Promis-e User Guide

promis•e V8i ®

User Guide November 2008

Copyright Notice

©2008 Bentley Systems, Inc. All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America

Trademark

promis•e, Bentley and MicroStation are registered or licensed trademarks of Bentley Systems,

Notices

Inc. PLC, PLC-2, PLC-3, and PLC-5 are registered trademarks of Allen–Bradley Company, Inc. SLC and SLC 500 are trademarks of Allen–Bradley Company, Inc. AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. Microsoft, MS-DOS, and Windows are registered trademarks, and Windows NT is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged. Cover Photo of Helix Nebula courtesy of NASA and STScI.

Important User

This Bentley Systems product is warranted in accord with the product license. The product’s

Information

performance will be affected by system configuration, the application being performed, operator control and other related factors. The product’s implementation may vary among users. This manual is as up-to-date as possible at the time of printing; however, the accompanying software may have changed since that time. Bentley Systems reserves the right to change any information contained in this manual or the software at any time without prior notice. The instructions in this manual do not claim to cover all the details of variations in the equipment, procedure, or process described, nor to provide directions for meeting every possible contingency during installation, operation, or maintenance.

Technical Support: Bentley Systems provides technical support to promis•e users currently under warranty or support contracts. Technical Support is available Monday through Friday from 8 am to 5 pm Central Standard Time. Phone (800) 778-4277 When you call, please have available your software revision number and a brief description of your problem. World Wide Web:

www.bentley.com

Table of Contents

Table of Contents Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Downloading the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Starting promis•e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Activating the Software License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 License Activation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Checking Out a License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Introduction and Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 The promis•e Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Software Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Using promis•e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Command Line / Text Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Help Screens and User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Engineering Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Sample Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Project Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Drawing Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Installations and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Favorites Project Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Search Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 See Page Pending Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Save Project As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Create New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Copy Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Rename Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Modify Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Delete Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Project Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Address File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

5

Table of Contents

Balloon Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Default Grid Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Default Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Display Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Drawing Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Region Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Revision Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Wiring Diagram Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Wire Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Project Backup / Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Make a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Restore a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Rebuild Project Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Migration Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Starting the Migration Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Migrate from Legacy promis•e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Migrate from Version 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Migrate Catalog from AutoCAD to MicroStation Version . . . . . 137 Data Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 BOM Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 BOM Explorer - Edit Parts Data in Existing Project . . . . . . . . . . 144 BOM Explorer - Assign Parts Data to New Project . . . . . . . . . . 145 BOM Explorer - Using the Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Page Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Page Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Page Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Displaying Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Open Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Close Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Next Page, Previous Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 New Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Save Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Automatic Page Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Save As Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Export Page to DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Copy Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Modify Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 6

Table of Contents

Rename Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Move Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Clear Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Refresh Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Update Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Validate Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Viewing Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Navigate Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Search Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Page Format Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Using Drawing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Drawing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Lines vs. Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 To Draw a Single Wire: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 To Draw Continuous Wires or Lines: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 To Draw 3-Phase Wires: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 To Draw Wires Using 90 Degree Up / Down: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Wire Connector Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Draw Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Wire Stretch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Edit Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Wire Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Insert Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Insert Symbol by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Insert Symbol by Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Insert Symbol By Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Device ID Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Symbol Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 I/O Text Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Multiple Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Symbol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Device Families (Parent and Child Symbols) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Symbol On the Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Update Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Insert Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

7

Table of Contents

Single Line Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Multiline Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Editing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Language Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Assigning Wires to a Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Cable Cross Reference Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Cable Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Wire Link Cross References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Types of Wire Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Wire Link Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Placing a Wire Link Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Search and Link Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Wire Link Notation Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Re-sequence Wire Link Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Wire/Device Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Connection Search Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Wire Number Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Automatic Wire Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Manual Wire Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Modify Wire Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Delete Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Find and Replace Wire Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Align Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Drawing Mode Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Edit an Existing Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Create a New Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Rename a Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Edit Drawing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Delete (Erase) Drawing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Copy Drawing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Move Drawing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Replace Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Replace Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Replace Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Replace Symbol Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Replace Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 8

Table of Contents

Replace Page Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Align Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Edit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Wiring Diagram Symbols vs. Wiring Diagram Charts . . . . . . . . 318 Create Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Creating Drawing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Managing Symbols and Symbol Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Symbol Catalogs and Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Catalog Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Create Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Symbol Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Symbol Creation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Modify an Existing Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Creating an Example PLC Parent Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Create Wiring Diagram Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Create Panel Layout Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Create Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Macro Creation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Create Title Block Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Create Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Modify Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 promis•e Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Command Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Symbol Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 User Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Language On Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Startup Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Validation Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Plug-in Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Plotting and Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Plot Page Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Plot Current Page (AutoCAD Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Plot Device tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Layout Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 9

Table of Contents

Plot Current Page (MircroStation Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Project Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Starting Project Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 File Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Manage External File Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Configure Publisher - Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Configure Publisher - Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Publish - Create Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Generate Reports Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Selecting and running a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Select the output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Sorting report contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Filtering report contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Creating a Report Output Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Compile Connection Information function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Standard Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Report Template Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Report Template Designer Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Report Template Designer Controls (Toolbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Report Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Engineering Design Considerations Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Graphical Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Create page macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Create graphical parts list macro and cross reference macro . . 485 Edit parts database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Run the Graphical Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Forced Routing Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Arrangement View tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Wire List View tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Split View tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Import Legacy Connection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Panduit Labels Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Terminal Plan Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Steps of Terminal Plan Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Connection Point Designations and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Terminal Plan Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 10

Table of Contents

Terminal Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Graphical Terminal Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 Graphical Terminal Plan Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 How the software generates a graphical plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 Graphical Plan Template Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 Graphical Plan Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 Panel Layout and Wire Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 Create Panel Layout First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 Create Panel Layout Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 Create Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 Assign Balloon Number in Device Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . 553 Modify or Delete Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 Set Balloon Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 Clear All Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 Panel Layout Design Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 Insert DIN Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 Snap to DIN Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 Mounting Accessories Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 Panduit Wire Containment Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Panduit Wire Containment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Panduit Auto Size-Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 Configuration File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Gauge Table Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 Shortest Distance Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Shortest Distance Procedure - Standard Method . . . . . . . . . . . 580 Shortest Distance Procedure - Wiring Rules Method . . . . . . . . 594 Direct Wiring (Wiring Rules Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 Grouping and Sequencing Terminal Connections - Wiring Rules Method 601 Guidelines and Routing Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 Panduit Wire Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 Create or Edit a Class with the Panduit Termination Editor . . . 609 Edit Parts Database with Panduit Data Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Creating an Export File with the Wire Terminations Utility . . . . 615 Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 Parts Database Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 Database Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 11

Table of Contents

Parts Database Editor Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 Structure of a promis•e parts database Data Record . . . . . . . . 640 Panduit Part Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 Project API Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 Project API Command File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 Legacy File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 Standard File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 Available Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 Running the Project API Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662 Appendices Engineering Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 Wiring Rules XML File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Structure of Wiring Rules File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 How to define a new rule set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 Defining Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 Defining Available Terminals For Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Defining Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 Specifying Direct Wire Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 Shipping Splits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 Section and Compartment ID Format in EctRway.xml . . . . . . . . . . 680 ProjectWise Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 Using ProjectWise with promis•e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 Logging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 Creating new projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 Checking in a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685 Checking out a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 Copy In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 Copy Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 Plant Exchange Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 Importing Data from Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 Using the Imported Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 Synchronizing Data to Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711

12

Installation and Start-up

1

Installation and Start-up

Downloading the Software After you purchase the software, you will be sent instructions for logging on to the Bentley web site and downloading the software. You will have the choice of downloading an executable installation file to your computer or having the files burned to CD and shipped to you. After installing promis•e you will need to run the software and activate your license (does not apply to evaluation systems).

Installation To install the software, follow the instructions in the promis•e Installation Guide. Most of the program files for promis•e are installed by default in the Program Files\Bentley\promis-e directory. Symbols, drawing templates and configurations files for promis•e are stored by default in the directory promis-e Data.

13

Installation and Start-up

Starting promis•e Use this procedure to start promis•e. 1. In Windows you can run promis•e from the Start button menu or, if you have created an icon (shortcut) for promis•e on the desktop, you can double click on the icon. 2. The software will start and the following promis•e welcome dialog will be displayed.

This screen allows you to choose a variety of functions: To browse through the projects on your system, select the Project Manager link. If you wish to always start in the Project Manager, select the Always Start With Project Manager checkbox. To open a recently used page, select one from the list in the Project Management section of the dialog. To create a new project, select the New Project link.

14

Installation and Start-up

To restore sample projects, select the Restore Sample Projects link. This will give you a variety of drawings to look at or edit. To access the promis•e Setup function (see page 407), select the Setup link. For information about the software, go to the Getting Started section of the dialog and select: • ANSI-IEEE or IEC Tutorial - for a product tutorial • User Manual - to access the User Guide • Product Videos - To see a Web page with videos of the product in use Note:

If you prefer, you can set the software to start in the Project Manager rather than in the Welcome dialog. Use the Startup Interface function in the Options dialog to make this setting (see page 424).

15

Installation and Start-up

Activating the Software License Product activation is the act of authenticating a product for entitled use. promis•e uses SELECT Server licensing, which is Bentley’s system for organizing and managing software licenses. SELECT Server offers many advantages including pooled licensing, license usage reports, and flexibility in how license servers are deployed. V8 XM Edition applications, including promis•e, are equipped by default with three behavioral states - Evaluation, Activated, and Deactivated. The Evaluation period (also called the Pre-Activated period) begins with installation and ends after 30 days or with Activation, which ever comes first. During this Evaluation period, most applications run in full-functioning mode, with no limitations applied to their activated state. An application is Activated when it is licensed, which is most commonly achieved by connecting to a valid SELECT Server. An application can return to Evaluation mode if its licensing server cannot be found. In this case, the Evaluation period begins again, providing a 30-day window during which to resolve any unintended disconnection. An application will reach its Deactivated state only when the Evaluation period has lapsed and the product has not been activated. In its Deactivated state, promis•e will not run.

16

Installation and Start-up

License Activation Procedure Use the following procedure to activate the software: 1. After installing promis•e, start it (see page 14). 2. Select Manage > License Manager to display the Product Activation Wizard:

You have the following choices: • SELECT subscriber activating against a hosted (Bentley) SELECT

Server - Select this option if your licenses will be stored on a server at Bentley. Select Next and go to step 3. • SELECT subscriber with a deployed (local) SELECT Server - Select this option if your licenses will be stored on a server at your site. Select Next and go to step 3. • NON-SELECT user - Select this option if your license will not be available on a server. This option is mainly for the LT and Express levels of promis•e which are used only on one computer. This condition is also referred to as “node-locked.” A node-locked license in XM is a CHECKED OUT license from the Bentley Hosted SELECT Server. With promis•e, you will be supplyed with a XML License file that you can place on the user’s machine. Select Next and go to step 4. • Evaluation Only - No license information - Select this option if you are evaluating the software and have not purchased it. You will have a 30 day period in which to use the software. Select Next and the software will start in evaluation mode. 17

Installation and Start-up

3. If you selected either of the SELECT Subscriber options, the following dialog will appear and prompt you for a server name and a site activation key.

If you selected the hosted (Bentley) server option in the previous step, you will see the entry selectserver.bentley.com in the Server Name field as shown above, and the field will be grayed out. If you selected the deployed (local) server option in the previous step, enter the name of your SELECT server in the Server Name field. If you selected NON-SELECT user in the previous step, you will see the entry productactivation.bentley.com in the Server Name field, and the field will be grayed out. The key is sent from Bentley in the form of a fulfillment document to the site administrator. The site administrator may then distribute the key at his/her discretion. The user just needs to simply copy and paste the key (an alpha-numeric code) into the space provided in the activation dialog. The user may then choose to Test Connection. This test simply pings the server to verify a connection can be made. Select Next to continue. A dialog will appear that allows you to check out a license (commuter license) which will allow you to work disconnected from the network for more than 30 days. If you don’t wish to check out a license, you can close the Product Activation Wizard at this point. For instructions on how to check out a license, go to page 21.

18

Installation and Start-up

4. If you selected NON-SELECT User in the first step, the following dialog will appear.

A. Select the I have a license file ready to import option. (You should have been supplied with a license file. This file should be stored on the computer on which you will run promis•e. B. Select Next. The License Information dialog will appear.

19

Installation and Start-up

C. Select the Browse button and browse to the location where the license file is stored. Select the license file so that it is displayed in the Activation Wizard.

D. Select Next. E. A dialog will appear listing the file you selected. Select the Finish button.

F. A message will appear indicating that your product activation is complete. Select the Close button to close the Product Activation Wizard.

20

Installation and Start-up

Checking Out a License The Bentley SELECT Server licenses are network-based. You may use a license while disconnected from the network for up to 30 days. However, there may be times when you must use a promis•e license off the network for more than 30 days, for example, when working at a remote site. For these situations, you may “check out” a license for use on a computer that is not on the network. (This is sometimes referred to as a “commuter license.”) This feature does not apply to the NON-Select or node-locked users, as these licenses are considered to be checked out already. Note:

While a license is checked out it will it will be tracked in the license server usage logs as being continuously used (i.e., 24 hours a day). To check out a license: 1. The computer on which you wish to use the checked-out license must be connected to the network. On this computer, start promis•e and select the Manage > License Manager function. The Product Activation Wizard dialog will appear.

2. Select one of the SELECT subscriber radio buttons that applies to your license server (either hosted at Bentley or deployed locally).

21

Installation and Start-up

3. Select Next to continue. The License Checkout dialog will appear. This dialog lists the available Bentley SELECT Server licenses on your system.

4. Select the Use a checked out license checkbox. 5. Enter your email address in the Email Address field. 6. Select the desired promis•e license from the list in the Product Name field. 7. Select the Next button to check out the file. While a license is checked out, it will not be available to other users on the network. At the end of the check-out period, the checked-out license will expire and it will again be available to users on the network. To check a license back in: 1. Connect the computer with the checked out license to your network. 2. On this computer, start promis•e and select the Manage > License Manager function. The Product Activation Wizard dialog will appear. 3. Select one of the SELECT subscriber radio buttons that applies to your license server (either hosted at Bentley or deployed locally).

22

Installation and Start-up

4. Select Next to continue. The License Management Tool dialog will appear. The checked out license will be listed at the bottom of the dialog. Note:

If the checked out license has expired, you may get a message dialog indicating this with OK and Cancel buttons. Clicking the OK button here will cause the temporary license string in the local license file to be deleted and the client will then query the server for a license in the normal manner. The Cancel button will cause the local license file to be left alone and promis•e will exit. There is no grace period for checked out licenses. 5. Select the license that you checked out at the bottom of the dialog and select the Check In button.

23

Installation and Start-up

24

Introduction and Overview

2

Introduction and Overview This section gives an overview of the promis•e software and explains the use and conventions of this user guide.

The promis•e Concept promis•e is an advanced productivity tool for designers of electrical control systems. Because of its customizable, open architecture, promis•e can also be adapted to other applications such as hydraulics, pneumatics, and process control. promis•e allows schematic diagrams to be rapidly constructed using pre-defined symbols and macros. Wires are automatically broken at symbol connection points and sections of drawings can be copied and pasted to save time. Many functions are performed automatically by the software including the generation of unique device IDs for each symbol, cross referencing of related symbols (such as contacts and coils), and numbering of wires. The software recognizes logical interconnections between devices in a schematic. A wire is recognized as a wire and not just a graphic line. The system can check for errors such as duplicate device IDs while a schematic is being created. The software can perform automatic cross referencing and wire numbering. In combination with a parts database, the software can automatically generate a variety of support documentation such as terminal diagrams, cable plans, panel layouts, bills of material, and a job costing analysis. Because work is divided into projects, all related drawing pages can be included in these automatic functions. The add-on version of promis•e runs as an application on top of a CAD program to take advantage of that software’s drawing capabilities. There are add-on versions for AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT and MicroStation.

25

Introduction and Overview

Software Functionality This chart shows the interrelationship of promis•e functions.

In addition, there are plug-in applications for promis•e that perform various specialized functions. See page 428. 26

Introduction and Overview

Using promis•e Generally, doing a job with promis•e involves the following stages: 1. If the parts database is to be used to allow the automatic generation of support documentation, component (parts) information must be entered or imported into the database. This information includes catalog numbers, manufacturer, price, dimensions, etc. If the same database is to be used for all jobs, this data entry step will not be necessary for subsequent projects unless new components are to be included. Part numbers can be assigned to symbols in the schematics. Note:

Parts databases for many leading component manufacturers are available from Bentley. 2. Create the schematic drawings. For the first project, most promis•e users create custom page formats, title blocks, symbols, etc., to match existing company standards. This customization is not necessary for subsequent projects. You also have the option of creating a parts list or panel layout before creating the schematic drawings. In this case, you select parts from the parts database and place them in a parts list or in a panel layout. This allows you to quote on a job or layout the hardware before designing the control circuits. When you are ready to do the schematics, you can take parts from the previously selected list and place them in the drawings. 3. Generate panel layout drawings. promis•e has an optional semi-automatic panel layout mode that will prompt the user for each component in the schematic diagram. The user then positions the component as desired in the layout drawing. 4. Generate terminal plan. promis•e automatically places terminal connection information on a graphical diagram page. The user can edit this plan as desired, for example, to assign cables and conduits. 5. Generate documentation lists. Using information in the schematics and in the database, promis•e can automatically generate other useful lists such as bills of material, wire lists, wire labels, component labels, job cost analysis, programmable controller lists, and so on.

27

Introduction and Overview

Using This Manual Purpose This manual is a reference for the operation of the promis•e system. Information provided in this manual is sufficient for learning how to use the majority of the software’s operating functions and advanced customization capabilities. However, to realize the full potential of promis•e it is recommended that you participate in the training programs offered by Bentley. These training programs are accelerated learning courses designed to ensure quick startup for users, and mastery of the software’s advanced customizing and interfacing features for system administrators and key operators.

Manual Conventions promis•e Functions Functions in promis•e are organized in groups. These groups are displayed somewhat differently depending on which CAD software promis•e is running with. In AutoCAD, various functions are available from pull-down menus or icon ribbon menus at the top of the screen. In MicroStation, functions are selected from a menu on the left side of the screen. In this manual, the first reference to a promis•e function is shown as a series of commands in bold type separated by arrows that indicate the function group followed by the function itself. For example: Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol by Name The above command indicates that one should go to the Design function menu, select the Insert Symbol function and then select the Insert Symbol by Name function on the submenu.

28

Introduction and Overview

Keyboard Use If a specific key on the keyboard is to be pressed. The name of the key will be shown enclosed in < > characters. For example: (press the Enter key)

Menus After installing promis•e, new menu selections are added to the existing CAD software menus. These will vary in appearance depending on the CAD software you are using: AutoCAD 2009 AutoCAD 2009 uses ribbon menus. These contain a number of ribbon tabs. When you select a ribbon tab, a group of icons are displayed that represent the functions in that tab. The following figure shows the menus as added to AutoCAD.

promis-e ribbon menu tabs

29

Introduction and Overview

AutoCAD 2006 - 2008 In AutoCAD 2006 - 2008, promis•e uses pull-down menus. These contain a number of ribbon tabs. When you select a ribbon tab, a group of icons are displayed that represent the functions in that tab. The following figure shows the menus as added to AutoCAD.

promis-e menu tabs

MicroStation and MicroStation PowerDraft When running on MicroStation and MicroStation PowerDraft, promis•e functions are accessed on the left side of the window.

The menu groups are collapsed to begin with, but when you select a group or sub-group, the functions in that group are displayed. 30

Introduction and Overview

The following is a list of functions under each menu group. Note: the Design menu changes depending on which drawing mode you are in (schematic, hydraulic, etc.). Design menu group (Schematic mode) Project Manager New Project ---------------------------New Page Page Next Page Previous ---------------------------Catalog Manager ---------------------------Insert Macro Insert Symbol >

Symbol on the Fly >

Insert Field Insert Balloon -------------------------Align Components Edit Components -------------------------Wiring >

Insert Symbol by Name Insert Symbol by Part Number Insert Symbol by Device ID* Draw Symbol on the Fly Insert Connection Point Delete Connection Point

Wire (Continuous) Wire (Dashed) Wire (Center) 3 Phase Wire Multi-wire Polywire Multi-polywire Wire 90 Degree Up Wire 90 Degree Down Draw Ladder Edit Wires Select Wire Layer Wire Connector Type

Insert Wire Link Insert Cable

31

Introduction and Overview

Design menu group (Schematic mode continued) Wire Numbering >

Multi-Line Text Display Options >

Automatic Wire Number Manual Wire Number Align Wire Numbers Delete Wire Number Grid Snap Setting Show Grid Display Connection Points Display Connection Point Texts Display Terminal Connection Point Texts Display Insertion Point Display Part Numbers Display Wire Numbers

Design menu group (Panel Layout mode) Project Manager New Project ---------------------------New Page Page Next Page Previous ---------------------------Catalog Manager ---------------------------Insert Macro Insert Symbol >

Symbol on the Fly >

Insert Field Insert Balloon -------------------------Align Components Edit Components -------------------------Panduit Wire Containment Panduit Auto Size Edit Wire Path Properties --------------------------------------

32

Insert Symbol by Name Insert Symbol by Part Number Insert Symbol by Device ID* Draw Symbol on the Fly Insert Connection Point Delete Connection Point

Introduction and Overview

Design menu group (Panel Layout mode continued) Insert DIN Rail Snap to DIN Rail Mounting Accessories -------------------------------------Shortest Distance >

Multi-Line Text Display Options >

Insert Region Edit Region Edit Region Connections Grid Snap Setting Show Grid Display Connection Points Display Connection Point Texts Display Terminal Connection Point Texts Display Insertion Point Display Part Numbers Display Wire Numbers

Design menu group (Hydraulic and Pneumatic modes) Project Manager New Project ---------------------------New Page Page Next Page Previous ---------------------------Catalog Manager ---------------------------Insert Macro Insert Symbol >

Symbol on the Fly >

Insert Symbol by Name Insert Symbol by Part Number Insert Symbol by Device ID* Draw Symbol on the Fly Insert Connection Point Delete Connection Point

Insert Field Insert Balloon -------------------------Align Components Edit Components --------------------------

33

Introduction and Overview

Design menu group (Hydraulic and Pneumatic modes continued) Piping/Hosing >

Draw Pipe/Hose Pipe/Hose (Continuous) Pipe/Hose (Dashed) Pipe/Hose (Center) 3 Pipe/Hose Multi-Pipe/Hose PolyPipe/Hose Multi-PolyPipe/Hose Pipe/Hose 90 Degree Up Pipe/Hose 90 Degree Down Edit Pipe/Hose Select Pipe/Hose Layer Pipe/Hose Connector Type

Insert Pipe/Hose Link Pipe/Hose Numbering Multi-Line Text Display Options >

34

Grid Snap Setting Show Grid Display Connection Points Display Connection Point Texts Display Terminal Connection Point Texts Display Insertion Point Display Part Numbers Display Pipe/Hose Numbers

Introduction and Overview

Review / Revise menu group Navigate Search Data Manager Forced Routing Manager Shortest Distance Wire Terminations Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager Re-sequence Wire Links Cable Manager Replace Symbol Replace Device ID Replace Part Number Replace Text Replace Symbol Text Find/Replace Wire Property Update Symbol Update Family Replace Title Block Replace Page Format Engineering Design Considerations promis-e Output menu group PLC Generator Project API Builder Project Builder >

Template Manager Project Builder

--------------------------------------Update Wiring Diagram Run Reports Graphical Parts List Run Graphical Plan Panduit Labels --------------------------------------Plot Project Publisher

35

Introduction and Overview

Manage menu group Create Macro Create Symbol Create Family Family on the Fly --------------------------------------Plant Exchange --------------------------------------Language Database Manager License Manager Mode Manager Parts Database Manager Plug-in Manager --------------------------------------Compile Connections Rebuild Project Database Refresh Page Validate Page Update Page Configure menu group Options Setup --------------------------------------Page Format Designer Title Block Designer --------------------------------------Graphical Plan Designer Report Template Designer --------------------------------------Gauge Table Editor Index Table Editor Button Table Editor Termination Editor Panduit Data Editor

36

Introduction and Overview

promis-e Help menu group Help Tutorial >

ANSI/IEEE IEC

Show Welcome Dialog -------------------------------Check For Updates --------------------------------About

37

Introduction and Overview

Toolbars In AutoCAD 2006-2008, many promis•e functions can be accessed through toolbars (tool boxes in the MicroStation version) with a single click. You can see a tooltip label that describes the function of each button by resting the cursor on the button for a moment. The toolbars correspond to the menu function groups listed on the previous pages. In some cases as large menu function group was split between two toolbars.

You can move the toolbar by pointing at the “handle” on the left side of the toolbar and dragging it to the desired location either floating above the drawing or docked to the edge of the window. To display or hide toolbars in AutoCAD, use the View > Toolbars function. In the dialog that appears, select the ECADMenu_promis•e menu group and select or de-select the checkbox for a toolbar to display it or hide it.

38

Introduction and Overview

To display or hide toolbars (tool boxes) in MicroStation, use the Tools > Tool Boxes function. Select or de-select the checkbox for a toolbar to display it or hide it.

In the MicroStation version, the Main Tools toolframe combines the other promis•e toolboxes.

39

Introduction and Overview

Command Line / Text Window In the AutoCAD version of the software, the command line is an area at the bottom of the drawing screen where the most recently executed commands are displayed. The software also displays prompts here for certain functions. You can also enter commands on the command line. By placing the cursor on its border, the command line area can be dragged to the top of the drawing screen or out onto the desktop to become a floating text window. The floating window can display more lines and therefore is useful for such functions as View > List. You can drag the floating window back to the drawing screen to reattach it. You can also display a floating text window without moving the command line by pressing the key.

Text Window

Command Line

In the MicroStation version, prompts appear in the Status Bar located at the lower left corner of the drawing screen.

If you need to enter (type) a command in the MicroStation version, select Utilities > Key-in to display the Key-in dialog where you can enter commands.

40

Introduction and Overview

Help Screens and User Guide Online help information is available to describe promis•e functions. Many of the dialog boxes displayed by promis•e have a Help button which can be selected to display relevant information from the User Guide.

The complete User Guide can be accessed by selecting the menu function promis•e Help > Help. The User Guide in PDF format can be accessed from the Welcome screen (see page 14). This PDF version of the User Guide is also included on the promis•e disc in the Documentation folder. The PDF User Guide is preferable if you wish to make printouts or if you need to zoom in on a figure.

41

Introduction and Overview

Dialog Boxes When the software requires you to make selections or enter information, it will display a dialog box. Buttons are provided in the dialog boxes to confirm information that has been entered, or to provide additional selections. Generally, selecting the OK button will confirm the information that has been entered, load it into the system and close the dialog box. In many (but not all) dialog boxes, pressing the key has the same effect as selecting OK. Selecting the Cancel button will abandon the information that was entered and will exit the current function. In many (but not all) dialog boxes, pressing the (Escape) key has the same effect as selecting Cancel. Selecting the Help button will display descriptive text about the functions in the current dialog box. A button with three dots on it [...] is a browse button that will display an additional dialog so that you can select a folder or file on your system or search a database.

Required entry marker

Browse button

Fields that require an entry before you can continue are marked with a red asterisk (*) until you make an entry.

42

Introduction and Overview

Engineering Design Considerations As you work, the software may display an Engineering Design Consideration dialog. These dialogs call attention to conditions in your project that may cause errors or other undesirable results. You then have an opportunity to take an appropriate action. See Appendix A for more information.

Sample Projects Several sample projects are provided with the software as backup files. These projects are automatically restored when you install the software. The sample projects are placed in your default project folder and will be available for viewing or editing using the Project Manager.

43

Introduction and Overview

44

Project Management

3

Project Management This section explains the concept of projects, which is how work is organized in promis•e. Project organization is presented first followed by sections on how to create, delete, copy, modify, rename and back up projects.

45

Project Management

Project Organization A project is a collection of work done in promis•e, all of which relates to the same job. This work includes both graphical drawings (schematics, layouts, etc.) and support documentation (part lists, labels, connection information). By associating every drawing and list with a specific project, the software is able to recognize which information to use when performing automatic functions such as list generation, cross referencing, wire numbering, cost analysis, and so on. PROJECT Drawings

Schematic diagrams Panel layouts Graphical terminal plans Wiring diagrams

46

Documentation

Bill of materials Wire list Terminal list Purchase order list Wire and device labels Job cost analysis etc.

Project Management

Drawing Sets Drawing sets are used to organize pages within a project into meaningful groups. You can arrange the drawing sets into any order you wish. For example, you may want to have all schematic pages in one drawing set and all panel layout pages in another set. In the Project Manager you can change the order of the sets, which affects the order in which the software indexes the pages. This has an effect on page navigation, cross referencing and print/plot order. PROJECT

DRAWING SET 1

DRAWING SET 2

4

4 3

3 2

2 1

1

INST NAME LOC NAME PAGE 1

Each page has a page number and can have a default installation and location

47

Project Management

Installations and Locations Projects optionally can be subdivided into installations and locations. These usually correspond to physical locations. For example, the project could consist of an entire production facility while each production line within the facility is designated as an installation and each control cabinet on a line is a location.

PROJECT

INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION

LOCATION

LOCATION

LOCATION

LOCATION

When graphical (drawing) pages are created, they can be assigned a default installation and location. (If the entered installation or location name does not yet exist, it will be created.) When support documentation is generated, it can also be sorted by installation and location. PROJECT 2

PROJECT 1

INSTALLATION 2

INSTALLATION 1

LOCATION

LOCATION

48

12

7 5

4

11

6

2 1

LOCATION

8

4 3

(NO INSTALLATION OR LOCATION)

10 9

3

DRAWING PAGES

2 1

Project Management

Project Manager The Project Manager is a central interface similar to Windows Explorer where you can access all project and page management functions. You can create, modify and organize your projects and pages using the pull-down menus, right-click menus and toolbars. Various other project-based features are also available in this interface and are covered in other sections of this manual. To open the Project Manager, select Design > Project Manager. You can also select the Project Manager toolbar button.

The Project Manager window will open.

Menu Bars

Folder/Project Browser

Data Section Page Preview Feature Tabs

The Project Manager is divided into the following sections: • Menu Bars • Folder/Project Browser • Data Section • Page Preview • Feature Tabs 49

Project Management

In the Folder/Project browser area you can select a project to view or edit. The active project will be marked with a special icon. You can have pages from different projects open at the same time. The open page that was most recently selected (i.e., the one that is “on top”) determines the active project.

Active project icon

The type of information shown in the data area can be changed by making selections in the View menu or by clicking on the feature tabs at the bottom of the data area. The following “views” are available: Details - Drawings are listed in columns of text information. You can customize the columns that are displayed by right clicking in the column heading area and selecting the checkbox for the page information that you wish to appear as shown in the following figure. The order of column headings can be changed by dragging the heading for a column to the left or right. You can also click on a column to sort by the entries in that column.

50

Project Management

One of the columns in the detailed view is labeled User. This field identifies the name of the person who has that page currently open. This name comes from the entry made in the User Options - User Name function (see page 424). This is a useful feature for a multi-user environment because it allows you to see which users have which pages open in the same project. Sometimes you might need to have the other users exit the project so that you can run a project-wide function. Thumbnails - Pages are shown as thumbnail images.

51

Project Management

Drawing Sets - A list of drawing sets in the selected project is shown. By clicking on the “+” or “-” character next to the drawing set name you can display or hide fields that allow you to enter up to five descriptive texts for the drawing set. Select the Save button to save any descriptions that are entered.

You can also change the order of drawing sets in the project by highlighting the drawing set name and then selecting the Up or Down button. Installation - A list of installations in the project. As with drawing sets, you can enter and save up to five descriptive texts for each installation. The descriptive texts can be displayed in reports and title blocks by including the appropriate variables. Location - A list of locations in the project. As with drawing sets, you can enter and save up to five descriptive texts for each location. The descriptive texts can be displayed in reports and title blocks by including the appropriate variables. - Allows you to view, modify and add to the part numbers assigned in the project. See page 142.

52

Project Management

Spare Parts - Shows the spare parts that are included in the project. Only part numbers used in the project that have spares assigned will be shown in this tab.

The parts database contains a Percent_Spare field (see page 630) that allows you to automatically add a percentage of spares to the parts that are actually used. This percentage is shown in the Project Manager Spare Parts tab in the Percent Spare column. You can also assign additional spares by making an entry in the Added Spares column. In the above example, 8 parts are actually used in the project. There is a spare percentage of 10 making 0.8 spares which the software rounds up to 1. In addition, there is 1 added spare assigned making a total of 2 spares. Note:

As you work in promis•e you can leave the Project Manager open in the background and quickly return to it by selecting the Project Manager toolbar button.

53

Project Management

Favorites Project Folder There is a function in the Project Manager that allows you to set up a “Favorites” folder where you can create links to projects even if they exist in different places on your system. To set up the Favorites folder: 1. Select the Favorites function on the left side of the Project Manager.

Favorites function

Note:

After you select the Favorites function, the function name changes to “Folders” which you can select to return to the normal view of folders on your system. 2. The display will show a Favorites folder. To configure the content of this folder, select the Organize link.

Organize function

54

Project Management

3. The Favorites dialog will appear. This dialog allows you to create and name subfolders of the Favorites folder. The creation of subfolders is optional.

To create a subfolder, select the Create Folder button. A folder named Folder1 will appear. Create additional subfolders as needed. Each subfolder can hold multiple projects.

To rename a subfolder, highlight the desired folder and select the Rename button. To delete a subfolder, highlight the desired folder and select the Delete button. 4. When you have created the desired subfolders, select the Close button to close the Favorites dialog.

55

Project Management

5. To add projects your Favorites folder(s), select the Folders function on the left side of the Project Manager to return to the folders view of your system. Right click on the desired project name and select Add to Favorites from the popup menu.

6. The Favorites dialog will reappear. Select the desired folder and select the Add it button to add the project to that folder. You can add projects to subfolders or to the Favorites folder itself.

56

Project Management Note:

Once you have added a project to a favorites folder, when you highlight that project, its path is displayed on the lower left side of the Favorites dialog.

7. After you have added links to projects, they are listed in the Favorites view of the Project Manager.

57

Project Management

Search Project The Search Project function in the Project Manager helps you to locate promis•e projects on your system. 1. In the Project Manager, select Tools > Search Project or select the Search Project toolbar button

.

2. The Search dialog will appear.

3. If you wish to search for a particular project, enter its name in the Name field. You can make wildcard entries such as D* to search for all projects beginning with “D.” If you leave the field blank the software will search for and list any projects it finds in the selected path. 4. In the Look in field, select the path that you wish to search on your system. By default, the path to the current project is entered. You can click inside the field and make changes to the path.

58

Project Management

5. Select the Search Now button to begin the search. As the software searches, it lists any projects that it finds in the lower part of the dialog.

6. You can select one of the listed projects and then the Switch to Project Manager button to display the selected project in the Project Manager.

See Page Pending Status The See Page Pending Status function in the Project Manager flags pages that have changes that will occur the next time they are opened due to changes elsewhere in the project. Select the See Page Pending Status toolbar button in the Project Manager. The same icon on the button will appear next to any page in the project manager that has pending changes in the database that have not yet been updated on the drawing. This handy visual aid lets the user know that certain drawing files are not up to date yet because they were never reopened after changes were made to the project that affect those pages.

59

Project Management

Save Project As You can use the Project Manager to save a copy of a project under another name. 1. In the Project Manager highlight the name of the project you wish to copy. 2. Select File > Save Project As. You can also right-click on the project name and select Save Project As from the pop-up menu. The Save Project As dialog will appear.

3. Enter a new name for the project in the New Name field. 4. Enter or browse to the desired folder for the copy in the Save Path field. 5. Select OK.

60

Project Management

Create New Project To create a new project: 1. There are two ways to open the New Project dialog: A. From the main screen select the Design > New Project icon.

B. Or, in the Project Manager select File > New > New Project (or select the “New” icon and then the New Project function from the menu that appears).

2. The New Project dialog will appear.

Enter a name for the project in the Project Name field. The name size follows Windows guidelines, i.e., 255 characters maximum. Do not use the following characters: \ / : * ? " < > | Note:

Keep in mind that Windows restricts the total path to a file to 259 characters. So the deeper your folders are nested, the fewer characters will be available for the project name.

61

Project Management

3. In the Save in field, enter the name of the directory (folder) where you wish to store the project. Use the browse button to locate and select a folder. Note:

If you highlight the name of the desired folder in the Project Manager before selecting the New Project function, this folder will be entered in the Save in field automatically. 4. If you wish to use the same project settings as an existing project, you can select that project in the Use Project Options From field. Use the browse button to select an existing project (click on the folder name) or a template (xml) file. Sample ANSI-IEEE and IEC project template files are provided in the folder Documents and Settings\All Users\ECT\promis•e\Config\Options. 5. To set project options, select the Options button. See page 67. 6. To enter a description for the project that will appear in title blocks, reports and elsewhere, select the Description button. The following dialog will appear.

In the Entry column, enter the various descriptive texts identified in the Name column. Select OK when finished. When you have finished making entries in the New Project dialog, select the OK button to create the new project.

62

Project Management

Copy Project To copy a project: 1. Open the Project Manager. 2. Select (highlight) the name of the project you wish to copy. 3. Select Edit > Copy from the Project Manager menu or right click on the project name and select Copy from the popup menu. 4. The Copy Project dialog will appear. The project you selected in step 2 will be listed in the Project field. If desired, you can use the browse button to select a different project.

5. In the New Path field, use the browse button to select or create the folder where you wish to save the copy. 6. In the New Name field, enter the name of the new copy of the project. 7. Select OK to create the copy. Note:

You can also use the File > Save Project As function to save a copy of a project. See page 60.

63

Project Management

Rename Project To copy a project: 1. Open the Project Manager. 2. Select (highlight) the name of the project you wish to rename. 3. Select Edit > Rename from the Project Manager menu or right click on the project name and select Rename from the popup menu. 4. The Rename Project dialog will appear. In the New Name field, enter a new name for the project you selected in step 2.

5. Select OK to rename the project.

64

Project Management

Modify Project To modify the settings of a project: 1. Open the Project Manager. 2. Select (highlight) the name of the project you wish to modify. 3. Select Edit > Modify from the Project Manager menu or right click on the project name and select Modify from the popup menu. 4. The Modify Project dialog will appear.

To change project settings, select the Options button. The Project Options dialog will appear (see page 67). Select the desired option, make the desired changes and select OK. 5. To change the project description, select the Description button. The Project Description dialog will appear. Make the desired changes and select OK.

65

Project Management

Delete Project To delete a project: 1. Open the Project Manager. 2. Select (highlight) the name of the project you wish to delete. 3. Select Edit > Delete from the Project Manager menu or right click on the project name and select Delete from the popup menu. 4. The Delete Project dialog will appear.

Select Yes to delete the project or select No to cancel the deletion.

66

Project Management

Project Options The Options dialog for projects allows you to make a variety of global settings for a project. You can access the project Options dialog in several ways: • Select the Options button in the New Project dialog • Select Configure > Options in promis•e (a drawing page must be open) • Select Tools > Options in the Project Manager. • Select the Options toolbar button in the Project Manager.

Select project options here

Note:

Project Options functions are only available when a project name is selected (highlighted) in the Project Manager or when a page in the desired project is open. Initially a selection of functions will appear on the right side of the dialog. You can also select functions in the column on the left side of the dialog. Once you select a function, the entry fields for that function appear on the right side of the dialog. The project option settings are described in the following sections.

67

Project Management

Address File The address file is a text file containing information such as the user’s street address which the software can automatically place in title blocks, report headings, and so on. You can select, edit and create address files in the Project Options mode. Select the Address File function in the Project Options dialog. The following fields will appear.

The Address File field allows you to select an existing address file. To edit an existing file, select the address file, make any changes in the Address field and select the Save button. To create a new file, select the New button, enter the name of the new file in the dialog that appears. Enter the new information in the Address field. Select the Save button. To delete an address file, select the address file name and then select the Delete button.

68

Project Management

Balloon Settings In the project Options dialog, select Balloon. The following fields will appear.

This dialog allows you to make settings that determine how balloons appear in various drawing types. A balloon is a numbered circle that marks an item in a panel layout or other type of drawing. The number corresponds to that item’s position in the bill of materials list. In the Balloon Numbering By field, select whether the balloon numbering will be unique across the entire project, across each installation or across each location. There is also a selection “installation+location” which allows balloon numbers to be duplicated if either the installation or location is different. Select the Clear All Balloons button to remove all assigned balloon numbers in the project. This will delete the balloons in the drawings and remove the item numbers from the project database. Select the Display Quantity Number checkbox if you wish a part number quantity value to appear next to each balloon. For each drawing type you can set: Radius - the radius of the balloon circle. Text Height - the text height of the number inside the balloon. Quantity Height - the text height of the quantity number. Text Style - the text style of the balloon and quantity text. Select the OK button when you have made the desired settings.

69

Project Management

Default Grid Settings Most promis•e drawing modes utilize a grid that causes objects to be aligned properly. For example, the grid ensures that wires make contact with symbol connection points so that the software can recognize these connections. Snap mode causes the cursor to limit its movements to set increments. In the AutoCAD version of the software you can turn the snap mode off and on by pressing the key or by clicking on SNAP button at the bottom edge of the AutoCAD window. You can adjust the spacing of the grid and snap mode to suit your requirements. In the project Options dialog, select Default Grid & Snap Settings. The following fields will appear. Note:

The Snap Spacing columns are not available in the MicroStation version of promis•e.

This function allows you to set the X and Y grid line spacing and snap mode intervals for various types of drawings. Enter the desired value for each drawing mode. Select Apply or OK to load the new values. Note:

70

There is also a Grid Snap toolbar that you can use to make grid settings as you work on drawings.

Project Management

Default Project Properties In the project Options dialog, select Default Project Properties. The following fields will appear. Note:

Project Options functions are only available when a project name is selected (highlighted) in the Project Manager or when a page in the desired project is open.

This function allows you to make global settings that determine what will appear automatically on newly created pages. The following fields are provided: Page Macro - This field sets the default page macro that appears in the New Page dialog. A page macro is any macro that you wish to be placed on every newly created page. An entry made here will not affect any existing pages. Use the browse button to select a macro file. Title Block - This field sets the default title block macro that will be prompted in the New Page dialog. Changing the default title block will not update existing pages. To change the title block on existing pages use the Search > Replace Title Block function. Scale - This field specifies the scale to be used for the page format. Scales other than 1:1 are mainly used for panel layouts so that symbols will appear at less than full size.

71

Project Management

Default Parts Database - In the Default Parts Database field you can select a default parts database for the project. The software will then look at this database instead of the database specified in the setup configuration (see page 407) when searching for part numbers. The available databases are listed in the drop-down menu. (You can add new databases in the promis•e Setup dialog.) You can use the Edit Filter button to create a project filter for the database. This filter restricts the displayed parts selection in the Select Part Number dialog for the project to those that match user-defined criteria (select the Apply Project Filter checkbox in the Select Part Number dialog). For example, you could limit the parts for the project to certain manufacturers. When you select the Edit Filter button, the Filtering dialog appears.

Use the following procedure to create a filter: 1. In the Field column, select the parts database field whose value you wish to use for filtering. 2. In the Relationship column, select the comparison function to be used in the filter. The available comparisons are: like equals is greater than is greater than or equal to is less than is less than or equal to 3. In the Value column, enter the field content value that you wish to use in the filter.

72

Project Management

4. Select OK to create the filter. To remove the filter, select the Clear Filter link in the Filtering dialog. Page Format Options - This group of settings affects the page formats used in the project: Use the Page Format field to select the page format that will be the default format when creating a new page. Use the browse button to select a format file. Formats are stored by default in the promis•e PageFormat directory. The # of Digits in Line Number field sets the number of digits that will be displayed for line numbers on the page. Extra zeroes will be added to the line number as needed. For example, if you enter a value of 3, then line number 1 will be displayed as 001. If you wish to include the page number at the beginning of each line number, select the Include Page Number as a Line Number Prefix checkbox. For example, line number 001 on page 2 will be displayed as 2001. If you wish line numbering to continue on following pages rather than starting over, select the Continuous Line Numbers checkbox. Existing pages will be updated when these page format options are changed. Project and Page Descriptions - The descriptions are parameters that are associated with and stored with the page. These descriptions can appear in title blocks and reports. To add another description, use the “+” button. To rename an existing description, place the cursor in the field of the existing description and then click the “R” button. To delete a description, place the cursor in the field of the existing description and then click the “X” button. Use the Reset button to return the descriptions to the state they were in when you entered the dialog.

73

Project Management

Display Formats In the project Options dialog, select Display Formats. The following fields will appear. This function allows you to set the format of device IDs, cross references and part numbers. There are tabs for ID & Cross Reference and Part Number.

Expand/Contract button

Items that can be formatted are divided into groups: • Device ID Formats • Device Cross References • Wire Link Cross References • Part Numbers

The Device ID Formats group has an expand/contract (double arrow) button that allows you to collapse or display the items in that group. Part Number formatting is accessed through a separate tab.

74

Project Management General Device ID Settings

At the top of the Display Formats dialog (ID & Cross Reference tab) is a group of settings that affect how device IDs are handled by the software.

Select the Adjust device ID when symbol(s) is moved checkbox if you wish a symbol’s ID to be updated when the symbol is moved, for example when the ID format includes the line number and the symbol is moved to a different line. Select the Make Device ID Uniqueness Case Sensitive checkbox if you wish the case of letters in an ID to make a difference. For example, if you select this checkbox then LS2 and Ls2 will be considered two different IDs. If you do not select the checkbox, then two radio button options are available for making the case of IDs consistent: you can choose to Convert lowercase to uppercase or Convert uppercase to lowercase. Select the Enable Device ID Nesting to allow nested devices IDs. This applies only to symbols that are inside symbols created with the “symbol on the fly” function. Nested IDs allow these symbols to have a device ID that combines the ID of the “symbol on the fly” with the ID of the nested symbol. One application of this feature would be to use the box to represent a circuit board and then insert pin/plug symbols to represent the connectors on the board. The box could also represent a special controller module with terminal symbols inside that are related to that module. Selecting the Partial Tag radio button will display only the device ID of the nested symbol. Selecting the Complete Tag button will display the entire, combined device ID. Device ID Format

For each format type, the dialog shows the name of the format that defines what the ID is currently based on (page and line number, sequential number, etc.).

Edit button

If you wish to change the elements that make up an ID, select the Edit button inside the field for a given format type to access the Device ID Format dialog.

75

Project Management Note:

The Schematic (PLC Wired Device ID) and Schematic (PLC Wired Terminal ID) device ID formats will only be applied when the Replace Device ID function is used. The PLC Wired Device ID will assign the PLC address to the first non-terminal device connected to the PLC. The PLC Wired Terminal ID will assign the PLC address to the first terminal connected to the PLC.

Load or save profiles Profile name

Parts of ID that will be displayed

Available elements Currently selected elements Example of current elements

The Profile Name field in the Device ID Format dialog displays the name of the current device ID profile. The profile is a saved device ID format. You can create new profiles, save them and reload them as your project needs require. Use the Save Profile button to save changes to the current profile. If desired, you can change the entry in the Profile Name field and save the changed profile under a different name. Use the Load Profile button to load a previously saved profile.

76

Project Management

The Complete Device ID area of the dialog allows you to define the elements of the complete device ID for symbols in a drawing. The list box displays the available elements in a complete device ID: Installation, Location, and Device Tag. To add one of these elements to the device ID, select it and click on the Add to Expression button. It will then appear on the right side of the dialog. (also see the figure on page 77). To remove an element from the device ID, select (highlight) it, then either press the key or right click on the element and select Delete from the popup menu. Use the Clear button to empty the field of all selected elements. Use the Reset button to reload the combination of variables that you had when you entered the dialog. The Identifiers area of the dialog allows you to define the characters that separate the device ID elements when displayed in a drawing or report (also see the figure on page 77). The default is “=” for Installations, “+” for locations, and “-” for the device tag. The Display fields allow you to select whether installation and location names will be displayed in device IDs always or only when the installation or location is different from that of the current drawing page. Use the Device Tag Format area of the dialog to configure the device tag. The “device tag” is that part of the device ID that does not include the installation and location (see the following figure). The device tag consists of a “tag mnemonic” that is applied to every symbol of a given type (such as “K” or “CR” for a relay) and items that are assigned by the software individually for each instance of a symbol (such as page/line numbers and sequential numbers). The tag mnemonic is defined when a symbol is created. Device ID

=LINE1+CAB1-PB120 Installation Location Device Tag

Tag Mnemonic

PB120 Device Tag

On the left side of the dialog is a list of available elements that can be added to the device tag. To add an element, select (highlight) it, and then click the Add to Expression button. It will then be shown on the right side of the dialog as part of the device tag. The following elements are available: Sequential Number [project based] - A number incrementing from 1. Numbering is unique across the entire project. Sequential Number [installation/location based] - A number incrementing from 1. Numbering is unique within each installation/location.

77

Project Management

Sequential Number [installation based] - A number incrementing from 1. Numbering is unique within each installation. Sequential Number [location based] - A number incrementing from 1. Numbering is unique within each location name. If you have two locations with the same name in different installations, the numbering will extend across both locations. Use installation/location based numbering if you want locations with the same name to be numbered separately. Sequential Number [page based] - A number incrementing from 1. Numbering is unique within the same page. Sequential Number [line based] - A number incrementing from 1. Numbering is unique for each line number. Tag Mnemonic - A group of alphanumeric characters that indicate the type of device that the device ID represents, such as CR or K for control relay or PB for pushbutton. On the drawing, the mnemonic that appears in the device tag will be taken from that which is defined in the symbol. Page Number - The page number where the device ID is first used. Line Number - The line number where the device ID is first used. Zone Number - The drawing zone number where the device ID is first used. PLC Address - (Available for PLC Wired Device ID and PLC Wired Terminal ID) The PLC I/O address to which the item is connected will be used in the device tag. The right side of the dialog displays the currently selected device tag elements. Below this is an example of what the device tag will look like in an actual drawing. To remove an element from the device tag, select (highlight) it, then either press the key or right click on the element and select Delete from the popup menu. Use the Clear button to empty the field of all selected elements. Use the Reset button to reload the combination of elements that you had when you entered the dialog. You can further format the device tag by selecting (highlighting) one of the selected elements. When you do this, additional fields become active.

78

Project Management

Select element

Additional fields become active

The Prefix and Suffix fields allow you to define a character string that will be placed at the beginning (Prefix) or end (Suffix) of the label element. The Width and Fill with fields allow you to set the number and type of characters that will be used for the selected tag element. These fields become available when you select a tag element and then select the Fixed number of characters checkbox. (If you do not select this checkbox the software will use as many characters as necessary for a given value.) The entry in the Width field sets the number of digits that will be used for the value (more will be used if necessary). The Fill with field defines the character that will be used if necessary to fill out the value to match the width value. Example: Page Number set to width 3, fill with 0. Device tags on page 2 will use the value 002. Device tags on page 13 will use the value 013. Device tags on page 3333 will use the value 3333. The Duplicate Character area of the dialog allows you to format how tags will be labeled when more than one symbol of the same type are placed on the same line. The First number/character field defines how the symbols will be labeled, numbers or letters, and what the first value will be. The Separator field defines the character that will divide the value from the rest of the device tag. If you select the Suppress first occurrence checkbox, then the first item on the line will not have the additional value, but succeeding items will. For example: PB123, PB123.1, PB123.2. When you have made the desired changes to the device ID format, use the Save Profile button to save the changes for all future projects using the profile. If you select the OK button (without saving) the changes will only apply to the current project. Device Cross Reference

A device cross reference is a cross reference that links two or more symbols in the schematic drawings. Examples would be the cross references between the coil and contacts of a relay or between a PLC parent and its child symbols.

79

Project Management

To configure device cross references, go to the project Options dialog, select Display Formats. Select the Device Cross Reference line. The Edit button will appear. Select the Edit button and the following dialog will appear.

There are tabs near the top of this dialog to select between layout for the cross reference and format (content) of the cross reference. Cross Reference Layout tab The Profile Name field displays the name of the current device cross reference profile. The profile is a saved format. You can create new profiles, save them and reload them as your project needs require. Use the Save Profile button to save changes to the current profile. If desired, you can change the entry in the Profile Name field and save the changed profile under a different name. Use the Load Profile button to load a previously saved profile. Cross Ref Type - In this column, various types of devices are listed: NO (Normally Open), NC (Normally Closed), IN (Input), OUT (Output) and None (no cross reference prefix). You can select whether or not cross references for each type of device will appear on the drawing with an underscore. Select the Underscore checkbox for each cross ref type that you wish to be underlined. Note: the cross ref type for each symbol is defined by the cross reference prefix text that is chosen when the symbol is created (see page 337).

80

Project Management

In the Parent Cross Reference Position fields, enter coordinates to determine the position of the cross reference. Enter the X offset from the insertion point of the symbol. Then enter the Y offset value and select whether this value is from the symbol insertion point or from the origin (0). In the Child/Duplicate Cross Reference Position fields, set the position of cross reference that appear at child or duplicate symbols. Enter an X offset value in the X Offset field. In the Y Offset Multiplier field, enter a value that will be multiplied times the ID text height to yield the Y offset value. Negative numbers can be entered. There is also a checkbox Display Child Symbol Cross-referencing which you can select or de-select to show or hide cross references at child symbols. Graphic style selection - There are several examples of graphic presentations of the cross reference in the dialog. You can click on the style that you prefer to select it.

Show CP Text - Select this checkbox if you wish the connection point text of the cross-referenced symbol to be included.

81

Project Management

Cross Reference Format tab Select this tab in the Device Cross Referencing dialog to display the following fields.

On the left side of the dialog is a list of available elements that can be added to the cross reference. To add an element, select (highlight) it, and then click the Add to Expression button. It will then be shown on the right side of the dialog as part of the cross reference. The right side of the dialog displays the currently selected cross reference elements. Below this is an example of what the cross reference will look like in an actual drawing. To remove an element from the cross reference, select (highlight) it, then either press the key or right click on the element and select Delete from the popup menu. Use the Clear button to empty the field of all selected elements. Use the Reset button to reload the combination of elements that you had when you entered the dialog. The Prefix and Suffix fields allow you to define a character string that will be placed at the beginning (Prefix) or end (Suffix) of the cross reference element. These fields are active only when one of the cross reference elements is selected.

82

Project Management

The Width and Fill with fields allow you to set the number and type of characters that will be used for the selected element. These fields appear when you select a tag element and then select the Fixed number of characters checkbox. (If you do not select this checkbox the software will use as many characters as necessary for a given value.) The entry in the Width field sets the number of digits that will be used for the value (more will be used if necessary). The Fill with field defines the character that will be used if necessary to fill out the value to match the width value. Example: Page Number set to width 3, fill with 0. Cross references to devices on page 2 will use the value 002. Cross references to devices on page 13 will use the value 013. Cross references to devices on page 3333 will use the value 3333. When you have made the desired changes to the device cross reference format, use the Save Profile button to save the changes for all future projects using the profile. If you select the OK button (without saving) the changes will only apply to the current project. Wire Link Cross Reference

Under Project Options, select Display Formats and click in the field for Wire Link. Select the Edit button to open the Wire Link Cross Reference Format dialog. This dialog functions the same as the one described for device ID formats. See page 76.

When you have made the desired changes to the format, use the Save Profile button to save the changes for all future projects using the profile. If you select the OK button (without saving) the changes will only apply to the current project.

83

Project Management Part Number Display Configuration

To configure the display of part numbers, go to the Project Options dialog, select Display Formats and select the Part Number tab. The following fields will appear.

Delimiter For Part Number Quantity - This field allows you to specify characters that are used to separate the quantity from the part number displayed at the symbol in schematic drawings. (This applies when you use the Quantity field when assigning part numbers.) Examples: Separator: {} Separator: :

Result: {5} 800T-001 Result: 5:800T-001.

Display Multiple Part Numbers On Drawing - When a part number is assigned to a symbol it can be designated as the “primary” part number. If multiple part numbers are assigned to one symbol only one of them will be the primary. See page 298. Select the All radio button to display all the part numbers assigned to a symbol. Select the Only the primary radio button to display only the primary part number. If the Only the primary radio button is selected and there are additional part numbers assigned. a comma and ellipsis will appear after the primary part number. Example: ABC1001, ... Display Part Number - Select whether you wish the part number to be displayed above the device ID or below the device ID. Suppress Part Numbers On Child Symbol - Select the checkbox if you wish the part number to be displayed only at the parent symbol. If the checkbox is not selected, the part number will appear at both parent and child symbols.

Display Languages This function sets which language text languages will be displayed on the drawing and how multiple part numbers are displayed. In the project Options dialog, select Display Languages. The following fields will appear.

84

Project Management

Certain descriptive text strings in a drawing can be displayed in up to three different languages simultaneously. In the Language fields, the user selects which languages will be used. By selecting the down arrow button the following list of languages can be selected from: English, Chinese, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Russian.

85

Project Management

Drawing Standards In the project Options dialog, select Drawing Standards. The following fields will appear.

This function allows you to define drawing standards, units and naming format. In the Drawing Naming Convention area you can set the naming format for drawing files. Select a pre-defined profile or edit the elements of these profiles. (See below.) In the Electrical Standard area, select whether the drawings will follow the ANSI-IEEE or IEC standard. In the Default Units of Measure area, select whether your drawings will use inch units or metric (millimeter) units. These units will also be used for report templates. In the Device Appending Setting area, select the Allow Devices To Be Appended To Families checkbox if you wish to allow additional symbols to be assigned to a device ID after the available spots have been filled. If you select this checkbox, two additional checkboxes will be available, allowing you to select whether parent symbols, child symbols or both can be appended. If you do not select the Allow Devices To Be Appended To Families checkbox, the append option will not be available when you attempt to assign too many items to a family (see page 231).

86

Project Management

In the Primary Mode field you can designate a drawing mode as “primary” which means an ID assigned in that mode will replace a different ID assigned to the same device in another mode. For more on drawing modes, see page 196. If you wish to edit the naming convention profile for drawing files, select the Edit button next to the Profile field. The following dialog will appear:

This function allows you to define the naming format for drawing files. Available Variables - This area of the dialog lists the variables that are available for inclusion in the device ID. To add one of these elements to the drawing name format, select it and click on the Add to Expression button. It will then appear on the right side of the dialog. To remove an element from the format, select (highlight) it, then either press the key or right click on the element and select Delete from the popup menu. Use the Clear button to empty the field of all selected elements. Use the Reset button to reload the format that you had when you first entered the dialog. The Example Result field shows the kind of filename that the selected variables will produce using example values.

87

Project Management

PLC In the project Options dialog, select PLC. The following fields will appear.

This function allows you to define the format of PLC card I/O addresses and import PLC descriptive text from existing files. PLC Import File – Specifies a text or spreadsheet file containing programmable controller addresses and descriptive text. Once the file is selected, click the Replace Text in Project button and the relevant text is automatically taken from the file and placed in the drawing. Note: in order to use this function the PLC symbols in the schematic must have the first address entered that matches the text in the file. Use the Browse button to view and select available files. The File Type field allows you to select the format of the programmable controller file. The choices are Text file (txt) or Excel file (xls). The format of the text file should be as follows: 1 6 (first and last column holding the PLC address) 8 60 (first and last column holding descriptive text) I00100 CONVEYOR START PUSHBUTTON(first address and text) I00101 CONVEYOR STOP PUSHBUTTON (second address and text) etc. The format of the Excel format file should be as follows: 88

Project Management

Address

Descriptive text

Installation

Location

Addressing – This field selects I/O address numbering for programmable controller symbols. The addressing will proceed in the selected numbering system from the starting address entered by the user when the symbol is placed. Automatic Addressing – This checkbox selects automatic or manual I/O addressing of programmable controller module symbols. When the checkbox is selected, automatic addressing is in effect; the system will take the beginning address number entered by the user and assign consecutive addresses to the remaining I/O points on the module. If the Automatic Addressing checkbox is de-selected, manual addressing is in effect. Input Card Format, Output Card Format - These fields allow you to define PLC card input and output addresses. The available elements are listed on the left side of the dialog. To add one of these elements to the PLC address format, select it and click on the Add to Expression button. It will then appear on the right side of the dialog. The Example field shows the kind of address that the selected variables will produce using example values. To remove an element from the format, select (highlight) it, then either press the key or right click on the element and select Delete from the popup menu. Use the Clear button to empty the field of all selected elements. Use the Reset button to reload the format that you had when you first entered the dialog. Select the OK button to load the settings for the current project.

89

Project Management

Region Settings In the project Options dialog, select Region Settings. The following fields will appear. There are two tabs: one for currency settings and one for date and time settings.

Currency tab

In the Decimal Places field, select the number of decimal places that you wish currency values to have. In the Negative Numbers field, select whether or not you wish negative currency values to be marked with a minus sign (-). Date & Time tab

Select one of the available formats for Date Type and Time Type.

90

Project Management

Revision Control In the project Options dialog, select Revision Control. The following fields will appear.

This function allows you to make settings to the Revision Control function. The following settings are available: Revision Control On - Select this checkbox to activate the Revision Control function. Use Page Prefix for Off-Page Revision Numbers - When you select this checkbox, off-page revision numbers will prefixed in the title block with the page number of the page where the edit occurred. (An “off-page” revision is a change that occurs on a page due to an edit made on another page.) Allow User to Increment Project Revision - Select Always to allow a user to create a project revision at his or her discretion. Select Never to prevent users from creating a revision. Log Off-Page Changes to Title Blocks - Sets whether or not revision notations will be made on pages that are affected by changes made by the user on another page. For example if the user changes the ID of a relay, it will affect a contact of that relay on a different page (an “Off-Page”). Select Always, Never or Prompt. Cancel Making a Revision - Sets whether the user will have the option to cancel making a revision. Select Never or Prompt. Revise Previous Revisions - Sets whether the user can open a revision and make changes. Select Never or Always.

91

Project Management

Log AutoCAD Revisions - Sets whether changes made using AutoCAD commands and functions will be logged as revisions. Select Never or Always. Backup Path for Revisions - Sets where revisions will be stored. Use the Browse button to select or create a folder. Creating New Revisions When you first turn on the Revision Control On checkbox in the Project Options Revision Control dialog and select OK, the Base Revision dialog will appear.

1. In the Base Revision Number field, enter the number that you wish the base revision to have. If you leave this field blank, the software use the name of the project as the name for the base revision. Note: the base revision that is saved is the project up to the point when you first turn on revision control. 2. In the New Revision Number field, enter the name that will become the current revision after you select OK. 3. If desired, enter short and long descriptions of the revision. 4. Select OK. The software will close all currently open pages and create a backup of the project to the revision path and name it as: "ProjectName - BaseRevision" where “ProjectName” is the name of the current project and “BaseRevision” is the name that was in the Base Revision Number field. 5. Thereafter, when you wish to create a new project revision, go to the Project Manager and select File > Revision Control > New Revision (the Revision Control menu is only available when revision control is turned on). The Add Project Revision dialog will appear.

92

Project Management

6. Enter a number for the new revision in the New Revision Number field. Select OK to create the new revision. The previous current revision will be saved as a backup and the newly created revision will become the current revision. To edit project revision information You can edit the descriptions for your page revisions. To do this, first you must have the Revise Previous Revisions field in the project Options dialog Revision Control screen set to Always (see page 91). This allows you to make changes. Then, in the Project Manager, select File > Revision Control > Edit Project Revisions function. The Edit Project Revisions dialog will appear.

The revisions are listed. You can display and edit the descriptions by clicking on the document icons in the Short Description and Long Description columns. You can also edit the User name. Select the OK button to save the changes. 93

Project Management

Deleting a Revision To delete a project revision: In the Project Manager, select File > Revision Control > Delete Revision function. The Delete Project Revision dialog will appear.

Select the revision you wish to delete. Then select the Delete button. Check Out (Access) a Revision If you wish to work with one of your saved project revisions, you can “check it out” for this purpose. To check out a revision: In the Project Manager, select File > Revision Control > Get Revision function. The Revision List dialog will appear.

94

Project Management

Highlight the revision you wish to check out. Select the Check Out button. The saved revision will be restored. Page Revisions When you have the revision control feature turned on, you will be prompted to save page revisions when you close a page that has been edited. These page revisions are descriptions of the changes that you have made to the page - they are not backup copies of the page itself. When you close an edited page, the Revision Control dialog will appear:

Select the Increment Page Revision radio button if you wish to save a page revision. Then select the OK button. (If you do not wish to save page revision information, select the No Revision button.) The Add Page Revision dialog will appear:

95

Project Management

This dialog shows the page name and the project and project revision to which the page belongs. In the New Page Revision Number field, enter a number for the new revision you are creating. In the Short Description field, enter a brief description of the changes that were made in this revision. In the Long Description field, enter a more detailed description of the changes that were made in this revision. In the Related Pages area of the dialog, select the This page radio button. Select the OK button to save the page revision. To view page revision information: You can use the Page Revisions report to view your page revisions. Select the Elec-Tools > Run Reports function. Then open the Revision Report (Page) category and select the Page Revision List report.

96

Project Management

The report shows each page revision in the current project along with their descriptions.

To edit page revision information: You can edit the descriptions for your page revisions. To do this, first you must have the Revise Previous Revisions field in the project Options dialog Revision Control screen set to Always (see page 91). This allows you to make changes. Then, in the Project Manager, select File > Revision Control > Edit Page Revisions function. The Edit Page Revisions dialog will appear.

The revisions are listed. You can display and edit the descriptions by clicking on the document icons in the Short Description and Long Description columns. You can also edit the User name. Select the OK button to save the changes.

97

Project Management

Text Settings In the project Options dialog, select Text Settings. The following fields will appear.

This function allows you to make settings for various kinds of text that appear in drawings. Fields for different categories of text (IDs, wire numbers, cross references, etc.) are provided. For each field, there are three checkboxes: Use Text Style - If you select Use Text Style, the software will use the text values defined in the text style for that type of text. If you de-select this checkbox, the software will use the text settings that were defined in the symbol or in the wire numbering function function for subsequently inserted symbols and assigned wire numbers. Use Text Height. If you select Use Text Height, the software will use the text height defined in the text style for that type of text. If you de-select this checkbox, the software will use the text height that was defined in the symbol or in the wire numbering function for subsequently inserted symbols and assigned wire numbers. Scale Text By Page Scale - If you select Scale Text By Page Scale, the software will scale the text size according to the page scale for the current page.

98

Project Management

If you wish to modify any of the text styles, select the Edit button for the desired text type. The following dialog will appear.

You can make changes to the available values and save the changes using the Save Profile button. You can change the profile name and save multiple profiles. Use the Load Profile button to recall a saved profile. The following fields are available: Font Name - Select a font from the drop-down list. Height - Sets the text height. Preview - An example of how the current font settings will appear. Width Factor - Sets character spacing. Entering a value of less than 1.0 condenses the text. Values greater than 1.0 expand the text. Rotate - Enter an angle value for placing text on a page. Oblique - Sets the oblique angle (italicizing) of the text. Enter a value between -85 and 85. Color - Select a color for the text from the drop-down list. Use the browse button to open a color dialog for additional colors.

99

Project Management

Wiring Diagram Settings In the project Options dialog, select Wiring Diagram Settings. The following fields will appear.

This function allows you to make settings that define the appearance and content of wire diagram drawings and cable cross reference drawings. There are separate tabs for these two types of drawings. Devices tab

The Devices tab of the Wire Diagram Settings dialog has settings for wire diagrams that contain standard (non-cable) hardware devices. At the top of the dialog is a graphical representation of a wire diagram symbol with fields for defining the connection information on each side of the symbol. To configure the information in these fields, select the Build Expressions button above the desired field.

100

Project Management

The following Expression Builder dialog will appear.

The available variables are listed in two columns on the left side of the dialog. To add one of these elements to the connection information, select it and click on the Add to Expression button. It will then appear on the right side of the dialog. The Example field shows how the selected variables will appear in the drawing. If you select (highlight) one of the selected variables in the expression, the Properties fields become active, allowing you to enter a Prefix or Suffix that will be added to the variable value. To remove an element from the format, select (highlight) it, then either press the key or right click on the element and select Delete from the popup menu. Use the Clear button to empty the field of all selected elements. Use the Reset button to reload the format that you had when you first entered the dialog. Select OK to load the changes and close the Expression Builder dialog. The Connection Options area of the wire diagram settings dialog has additional functions that determine how the connection information will be displayed. Display Multiple Connections on One Line - When this checkbox is checked, connections that have multiple wires will display the information on one line rather than on separate lines. The Connection Delimiter field allows you to choose a character to separate the multiple connections. Suppress Connections With Different Installation/Location - Connections that go from/to different installations or locations will be ignored and not included. 101

Project Management

Only Display Installation/Location if Different Than Device - The installation/location in the connection information will only be displayed if it is a different installation/location than that of the device represented by the symbol. Suppress Duplicate Wire Number - Do not display wire numbers that are duplicates. Suppress Gauge/Color If - Allows you to suppress display of gauge and/or color values if the values match those entered in the Gauge and Color fields. Remove ‘?’ Character For Unterminated Connections - When selected, this checkbox suppresses the question mark character that marks unterminated connections. Dynamically Update Connections - If you select this checkbox, connection information on the wiring diagram will be updated automatically each time the page is opened. If the checkbox is not selected, the page will only be updated when the update command (Wiring > Update Wiring Diagram) is selected from the menu. Terminal/Pin-Plug Options - These settings affect the display of terminal or pin/plug information. Suppress Clip Jumper Prefix - When selected, the prefix for clip jumpers (“CLIP:”) will not be displayed. Suppress Connection Point - When the checkbox is selected, the connection point designation (“I”, “E”) will not be displayed with the terminal number. Terminal Number Delimiter - Defines the character used to separate the terminal block number from the terminal strip name.

102

Project Management Cable Cross-References tab

The Cable Cross-References tab of the Wire Diagram Settings dialog has settings for diagrams that show cable connection information.

At the top of the dialog is a graphical representation of a cable wiring diagram symbol with fields for defining the connection information on each side of the symbol. To configure the information in these fields, select the Build Expressions button above the desired field. The Expression Builder dialog will appear (see page 100). The Connection Options area of the dialog has additional functions that determine how the connection information will be displayed. Only Display Installation/Location if Different Than Device - The installation/location in the connection information will only be displayed if it is a different installation/location than that of the device represented by the symbol. Suppress Gauge/Color If: - Selecting this checkbox will suppress the display of gauge or color information if the value matches those entered in the Gauge or Color fields. Remove ‘?’ Character For Unterminated Connections - When selected, this checkbox suppresses the question mark character that marks unterminated connections. Dynamically Update Connections - If you select this checkbox, connection information on the wiring diagram will be updated automatically each time the page is opened. If the checkbox is not selected, the page will only be updated when the update command (promis-e Output > Update Wiring Diagram) is selected.

103

Project Management

Terminal/Pin-Plug Options - These settings affect the display of terminal or pin/plug information. Suppress Connection Point - When the checkbox is selected, the connection point designation (“I”, “E”) will not be displayed with the terminal number. Terminal Number Delimiter - Defines the character used to separate the terminal block number from the terminal strip name. Wiring Diagram Charts tab

The Wiring Diagram Charts tab of the Wire Diagram Settings dialog has settings for diagrams that show connections in a table format. You have the option of using this format rather than using wiring diagram symbols to represent devices.

In the Text Styles area you can set the text style for the types of text that appear in the chart. Select the Edit button for a text type to display the Edit Text Style dialog (see page 99). In the Include area, select the Include Function Text checkbox to include symbol function text. Select the Include Headings checkbox to activate the fields that allow you to enter column headings for connection points (CP Heading) and connection information (Connection Heading). In the Default Chart Settings area, enter width values (in default units) for the CP Column Width (connection point column) and Connection Column Width (connection information column). You can also select the Chart Color, which is the color of the dividing lines in the table.

104

Project Management

Wire Options In the project Options dialog, select Wire Options. The following fields will appear.

This function allows you to make settings that affect the appearance of wires and wire labels in drawings. Wire Crossing Preference

This setting determines how a wire will appear when it crosses another wire without connecting. Choose Standard or Loop Over. Standard Crossing

Loop Over Crossing

If you select Loop Over, the Loop Over Radius field becomes active, allowing you to enter a radius value for the loop.

105

Project Management Wire Connector Type

This setting determines how the connection between two wires will appear by default. Choose Node (connection point) or Diagonal. Node Connector

Diagonal Connector

Wire Property Display

Wire Property Display - This field determines the properties of the wire that will be displayed in the drawing. To change the entry, select the Edit button. The Wire Properties Display dialog will appear.

This dialog, accessed using the Edit button in the Wire Options dialog, allows you to select the wire properties that will be displayed in the drawing and configure how they will appear. You can combine other elements with the wire tag (wire number) to create a more complex wire ID. You can make changes to the available values and save the changes using the Save Profile button. You can change the profile name and save multiple profiles. Use the Load Profile button to recall a saved profile. The Profile Name field displays the name of the currently selected profile. 106

Project Management

The left side of the dialog lists the variables that are available for inclusion in the properties display. To add one of these elements to the displayed properties, select it and click on the Add to Expression button. It will then appear on the right side of the dialog. To remove an element from the format, select (highlight) it, then either press the key or right click on the element and select Delete from the popup menu. Use the Clear button to empty the field of all selected elements. Use the Reset button to reload the format that you had when you first entered the dialog. The Example field shows the kind of wire properties that the selected variables will produce using example values. Text & Position Options - Use these fields to set the position of the displayed wire properties in relation to the wire. Position Along Line - Sets where the wire tag will appear on a wire segment. Select Left or Top, Middle, or Right or Bottom. Wire Number On Wire - Select this checkbox if you wish the number to appear on the wire itself. 22

Offset from Line - Sets the distance of the wire tag from the wire. The Properties area of the dialog has two fields Prefix and Suffix that allow you to add characters to the beginning or end of any of the elements in the format. These fields become available when you select (highlight) one of the elements that has been added to the expression. Same Potential Over Terminal - This checkbox selects whether or not the same wire number will be assigned before and after a terminal when wires are numbered. When this checkbox is selected, the same wire number will appear before and after the terminal symbol. If the checkbox is not selected, a different wire number will be assigned after the terminal as shown below. 15

TB2

16

107

Project Management Wire Layer Configuration

Wire Layer Configuration - Select the Wire Layer Configuration button in the Wire Options dialog. The following dialog will appear.

This dialog is for making settings for drawing wires on two or more different layers. (Layers correspond to MicroStation “levels.”) You can assign different wire properties such as gauge, color and voltage to different layers. This will, for example, allow you to draw power wires on one layer and signal wires on another layer. The appropriate properties are then automatically assigned to each wire type. If the Allow Multiple Wires Per Mode radio button is set to On the software will allow the user to define different types of logic line layers for each drawing mode. If this feature is set to Off the software will only permit the user to define one layer for logic lines for each mode. Import Layers - Selects this button to open a file browser dialog and select a .DWG or .DXF file. After the file is opened the software will extract all the layer names used in the drawing and list them in the layer configuration dialog.

108

Project Management

New Layer - Select this button to enter the name of a new layer and add it to the list. Delete Layer - If the user selects this button the currently selected layer will be deleted. Rename Layer - If the user selects this button the software will allow the user to enter a new name for the currently selected layer. Use the drop-down list in the Drawing Mode column to assign a drawing mode to each layer. (The drop-down list will appear when you place the cursor in a field within the column).

The Use column allows you to assign a description to the logic line layer. When you place the cursor in that column a drop-down list will appear that lists every use that has already been defined. The More Properties button will display a dialog that lists the other ten user-definable attributes. Select OK to load the layer configuration settings.

109

Project Management Default Wire Properties

Select the Default Wire Properties button in the Wire Options dialog to display the Default Wire Properties dialog. This dialog allows you to set the values that are prompted when setting wire properties in a drawing or in the Force Routing Manager.

To enter values, first select the desired property in the Wire Property field. The available selections are Gauge, Color, Type, Voltage and Current. Select the “+” button to enter a new value. You will be prompted with the Add dialog where you can enter the value. This value will then appear in the Default Value field. You can add more values as needed. You can set the order of the default values by selecting a value in the Default Value field and then selecting the up or down arrow button to move it up or down the list. You can delete a value by selecting it and then selecting the “X” button. Wire Tag Formats

The Wire Tag Formats area of the Wire Options screen allows you to format wire labels (wire numbers). \ There are settings that affect wire tag duplicate number checking: The Labels Include Installation and Location radio buttons. When you select the Installation, Location and Tag radio button, the installation and location of the wire will be considered part of the wire tag (even though it may not be

110

Project Management

displayed). This means you could have two wires with the same number in different installations or locations and they would not be considered duplicates because the different installation or location in the tag makes each one unique. If you select the Tag Only radio button, identical tags will be considered duplicates even if they are in separate installations. When you select the Duplicate Label Checking Between Modes the software will not allow duplicate wire labels even if the drawings have different drawing modes (schematic, pneumatic, etc.). Four types of wire labels can be formatted: • Standard - a typical wire. • Terminal Number- a wire connected to a terminal symbol. • PLC - a wire connected to a PLC input or output. • Cable - a wire assigned to a cable.

For each format type, the dialog shows the name of the profile that the format is currently based on (default, etc.). If you wish to change this setting, select the Edit button for that field.

111

Project Management

Select the Edit button to access the Wire Tag Format area of the dialog. Load or save profiles Profile name Available elements Currently selected elements Example of current elements

The Profile Name field displays the name of the current label profile. The profile is a saved format. You can create new profiles, save them and reload them as your project needs require. Use the Save Profile button to save changes to the current profile. If desired, you can change the entry in the Profile Name field and save the changed profile under a different name. Use the Load Profile button to load a previously saved profile. On the left side of the dialog is a list of available elements that can be added to the wire label. To add an element, select (highlight) it, and then click the Add to Expression button. It will then be shown on the right side of the dialog as part of the label. The following elements are available: Line Number Terminal Number, Terminal Strip - For terminal wire labels. PLC Address - For PLC wire labels. Zone Number - For pages that are divided into zones.

112

Project Management

Sequential Number - A number incrementing from 1. You can choose to have this numbering extend across the entire project, an installation, a location, a page or a single line. Branch Label Drawing Set The right side of the dialog displays the currently selected label elements. Below this is an example of what the label will look like in an actual drawing. To remove an element from the label, select (highlight) it, then either press the key or right click on the element and select Delete from the popup menu. Use the Clear button to empty the field of all selected elements. Use the Reset button to reload the combination of elements that you had when you entered the dialog. You can further format the label by selecting (highlighting) one of the selected elements. When you do this, additional fields become active.

Select element

Additional fields become active

The Prefix and Suffix fields allow you to define a character string that will be placed at the beginning (Prefix) or end (Suffix) of the label element. The Width and Fill with fields allow you to set the number and type of characters that will be used for the selected label element. These fields become available when you select a label element and then select the Fixed number of characters checkbox. (If you do not select this checkbox the software will use as many characters as necessary for a given value.) The entry in the Width field sets the number of digits that will be used for the value (more will be used if necessary). The Fill with field defines the character that will be used if necessary to fill out the value to match the width value. Example: Page Number set to width 3, fill with 0. Labels on page 2 will use the value 002. Labels on page 13 will use the value 013. Labels on page 3333 will use the value 3333. The Duplicate Character area of the dialog allows you to format how labels will be distinguished when more than one label appears on the same line. The First number/character field defines how the labels will be marked, numbers or letters, and what the first value will be. The Separator field defines the character that will 113

Project Management

divide the value from the rest of the wire label. If you select the Suppress first occurrence checkbox, then the first item on the line will not have the additional value, but succeeding items will. For example: 102, 102.1, 102.2. When you have made the desired changes to the wire label format, use the Save Profile button to save the changes for all future projects using the profile. If you select the OK button (without saving) the changes will only apply to the current project.

114

Project Management

Project Backup / Restore You can make a backup copy of a project for safekeeping or for sending to someone else. The restore function allows a user to convert the backup file back into a project that can be opened.

Make a Backup Use the following procedure to make a backup: 1. Close any open drawing pages. 2. In the Project Manager, select Edit > Backup. The Backup Project dialog will appear.

3. In the Project field, select the name of the project that you wish to back up. 4. In the Save In field, select the folder where you wish the backup copy to be stored. Use the browse button to locate the desired folder. 5. In the Include in Backup File area of the dialog, make selections to determine what information will be stored with the project in addition to the drawings. You can select checkboxes to include Symbols used and Language phrases used. 6. If you wish to save the project in the MicroStation drawing format (.dgn), select the Save files in MicroStation compatible format checkbox. (This checkbox is not present in the MicroStation version of promis•e.) 7. Select OK to create the project backup file. This file will have the same name as the project and a “.prj” extension. 115

Project Management

Restore a Backup Use the following procedure to restore a project from a backup file: 1. In the Project Manager, select Edit > Restore. The Restore Project dialog will appear.

In the Project File field, use the browse button to locate and select the backup file that you wish to restore. 2. In the Path field, use the browse button to locate and select the folder where you wish the restored project to be located. 3. In the Name field, enter the name that you wish the restored project to have. The entry will default to the name of the selected backup file, but you can change this. 4. Select the OK button to restore the project.

116

Project Management

Rebuild Project Database Ordinarily, changes made to a drawing page are recorded in the project database so that the software can perform cross referencing, keep track of device IDs and wire numbers, etc. However, if the information on the pages becomes out-of-sync with the project database (for example if someone edits the DWG files outside of promis•e), you will need to update the project database with the new information. To re-sync the information on the pages with the project database, select the Manage > Rebuild Project Database function. The software will examine the information on each page in the project and update the project database. This is similar to the Update Page function (see page 175) except that it includes all pages in the project, not just one.

117

Project Management

Migration Wizard The Migration Wizard is a function to convert projects and other data created in earlier (legacy) versions of the software to the format used by promis•e 2007 version 3.0 and promis•e V8i.

Starting the Migration Wizard To activate the Migration Wizard go to the Project Manager and select File > Migration Wizard. The Migration dialog will appear:

In this dialog, select whether the project to be imported comes From Legacy promis•e (a version of promis•e earlier than promis•e 2007) or From promis•e Version 2.0 or From promis•e (ACAD) to promis•e (MicroStation) (You will only see this choice in MicroStation or PowerDraft versions of the software. It is for migrating catalogs only.) The remainder of the wizard steps will be affected by your choice here: • If you select the From Legacy promis•e, go to Migrate from Legacy

promis•e on page 119. • If you select From promis•e Version 2.0 go to Migrate from Version 2.0 on page 133. • If you select From promis•e (ACAD) to promis•e (MicroStation) go to Migrate Catalog from AutoCAD to MicroStation Version on page 137. Select OK to continue.

118

Project Management

Migrate from Legacy promis•e (See the previous steps for starting the Migration Wizard on page 118.) The Select Legacy Data Files dialog will appear:

If you have a legacy version of the software on your system, you can select the I have a legacy version radio button and then use the browse button next to the Legacy promis-e path field to locate and select where the legacy software is installed. This will allow the software to prompt you in later steps with the appropriate path for projects, symbols, etc. If you don’t have the legacy software installed, select the I want to browse to my legacy data files radio button. Select OK to continue.

119

Project Management

The Migration Wizard dialog will appear.

The dialog has five tabs across the top, each of which corresponds to a different type of data (you may need to scroll to the right to see all the tabs). These are: • Catalogs • Page Formats • Language Phrases • Parts Databases • Projects (drawings)

You can go directly to any of the tabs and skip those that you do not need. For each tab there are a series of steps to be performed to import the data. Import Legacy Catalog tab In this tab of the Migration Wizard (see previous figure) you can import symbol catalogs from earlier versions of the software. Use the following steps. 1. Identify the catalog. You can choose a radio button to import the catalog either from a backup file or from an uncompressed folder. If you choose to import from a backup file, use the browse button to locate and select the desired backup file. If you choose to import an uncompressed catalog, use the browse button to browse to the directory where the legacy symbol catalog is installed. 120

Project Management

If you selected an existing legacy installation of the software when starting the Migration Wizard (see page 118) you will be prompted with a drop-down list of catalogs that exist in that version. Select the desired catalog from the list.

2. Click on Step 2: Select Title Block.

121

Project Management

All the macros in the selected catalog are listed. From this list, select the title block macros by scrolling down the list and double-clicking on each title block macro that you wish to convert. You can also select multiple items by holding down the or keys and then selecting the Import Selected button. Use the Import All button if you wish to select all the macros in the catalog. (Macros that are not title blocks should be imported in step 4.) Selected macros are listed at the bottom of the dialog. To remove a macro from the selected list, highlight it and select the Remove button. To clear the list of selected macros, select the Clear button. Note:

Some legacy versions of promis•e clearly defined which macros were title blocks. If you are converting from one of these versions, the wizard will automatically filter the list of macros and only list the title blocks in this step of the wizard. 3. Select Step 3: Select Symbol.

The symbols in the selected catalog are listed. From this list, select symbols by scrolling down the list and double-clicking on each one that you wish to convert. You can also select multiple items by holding down the or keys and then selecting the Import Selected button. Use the Import All button if you want to select all of the symbols. Selected symbols are listed at the bottom of the dialog. 122

Project Management

To remove a symbol from the selected list, highlight it and select the Remove button. To clear the list of selected symbols, select the Clear button. The software tries to determine the correct type of symbol to which each symbol should be converted, but there may be times when the software cannot automatically identify the correct symbol type (for example, panel layout symbols). You can individually change the types in this dialog by clicking in the Type field and selecting the correct type from the drop-down list. You can use the and keys to select multiple records and change their type at the same time. 4. Select Step 4: Select Macro.

The macros in the selected catalog are listed. From this list, select macros by scrolling down the list and double-clicking on each one that you wish to convert. You can also select multiple items by holding down the or keys and then selecting the Import Selected button. Use the Import All button if you want to select all of the macros. (You should de-select title block macros that were selected in step 2.) Selected macros are listed at the bottom of the dialog.

123

Project Management

To remove a macro from the selected list, highlight it and select the Remove button. To clear the list of selected macros, select the Clear button. The software tries to determine the correct type (drawing mode) to which each macro should be converted, but there may be times when the software cannot automatically identify the correct type. You can individually change the types in this dialog by clicking in the Type field and selecting the correct mode from the drop-down list. You can use the and keys to select multiple records and change their type at the same time. 5. Select Step 5: Select Device Type.

The device types in the selected catalog are listed. From this list, select device types by scrolling down the list and double-clicking on each one that you wish to convert. You can also select multiple items by holding down the or keys and then selecting the Import Selected button. Use the Import All button if you want to select all of the device types. Selected device types are listed at the bottom of the dialog.

124

Project Management

To remove a device type from the selected list, highlight it and select the Remove button. To clear the list of selected device types, select the Clear button. The software tries to determine the correct type of device family to which each device type should be converted, but there may be times when the software cannot automatically identify the correct type. You can individually change the types in this dialog by clicking in the Type field and selecting the correct type from the drop-down list. You can use the and keys to select multiple records and change their type at the same time. 6. Select Step 6: Save.

The Catalog Path field will default to your first promis•e V8i catalog path. If desired, you can use the browse button to select a different path. The Catalog Name field entry will default to the original name of the imported catalog. If desired you can enter a different name. In the Catalog Type field, select Inch or Metric to match the type of units to be used in the drawings where the imported symbols will be used. Select the Import button. A folder will be created for the imported catalog, including sub-folders containing the imported title blocks, symbols, macros and device families. In the Progress area of the dialog a status bar indicates the percentage of the catalog that has been imported. Select the Log button to view information about the import process. It is recommended that you view this log data when the import is complete to verify that no problems occurred. 125

Project Management

Import Legacy Page Formats tab You can use this tab of the Migration Wizard to import drawing page formats from earlier versions of the software. Use the following steps. Note:

If you are importing page formats that make use of line number macros or zone macros, you must first import the symbol catalog(s) that contain those macros. 1. Select the page format folder. In the Select dwg .cfg file field, browse to the directory where the legacy version of the software is installed and find the dwg.cfg file (typically in the SYSCON\SYSTEM folder).

Note:

126

If you selected an existing legacy installation of the software when starting the Migration Wizard (see page 118) you will be prompted with a drop-down list of the dwg.cfg files that exist for that version of the software. There is one for each project and also one in the SYSCON\SYSTEM folder.

Project Management

2. Select Step 2: Select Page Format.

The page formats in the selected configuration are listed. From this list, select page formats by scrolling down the list and double-clicking on each one that you wish to convert. You can also select multiple items by holding down the or keys and then selecting the Import Selected button. Use the Import All button if you want to select all of the page formats. Selected page formats are listed at the bottom of the dialog. To remove a page format from the selected list, highlight it and select the Remove button. To clear the list of selected page formats, select the Clear button.

127

Project Management

3. Select Step 3: Save. In the field labeled Folder to store imported page formats, browse to the folder where you wish the imported legacy formats to be stored. It is recommended to use the default folder: promis•e Data\PageFormat.

Select the Import button. The formats will be stored in the selected folder. For each format, a file with a “pgf” extension is created. In the Progress area of the dialog a status bar indicates the percentage of the import process that is completed. Select the Log button to view information about the import process. It is recommended that you view this log data when the import is complete to verify that no problems occurred.

128

Project Management

Import Legacy Language Phrases tab This tab of the Migration Wizard allows you to import language database from legacy versions of the software. Use the following steps. 1. In the Select Legacy Language Database field, browse to the folder containing the language database and select the database (mdb) file. Typically this is the TDB.MDB file in the DB\LG folder. Note:

If you selected an existing legacy installation of the software when starting the Migration Wizard (see page 118) you will be prompted with the language database file for that version of the software.

2. Select the Import button. A language database file will be created in your “promis•e Data” folder in the Databases sub-folder. In the Progress area of the dialog a status bar indicates the percentage of the import process that has been completed. Select the Log button to view information about the import process. It is recommended that you view this log data when the import is complete to verify that no problems occurred.

129

Project Management

Import Legacy Parts Database tab You can use this tab of the Migration Wizard to import parts database files from earlier versions of the software. Use the following steps. 1. In the Legacy Parts Database field, browse to the folder where the legacy database file is stored. Note:

130

If you selected an existing legacy installation of the software when starting the Migration Wizard (see page 118) you will be prompted with the parts database file for that version of the software.

Project Management

2. In the Save New Parts Database field select a folder where the converted database will be stored. When you select the browse button, the following dialog will appear, automatically defaulting to the database folder for promis•e V8i. You can select a different folder if you wish. Enter a name for the converted database file in the Filename field.

Select the Save button to continue. 3. Select the Import button. The converted database will be stored in the designated folder. In the Progress area of the dialog a status bar indicates the percentage of the import process that has been completed. Select the Log button to view information about the import process. It is recommended that you view this log data when the import is complete to verify that no problems occurred. Import Legacy Projects tab You can use this tab of the Migration Wizard to import projects from earlier versions of the software. Use the following steps. 1. In the Legacy Project(s) Path field, browse to the folder where the legacy projects are stored. Typically, this is the ..\PROJECT\WORK folder. Note:

If you selected an existing legacy installation of the software when starting the Migration Wizard (see page 118) it will default to the project path for that version of the software.

131

Project Management

2. If you select the Import Report checkbox, the software will convert the MS-Access report formats from the legacy version so that they will run on promis•e V8i. It will create a file called Reports.mdb in the folder for the imported project. You can open this file in MS-Access and print reports from there. 3. When you select the legacy project path, the projects stored in that folder are listed. Select the Import checkbox for each project that you wish to import. Use the Select All button to select all the projects.

4. The New Path column for the selected project(s), will default to your default folder for storing projects. If desired, you can click inside this field to display a browse button and use the browse button to select a folder for the converted projects. 5. By default, symbol attribute text will be converted using the default values that were delivered with the legacy version. However, if you have customized these values and wish to use your values instead, click inside the Attributes File column and browse to your edited att_eng.txt file.

132

Project Management

6. Select the Start button to start the conversion process. The selected projects are converted page by page. Status bars at the bottom of the dialog show how much of the current project and the total job have been converted. The log file stores information about the conversion including any errors that were encountered.

Migrate from Version 2.0 (See the previous steps for starting the Migration Wizard on page 118.) The Migration Wizard dialog will appear.

The dialog has tabs across the top, each of which corresponds to a different type of data. These are: • Catalogs • Page Formats • Parts Database Note:

You import projects from version 2.0 by making a backup of the project in version 2.0 and restoring it in version 3.0. You can go directly to any of the tabs and skip those that you do not need. For each tab there are a series of steps to be performed to import the data.

133

Project Management

Import Catalogs tab In this tab of the Migration Wizard (see previous figure) you can import symbol catalogs from Version 2.0 of the software. Use the following steps. 1. Select a radio button to choose whether you wish to Import uncompressed catalog or Import catalog from a backup file. 2. If you are importing an uncompressed catalog, use the browse button to locate and select the Catalogs folder for the Version 2.0 software. If you are importing from a backup file, use the browse button to locate and select the backup file. Existing catalogs in the Catalogs folder or in the backup file will be listed.

3. In the Convert column, select the checkbox for each catalog that you wish to import into the latest version of the software. You can also use the Select All or Deselect All buttons rather than clicking on individual checkboxes. 4. Select the Update button to import the selected catalogs. When the importation is complete, an “update successful” message is displayed.

134

Project Management

Import Page Formats tab In this tab of the Migration Wizard you can import page formats from Version 2.0 of the software. Use the following steps. 1. Use the browse button to locate and select the PageFormat folder for the Version 2.0 software.

2. The page formats in the selected folder will be listed. Select the checkbox for each format that you wish to import (all formats are selected by default). 3. Select the Update button to import the formats. When the importation is complete, an “update successful” message is displayed.

135

Project Management

Import Parts Database tab In this tab of the Migration Wizard you can import the parts database from Version 2.0 of the software. Use the following steps. 1. Use the browse button to locate and select the desired database file (in the Databases folder) for the Version 2.0 software.

2. Select the Update button to import the selected database. When the importation is complete, an “update successful” message is displayed.

136

Project Management

Migrate Catalog from AutoCAD to MicroStation Version If you are migrating from an AutoCAD-based version of promis•e to one that is based on MicroStation or PowerDraft, you can migrate your symbol catalogs by selecting the From promis•e (ACAD) to promis•e (MicroStation) radio button in the first Migration Wizard dialog. This option is only available in the MicroStation or PowerDraft versions of the software. The following dialog will appear:

In the Standard of the catalog to convert field, select ANSI-IEEE if the catalog you are migrating uses inch units, or select IEC if the catalog uses metric units. In the Source catalog (ACAD) area of the dialog: Select Import uncompressed catalog if the catalog exists in a standard catalog folder. Then use the browse button in the adjoining field to select the catalog folder. Select Import catalog from a backup file if the catalog exists in a compressed backup file. Then use the browse button in the adjoining field to select the backup file.

137

Project Management

In the Target catalog(MS) area of the dialog: Select Export to an uncompressed catalog if you wish to migrate the catalog to a standard catalog folder. Then use the browse button in the adjoining field to select the destination catalog folder. Select Export to backup catalog file if you wish to migrate the catalog to a compressed backup file. Then use the browse button in the adjoining field to select the folder and enter the name of the backup file.

138

Project Management

Data Manager The Data Manager is a feature that allows you to access data from the project in one window with tabs for different categories of data such as device IDs, symbol text and more. The Data Manager is a convenient way to globally search, sort and edit project data without opening drawing pages. To access the Data Manager, select Revise/Review > Data Manager. (A project must be active.) The Data Manager dialog will appear.

The dialog has a series of tabs along the bottom that allow you to select the category of data that you are accessing. There are tabs for the following: Cable Device ID Wire Logical Field Page Description Page Number Plug Symbol Text Terminal Wire Link Wire Number When you select a tab, a set of data columns that are relevant to that category of data will appear. The white columns are available for editing; the shaded columns cannot be altered.

139

Project Management

To sort the data, you can click on the column headings. In the Select Page(s) area of the dialog, you can restrict the data display to certain drawing sets and pages within the project. When an item is selected, a checkmark will appear beside it. In the Find & Replace area of the dialog you can search for specific data values and replace them with new values. To search for values:

1. Select the tab for the desired category of data. 2. Use the Look in field to select the data column that you wish to include in the search. The data columns of the current data category are available in the drop-down list. 3. Enter the value that you wish to search for in the Find what field. You can enter an exact value or use wildcard (*) strings. 4. Select the Find button. The software will highlight the first item in the list of displayed values that matches the entered value. If you select Find again, it will go to the next value that matches the value, if there is one. To replace values:

1. Select the tab for the desired category of data. 2. Use the Look in field to select the data column that you wish to include in the replacement. The data columns of the current data category are available in the drop-down list. 3. Enter the value that you wish to replace in the Find what field. You can enter an exact value or use wildcard (*) strings. 4. Select the Replace button. The software will highlight the first item in the list of displayed values that matches the entered value and change the value. If you select Replace again, it will go to the next value that matches the value and change it. You can also select the Replace All button to change all the items that match the entered value in one step. 5. Save the changes you have made by selecting the Save toolbar button (disk icon). If you exit the Data Editor without saving your changes, you will be prompted to save them. Select Yes to save the changes. Select No to cancel the changes.

140

Project Management

There are two checkboxes that you can select to limit or expand the search and replace functions. Select Match Case to limit the function to values that exactly match the case of the entered value. Select Whole Words Only to limit the function to find only entries that match the complete word. For example, if you search for “volt” the software will not include “voltage” in the results.

141

Project Management

BOM Explorer The BOM Explorer is a feature of the Project Manager that allows you to view and edit the part numbers that are assigned to a project. You can see part numbers that have been assigned to items in a drawing and assign part numbers to items that don’t yet have them. The BOM Explorer also allows you to assign part numbers to a project before drawings are created. You can then generate a bill of materials to make a quote before a project is designed or as a pick list when creating schematic or panel layout drawings via the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device ID function (see page 219). To access the BOM Explorer, open the Project Manager and select the BOM Explorer tab at the bottom of the dialog.

In the left column you can select the project that you wish to access.

142

Project Management

In the center column (BOM Tree) you can select viewing options. Select the Device radio button to show items with device IDs assigned. Select Wire to show wires (with assigned wire numbers). Select Both to show both devices and wires. The BOM Tree lists installations and locations in the project and the device IDs and part numbers that are assigned within them.

Any existing device IDs are listed under each installation and location. You can click on the box beside each installation and location name to show or hide the contents. Device IDs are identified in the tree view by the letters “ID” to the left of each ID. If a part number is assigned to the ID, it is listed just below the ID. Part number information is displayed on the right side of the BOM Explorer. There is a filter function that allows you to narrow the range of part numbers displayed.There is a drop-down list for selecting the parts database field to which you wish the filtering to apply. In the Like field enter the value by which you wish to filter. This can include wildcard (*) entries such as *700* for any part numbers containing the number 700. Select the Apply Filter button to list the part numbers that match the filter. Select the Clear Filter button to remove the filter.

143

Project Management

BOM Explorer - Edit Parts Data in Existing Project To edit parts data in the BOM Explorer, use the following procedure: 1. Select the desired project in the left column.

2. In the BOM Tree area, select the radio buttons for the items in the project you wish to view: Device, Wire or Both. 3. In the BOM Tree area, select the installation and location containing the part number information you wish to modify.

144

Project Management

4. Right click on the part number you wish to change. The popup menu contains the following options: Edit Quantity - Change the quantity of the part number assigned to this ID. The Edit Part Number Quantity dialog will appear, allowing you to change the quantity value.

Remove - Remove this part number from the ID. 5. If the device ID currently has no part assigned, you can assign one: A. Right click on the ID. B. Select Add Part Number from the popup menu. C. Select the part number in the Select Part Number dialog and click on OK.

BOM Explorer - Assign Parts Data to New Project You can assign parts data to a new project (one that does not yet contain any drawings). This allows you to make a quote or a purchase order list for an upcoming job. Later, you can use this parts list as a pick list when placing symbols using the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device ID function. You can also right click on an existing symbol and select Device BOM Assign to replace the existing ID with one created in the BOM Explorer. To assign parts data in a new project: 1. Open the project manager and create a new project. See page 61. 2. Select the new project name in the Project Manager and select the BOM Explorer tab at the bottom of the dialog.

145

Project Management

3. In the center column (BOM Tree), right click and select Add Installation from the popup menu. The Add dialog will appear.

4. Enter the name of the new installation in the Add dialog and select OK. You can change the name of this installation later, if necessary.

5. Right click on the name of the new installation and select Add Location from the popup menu.

146

Project Management

6. Enter the name of the new location in the Add dialog and select OK. You can change the name later, if necessary. 7. If you need additional installations or locations, create them in the same way. 8. If you decide you don’t need an installation or location that you created, right click on the name and select Remove from the popup menu. 9. Assign part numbers to the locations you have created. Any part numbers that are assigned to the project must be associated with a device ID. You can manually create device IDs and then assign parts to them or you can allow the software to assign IDs automatically as you add parts to the project.

147

Project Management

A. If you wish to have device IDs assigned automatically, simply drag the part numbers from the right side of the dialog and drop them on top of the desired location name. A “+” character will appear at the cursor when it is positioned over a location or ID to which you can assign a part number.

The software will create a device ID for the part number based on the device tag mnemonic (defined during symbol creation for the schematic symbol specified in the parts record) and a sequential number. The ID and part number will appear below the location name (you may have to click on the “+” icon beside the ID to display the part number). Note:

The “ID” icon that appears beside the ID is bold if no symbol has been placed in the project, and it is grey if a symbol has been placed. When you place one of these “bold” IDs in the primary drawing mode, the ID will be renamed to conform to the project ID format. These bold IDs are also referred to as “temporary IDs.”

B. If you wish to manually create device IDs, right click on the desired location and select Add Device ID from the popup menu. Enter the ID in the Add dialog and select OK. To assign a part number to a device ID, you can either drag a part number from the right side of the dialog and drop it on top of the ID, or you can right click on the ID and select Add Part Number from the popup menu. The 148

Project Management

Select Part Number dialog will appear from which you can select parts. You can assign attributes to the device IDs in the BOM Explorer by right-clicking on the ID and selecting Attribute from the pop-up menu. The BOM Attribute dialog will appear:

When you elect the Add Attribute link, the Attribute List dialog will appear.

Here you can select one or more attributes followed by the OK button to add these to the BOM Attribute dialog. Then you can enter the desired value in the Value field. Select OK to finish assigning the attributes.

149

Project Management

BOM Explorer - Using the Parts List Once you have created a parts list using the BOM Explorer, you can use it generate reports such as a Bill of Materials or Purchase Order List. In order to generate reports, you must make the project active, which requires that you open a page. Therefore, before you can generate reports you must create at least one page in the project. This page can be blank. You can also use the parts list as a pick list when creating drawings. Once you have created a drawing page, use the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device ID function to place items in the drawing. See page 219. As you place items into drawings from the pick list, the ID for each item that is not yet associated with a symbol will be renamed according to the default project ID format. This occurs only if you are placing the items in the project’s primary drawing mode. You can also assign items in the parts list to existing symbols in a drawing using the Device BOM Assign function (see page 224).

150

Page Management

4

Page Management This section describes functions related to promis•e drawing pages. The first section covers how pages are organized within the project. Other sections describe how to display (open), create, delete and copy pages.

151

Page Management

Page Organization As described in Section 3, drawing sets are used to organize pages within a project into meaningful groups. You can arrange the drawing sets into any order you wish. For example, you may want to have all schematic pages in one drawing set and all panel layout pages in another set. In the Project Manager you can change the order of the sets, which affects the order in which the software indexes the pages. This has an effect on page navigation, cross referencing and print/plot order. PROJECT

DRAWING SET 1

DRAWING SET 2

4

4 3

3 2

2 1

1

INST NAME LOC NAME PAGE 1

152

Each page has a page number and can have a default installation and location

Page Management

Projects can be (optionally) subdivided into installations and locations. An installation or location does not exist until a drawing page is created and assigned to that installation and location. A page need not be assigned to an installation or location, but it must be associated with an existing project. PROJECT 2

PROJECT 1

INSTALLATION 2

INSTALLATION 1

LOCATION

LOCATION

12

7 5

4

11

6

2 1

LOCATION

8

4 3

(NO INSTALLATION OR LOCATION)

10 9

3

DRAWING PAGES

2 1

Page numbering need not be continuous; there can be “gaps.” Note:

Two pages cannot have the same number unless they are assigned to different drawing sets.

153

Page Management

Page Storage When a promis•e drawing page is created and stored, graphical information is stored in a DWG file (AutoCAD version) or DGN file (MicroStation version) while the logical information is stored in the project database.

Drawing Page

stored as

.DWG file (graphics) or .DGN file (graphics) Project database (project logical data)

The DWG or DGN file contains the graphical information for the drawing: everything that is seen when the drawing is plotted. The logical information for all the drawings in all the projects is stored in the project database which is an SQL/MSDE or Oracle database. This data includes device IDs, wire coordinates, connection information, and much more, and is used by various software functions. By having this information in the database, the software is able to perform project-wide operations such as cross referencing and report generation without having to open and analyze every DWG or DGN file. When changes are made in the currently open page that affect another page in the project, the software will place the change in the project database. The next time the user opens the second drawing page, the DWG or DGN file is updated from the information in the project database. Within the DWG or DGN file, the software follows a layering standard that places different types of information on separate layers. DWG and DGN files are stored in the directory for the project to which they belong. As each page is created, the software assigns a name to the DWG or DGN files according to the naming format that was defined for the project. See page 86.

154

Page Management

Displaying Pages Open Page To open a drawing page: 1. Start promis•e and open the Project Manager (see page 49).

Select Project

Select page

Page preview

2. Select the desired project from the browse window on the left side of the Project Manager. The pages in the selected project are then listed on the right side of the Project Manager. When you select (highlight) a page name, a thumbnail preview of the page appears in the lower left corner of the Project Manager. 3. To open a page, you can: • Double click on the page name, or • Right click on the page name and then select Open from the popup menu, or • Select the page name and select Edit > Open

Pages that are currently open are marked with a pencil icon in the project manager.

155

Page Management

Close Page AutoCAD version - You can close a page by clicking on the close (“X”) button in the window for the page, or you can right click on the page name in the Project Manager and select Close from the popup menu. MicroStation version - Pages are considered open until you close them by right clicking on the page name in the Project Manager and selecting Close from the popup menu.

Next Page, Previous Page You can open the next page or the previous page in numerical order in the current project by using the Design > Page Next or the Design > Page Previous functions (in the promis•e drawing window). There are also toolbar buttons for these functions.

156

Page Management

New Page To create a new page: 1. Start promis•e and open the Project Manager (see page 49).

Select Project

2. (Optional) In the browse window on the left side of the Project Manager, select the project to which the new page will belong. If you don’t select a project here, you can do so later in the New Page dialog. 3. To create the new page, you can: • Select File > New > New Page, or • Select the New toolbar button and then New Page from the menu that

appears.

157

Page Management

4. The New Page dialog will appear.

Enter the desired values and select OK to create the page. The following fields are available: Project - Use the drop-down list or the browse button to select the name of an existing project to which the page will belong. Drawing Set - Enter the name of a drawing set to which the page will belong. See page 47 for an explanation of drawing sets. Use the drop-down list to select an existing drawing set or enter the name of a new drawing set that will be created when you create the page. Note:

If you wish to re-assign the page to a different drawing set later, use the Rename Page function. See page 170. Installation - Enter the name of an installation that will be assigned to this page. See page 48 for an explanation of installations. Use the drop-down list to select an existing installation or enter the name of a new installation that will be created when you create the page. Location - Enter the name of the location that will be assigned to this page. See page 48 for an explanation of locations. Use the drop-down list to select an existing location or enter the name of a new location that will be created when you create the page. Page Name - Enter the name of the page.

Note:

158

Two pages cannot have the same number (name) unless they are assigned to different drawing sets.

Page Management

Initial Mode - Select the drawing mode that the software will default to when the page is opened. You can change the drawing mode later if necessary, i.e., you can have more than one type of drawing on a page. The available modes are that are delivered with the software are: Schematic Mode Panel Layout Mode Wiring Diagram Mode Hydraulic Mode Pneumatic Mode Single Line Mode Graphical Plan Mode Title Block -This optional field specifies the title block macro to be used only on the page being created. A title block named on the New Page dialog box will override the title block specified in the Default Project Properties for the current project (see page 105). A drop-down list and browse button allow you to select from existing title block macros. Page Format - This field selects the page size format. A drop-down list and browse button allow you to select from existing page formats. Various ANSI and IEC formats are provided with the software, with single or multiple columns. There is also a wizard for creating custom page formats. When you select the browse button, the Select Page Format dialog will appear. Select the desired format and select OK to continue.

159

Page Management

Page Macro - This optional field allows a macro to be placed on the page automatically. Unlike the Page Macro specified in the Default Project Properties for the current project (see page 105), the Page Macro here only applies to the page currently being created. Scale Factor - This field specifies the drawing scale to be used for the page being defined. Scales other than 1:1 are mainly used for panel layout drawings so that symbols can be placed at full size. Page Descriptions - These fields allow you to enter descriptive information about the page that will appear in title blocks and on reports. Set Page Online - This checkbox determines whether or not logical functions are active on the page. When the Set Page Online checkbox is selected, the page is online, meaning that automatic functions such as error checking and cross referencing will be performed on the drawing. When the Set Page Online box is not selected, the page is not online (it is “offline”). The Set Page Online checkbox should be turned off only when no logically connected control devices will be placed on the page, such as for general mechanical CAD work where no error checking or cross referencing is required. After you have entered all the values for the new page, select the OK button and the newly created page will appear on screen.

160

Page Management

Save Page To save a drawing page, select File > Save from the menu, or select the Save (disk) toolbar button. If you attempt to close promis•e without saving a page that you have changed, the following prompt will appear:

Select Yes to save the changes. Select No to discard the changes. Select Cancel to continue working on the page. Note:

The Undo function will only undo changes that have been made up to the last save.

Automatic Page Save You can set the software to save the currently open page automatically at a regular time interval. Use the following procedure: AutoCAD Version 1. Select the Tools > Options function. 2. Select the Open and Save tab. 3. Select the Automatic save checkbox. 4. Enter a time interval value in the Minutes between saves field. Drawings will be saved automatically after the entered number of minutes. MicroStation Version 1. Select Workspace > Preferences. The Preferences dialog will open. 2. In the Preferences dialog select the Operation category. 3. Select the Automatically Save Design Changes checkbox. 4. Select the OK button to close the Preferences dialog. Drawings will be saved automatically after two seconds of inactivity. Note:

The Undo function will only undo changes that have been made up to the last save operation. 161

Page Management

Save As Page Use the File > Save As function to save a promis•e drawing as a separate file under another name for use outside of promis•e. The logical information for the file that is created with this function will not be saved in the project database and therefore will not work with the promis•e logical functions (error checking, cross referencing, etc.). It will only be a graphical view of the drawing page. Therefore, do not use the Save As function to create files that you wish to use later in promis•e. Use the page copy function in the Project Manager to make copies of pages for use inside promis•e (see page 166). The AutoCAD version of promis•e allows you to save files as DWG, DXF, DWT or DWS format files. The MicroStation version allows you to save files as DGN, DWG, DXF or RDL format files. You can also use the Export to DWG function for this purpose (see page 164). It is limited to the DWG format, but allows you to export multiple pages in one step.

Warning: Use the Save As functions only for DWG/DGN files that will be used outside of promis•e. The logical information for the DWG/DGN file that is created with this function will not be saved and therefore will not work with the promis•e logical functions if you attempt to use this new file later in promis•e.

1. To use this function, first display the promis•e drawing page that you wish to save. 2. Then, select File > Save As.

162

Page Management

The Save Drawing As dialog box will appear.

AutoCAD

MicroStation

3. In the Save in field (AutoCAD) or Directories field (MicroStation), select the path and folder in which you want to save the drawing. 4. The drawing’s current name is indicated in the File Name field (AutoCAD) or Files field (MicroStation). Enter the new name under which you wish to save the drawing in this field. Do not enter the filename extension; it will be added automatically.

163

Page Management

5. In the Files of type field (AutoCAD) or Select Format to Save field (MicroStation), select the file type that you want the file saved as, from the drop-down list. 6. Select the Save button (AutoCAD) or OK button (MicroStation) to save the new file.

Export Page to DWG You can save a promis•e drawing as a DWG file for use outside of promis•e. The logical information for the DWG file that is created with this function will not be saved in the project database and therefore will not work with the promis•e logical functions (error checking, cross referencing, etc.). It will only be a graphical view of the drawing page. This exported file could be used, for example, to show a drawing to someone who is not directly working on the project. Therefore, do not use the Export to DWG function to create files that you wish to use later in promis•e. Use the Copy Page function to make copies of pages for use inside promis•e (see page 166). The Export to DWG function is similar to the page Save As function (see page 162) except that it is limited to the DWG format. The Export to DWG function also allows you to export multiple pages in one step.

Warning: Use the Export to DWG function only for DWG files that will be used outside of promis•e. The logical information for the DWG file that is created with this function will not be saved and therefore will not work with the promis•e logical functions if you attempt to use this new file later in promis•e.

To export a page to DWG: 1. Open the Project Manager. 2. Select (highlight) the name of the project containing the page you wish to export. The pages in the selected project will be listed. 3. Select (highlight) the name of the pages that you wish to export. 4. Select File > Export to DWG from the Project Manager menu. 5. The DExportToDWG dialog will appear.

164

Page Management

6. Use the browse button to select the folder where you wish the exported drawing(s) to be stored. 7. In the DWG Version field, select the DWG format that you wish to use. 8. Select OK. The exported DWG file(s) will be created in the selected folder.

165

Page Management

Copy Page To copy a drawing page: 1. Open the Project Manager. 2. Select (highlight) the name of the project containing the page you wish to copy. The pages in the selected project will be listed. 3. Select (highlight) the name of the pages that you wish to copy. 4. Select Edit > Copy from the Project Manager menu or right click on the page name and select Copy from the popup menu. 5. The Copy Page(s) dialog will appear.

The Source Page(s) field displays the name of the page or pages to be copied. In the Copy to area of the dialog, you can make the following entries. Project - The current project name is listed. If desired you can use the browse button to select a different project for the copied pages to reside in. Drawing Set - You can select Keep Existing, enter a new drawing set name, or select one from the drop-down list. Installation - You can select Keep Existing, enter a new installation name, or select one from the drop-down list. Location - You can select Keep Existing, enter a new location name, or 166

Page Management

select one from the drop-down list. Page Mode - You can select Keep Existing or select a different one from the drop-down list. Description - If you wish to change the page description, select the Description button and make the desired changes in the Page Description dialog. In the Page Options area of the dialog, you can make the following settings: Maintain Device ID - This checkbox determines whether or not device IDs on the copied pages will be changed automatically to match the new page number. When the checkbox is selected, the device IDs will be left as they are. When the checkbox is not selected, device IDs on the copied page will reflect the new page/line number (assuming this is part of the device tag format you are using). When the checkbox is selected, you can use the drop-down list beside this field to select: Complete - The full device ID including installation and location will be maintained on the new page. Tag Only - Only the device tag will be maintained on the new page, the installation and location portion of the device ID will be changed to match the new page. Maintain Terminal Numbers - This checkbox determines whether or not terminals in the copied page will be renumbered automatically to avoid duplication. If the checkbox is selected, you will be prompted to enter a new ID for each terminal that is duplicated within the same installation. De-select the checkbox to automatically renumber terminals. Set Pages Online - This checkbox determines whether the copied pages will be online or offline. Select the checkbox to make the copied pages online pages. If the pages are offline no error checking or cross referencing will be performed. Change Field Settings - This checkbox determines whether or not field settings of the existing page will be duplicated into the copied page. If the checkbox is selected, you will be prompted with a dialog box to make modifications to the field settings of the copied page. If the checkbox is not selected, existing field settings will be used on the copied page. In the Wire Number Options area of the dialog, you can make the following settings: Maintain Wire Number - This checkbox determines whether or not wire numbers will be copied. If you do not select the Maintain Wire Number checkbox, wire numbers will not be copied. If you do select the Maintain Wire Number checkbox, wire numbers will be copied under the following rules: A. If the copied wire numbers do not exist in the destination project/installation, 167

Page Management

the wire numbers will be maintained without changes. B. If copied wire numbers are connected to a wire link connecting to an existing wire number, the existing wire number will be used on the copied portion. C. If copied wire numbers duplicate existing wire numbers in the destination project, the system will add a question mark (?) to any copied wire number that duplicates an existing wire number. For example, if wire number 100 is copied to a project that already has a wire number 100, the copied wire number will be changed to 100?. (This can be avoided by adding a prefix or suffix to the copied numbers. See the following paragraph.) The Add Prefix and Add Suffix fields allow you to specify a prefix or suffix that will be added to all copied wire numbers. The added prefix and/or suffix will make the copied wire numbers unique, thus avoiding duplicate numbers (unless the prefix or suffix is already used in the destination project.) Maintain Wire Link IDs - When this checkbox is selected the device ID of signal cross references will be the same on the copied pages as on the original. If the checkbox is unchecked, the next available number will be assigned to signal IDs on the copied pages. 6.

Once the settings are made, select the OK button to create the copied pages.

If you try to copy a page that is currently open with unsaved changes, the software will prompt you to save it first.

168

Page Management

Modify Page The Modify Page function allows you to change the title block and page format used on an existing drawing page and also change the page descriptions and turn the Online function off and on. To modify a drawing page: 1. Open the Project Manager. 2. Select (highlight) the page you wish to modify. 3. Select Edit > Modify from the Project Manager menu or right click on the page name and select Modify from the popup menu. The Modify Page dialog box will appear. This dialog box is similar to the New Page dialog box (see page 157) except that only the Initial Mode, Title Block, Page Format, Set Page Online (where applicable), Scale Factor and Page Descriptions fields are accessible for modification.

If you wish to update the device IDs and wire numbers on the page to reflect the new page format (for example, if the line numbers change), select the Rename existing Device IDs checkbox. If you do not select this checkbox, the device IDs and wire numbers will remain unchanged. 4. After making the desired entries and settings, select the OK button to modify the page.

169

Page Management

Rename Page To copy a drawing page: 1. Open the Project Manager. 2. Select (highlight) the name of the project containing the page you wish to rename. The pages in the selected project will be listed. 3. Select (highlight) the name of the page that you wish to rename. 4. Select Edit > Rename from the Project Manager menu or right click on the page name and select Rename from the popup menu. 5. The Rename Page dialog will appear.

6. In the appropriate fields, enter the drawing set, installation, location and page number that the renamed page is to have. 7. If you wish to update the device IDs and wire numbers on the page to reflect the new page name, select the Rename existing Device IDs checkbox. If you do not select this checkbox, the device IDs and wire numbers will remain unchanged. 8. Select OK to rename the page.

170

Page Management

Move Page The page move function allows you to move drawing pages within an installation. You may wish to move pages to rearrange the page order or to make room for inserting new pages. Or, you may wish to move pages to close gaps in the page order. Note: If you wish to move a page to another installation, or to another project, use the Copy

Page function in the Project Manager and then delete the original page. To move a page: 1. Go to the Project Manager and select the desired project. 2. Select one or more pages to move, then right click on the page(s) and select Move from the popup menu that appears. The Move Page(s) dialog box will appear.

3. Use the Drawing Set, Installation and Location fields to determine where the moved page(s) will reside in the project. You can also change the Page Mode of the moved pages. 4. In the Page Name field, enter the page number that the moved page is to have. If you are moving more than one page, this will be the number of the first (lowest numbered) page that you are moving.

171

Page Management

5. In the Page Options area, the following settings are available: Maintain Device ID - This checkbox determines whether or not device IDs on the moved pages will be changed automatically to match the new page number. When the checkbox is selected, the device IDs will be left as they are. When the checkbox is not selected, device IDs on the moved page will reflect the new page/line number (assuming this is part of the device tag format you are using). When the checkbox is selected, you can use the drop-down list beside this field to select: Complete - The full device ID including installation and location will be maintained on the new page. Tag Only - Only the device tag will be maintained on the new page, the installation and location portion of the device ID will be changed to match the new page. Maintain Terminal Numbers - This checkbox determines whether or not terminals in the moved page will be renumbered automatically to avoid duplication. If the checkbox is selected, you will be prompted to enter a new ID for each terminal that is duplicated within the same installation. De-select the checkbox to automatically renumber terminals. Set Pages Online - This checkbox determines whether the moved pages will be online or offline. Select the checkbox to make the copied pages online pages. If the pages are offline no error checking or cross referencing will be performed. Change Field Settings - This checkbox determines whether or not field settings of the existing page will be duplicated into the moved page. If the checkbox is selected, you will be prompted with a dialog box to make modifications to the field settings of the moved page. If the checkbox is not selected, existing field settings will be used on the moved page. 6. In the Wire Number Options area of the dialog, you can make the following settings: Maintain Wire Number - This checkbox determines whether or not wire numbers will remain on the moved page. If you do not select the Maintain Wire Number checkbox, wire numbers will be deleted. If you do select the Maintain Wire Number checkbox, wire numbers will not be changed. The Add Prefix and Add Suffix fields allow you to specify a prefix or suffix that will be added to all wire numbers on the moved page.

172

Page Management

Maintain Wire Link IDs - When this checkbox is selected the device ID of wire links will be the same on the moved pages as on the original. If the checkbox is unchecked, the next available number will be assigned to wire link IDs on the copied pages. 7.

Once the settings are made, select the OK button to move the pages.

Rules for Page Move: A page cannot be moved into a position already occupied by another page. This will cause a “Page already exists” error message to appear. A page cannot be moved backward to a page number of less than zero. If this is attempted, a dialog with the message “Page cannot be moved” will appear. The following illustration shows an installation containing five drawing pages, numbered 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6. There is no page 3. Pages 1 and 2 could be moved forward one position (+1) in which case they would become pages 2 and 3, respectively. They could not be moved forward two positions (+2) because this would conflict with the existing page 4. However, they could be moved ahead six positions (+6) where they would become pages 7 and 8. Pages 6

Move Pages 1 and 2:

5 4

+ 1 Allowed + 2 Not Allowed

2 1

+ 6 Allowed - 1 Allowed - 2 Not Allowed

(+ = forward, - = backward)

Pages 1 and 2 could also be moved backward one position (-1) where they would become pages 0 and 1. They could not be moved back any further than this.

173

Page Management

Clear Page The Clear Page function erases all drawing elements from the currently active drawing page. The page becomes blank as if it had just been created. This function therefore should be used with caution.

Warning: This function deletes all current page data completely.

To erase everything from the current drawing page: 1. Go to the Project Manager and select the desired project. 2. Right click on the page you wish to clear and select Clear from the popup menu that appears.

3. The software will display a dialog box asking you to confirm the page clear. Select the OK button to proceed. Select the Cancel button to cancel the clear operation.

174

Page Management

Refresh Page The Manage > Refresh Page function will update the currently open page with any pending changes in the project database. This typically applies to a multi-user environment where another user may have edited a page and saved it while you have the same page open. This creates a pending change. The Refresh Page function will retrieve this change so that it appears on your display.

Update Page Ordinarily, changes made to a drawing page are recorded in the project database so that the software can perform cross referencing, keep track of device IDs and wire numbers, etc. However, if the information on the page becomes out-of-sync with the project database (for example if someone edits the DWG or DGN file outside of promis•e), you will need to update the project database with the new information. To re-sync the information on the currently open page with the project database, select the Manage > Update Page function.

Validate Page Use the Manage > Validate Page function to compare the information on the currently active page with the information in the project database. If the software finds any mismatches it will display a dialog box. Note:

Not all possible mismatches are currently validated, but if you should receive an error it would be a good idea to run either the "Update Page" or "Rebuild Project Database" commands in the Manage menu to attempt to correct the problem.

175

Page Management

Viewing Pages The View menu contains a number of functions that control the user’s view of drawing pages. Among the relevant functions for promis•e are: Redraw – Redraws the current drawing, removing marker blips and display artifacts (stray pixels) left by editing commands. Regen – Regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects. Regen All – Regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects in all viewports. It also re-indexes the drawing database for optimum display and object selection performance. Zoom – There are a number of zoom functions: Real Time Zoom – This option is used for interactive zooming. With this Zoom function, you can zoom in or out of the drawing by holding down the left button of the pointing device and moving the cursor vertically up or down. Press to exit this mode. Zoom Previous – Displays the previous zoom view of the drawing. Zoom Window – Allows the user to enlarge (zoom) the view of a selected area of the drawing. When selected, the software prompts you to select the first corner followed by the opposite corner. This allows you to define a rectangular area on the drawing which will be enlarged to fill the screen. Zoom Dynamic – Allows the user to zoom out as well as in. Selecting the function produces a reduced view of the entire drawing with a square area window. Position the area window and click the left button. The window can now be re-sized as desired by moving the mouse. Click the right button to zoom to the selected area. Zoom Scale – Allows you to zoom at a specified scale factor. When you select this function you will be prompted on the command line to enter a scale factor. Entering a value followed by “x” specifies a scale relative to the current view (“2x” magnifies objects to twice their current size). Entering a value followed by “xp” specifies a scale relative to paper space units (the first view is considered 1xp).

176

Page Management

Zoom Center – Zooms to display a window defined by a center point and a magnification factor or height. When you select the function you will be prompted to specify a center point and then enter a height or magnification factor. Zoom In – Zooms in to the drawing in 2X increments. Zoom Out – Zooms out from the drawing in 0.5X increments. Zoom All – Zooms to the smallest view that includes everything in the drawing. Zoom Extents – Zooms to display the drawing extents. If your mouse has a scroll wheel, turning the wheel will zoom in or out to the point where the cursor is pointing. Pushing on the scroll wheel button twice will zoom to the extents of the drawing. Pan – The following Pan functions are available: Real Time – This option is used for interactive panning. You can pan the drawing image to a new location by holding down the left button of the pointing device and moving the cursor. Press to exit this mode. Point – Moves the view of the drawing by the specified distance. Left – Moves the drawing to the left. Right – Moves the drawing to the right. Up – Moves the drawing up. Down – Moves the drawing down. When you use the Real Time option of Zoom or Pan, you can right-click the pointing device and use the cursor menu to move quickly between zooming and panning. If your mouse has a scroll wheel, pressing and holding the wheel will allow you to pan around the drawing. Aerial View – Aerial View is a navigation tool that displays a view of the drawing in a separate window so that you can quickly move to that area. If you keep the Aerial View window open as you work, you can zoom and pan without selecting a command. In the Mode menu you can choose Pan or Zoom. Pan mode allows you to move a rectangle to the part of the drawing you wish to view. Zoom mode allows you to define a window to move and resize the drawing at the same time. Clean Screen - Hides borders and toolbars, leaving more room for the drawing area. In MicroStation and PowerDraft versions of the software there is a View toolbar with zoom functions including Zoom In, Zoom Out, Fit View and Pan View.

177

Page Management

Navigate Function The Navigate function allows you to go from one place where a particular ID is used to another place in the project where the same ID occurs. You can move quickly from one drawing page to another by clicking on a device ID, a cross reference or a wire link. You can also click on a part number and see detailed information for that part. To activate the Navigate function, select Review/Revise > Navigate. On the command line, you will be prompted to “Select symbol or cross reference text.” Click on the symbol, the device tag or any cross reference text that appears near the symbol. If you select the cross reference at a parent symbol you will jump to a view of the selected child symbol, wherever it exists, on the same or a different page. Similarly, if you select the cross reference at the child symbol you will jump to a view of the parent symbol. The view will zoom in according to the percentage setting made in the View Options dialog (see page 427).

click on device tag click on cross reference click on wire link

When you click on a wire link, the view will shift to the cross-referenced wire link. There is also a third method for activating the navigate function: right click on the desired address and select Navigate from the popup menu. If the selected address is used on more than one type of page, there will be a submenu to select the desired page type.

178

Page Management

If the device tag is used at two or more other places (in the selected drawing type), a dialog will appear listing the other places. Select the desired instance to navigate to and then the OK button.

179

Page Management

Search Tool The search tool allows you to locate items within the project by one or more parameters. You can arrange the dialog to filter and sort the items in your project to reduce the amount of scrolling you must do to locate a given item. To activate the search tool, select Review/Revise > Search. The Search dialog will appear, listing all the items in your project having a device ID.

Suppose you wish to see all the relays (symbol name CR) in location EN1. You can start by dragging the Location column heading into the top of the dialog where it says, “Drag a column header here.” This produces a list of locations in the project.

180

Page Management

At this point if you were to click on the “+” character next to location EN1, you would see a list of all the items in that location.

However, you only wish to see the items using the CR symbol, so to further sort the list you can drag the Symbol column heading into the upper area. This produces a list within EN1 that is sorted by symbol.

181

Page Management

If you click on the “+” character beside the CR symbol name, you will see the list of items using this symbol.

If you double-click on one of the items you will navigate to where that item is used. Using this method, you can drag multiple column headings to create a “tree” that sorts your project in any way that you wish. To clear the current search criteria, right click in the upper part of the dialog and select Clear Grouping from the pop-up menu. There is a Wire Number tab in the Search tool that allows you to do similar sorting of wire numbers.

182

Page Management

Page Format Designer The Page Format Designer function allows you to create new drawing page formats or modify existing formats. You can also extract page formats from project files that you receive from someone else. To use the Page Format Designer: 1. Select Configure > Page Format Designer. The Page Format Designer dialog will appear.

Auto Hide button Note:

The Page Format Designer dialog consists of step buttons on the left and a settings area on the right. There is an Auto Hide button in the lower left corner of the dialog that sets whether or not the settings area will be hidden if you move the cursor back to the drawing area (so it is not in the way). If auto hide is turned on, you can click on the desired step button to display the setting area again. You have three options in this step: • Create a new page format from scratch - select the New Page Format

radio button. • Edit a page format that already exists - select the Modify Existing Page Format radio button.

183

Page Management • Extract a page format from a project - select the Extract Page Format

From Project button. If you select the Extract Page Format From Project button, the Extract Page Format dialog will appear.

A. Select the desired project in the Project field. The page formats in that project will then be listed. B. Select the page format you wish to extract. You can give the format a different name in the Save as field, if desired. C. Select OK to extract the page format and save it in your page format folder. Select the Next button to continue to the next step of the page format designer.

184

Page Management

2. In this step you set the dimensions and orientation of the page format.

A. In the Page Size area of the dialog, define the page size. You can either select the Predefined radio button and select one of the existing ANSI or IEC page sizes or you can select the Custom radio button, select metric or inch units and enter values in the Width and Height fields. B. In the Page Layout area of the dialog, select either the Portrait or Landscape radio buttons to set the orientation of the page. C. In the Select Title Block field, use the browse button to select one of the existing title block macros to use as a reference. This title block appears on the screen while you are creating the page format but is not stored with it (you can select a different title block when using the format to create drawing pages). D. Select one of the Line Number Orientation radio buttons to set whether line numbers will appear going down the page (Vertical) or across the page (Horizontal). The Zone Number Orientation setting will be automatically set to the opposite of the line number orientation. Select the Next button to continue to the next step.

185

Page Management

3. In this step you can define the line number regions. A line number region is the area of a page assigned to an individual line number. (At this point a representation of the page format will appear in the drawing area.)

01

Line number regions

02

03 04 05

06

Line number text position

186

Page Management

The Measuring Tools area of the dialog is a utility that helps you to calculate the region size you will enter in the lower part of the dialog. To use this function: A. First, select the Measure Distance button. You will be taken to the drawing area where you can click on a first point and a second point to define where the first and last line numbers will appear. The distance between the two points that you selected will be entered automatically in the field beside the Measure Distance button. B. Then, enter a value in either the # of Regions field or the Region Size field. For example, if you wish the line numbers to be 0.5 inches apart, enter 0.5 in the Region Size field. C. Select the Calculate button. The software will calculate and enter an appropriate value in either the # of Regions field or the Region Size field, whichever one was previously empty. Note:

The values you calculate in the Measuring Tools area are not used automatically - they are only intended to help you determine what settings to use when drawing the region. In Line Numbers area of the dialog, you make the actual settings that will be used in your page format. If you wish the page number to appear on a separate line, select the Page and Line Number on Two Lines checkbox. (To determine whether or not a page number is included with the line number, use the Include Page Number as a Line Number Prefix checkbox in the Default Page Properties dialog. See page 71). In the Enter (First) Line Number field, enter a value for the line number of the region you are drawing. If you are using the array function (see below) enter the first line number. Use the Text Settings button to make text settings for the line numbers. The Edit Text Format dialog will appear. This dialog is similar to the Edit Text Style dialog (see page 99). One important difference is the Text Align field which allows you to set in which direction the data will be placed from the variable’s insertion point. Select OK when the desired settings are made. Use the Region Size part of the dialog to draw each line number region: A. Select your drawing method: you can either define an area on the screen (select the Specify on Screen checkbox) or enter X and Y values in the appropriate fields to set the size of the region. B. Select the Draw Line Number Region button. You will be taken to the drawing area where you will either define a box for the region or place the box that was defined by the X and Y values.

187

Page Management

C. After drawing or placing the region you will be prompted on the command line to “pick the line number text position.” Click on the desired position for the line number. The line number must be placed inside the boundary of the region. D. To return to the Page Format Designer after you draw a region you can press the or keys or click the right mouse button. Line number regions appear in the drawing area as green boxes. Note:

While drawing the regions, you will probably need to use a smaller grid so that the region borders can fall between your default drawing grid spacing.

01 02 03

Default drawing grid spacing Region border

To delete a region you have placed, click on the region so that it has a dotted border and then press the key. You can copy regions that you have placed using the standard copy function. You will have to edit the number text of the copy so that it is different from the original. If you wish to draw a series of regions in one step: A. Select the Array Region checkbox. B. Enter a value for the first line number in the Enter (First) Line Number field. C. Select the Draw Line Number Region button. D. Draw or place the first region and select the text position for that region. E. You will then be prompted to “pick the last position of the array region.” Click at the point where you wish the last region to end. The software will draw as many regions as it can fit between the first region and the selected point. Select the Next button to continue to the next step.

188

Page Management

4. In this step you can define zone regions. A zone region is the area of a page assigned to an individual zone.

Zone number text position A

B

C

D

E

F

Zone regions

The Measuring Tools area of the dialog is a utility that helps you to calculate the region size you will enter in the lower part of the dialog. To use this function: A. First, select the Measure Distance button. You will be taken to the drawing 189

Page Management

area where you can click on a first point and a second point to define area of the drawing that will be occupied by zones. The distance between the two points that you selected will be entered automatically in the field beside the Measure Distance button. B. Then, enter a value in either the # of Regions field or the Region Size field. C. Select the Calculate button. The software will calculate and enter an appropriate value in either the # of Regions field or the Region Size field, whichever one was previously empty. Note:

The values you calculate in the Measuring Tools area are not used automatically - they are only intended to help you determine what settings to use when drawing the region. In Zone Numbers area of the dialog, you make the actual settings that will be used in your page format. In the Enter (First) Zone Number field, enter a number for the zone that you are drawing. If you are using the array function (see below) enter the first zone number. Use the Text Settings button to make text settings for the zone numbers. The Edit Text Format dialog will appear. This dialog is similar to the Edit Text Style dialog (see page 99). One important difference is the Text Align field which allows you to set in which direction the data will be placed from the variable’s insertion point. Select OK when the desired settings are made. Use the Region Size part of the dialog to draw each zone region: A. Select your drawing method: you can either define an area on the screen (select the Specify on Screen checkbox) or enter X and Y values in the appropriate fields to set the size of the region. B. Select the Draw Zone Region button. You will be taken to the drawing area where you will either define a box for the region or place the box that was defined by the X and Y values. C. After drawing or placing the region you will be prompted on the command line to “pick the text position.” Click on the desired position for the zone number. The zone number must be placed inside the boundary of the region. D. To return to the Page Format Designer after you draw a region you can press the or keys or click the right mouse button. Zone regions appear in the drawing area as yellow boxes. To delete a region you have placed, click on the region so that it has a dotted border and then press the key.

190

Page Management

You can copy regions that you have placed using the standard copy function. You will have to edit the number text of the copy so that it is different from the original. Note:

While drawing the regions, you may need to use a smaller grid so that the region borders can fall between your default drawing grid spacing. If you wish to draw a series of regions in one step: A. Select the Array Region checkbox. B. Enter a value (number) for the first zone in the Enter (First) Zone Number field. C. Select the Draw Zone Region button. D. Draw or place the first region and select the text position for that region. E. You will then be prompted to “pick the last position of the array region.” Click at the point where you wish the last region to end. The software will draw as many regions as it can fit between the first region and the selected point. Select the Next button to continue to the next step. 5. In this step you let the software check your format for possible problems.

191

Page Management

Select the Validate button. If no problems are encountered, the following message will be displayed.

If errors are encountered, you can click on the error and the software will navigate to and display the problem area. The software checks for the following conditions: • Overlapping line number regions. The software cannot function properly

if this condition exists. • Overlapping zone number regions. The software cannot function properly • • •

•

•

•

192

if this condition exists. Gaps between line number regions. (The software may not properly calculate the correct line number of a device placed in such a gap.) Gaps between zone regions. (The software may not properly calculate the correct zone number of a device placed in such a gap.) Line number region without a line number text. Each line number region must have at least one line number text within its boundary. The software cannot function properly if this condition exists. (There can be more than one line number text within a region but these texts must have the same value.) Zone number region without a zone number text. Every zone region must have at least one zone number text within its boundary. The software cannot function properly if this condition exists. (There can be more than one zone number text within a region but these texts must have the same value.) Line numbers and zone numbers outside of a region. The software cannot function properly if this condition exists. Each line or zone number must exist within the boundaries of a region. Duplicated line or zone numbers in different regions. (This may or may not be a problem since you may intend to do this in certain page formats.)

Page Management • Staggered line number regions - a line number region that spans across

two other line number regions. The software cannot function properly if this condition exists.

01 02

03

• Staggered zone regions - a zone region that spans across two other zone Note:

regions. The software cannot function properly if this condition exists. You can still proceed to the next step and save the format without correcting these conditions, but some of the conditions may prevent the format from working correctly or cause an error message when you attempt to use it. Select the Next button to continue to the next step. 6. In this step you save the completed page format.

Enter a name for the format in the Format Name field. Enter a description for the format in the Description field. Select the Finish button to save the format in your promis•e PageFormat folder.

193

Page Management

194

Using Drawing Elements

5

Using Drawing Elements This section covers using various drawing elements (wires, symbols, macros, texts, etc.) to make a drawing. Included are sections on the various types of elements as well as sections on placing, deleting, copying, and moving the schematic elements. See Section 6 for information on how to create custom drawing elements.

Overview Before you can begin to create a schematic drawing, you must first: 1. Create a project. See page 61. 2. Create a drawing page within the project. See page 157. 3. Open the drawing page. See page 155. Once you open a page, you create the drawing in the drawing area. Toolbars

Drawing area

195

Using Drawing Elements

Most of the drawing functions can be found in the Design function group (for inserting symbols, macros and fields) and the Wiring sub-group (for placing wires and wire numbers). See page 29 for descriptions of the menus.

Drawing Modes A drawing mode is a state that the software is in that enables the user to create a particular type of drawing such as a schematic or a panel layout. The drawing mode will determine both the appearance and the behavior of the software. By changing the drawing mode as you work on a drawing it is possible to have more than one type of drawing on the same page. Schematic Drawing - A schematic drawing is a logical diagram that shows how individual devices are connected together. Panel Layout Drawing - A panel layout drawing is a physical layout of the actual devices. This drawing is used to show what the devices really look like and where they will actually be mounted. This drawing is typically drawn to scale. Wiring Diagram - A wiring diagram is a drawing that shows each device and identifies all the wire connections that are necessary to properly wire the devices. Hydraulic Drawing - A hydraulic drawing is used to show electrical and mechanical hydraulic devices and how they are connected together with pipes, etc. Pneumatic Drawing - A pneumatic drawing is used to show electrical and mechanical pneumatic devices and how they are connected together with tubes, etc. Single Line Drawing - A single line drawing is similar to a schematic in that it shows how individual devices are logically connected together, however, it does not show each and every individual wire connection. Instead of showing each conductor of a cable and what each conductor is connected to, you simply draw one line between the two devices, which represents all the conductors. Graphical Plan - A graphical representation of a terminal strip showing connections.

196

Using Drawing Elements

You select the current drawing mode from the drop-down list in the lower right corner of the drawing window (AutoCAD version) or in the Page Management toolbar (MicroStation version). MicroStation version

Select drawing mode

AutoCAD version

You can designate a mode as “primary” which means an ID assigned in that mode will replace a different ID assigned to the same device in another mode. The primary mode is defined in the project options Drawing Standards dialog (see page 86). You can use the Mode Manager to edit the characteristics of existing modes and create new modes. See page 299.

Lines vs. Wires promis•e schematic drawings can have two types of lines: wires and drawing lines. Wires - Wires are lines that have logical properties. (Wires are sometimes referred to as “logical lines.”) Wires must be used to connect the symbols in schematic drawings. Wires will break automatically at symbol connection points. Wires allow the software to recognize the connections between symbols and perform other functions such as automatic wire numbering. Drawing Lines - Drawing lines are simple graphic lines with no logical properties. They should only be used for borders or for drawing the graphical portion when you create a new symbol. They should not be used to represent wires. To create drawing lines: (AutoCAD version) Use the line drawing functions such as those in the Draw menu or the Draw toolbar. (MicroStation version) Use the functions in the Tools > Main > Linear Elements menu. To create wires, use the functions in the Design > Wiring menu.

197

Using Drawing Elements

Wires Use the Design > Wiring menu function to draw wires, pipes or other elements that connect the symbols on a drawing. Wires are necessary for promis•e to recognize the from/to connections between the symbols. When wires are drawn over symbols (or when symbols are placed on a wire), the line is broken automatically at the symbol connection points. When two wires are connected, the connection points are drawn automatically. Important: You must draw wires using the Wire functions in order for the software to recognize

connections and perform other automatic functions. Drawing lines will not work for this purpose.

Design > Wiring >Wire (Continuous) Wire (Center) Wire (Dashed) 3 Phase Wire Multiwire Polywire Multi-polywire Draw Ladder Wire 90 Degree Up Wire 90 Degree Down

198

Using Drawing Elements

The following wire drawing functions are available: The Wire (Continuous) function is used when you wish to create single wire segments or two or more connected wire segments. The Wire (Center) and Wire (Dashed) functions create dash-dot and dashed wires, respectively. The 3 Phase Wire function allows automatic drawing of three parallel wires. With the 90 Degree Down and 90 Degree Up functions, you can connect two points with wire segments at a 90 degree angle in one step. The angle is either above or below the vertical wire. The Multiwire function allows multiple parallel wires to be drawn in a single step. Multiwires can have various combinations of solid, dashed and dotted lines in various colors. These are called multiline styles. You can select and customize multiline styles using the Format > Multiline Style function. Polywires can overlap without joining together the way that standard wires do. This is useful when you have draw multiple wires in a tight space on the drawing. You cannot place symbols on an existing polywire (only at the ends). You cannot connect a regular wire to a polywire.

Polywires

199

Using Drawing Elements

Multi-polywires are multiple polywires that are drawn in a single operation by defining offset values after the first polywire is defined. To draw a multi-polywire: 1. Select Design > Wiring > Multi-polywire. 2. Following the prompts on the command line to “Select next point,” define a polywire on the drawing. This will include the top line segments on both sides of the polywire. When you have completed this part of the polywire press or click the right mouse button.

3. You will be prompted define the “Offset to first line segment.” Click on a point below the top line segment on the left side to define the spacing between line segments on the left side. 4. You will be prompted define the “Offset to last line segment.” Click on a point below the top line segment on the right side to define the spacing between line segments on the right side. In other words, you can have different line spacing on the left and right sides of the multi-polywire.

200

Using Drawing Elements

5. You will be prompted to “Mark position of last line.” On the left side, click on a point just below where you want the last line segment to begin. The software will draw as many line segments on the left as it can, based on the spacing and the last line position you selected. It will draw an equal number of line segments on the right.

1. Beginning of first polywire 3. Offset to first line segment

5. Mark position of last line

2. End of first polywire

4. Offset to last line segment

To Draw a Single Wire: Select the Design > Wiring > (Wire) Continuous function. 1. Locate the starting point of the wire by clicking the left mouse button. 2. Locate the end point by clicking the left mouse button.

201

Using Drawing Elements

3. Click the right mouse button to complete the wire. Click On Start And End Points 117

PB118.1

PB118

CR118

118 119

Connection Points (Drawn Automatically)

Symbol Connection Points (Wire Broken Automatically)

ANSI-IEEE Single Wires Click On Start Point 21 13 -K1 /.6

-S5 22

14

21

21 -S6

-S4 22

22

3 -H4

-K1 4

13 21

Click On End Point

14 22

/.4

IEC Single Wires

Adjusting Wire Length – You can extend an existing parallel wire by drawing another wire and connecting it to the first. The system will treat the two wires as a single wire. You can also adjust wire length by stretching the wire’s endpoint. (In the AutoCAD version use the Modify > Stretch function. In the MicroStation version, select the wire and drag the handle on its endpoint.) Note: 202

If a wire is drawn over one or more symbols, the wire will automatically break between symbols.

Using Drawing Elements

Wire/Line Coordinates Display – While wires and lines are being drawn, x-y coordinates of the line endpoint are displayed on the status line below the drawing area. Wire Line Style - In addition to the Wire (Continuous) function that produces a solid line, the Wiring menu and toolbar also include the Wire (Center) and Wire (Dashed) functions that produce a long/short dash pattern and an even dash pattern, respectively. If you wish to change the line style of an existing wire, right-click on the wire and select Line Settings from the popup menu. The dialog that appears has a Line Style field for selecting a different style.

To Draw Continuous Wires or Lines: The (Wire) Continuous function allows you to draw multiple, connected wire segments. Select the Design > Wiring > Wire (Continuous) function. 1. Locate starting point of the first wire by clicking the left mouse button. 2. Click on end point of first wire with the left mouse button. 3. Create second and all subsequent lines by clicking on the destination point of each wire segment with the left mouse button. 4. Complete the last segment by clicking the right mouse button (or pressing the key). Step 1

First Segment

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

203

Using Drawing Elements

To Draw 3-Phase Wires: Use the 3 Phase wire function to automatically draw 3 parallel wires spaced one grid unit apart. 3-phase wires are used for power circuit diagrams. Select the Design > Wiring > 3 Phase Wire function. 1. Locate starting point of wires by clicking left mouse button. 2. Click the left mouse button again on the desired end point. 101 Wire Starting Point

102 T1

103

T2

104

M

T3

105 Wire End Point

M1

106 107 Wire Starting Point 101

Wire End Point

102

T1

103

T2

104 3-Phase Connections (Drawn Automatically)

T3

105 106 ANSI-IEEE 3-Phase Wires

204

M1

M

Using Drawing Elements

Wire Starting Point

Wire End Point

3-Phase Connections (Drawn Automatically)

Wire End Point

Wire Starting Point U

-M1

V

W

PE

U

M 3~

-M1

PUMP

V

W

PE

M 3~

PUMP

5 HP

5 HP

7.2 AMP

7.2 AMP

1000 RPM

1000 RPM

IEC 3-Phase Wires Important:

The software automatically connects two intersecting sets of 3 phase wires. However, you must draw the second set of wires into the first set. See the above examples.

205

Using Drawing Elements

To Draw Wires Using 90 Degree Up / Down: Use the Design > Wiring > Wire 90 Degree Up and Wire 90 Degree Down options to draw right angles automatically. This allows a pair of wires to be drawn in one operation. See examples below for procedure. “90 Degree Up” means the angle is above the diagonal. “90 Degree Down” places the angle below the diagonal. Wire 90 Degree Up Example: 3) Angle Drawn Automatically

1) Click On Start Point 2) Click On End Point

Wire 90 Degree Down Example: 1) Click On Start Point

2) Click On End Point 3) Angle Drawn Automatically

Wire Connector Type When two wires intersect, the software will automatically create a connection point. This can be either a circular connection point (node) or a diagonal connection. Diagonal Connector

Node Connector

To set the default wire connector type, use the Wire Options mode in the Project Manager. See page 105. To select between the circular and diagonal wire connection as you work on a drawing, you can use the Design > Wiring > Wire Connector Type menu function to toggle the software between the node and diagonal connector type.

206

Using Drawing Elements

When the diagonal wire connection is selected and intersecting wires are drawn, the following dialog box will appear.

The buttons in this dialog allow you to select the orientation of the diagonal connection. Select the desired orientation and then the OK button. If you wish to override the diagonal connection and use a circular connection, select the Connection Node button followed by OK.

Draw Ladder The Draw Ladder function allows you to create ladder wires quickly. Note:

For ANSI-IEEE drawings the “rung” wires will be drawn horizontally. For IEC format drawings, these wires will be drawn vertically. To use the Draw Ladder Tool: 1. Select the Design > Wiring > Draw Ladder function. 2. On the command line, the software will prompt you to “Select Ladder Top-Left Point.” Click on the point that will be the top of the left-hand vertical wire (ANSI) or the left end of the top horizontal wire (IEC). 3. The software will prompt you to “Select Ladder Bottom-Right Point.” Click on the point that will be the bottom of the right-hand vertical wire (ANSI) or the right end of the bottom horizontal wire (IEC). A box will appear on the screen to indicate the area that will hold the wires.

207

Using Drawing Elements

4. The software will prompt you for “Space between ladder rungs .” This is the space between the rung wires. The default value is 1 inch (ANSI) or 5 mm. (IEC). Enter a different value if desired. Then either right click or press the key. The wires then will be drawn automatically.

Select top left point

Select bottom right point

Enter value for rung spacing

Wire Stretch To stretch a wire or group of wires, use the following procedure: AutoCAD version 1. Select Modify > Stretch. 2. As prompted on the command line select the wire or group of wires you wish to stretch. 3. Select a base point, such as the existing wire end that you wish to extend. 4. Select a second point of displacement to define the new endpoint of the wire(s).

208

Using Drawing Elements

MicroStation version To stretch a single wire, click on the wire so that handles appear. Drag one of the handles to stretch the wire. To stretch multiple wires: 1. Select the Stretch button in the Extend Tools tool box. 2. You will be prompted to “Place fence.” Click on two points to define the opposite corners of the fenced area. This area should include the endpoints of the wires. 3. You will be prompted to “Define origin.” Click on a reference point, usually one of the wire endpoints. 4. You will be prompted to “Define distance.” Click on another point to define the distance that the wire should be stretched. The wires will be extended by this amount.

209

Using Drawing Elements

Edit Wire If you wish to modify an existing wire or wires, you use two methods: To edit multiple wires, select the Design > Wiring > Edit Wires function. Select the desired wires in the drawing and then right click or press . To edit a single wire, right click on the desired wire. In both cases, the following popup menu will appear.

Edit Wire Number - Select a wire and edit the wire number and related properties. Same as the Manual Wire Number function (see page 286). Delete Wire Number - Remove the wire number assigned to the selected wire. Show Wire Number - Display or hide the wire number on the selected wire. Duplicate - If a wire has multiple branches you can make the assigned wire number label appear on a branch by right clicking on the branch and selecting this menu item. Copy - You can copy a wire segment by right-clicking on the segment and selecting this menu item. You will be prompted on the command line to select a base point and a new reference point for the copied wire segment. Delete - You can delete a wire segment by right-clicking on the segment and selecting this menu item. Move - You can move a wire segment by right-clicking on the segment and selecting this menu item. You will be prompted on the command line to select a base point and a new reference point for the moved wire segment.

210

Using Drawing Elements

Line Settings - If you wish to change the line style of an existing wire, right-click on the wire and select this menu item. The dialog that appears has a Line Style field for selecting a different style. You can also change the color of the wire and whether the line is a logical line (wire) or a drawing line.

Force Connection - If you wish to override the default algorithm that determines the order of connections on a wire, you can right-click on the wire and select this menu item. The Force Connections dialog will appear, listing all the devices connected on the wire. The devices are listed in the default connection order that will be used on connection lists, etc.

To force a connection between two items, hold down the key and select the two devices so that they are highlighted. Then select the Force Connect button. The order of items will be changed and the new connection will be marked by a line in the leftmost column.

211

Using Drawing Elements

Edit Wire Properties If you wish to edit the properties of a wire you can right click on the wire and select Edit Wire Number from the popup menu. The Edit Wire Number dialog will appear.

You can change various wire property values in the fields of this dialog. For descriptions of these fields see page 286. If you wish to edit the properties of more than one wire at the same time, select the Design > Wiring > Edit Wires function.

212

Using Drawing Elements

Wire Layers Wires can be drawn on different layers allowing different types of wires (power, signal, etc.) to be drawn on separate layers. A different set of properties (color, gauge, etc.) can be assigned to each layer. This allows each type of wires to automatically receive the correct properties. You configure these wire layers in the Wire Options dialog under Project Options (see page 105). When working on a drawing, you can select the layer on which your wires will be drawn: 1. Select the Design > Wiring > Select Wire Layer function. The Select Wire Layer dialog will appear.

2. Select the desired wire layer. 3. Select the OK button to make the selected layer current. Any wires you draw will now be placed on the selected layer.

213

Using Drawing Elements

Insert Symbol To place a symbol in a drawing, use the Design > Insert Symbol functions. There are three insert symbol functions: By Name, By Part Number and By Device ID.

Design> Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Name > Insert Symbol By Part No. > Insert Symbol By Device ID

214

Using Drawing Elements

Insert Symbol by Name To insert a symbol by name: 1. Select Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Name. The Insert Symbol(s) dialog will appear (with the By Name mode selected).

2. If you know the name of the symbol that you wish to place in the drawing, you can enter it in the Name field. As you enter the name of the symbol, any existing symbols that match the entered characters will be listed in the Database area of the dialog. The symbols listed in the Database area come from any symbol libraries that are included in the catalog path. (Use the Configure > Setup function to define the catalog path. See page 407.) If you empty the Name field, all symbols in the catalog path will be listed in the Database area.

215

Using Drawing Elements Note:

If you select the Display project catalog checkbox you will list the symbols that are stored with the project. In addition to entering the symbol name, you can search for a symbol by entering part of its description in the Description field and selecting the Search button. Any symbols with descriptions that contain the search term will be displayed. 3. Click on the name of the desired symbol to select it. A thumbnail view of the symbol will appear in the Preview area of the dialog. 4. To place the selected symbol in the drawing, click on the Place Symbol(s) button (or double-click the symbol name). The symbol will appear at the cursor. Position the symbol by pointing the cursor at the desired location and pressing the left mouse button. The symbol is then placed in the diagram. The insertion point of the symbol will snap to the nearest grid point. If the symbol is placed on a wire, the wire will break automatically at the symbol connection points. If a symbol is placed first and a wire is drawn over the symbol, the wire will also break automatically. The symbol will be rotated automatically to match the horizontal or vertical alignment of a wire. (For this to occur, symbol rotation must be set to 0 degrees and the symbol insertion point must be on the wire. Also, the Auto Rotate checkbox must be turned on in symbol settings, see page 228. Certain 3-phase symbols will not be rotated automatically.)

Note:

No more than one wire should be connected to a single symbol connection point. PB118

Wrong

PB118

Right

Once the symbol is placed, the Device Properties dialog will appear, allowing a device ID, part number and other items to be assigned. See page 221. Note:

216

You can also right-click on any symbol in a drawing and select Place Symbol Again from the pop-up menu to place the same symbol again.

Using Drawing Elements

Insert Symbol by Part Number Rather than selecting a symbol, you may wish to select a part number and let the software select a symbol to represent it in the drawing. To insert a symbol by part number: 1. Select Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Part Number. The Insert Symbol(s) dialog will appear (with the By Part Number mode selected).

The dialog has two areas: Parts Database and Selected Item(s). The Parts Database area lists the items in the parts database. You can sort the list of parts in the Parts Database area by clicking on one of the column headings. The first click will sort in alpha-numeric order, the second click in reverse alpha-numeric order. There is also a drop-down list in each column heading that allows you to filter entries or select from values that exist in that column.

217

Using Drawing Elements

The Selected Item(s) area lists information about the symbol or symbols that are associated with the part number that is currently selected. This includes the symbol name, connection point designations (if any) and symbol description. If the selected part number represents a device family, there may be more than one symbol listed in the Selected Item(s) area. 2. Select a part number to place in the drawing (as a symbol) by selecting (highlighting) it in the Parts Database area. If more than one symbol is associated with the part number (i.e., a device family), they will be listed in the Selected Item(s) area. For example, in the previous figure, you could select either the CRS symbol or the CRNO symbol to represent the part. The default selection will be the parent symbol. If you wish to place a child symbol, select it rather than the parent symbol. 3. To place the selected symbol in the drawing, click on the Place Symbol(s) button or double-click the entry. The symbol will appear at the cursor position. Position the symbol by pointing the cursor at the desired location and pressing the left mouse button. The symbol is then placed in the diagram. The insertion point of the symbol will snap to the nearest grid point. Once the symbol is placed, the Device Properties dialog will appear, allowing a device ID, part number and other items to be assigned. See page 221.

218

Using Drawing Elements

Insert Symbol By Device ID Rather than selecting a symbol, you may wish to place a symbol with the same device ID as an existing symbol in the drawing. In schematic drawing mode, this applies only when placing a parent or child symbol from a device family (because these symbols are allowed to have the same device ID). To insert a symbol by device ID: 1. Select Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device ID. The Insert Symbol(s) dialog will appear (with the By Device ID mode selected). Select device ID here

Available symbols listed here

219

Using Drawing Elements

This dialog lists existing device IDs in your drawings that belong to a device family. When you select a device ID in the upper area of the dialog, the symbols of the device family will be listed in the lower area of the dialog. Symbols that are already placed are marked with an “X” in the left column. The Filter Devices fields on the left side of the dialog allow you to filter the list of displayed device IDs. By selecting the appropriate radio button you can restrict the filter to Terminal/Plugs or Devices (non-terminals/plugs). Select or enter any combination of Installation, Location, Tag, Part Number and Function Text and then select the Search button. Any device IDs that match all the entries will be listed. Partial entries can be made in the fields unless the Whole Word checkbox is selected. If the Ignore Case checkbox is selected, the case of entered letters will not be taken into account. There is also a group of checkboxes labeled Show Devices that, when selected, will list IDs that meet the following criteria: Parts Allocated in Primary Drawing Mode - Selecting this checkbox will display all the device IDs that had part numbers assigned in the primary drawing mode. This checkbox will be selected but unavailable if you are currently in the primary drawing mode. Parts Allocated in Non-Primary Drawing Mode - Selecting this checkbox will display all the device IDs that had part numbers assigned in a drawing mode other than the primary drawing mode. Parts Allocated in BOM Explorer - Selecting this checkbox will display all the device IDs that had part numbers assigned in the BOM Explorer function (see page 142). In the Display area of the dialog, the following checkboxes are available: Show Placed Devices in Current Drawing Mode - When this checkbox is selected, the IDs of any placed devices will remain in the list in the upper part of the dialog rather than being removed from the list as they are placed. Placed IDs will be marked with an “X.” Show Only Devices with Assigned Part Numbers - When this checkbox is selected, only devices with part numbers assigned will be listed. To place one of the symbols, select it from the list at the bottom of the dialog and then select the Place Symbol(s) button. The symbol will appear at the cursor position in the drawing. You can then click the mouse button to place the symbol.

220

Using Drawing Elements

Device ID Assignment Once the symbol is placed, the Device Properties dialog box appears. The software automatically prompts the next available device ID based on the format that is defined for the current project (see page 75). You can accept the prompted device tag or you can type a different ID in the fields provided.

The drop-down list beside the Device Tag field will show the six most recently assigned device tags in the current project. Use the Select Device ID button to assign the device ID by clicking on an existing symbol in the drawing that has the desired ID. This usually applies when placing a parent or child symbol (because these symbols have the same device ID). To use this method, place the symbol as usual. When the Device Properties dialog box appears, select the Select Device ID button. The dialog box will then close and you can click on the existing symbol in the drawing to use its device ID (the symbols must be on the same page). Use the Search button to list device IDs in the project that have the same symbol tag mnemonic (CR or K for relay, PB for pushbutton, etc.). This is useful when assigning parent and child symbols (auxiliary contacts). When you place a terminal or plug symbol, the Terminal No. field displays the terminal block number of the terminal within the terminal strip (or pin number within a plug). You can change this number if desired.

221

Using Drawing Elements

Use the Family field to assign the symbol to a device family. See page 229. Select the browse button to select from a list of available families.

Note:

If you assign a part number to a symbol and there is a device family associated with that part number, that family will be assigned automatically. When you select a family, the Device Usage Chart dialog appears, showing you which item in the family will be associated with the symbol you are placing. The software disables selections that are invalid for the symbol you are currently placing or are unavailable because they have already been placed or used.

222

Using Drawing Elements

The Device Usage Chart link in the Device Properties dialog also displays the Device Usage Chart dialog, showing you where all the symbols matching the prompted device ID are used throughout the project. The CP Text field displays the default connection point designations for the symbol’s connection points. You can enter new values if the symbol is not part of a family. To assign a part number to the symbol, select the Search button above the Part Number field. The Select Part Number dialog will appear. For more information, see page 294. Alternatively, if you know the part number you can select the Add button and manually enter the part number. If you wish the device ID to be hidden on the screen and on plots of the drawing, select the Suppress Device ID checkbox. The device ID will still be assigned to the symbol; it will simply not be shown. Duplicate Device IDs - The software’s error checking detects duplicate IDs. If you attempt to assign an ID that has already been used, the software will prompt that the ID already exists and ask if you wish to duplicate it.

If you answer Yes, the symbol will be placed with the duplicate ID and cross referencing will appear at both symbols indicating the page and line number where the other symbol appears. If you place more than two symbols with the same ID using this method, there will be additional cross references appearing at each symbol. If you wish to avoid duplicate part numbers, you should only assign a part number to one of the symbols. If you answer No to the prompt, the symbol placement will be cancelled. The Multiple Placement checkbox applies only when placing a series of similar symbols (allows automatic placement on consecutive lines). See page 227. The Duplicate Device ID checkbox is only active when using the multiple placement function. The Symbol Settings area of the dialog displays the symbol name and description of the symbol being placed. Select the Settings link to make various settings that affect how the symbol will appear on the page. See page 228. When you have made the desired entries and settings, select the OK button in the Device Properties dialog to complete the placement of the symbol.

223

Using Drawing Elements

Device BOM Assign If you created a device ID in the BOM Explorer that is not associated with an existing symbol (see page 145), you can use the Device BOM Assign function to assign that device to an existing symbol. Use the following procedure: 1. Right click on an existing symbol in a drawing. 2. Select Device BOM Assign from the pop-up menu. 3. The Device BOM Assign dialog will appear.

This dialog lists device IDs created in the BOM Explorer that are unassigned to symbols. You can filter this list by selecting a parameter (such as Installation or Device Tag) in the Filter drop-down list, entering a filter value in the Like field, and then selecting the Apply button. Use the Save button to save this filter. Use the Clear button to remove an existing filter. 4. Select the item from the list that you wish to assign to the existing symbol. 5. If you want to keep the device ID that the symbol already has, select the Drawing Device ID radio button. (The selected item will still be removed from the pick list because it will be “placed” on the current symbol.) 6. If you want the symbol to receive the device ID from the list in the dialog, select the BOM Explorer ID radio button. 7. If the selected item in the list has attributes assigned, they will be shown in the lower part of the dialog. If you wish this attribute value to be assigned to the existing symbol, select the Replace checkbox. 8. Select OK to assign the selected item to the symbol in the drawing. Select Cancel if you do not wish to make an assignment. 224

Using Drawing Elements

Symbol Text Some symbols will prompt you to enter symbol text after you enter the device ID. These are various text attributes that were defined when the symbol was created.

You can enter values for the texts in the Value column. Select the Visible checkbox to display the value in the drawing, or de-select it to hide the text.

225

Using Drawing Elements

I/O Text Definition When you place a PLC parent symbol, the I/O Text Definition dialog will appear. This dialog box allows you to set rack and module numbers, the address numbers and function text for each point on the module.

1. Enter the Rack and Module/Slot numbers in the appropriate fields. 2. In the Address fields, it is only necessary to enter an address in the first field. Press to automatically assign the other addresses (you must have the Automatic Addressing checkbox selected under project Options in the PLC dialog - see page 88). The remaining addresses will be filled in automatically, continuing from the first. The separator character used in word/bit addresses is also specified in the project Options PLC dialog in the Input or Output Card Format fields. 3. In each Function Text field you can enter descriptive text. 4. If you select the Import I/O Text button, entries for the Function Text fields will be taken from an external file. This filename is specified in the PLC Import File fields of the project Options PLC dialog. 226

Using Drawing Elements

5. Select the OK button. The module symbol should appear on the drawing with the appropriate Rack and Module numbers, addresses, and function texts.

Multiple Placement When the Multiple Placement checkbox in the Device Properties dialog box is enabled you can automatically place symbols on parallel wires. To place multiple symbols use the following steps: 1. Select a symbol (such as TB) using one of the insert symbol functions (see page 214). 2. Place the symbol on the first wire of the range of wires to be included. 3. The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear. Enter the desired device ID in the Device Tag field. 4. Select the Multiple Placement checkbox. 5. Select the OK button to continue. The symbol will appear on the wire. 6. Select a position on the last wire in the range of wires by pointing the cursor and left-clicking the mouse. If terminal symbols are being placed, consecutively numbered terminals will appear on all wires between the first and last selected wires. Device IDs are assigned automatically based on the defined format. -TB4

1

Place first symbol here

2 3

Click on last wire Terminals 2 and 3 are placed and numbered automatically

If you wish all of the symbols that you are placing to have the same device ID, select the Duplicate Device ID checkbox at the same time that you select the Multiple Placement checkbox.

227

Using Drawing Elements

Symbol Settings Select the Settings link in the Device Properties dialog to display the Symbol Settings dialog. Here you can make various settings that govern how the symbol appears on the drawing. In general, these settings remain in effect until a different setting is made.

Select rotation and scaling values in the Scale and Rotate fields either by selecting a value from the drop-down list or entering a value. Rotate values allow rotation of the symbol in degrees. When the Auto Rotate checkbox is selected, the symbol will automatically orient itself so that the connection points fall on the wire on which the symbol is placed. The Scale values allow the symbol to be reduced (0.500) or enlarged (2.000). Use the Mirror drop-down list to flip the symbol on the X or Y axis. Select No Mirror for no mirroring (normal orientation).

No Mirroring

X Axis Mirroring

Select the OK button to make the symbol settings active.

228

Y Axis Mirroring

Using Drawing Elements

Device Families (Parent and Child Symbols) Certain symbols can have a “parent” or “child” relationship with other symbols in a schematic. Examples include relays and motor starters (parent) which have related contacts (child) appearing throughout a drawing. If child symbols are given the same device ID as the parent, the system can automatically provide cross referencing. The software can also alert you when you try to assign more child symbols than are available for the parent.

Parent Symbol CR112

114

(Line 112) Cross Reference To Child Child Symbol

CR112

(Line 114) 112

Cross Reference To Parent ANSI-IEEE Cross Reference

Child Symbol 21 -K1 /.6

Cross Reference To Parent

22 3

Parent Symbol

A1

-K1 4

A2

Cross Reference To Child 13 21

14 22

/.4

IEC Cross Reference

You may wonder how the system knows the number and type of children that a given parent symbol can have. This is accomplished with a “Device Family” definition that establishes the type and number of child symbols that are associated with the parent and which cross reference symbol to place next to the parent symbol. 229

Using Drawing Elements

When you place a parent or child symbol on a drawing, you can assign the symbol to a device family by selecting one in the Family field of the Device Properties dialog. You can enter the name of the family or select the browse button to display the Device Family dialog to select from a list of families.

Select browse button Select device family

Once the system knows the family name, it can also perform error-checking functions by keeping track of how many of the available child symbols have been used. A number of device family definitions are provided with promis•e. You also can create custom family definitions. The example above could use the standard family named “20.” This device consists of a parent relay with two normally open and no normally closed contact children. Put simply, the device family definition contains the following information:

230

Family Name:

20

Parent Symbol Name:

CR

Cross Reference Symbol Name:

Q20

Child Symbol:

CRNO

Child Symbol:

CRNO

Using Drawing Elements

Over-assignment of Family If you attempt to assign more items to a family than it is configured to contain, the software will display an Engineering Design Consideration dialog to inform you.

You have three choices: 1. Use the Search button to choose a different family to replace the current family. 2. Append the current symbol to the device family. The appended symbol will use the same device ID as the existing items in the family. 3. Cancel the current symbol placement and use a different device ID. Note:

You can choose to turn off the Append option in the project options mode. See page 86. If you do this, option number 2 and the Append button in the above dialog will be grayed-out.

231

Using Drawing Elements

Exchange Family If you change the family that is assigned to a symbol, the software will ask if you wish to automatically transfer the symbols in the original family to positions in the new family. (You can change the family assignment by right-clicking on a symbol, selecting Device ID from the menu, and using the Family field in the Device Properties dialog.)

If you select Yes, the software will transfer symbols to the new family automatically. If you select No, the Exchange Family dialog will appear, allowing you to choose where to place items in the new family.

To exchange the symbols, drag each one from the original family to the position you wish it have in the new family. Select OK to complete the exchange. 232

Using Drawing Elements

Update Family Family definitions can be stored with a project. This means that the family definition stored with a project may not match the definition in your device family database. This could happen if you edited the definition on your system after creating a project or if you imported a project from another user who has a different family definition. The Update Family function allows you to compare a selected family in a project with a family in your family database. Use the following procedure. 1. Select Review/Revise > Update Family. The Update Family dialog will appear.

2. In the Project field select the project that contains the family that you wish to compare with a family in your family database. Select a project from the drop-down list or use the browse button. 3. Select the Get Family List button to obtain a list of families in the selected project. These families will then be available for selection in the Family field. 4. Select the desired family in the Family field. The elements of the selected family will be listed in the Family in Project (left) side of the dialog. 5. Select the Compare Families button. If there is a similarly-named family in the family database it will be listed in the Family in Catalog (right) side of the dialog. Any differences between the two families will be highlighted.

233

Using Drawing Elements

Family on the Fly If you find that you don’t have a family definition with the right combination of symbols, you can create one as you work on a drawing. Note:

To use this function you need to have two or more symbols sharing the same device ID with no family assigned. 1. Select the Manage > Family on the Fly function. The following dialog will appear:

2. Use the Select A Device ID button to display the Select Device ID dialog showing the duplicated device IDs used in the current project. Double click on the ID for which you wish to create a family. This ID will then appear in the Device ID field of the Apply/New dialog.

234

Using Drawing Elements

3. In the Apply/New dialog, select one of the following radio buttons: Select the Search for compatible family radio button if you wish to assign a family that already exists in your catalogs. After you select OK a dialog will appear that allows you to select one of the existing families. Select the Create new family radio button if you wish to create a new family to meet your special requirements. Select OK and continue with the next step. 4. The Family On the Fly dialog will appear.

5. In the Family Name field enter a name for the new family you are creating. 6. In the Catalog Path field select the catalog path where the family will be stored from the drop-down list.

235

Using Drawing Elements

7. Select the Description button and a dialog will appear with four text fields that allow you to enter descriptions of the family. Enter the desired text and select OK to continue.

8. In the Family Type field, select one of the following: Standard or Terminal/Pin-Plug depending on the type of device that is being represented. 9. The Family area of the dialog will be populated with the existing symbols that have the selected ID. The previous figure shows an ID with one relay coil symbol (CR), one normally open contact (CRNO) and one normally closed contact (CRNC). In the Role column, select the function that each symbol serves in the family: Parent, Child1, Child2, etc. The child number determines the order they will appear in the cross reference symbol.

10. (Optional) If connection point text was defined on the symbol it will be displayed in the Connection Points field. You can alter this text, if desired.

236

Using Drawing Elements

11. (Optional) Add any additional symbols that you want included in the family by making entries on blank lines. If you add an unneeded symbol you can use the delete (“X”) button to remove it. 12. (Optional) If you wish to create potential groups within the family, select the Edit Group button. If two or more connection points on the symbol are given the same potential group number and are connected to wires, the same potential (wire number) will be assigned to these wires. In other words, the potential will carry through the symbol. See page 402 for more information. 13. In the Cross Reference Symbol area of the dialog, select a cross reference symbol in the Symbol Name field. This symbol will hold the cross reference information for the parent/child symbols. 14. Set the position for the cross reference symbol. First, make a selection from the drop-down list to determine how the symbol will be positioned, either Offset from Insertion Point (of parent symbol) or Offset from 0. Typically, ANSI-IEEE drawings use Offset from Insertion Point and IEC drawings use Offset from 0. Then, in the X Offset and Y Offset fields, enter the distance values between the selected insertion point and the insertion point of the cross reference symbol. ANSI-IEEE Distance Values

IEC Distance Values

dx=0 mm

dx=1.50"

dy=-0.5" dy=75 mm Bottom of Page

15. Select OK to create the new device family.

237

Using Drawing Elements

Symbol On the Fly The Symbol On the Fly function allows you to create a box-shaped symbol in the drawing rather than selecting an existing symbol from a catalog. Like other symbols, these on-the-fly symbols are assigned a device ID and have connection points.

Connection Point D426

A

B

Connection Point Text

Device Tag

Symbol On the Fly 1. Select the Design > Symbol On the Fly > Draw Symbol On the Fly function or select the first button on the Symbol On the Fly toolbar. 2. The software will prompt you to define the first corner of the box and then the opposite corner. 3. The software will display the Device Properties dialog box and prompt you to enter a device tag for the symbol. The device tag is entered in the same way as for a symbol. If desired, you can also assign a part number to the symbol. Select OK. 4. The default position for the device ID is just above the symbol. It can be moved by right-clicking on the ID and selecting Text Position from the pop-up menu.

238

Using Drawing Elements

5. Next, select the Design > Symbol On the Fly > Insert Connection Point function (or the Insert Connection Point toolbar button) and select a connection point by pointing and clicking. You also will be prompted to select the position for connection point text. Then you will be prompted to enter the connection point text in the following dialog box.

Enter in the Visible Text field any connection point designations that you wish to appear beside the connection point. If you want hidden text to be associated with the connection point, enter it in the Hidden Text field. Select OK to enter the connection point text. Enter additional connection points as required. This completes the creation of the on-the-fly symbol. Important: To delete the connection point of an on-the-fly symbol, you must select the Design >

Symbol On the Fly > Delete Connection Point function (or the Delete Connection Point toolbar button). Then click directly on the connection point you wish to delete.

239

Using Drawing Elements

Update Symbol Once a symbol has been used in a project its definition is stored within the project. This means that the symbols stored with a project may not match the similarly-named symbols in your master catalogs. This could happen if you modified a symbol on your system after creating a project or if you imported a project from another user who has a different symbol. The Update Symbol function allows you to compare symbols in a selected project with any similarly-named symbols in your symbol catalogs. It also allows you to replace symbols in the project with the symbols that exist in the catalog. Use the following procedure: 1. Select Review/Revise > Update Symbol. The Update Symbol dialog will appear.

2. Select the desired project in the Project field. The symbols in this project will be compared to your symbol catalogs for differences.

240

Using Drawing Elements

3. Select the Get Symbol List button to perform the comparison function. Any symbols in the catalog that are different from similarly-named symbols in the project will be listed in the Update Symbol dialog.

If no mis-matched symbols are found you will see the message, “No symbol needs to be updated for this project.” 4. To replace (update) the symbols in the project, select the OK button. You will be prompted with the symbols one by one in the Replace Symbol dialog. Use this dialog to select the catalog symbol that will replace the symbol in the project.

241

Using Drawing Elements

5. Use the Search field in the Replace Symbol dialog to select whether the replacement will occur on the current page, on selected pages, or in the entire project. You can also use the checkboxes in the Maintain on New Symbol area to select aspects of the existing symbol that you wish to preserve. 6. To replace the symbol in the project with the symbol from the catalog, select the “catalog” symbol in the Replace with field. Use the browse button to make the selection. The Select Symbol dialog will appear. You can distinguish between the symbol in the catalog and the symbol in the project by looking at the Catalog column. This column indicates whether the symbol exists in the project or in a specific catalog as shown in the following figure.

Symbol exists in project or in catalog

7. Select OK in the Select Symbol dialog and in the Replace Symbol dialog to make the replacement. As you replace symbols in a project, you will be prompted with the Device Properties dialog in order to confirm the replacements. After each symbol is replaced, you will be prompted with the Replace Symbol dialog for the next mis-matched symbol. Select the Cancel button for any symbol that you do not wish to replace.

242

Using Drawing Elements

Hyperlinks Symbol Hyperlink You can create a hyperlink between a symbol in a drawing and a web page or a file such as a pdf or MS-Word document. To create a hyperlink: 1. Right click on the desired symbol. 2. Select Hyperlink > Create from the pop-up menu. The Insert Hyperlink dialog will appear.

3. In the Text to display field enter the text that will appear as a tooltip at the cursor when the user points at the symbol. 4. In the Type the file name or web page location field, enter the URL for a web page or the path to a file. This is the page or file that will be displayed when the hyperlink is opened. 5. Select OK to insert the hyperlink in the drawing. When you point the cursor at a symbol that has a hyperlink, a hyperlink icon will appear along with the text that was entered in the Text to display field.

243

Using Drawing Elements

To follow a hyperlink - To go to the linked web page or file, right click on the symbol and select Hyperlink > Open from the pop-up menu. The page or file will open in your default application for that type of file. To edit a hyperlink - Right click on the symbol and select Hyperlink > Edit from the pop-up menu. The Insert Hyperlink dialog will appear, allowing you to change the values for the hyperlink. To delete a hyperlink - Right click on the symbol and select Hyperlink > Delete from the pop-up menu. The hyperlink will be removed. Part Number Hyperlink You can assign a hyperlink to a part number record so that the hyperlink will be available on any symbol to which the part number is assigned. To create the part number hyperlink: 1. Open the desired part number record using the Manage > Parts Database Manager function (see page 630). 2. Enter the complete URL (http://...) in the URL field. 3. Select Apply to save the parts record. To use the part number hyperlink: 1. Right click on a symbol that has been assigned a part number that has a URL. 2. Select Hyperlink > Part Number URL from the pop-up menu. The assigned URL will be displayed in this sub-menu. 3. Select the displayed URL.

244

Using Drawing Elements

Insert Macro A macro is a collection of symbols, wires and other elements that can be placed on a drawing in one step. A number of macros are provided with the software. You can also create your own macros. See page 385 for instructions on creating a macro. To insert a macro in the drawing: 1. Select Design > Insert Macro. The Insert Macro(s) dialog will appear:

245

Using Drawing Elements

2. If you know the name of the macro that you wish to place in the drawing, you can enter it in the Name field. As you enter the name of the macro, any existing macros that match the entered characters will be listed in the Database area of the dialog. The macros listed in the Database area come from any symbol libraries that are included in the catalog path. (Use the Elec-Tools > promis•e Setup function to define the catalog path.) If you empty the Name field, all macros in the catalog path will be listed in the Database area. In addition to entering the macro name, you can search for a macro by entering part of its description in the Description field and selecting the Search button. Any macros with descriptions that contain the search term will be displayed. 3. Click on the name of the desired macro to select it. A thumbnail view of the macro will appear in the Preview area of the dialog. 4. (Optional) If you do not want the device IDs of any symbols in the macro to be automatically updated to reflect their new position, select the Maintain Device IDs as Created when inserting Macro checkbox. (You will still be prompted with the original device ID). You can choose to maintain the device tag only or the complete ID. 5. (Optional) If wire links were stored as part of the macro and the Maintain Wire Link IDs as created when inserting Macro checkbox is selected, these will appear when the macro is placed and will not be updated automatically to reflect their new position. You can choose to maintain the device tag only or the complete ID. 6. (Optional) If wire numbers were stored as part of the macro and the Maintain Wire Numbers as created when inserting Macro checkbox is selected, these will appear when the macro is placed. If the macro’s wire numbers are connected to existing wire numbers in the project, the existing wire numbers will take precedence. If the wire numbers would create a duplicate wire number, they will have “?” appended. You can choose to maintain the wire tag only or the complete ID.

246

Using Drawing Elements

7. (Optional) By selecting the Macro Settings link you can display the Macro Settings dialog. Here you can make various settings that govern how the symbol appears on the drawing. In general, these settings remain in effect until a different setting is made. These settings are similar to the symbol settings (see page 228).

8. To place the selected macro in the drawing, click on the OK button. The macro will appear at the cursor position. Position the macro by pointing the cursor at the desired location and pressing the left mouse button. The macro is then placed in the diagram. The insertion point of the macro will snap to the nearest grid point.

247

Using Drawing Elements

Entering Text Although promis•e automatically enters device IDs and other descriptive labels when placing symbols, the user may wish to include additional text in the drawing to further describe the control system. For entering general text you can use the AutoCAD text entry functions.

Single Line Text With single line text, each line of text entered is treated as a separate object. AutoCAD: 1. Use the Draw > Text > Single Line function or select the Single Line Text toolbar button on the AutoCAD Text toolbar. Follow the prompts on the command line to set various text parameters: 2. Specify start point by clicking in the drawing. 3. Specify Text Height - by entering a value on the command line or moving the mouse pointer and clicking to establish a height. 4. Specify Text Angle - by entering a value on the command line or moving the mouse pointer and clicking to establish an angle. 5. When prompted to “Enter text,” type the text string that you wish to appear in the drawing. 6. Press the key to complete each single line text entry. 7. Press a second time (or press ) to exit from text entry mode. MicroStation: 1. Use the Tools > Main > Text function and select the Place Text button in the Text tool box. 2. The Text Editor window will open if it is not already open. Enter text in this window. (This text can be single line or multi-line.) 3. Make any desired text settings in the Place Text dialog. 4. Select a point in the drawing where you wish the text to appear.

248

Using Drawing Elements

Multiline Text With multiline text, a block of text that can have more than one line is treated as a single object. To enter multiline text, use the Design > Multiline Text function. Follow the prompts on the command line to set various text parameters: 1. Specify start point by clicking in the drawing. 2. Click on a first corner and opposite corner to define a text box on the drawing. The following Multi-line Text dialog will appear.

3. Enter the desired text in the Text area of the dialog. Simply press to start a new line. Make any desired formatting settings in the Settings fields. 4. If you wish to use foreign language text phrases, select the Search Language Phrases button. The following dialog will appear.

249

Using Drawing Elements

Select the desired language text followed by the OK button. 5. Select the OK button to enter the text in the drawing.

Editing Text To edit text, double click on the text object that you wish to edit. (AutoCAD) Single line text will appear in the Edit Text dialog, multiline text will appear in the multiline text editor. Make the desired changes and select the OK button. (MicroStation) Both single line text and multiline text will appear in the Text Editor window. Make the desired changes and then click in the drawing to enter the changes.

Language Text promis•e has the capability to automatically display selected text words and phrases

in multiple languages. promis•e includes a database containing lists of commonly used technical words and

phrases in various languages. (Currently, English, German, and Chinese phrases are provided with the software.) The words and phrases in each list are numbered, and the corresponding term is given the same number in each language list. By selecting and placing a word or phrase from the language text list, the software can automatically display the word or phrase in up to three of the available languages. The text is entered on the drawing using the Design > Multiline Text function. See page 249. 250

Using Drawing Elements

The user can edit and add to any of the word lists and can create new word lists for additional languages. Selecting Languages To select which languages will appear in a drawing, use the Display Languages dialog under Project Options. See page 84. Editing Language Text Database To edit the lists of language text words and phrases, select the Manage > Language Database Manager function. The Phrase and Language Edit dialog will appear.

251

Using Drawing Elements

To edit a phrase: 1. Use the Select Language field to select a language. The list of phrases in that language will appear on the left side of the dialog.

2. Select the desired phrase on the left side of the dialog. All existing translations of the phrase will be listed on the right side of the dialog. 3. Click inside the desired field on the right side of the dialog to edit the phrase in any of the languages. To add a phrase: 1. Use the Select Language field to select a language. The list of phrases in that language will appear on the left side of the dialog. 2. Select the Add button. A field will appear beside the Add button where you can enter the name of the new phrase. This is usually a number that determines the phrase’s position in the list.

3. Enter the phrase name and press the key. A new position will be added to the list. 4. Enter the desired phrase text(s) in the Translation column on the right side of the dialog.

252

Using Drawing Elements

To delete a phrase: 1. Use the Select Language field to select a language. The list of phrases in that language will appear on the left side of the dialog. 2. Select the desired phrase from the list on the left side of the dialog. 3. Select the Delete button. 4. Select Yes when prompted to confirm the deletion. To add a language: 1. Select the Add button on the right side of the dialog under Languages. A field will appear beside the Add button where you can enter the name of the new language list.

2. Enter the language name and press the key. The new language will be added to the list of languages. You can then enter translations for each phrase for that language.

253

Using Drawing Elements

Cables There are several methods of creating and assigning cables in promis•e. The user can create device types and enter part numbers that represent various types of cables. Wires can be assigned to cables either in the schematic or in the terminal plan editor.

Assigning Wires to a Cable You can assign a group of wires to a cable by placing a cable symbol in the schematic drawing. Cables assigned in the schematic will be listed in the terminal plan editor mode (see page 512). To assign a group of wires in a schematic to a cable, use the following steps: 1. While viewing the schematic, select the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Name function. When prompted for a symbol name enter a cable symbol name. The symbol named CABLE is provided with the software. 2. Select the desired cable symbol position on the first wire that you wish to assign to the cable. 3. The Device Properties dialog box will appear. A device ID tag will be prompted in the Device Tag field. Enter a device tag for the cable in this field.

254

Using Drawing Elements

4. The Multiple Placement checkbox will default to the “On” setting when placing cable symbols. This allows you to assign multiple consecutive wires to the cable in one step. (You can also assign wires to a cable individually by placing the cable symbol on each wire and assigning the same device ID on each wire).

Multiple Placement checkbox

5. At this time, if desired, you can also assign a part number to the cable. Select the Search button in the Part Number area of the dialog. The parts database Assign Part Number dialog box will be displayed (see page 294). You can search the database for cable part numbers. Select these part numbers by pointing and clicking. Select OK to return to the Device Properties dialog box. Note:

Assign a part number to only one of the cable’s conductors. 6. To select a device family for the cable, select the browse button in the Family field. The Device Family dialog box will appear allowing you to select a device family for the cable. The family type determines how many conductors the cable has and what the designation (such as color) is for each conductor. You can create custom cable families (see page 396). Select OK.

255

Using Drawing Elements Note:

If you assigned a part number to the cable, and a device family was defined in the data for that part number, the device family will be assigned automatically.

7. The Device Usage Chart dialog box will appear next, listing all the conductor designations for the cable. The first available (unassigned) conductor will be assigned to the cable symbol you are currently placing unless you select a different conductor by pointing and clicking.

256

Using Drawing Elements

If any of the conductors have already been assigned in the schematic, a page and line number will be indicated in the Drawing Set, Page and Line Number columns. These conductors cannot be assigned again unless you delete the existing cable symbol where they have been assigned. Select the OK button to continue followed by the OK button in the Device Properties dialog.

257

Using Drawing Elements

8. The Cable Text dialog box will appear. This dialog box allows you to enter up to 50 descriptive texts related to the cable. Select the OK button when the desired texts have been entered.

9. The cable symbol will appear at the selected position with the device ID and the designation of the first conductor. If the Multiple Placement checkbox was selected, the software will then prompt, “Mark position of last symbol.” By pointing and clicking, select the last wire to be assigned to the cable.

Original symbol position Select last wire

258

Using Drawing Elements

Cable conductor designations will be automatically assigned to each wire up to the last selected wire. The cable device ID appears at the first wire; conductor designations appear at subsequent wires (see following figure).

Conductor designations automatically assigned

259

Using Drawing Elements

Cable Cross Reference Symbols You can place a cable cross reference symbol in a drawing that will show where the conductors of a cable are connected. Note:

The page must be in Wiring Diagram drawing mode in order to place the symbol. = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1-TB9:1

= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1-TB2:1

BLK

BLK CAB77

= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1-TB2:2

= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1-TB9:2 WHT

WHT LENGTH

= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1-TB2:3

= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1-TB9:3

50

RED

RED = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1-TB9:4

= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1-TB2:4

GRN

GRN

A number of cable cross reference symbols are provided with the software (search for symbol type “cablexref”) or you can create your own. When you place the cable cross reference symbol you assign the same device ID as the existing cable. For example, if you had assigned the following cable in a schematic, the cross reference symbol might show the information in the above figure. TB2

CAB77

BLK

1

TB9 1

WHT 2

2 RED

3

3 GRN

4

4

The type of information that is displayed at the cross reference symbol can be customized using the Cable Cross-References tab of the Wire Diagram Settings dialog in the project options (see page 103).

260

Using Drawing Elements

Cable Manager The Cable Manager allows you to edit cable text for all the cables in a project in a single dialog. You can make large-scale changes to the cable texts in a project without searching for and editing individual cables. This saves time and lessens errors of omission or inconsistency of edits. To access the Cable Manager, select Review/Revise > Cable Manager. The Cable Manager dialog will appear.

The existing cables in the project are listed on the left side of the dialog. When you select a cable, the cable text for that cable is displayed on the right side of the dialog. If you select multiple cables that have different cable text values, the text will be displayed as “”. You can edit the cable text values of the selected cables. Entered values will be assigned to all the selected cables, allowing you to edit multiple cables in one step. Use the Best Fit buttons to optimize the column widths in the dialog. Select the Apply button to assign the entered values without closing the dialog. Select the OK button to assign the entered values and close the dialog. 261

Using Drawing Elements

Field promis•e software has the ability to recognize devices on a schematic that originate from a remote location, in other words, devices that exist in a different physical locale than the other devices on the schematic page. One way the user can identify these remote devices is by placing them in a “field.” (Another way is to right click on a symbol’s device ID, select the Device ID function from the popup menu and change the device ID to a different installation and location.) Overview – promis•e is an intelligent software package that can identify locations as well as logical connections. However, in the two-dimensional schematic world, the user must provide the software with the means to distinguish between real-world, physical locations and theoretical callouts on the drawing. To allow the software to recognize remote devices, the user can assign a field as an area of the schematic to contain the remote devices. A different Installation and Location can then be assigned to the field. promis•e will associate the devices in the field with this new Installation and Location rather than the Installation and Location of the page where the field appears. A field can be drawn around existing devices, or devices can be drawn inside an existing field. A field can be drawn within another field, but it must be completely inside the other field. Procedure for Field Creation: 1. Select the Design > Insert Field function. 2. On the command line, you will be prompted to define the first corner and opposite corner of the field in the desired area of the drawing. A box will indicate the field area. 3. Next a prompt will appear on the Command Line asking you to “Locate the text position.” This means to select a point near the field where the field’s Installation/Location name will be printed. Select the point by pointing the cursor and clicking.

262

Using Drawing Elements

4. The following Field Parameters dialog box will then appear.

At the top of this dialog box you can enter the Installation and/or Location name to which you wish the field to be assigned. This can be an existing installation/location, or one that has not yet been used. (The field can have the same installation name as the drawing page where it appears, but it should have a different location name if the field is to indicate remote devices.) Use the drop-down list to display the names of existing installations and locations. The Rename Existing Symbols to Inst/Loc of the Field checkbox determines whether or not any existing symbols in the field area will be renamed (reassigned) to the field’s installation and location. When the checkbox is on, existing symbols are renamed. There is also a set of fields for determining the characteristics of the text that will label the field on the drawing. The Text-Offset values indicate the distance from the field insertion point (first corner) to the insertion point (write position) of the text. These values can be altered if desired. The Line Color and Line Type fields allow the characteristics of the field border line to be set. Drop-down buttons are available on the right side of each field for displaying and selecting most of these text and line parameters.

263

Using Drawing Elements

5. When the desired values are entered, select the OK button to complete creation of the field. Mixed Device Assignment – In some cases, you may wish to have some devices within a field remain associated with the Installation and Location of the drawing page, i.e., be local rather than remote devices. In such a case, use the following procedure: 1. Before creating the field, draw the devices that are to remain local. 2. Draw the field around the local devices. During the field creation process, set the Rename existing symbols to inst/loc to name of the field checkbox to off (no checkmark). This will cause the symbols to remain associated with the Installation/Location of the current page. 3. Add the remote devices to the field area. Any new devices will be assigned to the Installation/Location of the field. Note:

The logic functions of promis•e ordinarily do not allow two devices with the same name to be assigned to the same Installation/Location. However, you may wish the devices in a field to represent devices that exist on another page, and therefore you would give the field the same Installation name as the other page where the devices appear. As shown in the following illustration, the device PB123 appears in Installation A, Location B as a local device and also as a remote device in Installation X, Location Y. The remote field has been assigned to Installation A, Location B. Installation A Location B

PB123

Installation X Location Y

Field Assigned To Inst. A Location B

PB123

Ordinarily, when the device ID PB123 was entered a second time for the same Installation/Location, a “Device already exists” error would be displayed and the ID would not be allowed.

264

Using Drawing Elements

This restriction can be overridden by selecting the Duplicate Device ID checkbox in the Device Properties dialog box when both symbols are placed. Therefore in the example above, the ID PB123 would be assigned to both pushbuttons when they are placed (or after they have been placed by right clicking on the device ID and changing it). Note:

To avoid duplication, part numbers should only be assigned to one of the devices.

265

Using Drawing Elements

Wire Link Cross References In a typical project it is very common to show a wire in one column of a page and continue that wire onto the next column or even the next page. With promis•e you must make a logical connection between these wires to tell the software that this is the same wire. This will allow you to carry the wire number throughout the potential. To do this you must place special symbols called wire links at the ends of the wires. Wire links can be placed on horizontal or vertical wires. In previous versions of promis•e, wire links were referred to as “signal cross references.” Note:

Because they are used to connect or join wires, wire links should be assigned before wire numbers are assigned.

125

CR124

AH126

126 127 128

ANSI-IEEE Wire Link Symbols L1/2.01

L2/2.01

IEC Wire Link Symbols

Page 1

266

P1/1

P1/2

P1/3

N1/1

N1/2

N1/3

Page 2

Using Drawing Elements

The following wire link symbols are provided with the software. They differ as to the graphics that represent the symbol and where the ID appears in relation to the graphics. The user can also create custom symbols. Symbol Name

Description

HEXIN

Wire Link, Hexagon Above

HEXINL

Wire Link, Hexagon to the Left

HEXINR

Wire Link, Hexagon to the Right

HEXOUT

Wire Link, Hexagon Below

STARHEX2L

(Star type) for use with the HEXOUT2L macro

STARHEX2R

(Star type) for use with the HEXOUT2R macro

STARHEXOUT5

(Star type) for use with the HEXOUT5 macro

WLINK-B

Wire Link, Std., Vertical ID to Bottom

WLINK-B-AD

Wire Link, Arrow Down, Vertical ID to Bottom

WLINK-B-AU

Wire Link, Arrow Up, Vertical ID to Bottom

WLINK-D-BD

Wire Link, Box, Vertical ID to Bottom

WLINK-L

Wire Link, Std., Horizontal ID to Left

WLINK-L-AL

Wire Link, Arrow Left, Horizontal ID to Left

WLINK-L-AR

Wire Link, Arrow Right, Horizontal ID to Left

WLINK-R

Wire Link, Std., Horizontal ID to Right

WLINK-R-AL

Wire Link, Arrow Left, Horizontal ID to Right

WLINK-R-AR

Wire Link, Arrow Right, Horizontal ID to Right

WLINK-T

Wire Link, Std., Vertical ID to Top

WLINK-T-AD

Wire Link, Arrow Down, Vertical ID to Top

WLINK-T-AU

Wire Link, Arrow Up, Vertical ID to Top

WLINK-T-BU

Wire Link, Box Up, Vertical ID to Top

These symbols are selected and placed using the Design > Insert Wire Link function. After the wire link symbols are placed, they will automatically display the current cross reference values (i.e., they will indicate where the circuit continues or originates).

267

Using Drawing Elements

Types of Wire Links There are three main types of wire links. Pair - Two wire link symbols cross-reference to each other. Pair L1/1.23

L1/1.43

Star Group - A group of wire links all cross-reference back to a single, primary link. Star Group L1/1.23

L1/1.23

L1/1.23

L1/1.65 2.65 3.65

Multi-Reference Group - A group of wire links cross-reference to all the other links in the group. Multi-Reference Group L1/1.23 2.23 3.65 L1/1.65 2.65 3.65

L1/1.23 1.65 2.23 L1/1.23 1.65 3.65

The type of wire link is chosen when the wire link symbol is placed.

268

Using Drawing Elements

Wire Link Index The software knows where the wire link continues by a combination of the wire link ID and a link index number associated with the ID. The link index is assigned when you place the wire link symbol. You must assign the same link index number to the device ID of the outgoing and incoming signals (the index number can be any number you want). The software will evaluate the connections in ascending order based on the index number. In drawings, the link index number appears with a slash after the link tag (example: 1264/1) until the corresponding wire link is placed at which time the index number is replaced with the cross reference information. Note: You cannot use the same link index number for more than one pair or group of signals

in the same project. Each outgoing and incoming pair or group must get a unique index number. Pairs example - The example below shows how you would specify the wire link IDs with index numbers to make connections within the same page and between pages that do not follow the page number order. L1/1 2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22

L1/1

Page 1

L2/1

L1/3

L2/1 2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22

24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46

L1/2

L2/2

Page 2

L2/3

L1/2

L2/2

L1/3

L2/3

2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22

Page 3

In this example wires L1 and L2 begin on the left column of page 1 and are continued to the second column of page 1. Then from the second column of page 1 they connect to page 3. From page 3 they connect to page 2. Therefore, by using the index numbers, your wire links do not have to follow page number order.

269

Using Drawing Elements

Star or Multi-Reference Group Example - In the following example, the same wire link ID and index number are used on all the linked pages.

L1/1

2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22

2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22

L1/1

P.1

L2/1

P. 2

L2/1 L1/1 2 4 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 22

P. 3

270

L2/1

Using Drawing Elements

Placing a Wire Link Symbol Wire link symbols are selected and placed using the Design > Insert Wire Link function. This will display a dialog from which you may select and place a wire link symbol. When you place a wire link symbol, the following Wire Link ID dialog will appear.

Wire Link ID - The software automatically prompts the next available device ID based on the format that is defined for the current project (see page 75). You can accept the prompted Wire Link Tag or you can type a different ID in the fields provided. After the first wire link is placed, the same ID will be prompted for any additional wire links that are placed. The value in the Link Index field sets the connection order between wire links with the same ID. (See page 269.) The software will prompt a number, but you can use any that you want. The software will evaluate the connections in ascending order based on the index number. In drawings, the link index number appears with a slash after the link tag (example: 1264/1) until the corresponding wire link is placed at which time the index number is replaced with the cross reference information. Use the Select Device ID button to assign the device ID by clicking on an existing symbol in the same drawing that has the desired ID. 271

Using Drawing Elements

The Search button displays the Select Wire Link ID dialog. This dialog allows you to select an existing wire link ID to assign to the new symbol.

The Search & Link button displays the Wire Link Usage dialog. This dialog allows you to manually select an existing wire link with which to connect the wire link you are placing. See page 272. Link Type - Select one of the three link types: Pair, Star Group or Multi-Reference Group. See page 268. If you select Star Group, the Primary checkbox becomes available. Selecting this checkbox designates this wire link as the primary one in the star group. All other wire links in the group will cross reference back to the primary. If you select the Designate as Wire Starting Point checkbox, the current link will be the starting point for the software to assign wire links with this ID. When you place a wire link with a previously unused ID, this checkbox is selected by default. The starting point affects the automatic wire numbering function: if the wire numbering format uses page/line numbers and the starting point is on a higher numbered page that is connected through a wire link to a lower numbered page, the wire number with the higher page number will be assigned first and carried back to the lower numbered page. Select the Multiple Placement checkbox if you wish to place two wire links at a time. You will be prompted to select the direction and insertion point for the second wire link.

Search and Link Function The Search & Link button in the Wire Link ID dialog displays the Wire Link Usage dialog. You can also right click on a wire link and select Wire Link Usage from the popup menu.

272

Using Drawing Elements

This dialog shows how the selected wire link ID is being used in the project. The Line # column shows where each wire link symbol is located. The symbols are organized into Pairs, Star Groups or Multi-Reference Groups. The items that are in the same pair or group are currently cross referencing each other.

The wire link that is currently selected is highlighted in gold. Any wire links that are unlinked appear in red and are marked with a “broken link” icon to the left. The primary link in a star group is marked with a red asterisk (*) to the left. You can drag and drop a wire link row from one group to another. When you drag a wire link into a group that already has two links, the link type for that group will be changed to Multi-Reference. If the user drags a connection from a star type configuration to a different group such that there is now only two wire links left in the star group the software will automatically convert that star group into a pair type. Note:

When you drag a wire link to a different pair or group the order of the pairs listed in the Wire Link Usage dialog may change. If you right click on an individual wirelink, you can move it to a separate pair or group.

273

Using Drawing Elements

Changing link type - In the Wire Link Usage dialog, you can right-click on the pair or group name and change the link type from pair to star or multi-reference group.

Wire Link Notation Configuration You can configure the format of wire link cross references with the Project Manager Options dialog (see page 67). Under Project Options, select Display Formats and click in the field for Wire Link. An Edit button will appear. Select this button to access configuration. For more information, see page 83.

Re-sequence Wire Link Function If, by moving or inserting pages in your project, the wire links no longer follow the page order, there is a function to re-sequence the index numbers. 1. Select Review/Revise > Re-sequence Wire Link. The Re-Sequence Wire Link dialog will appear, listing all the wire links in the project.

2. Select the row for the wire link that you wish to re-sequence. 3. Select the OK button.

274

Using Drawing Elements

The wire link indexes for the selected ID will be renumbered to follow page numbers in numerical order and position within pages. Note on index numbers in macros and copied pages: When placing a macro containing a wire link pair, the software will maintain the pairing by assigning the first unused index number. If there is a single, unpaired wire link in the macro, the software will assign it the last unpaired index number, if there is one. When copying a page that contain wire link pairs, the software will maintain the pairing by assigning the first unused index number. If there is a single, unpaired wire link in the copied page, the software will assign the next unused index number.

275

Using Drawing Elements

Wire/Device Connections A number of functions in the software require information on how devices are connected together in the schematics. These functions include the wire list report, the terminal plan, the shortest distance wire routing function, wiring diagrams and others. To obtain this information, the searches along wires using a set of priorities to determine what is connected to what. On most wires, only a “from” and “to” need to be determined; but in some cases there may be many devices all connected to the same potential. The software searches these wires in the following manner:

Connection Search Priorities 1. Search for diagonal connections Each diagonal connection has three “sides,” each of which can go to a single device or to a group of devices. If there are additional diagonal connections within these groups, they can be further divided into more groups. In the following figure, there are two diagonal connections. The lefthand diagonal goes to three groups (1, 2, and 3). Group 2 can be divided into two more groups (4, 5). The following steps can then be applied to each group.

1

2 4 3

276

5

Using Drawing Elements

2. Search for wire links Within each group from the previous step, find any wire links that exist and divide devices into groups according to which side of the wire link connection they are on. These groups are then sorted in the following priority: In ANSI-IEEE drawings, top priority is given to the group with the highest Y position value (including wires). If two groups have the same maximum Y value, priority will be given to the one with the smallest X value. In other words, the search goes top to bottom, left to right. In IEC drawings, top priority is given to the group with the lowest X position value (including wires). If two groups have the same minimum X value, priority will be given to the one with the highest maximum Y value. In other words, the search goes left to right, top to bottom. In the following figure, group 2 would have priority in this ANSI-IEEE drawing because it extends higher on the page.

1

2

3. Sort connections within each group The software will search for connections in each group. The order of connections in each group is determined by the ANSI-IEEE or IEC X/Y position rules given in step 2. 4. List connections in group priority order The wire list starts from first group's first connection point and end with last group's last connection point.

277

Using Drawing Elements

Example - The following (ANSI-IEEE) figures show the application of the connection search priority steps. As mentioned above, the software will first check your circuit for diagonal wire symbols. In the example below, we see that we have a diagonal wire symbol. This breaks our evaluation into 3 groups. The order in which these groups are evaluated is a combination of the "Top to Bottom, Left to Right" rule and the diagonal wire symbol that was chosen.

The software will evaluate Group 1 and then Group 2 and finally Group 3. Note:

278

All of the group evaluations follow the rules defined in the Connection Search Priorities section.

Using Drawing Elements

Group 1:

The software starts at the top-most symbol and moves in the direction indicated by the arrows Group 2:

The software starts at the top-most symbol of this group and moves in the direction indicated by the arrows; notice it evaluated all the symbols on the left before going through the wire link. Once on the other side of the wire link symbol, the software starts once again with the top-most symbol.

279

Using Drawing Elements

Group 3:

This group is very similar to group 2 except there are two symbols on the upper-most plane, notice the software goes top to bottom, left to right.

280

Using Drawing Elements

Wire Numbers promis•e schematic diagrams are created with wire lines which the system can recognize as wires (unlike drawing lines which are not recognized as having any logical properties). The Design > Wire Numbering > Automatic Wire Number function allows the software to automatically assign wire numbers throughout the project. The format of the wire numbers is user-definable: it can be based on line numbers or sequential numbers with alphanumeric prefixes or suffixes. Color and gauge (size) also can be assigned to each wire. Wire numbers can be assigned automatically or manually as described in later sections.

Wire Number Format To format wire numbers, go to the project Options dialog and select Wire Options. Use the Label Formats fields. For more information, see page 110.

Automatic Wire Number Assignment The software can assign numbers to wires and other logical lines automatically. Important: Before the system can assign wire numbers across columns and pages, wire link

symbols must be placed in the drawing to tie together the “hot” and “common” lines on each column and page. See page 266. If this step is performed, automatic wire numbering can extend across the pages of a project. To assign wires automatically, select the Design > Wire Numbering > Automatic Wire Number function. The Automatic Wire Number dialog will appear.

281

Using Drawing Elements

In the Labeling Selection field, select whether you wish the new wire numbers to apply to one of the following: • Project - Number wires in the entire project. • Select Pages - Number wires on selected pages (the Select Pages dialog will

open after you select OK. • Select Objects - Number one or more selected wires on the current page. In the Filters area, use the Mode field to select the drawing mode in which the wires (or pneumatic lines, etc.) will be numbered. The Use field is used in conjunction with the wire layers defined in the wire options mode (see page 108). You can select to number wires on all layers, or select a single layer on which wire numbering will be performed.

282

Using Drawing Elements

In the Label Options area, the Omit Labels On Cables checkbox causes the software to skip any wire branches that are designated as a conductor of a cable so that they do not get a label. The wires connected to the cable will still receive labels. Select the Terminal = Wire Number checkbox if you wish to renumber any terminal on a wire with the assigned wire number. In the Overwrite Options area, you can choose whether or not the new wire numbers will overwrite any existing wire numbers. You can choose to overwrite manually assigned wire numbers (Overwrite Manual Labels), automatically assigned wire numbers (Overwrite Automatic Labels), or both. In the Label Name area select elements that will comprise the wire label. You can choose to include installation and/or location names. The First Number field allows you to set the value at which sequential numbering will begin. If no value is entered, numbering will start with 1. The Text Style field allows you to set the font name, size and other attributes of the wire labels (use the Edit button to make changes). Select the Calculate Branch Label checkbox if you wish the software to calculate unique numbers for each wire branch. You can specify the first number (or letter) in the First Number/Character field. (Note: to include branch numbers in the displayed wire number you must also include the Branch # variable in your wire number format settings. See page 106.) Use the Position field to select where the wire number will appear on the wire segment. The choices are “Left or Top,” “Middle” and “Right or Bottom.” The Edit Group Wire Number button allows you to modify the prefix and/or suffix on a selected group of wires. These are similar to the settings you can make in the project options wire options (see page 111) which apply globally. When you select the button, the Edit Prefix/Suffix dialog appears.

Make the desired prefix or suffix settings. You must make settings for all of the wire types. Select the Same as Option checkbox if you wish to use the wire labeling defined in the project options for that wire type. When you click in the 283

Using Drawing Elements

Numbering Profile field, a browse button will appear, allowing you to select one of the existing wire numbering profiles. Enter any desired prefixes or suffixes in the Prefix or Suffix fields. Select OK to return to the Automatic Wire Number dialog. In the Properties area you can assign various wire parameters. In order to assign these properties you must first select the Overwrite Existing Wire Properties checkbox; then the various properties fields will become active. (If you do not select the checkbox, the properties that are already assigned to the wires will be used.) The Gauge field allows a wire gauge (size) value to be assigned which will be associated with the wires. The Color field allows a wire color to be assigned which will be associated with the wires. The Type field allows you to select from a list of wire types (bare copper, tinned copper, etc.) or enter your own description. The Voltage and Current fields allow you to enter electrical values for the wire. The Part Number field allows you to assign a part number to be associated with the wires. Note:

If a wire property (gauge, color, etc.) for a specific wire has no value, it is not considered an existing property. Therefore, if you enter a new property value it will be assigned to wires that currently have no value even if the Overwrite Existing Wire Properties checkbox is not selected (provided that those wires are selected for wire number assignment). For example, suppose wire number 100 starts with these properties: Gauge: 14, Color: RED, Voltage: (blank). You then enter these properties: Gauge: 12, Color: BLK, Voltage: 120 and run wire numbering without selecting the Overwrite Existing Wire Properties checkbox. As a result, wire 100 will have these properties: Gauge: 14, Color: RED, Voltage: 120 (only the voltage property was assigned). If you select the Use Cable’s Gauge/Color If Cable Exists checkbox, any gauge or color values that are assigned to a cable through its device family will be retained. By selecting the More Properties button the software will display a dialog containing ten additional property fields that the user can assign. If a wire already has a property value assigned it should never be overwritten by the auto label function.

284

Using Drawing Elements

Enter any additional properties you wish to associate with the wire and select OK. Select OK in the Auto Label dialog to execute the automatic wire number assignment.

285

Using Drawing Elements

Manual Wire Number Assignment To manually assign wire numbers, select Design > Wire Numbering > Manual Wire Number. You can also right-click on a wire and select Assign Wire Number from the pop-up menu. The software will prompt you to “Select Logical Line.” Select the wire that you wish to number by clicking the left mouse button. The following dialog box will appear.

In the Label area, select elements that will comprise the wire label. You can choose to include installation and/or location names. The Tag field allows you to enter a value for the wire number. Select the Hide checkbox if you wish the wire number to be hidden on the drawing. If you are editing a wire with multiple branches that already has a wire number assigned, you can select the Duplicate checkbox to make the wire number also appear on the branch you selected. In the Assigned field you can designate how the software will treat the wire number; either as a manually assigned number or an automatically assigned number. This is relevant when deleting wire numbers - you can choose to delete all wire numbers or only the automatically assigned numbers. 286

Using Drawing Elements

The Text Style field allows you to set the font name, size and other attributes of the wire labels (use the Edit button to make changes). Use the Position field to select where the wire number will appear on the wire segment. The choices are “Left or Top,” “Middle” and “Right or Bottom.” The Distance field allows you to set how far the wire number is offset from the wire. In the Properties area you can assign various wire parameters: The Apply properties by field select Potential to apply the properties to all branches of the wire. Select Branch to allow different properties to be assigned to different branches of the same potential. The Use field displays the wire layer of the selected wire. You can select a different layer name to assign the wire to another layer (these layers are defined in the Wire Layer Configuration dialog, see page 108). The Gauge field allows a wire gauge (size) value to be assigned which will be associated with the wires. The Color field allows a wire color to be assigned which will be associated with the wires. The Type field allows you to select from a list of wire types (bare copper, tinned copper, etc.) or enter your own description. The Voltage and Current fields allow you to enter electrical values for the wire. The Part Number field allows you to assign a part number to be associated with the wires. By selecting the More Properties button the software will display a dialog containing ten additional property fields that the user can assign. If a wire already has a property value assigned it should never be overwritten by the auto label function. Select OK to assign the wire number.

Modify Wire Number To modify an existing wire number, right-click on a wire and select Edit Wire Number from the popup menu. The Edit Wire Number dialog box will appear. Change the value in the Tag field or any other wire properties. See page 286 for more information.

287

Using Drawing Elements

Delete Wire Numbers To delete wire numbers, select the Design > Wire Numbering > Delete Wire Number function. You can also select the Delete Wire Number button on the wiring toolbar. The Delete Wire Number(s) dialog will appear.

Select the Entire Project radio button if you wish to delete wire numbers throughout the entire project.

288

Using Drawing Elements

If you wish to delete wires only on certain pages, select the Selected Pages radio button. The Select Pages button will then become active, which displays the Select Pages dialog. Use this dialog to choose the pages on which wire numbers will be deleted.

Select the desired pages and select OK to return to the Delete Wire Number(s) dialog. If you wish to delete all wire numbers regardless of whether they were assigned automatically or manually, select the All (including manually assigned) radio button. If you wish to delete only the wire numbers that were assigned automatically, select the Only Automatically Assigned radio button. Select OK to start the delete wire number function.

289

Using Drawing Elements

Find and Replace Wire Properties The Find and Replace Wire Property function allows you to change wire properties such as color, gauge and type. The replacement can affect the entire project or it can be restricted to a single drawing set, installation, location, page, or even individually selected wires. Use the following procedure: 1. Select the Review/Revise > Find/Replace Wire Property function. The Find and Replace dialog will appear.

2. If you wish to select individual wires on the currently open page, go to step 3. select the Select Objects button. If you wish to apply the replacement to a range of pages or to the entire project, go to step 5. 3. To make a replacement on selected wires in the current page, select the Select Objects button. Click on the desired wires in the drawing to select them. Right click or press when all the wires are selected.

290

Using Drawing Elements

4. You will return to the Find and Replace dialog. Enter the new properties that you wish to assign in the appropriate fields. Select OK to assign the new value(s). 5. To apply the replacement to a range of pages or to the entire project, select the Quick Select button. The Quick Select dialog will appear.

In the Apply to field, select the range to which you wish to apply the change. The selections are: Project, Drawing Set, Installation and Page. In the Mode field, select the drawing mode that you wish to include in the replacement.

291

Using Drawing Elements

In the Operator column, select a logical comparitor and enter a value in the Value column. These selections determine the wires that will be affected by defining the existing value or range of values that is to be changed.

Select Apply when you have made the desired entries. Go to step 4.

292

Using Drawing Elements

Align Wire Numbers If there are wire numbers on parallel wire segments that are not lined up and you wish to have them so, you can use the Align Wire Number function to align them in one simple procedure. 1. Select the Design > Wire Numbering > Align Wire Numbers function. 2. You will be prompted on the command line to “Select objects.” Select the wires that have the numbers you wish to align. Right click or press when all the wires are selected.

Select wires

Select lineup point

3. You will be prompted to “Select Lineup Point.” Select the position at which you wish the numbers to line up. The wire numbers will move to line up on this point.

293

Using Drawing Elements

Part Numbers The parts database allows promis•e users to assign part numbers to device IDs in the project. This allows the system to generate bills of material and other informative lists based on the items in the schematics and the information in the database. See Section 12 for information on accessing and editing the parts database. Note:

You can also assign a part number when a symbol is created so that the part number is always prompted whenever the symbol is placed. See page 345. Part numbers are assigned to device IDs within a given project. They are not automatically assigned to the same symbols in a new project unless you copy part of an existing project with part numbers assigned.

Note:

If you create a macro containing elements which have been assigned part numbers, these part numbers will be stored with the macro. (If desired, they can be altered after the macro is placed by right clicking on the symbol and selecting the Part Number function from the pop-up menu.) Part numbers can be assigned to parent or child symbols. All part numbers are associated with the device family so that you can edit them from any parent or child symbol associated with that device family. When a symbol is placed, the Device Properties dialog box appears, prompting the user with a device ID for the symbol. This dialog box also contains a Part Number field and a part number Search button. Part number search button

294

Using Drawing Elements

To assign a part number from the parts database select the Search button. This will display the Select Part Number dialog box, which allows you to search the database and make part number selections. Select parts here

Selected parts are listed here

The Select Part Number dialog has a column for each data field in the parts database. You can scroll from side to side to see additional columns. You can adjust the width of the columns by dragging the edges in or out. The columns can be dragged to the left or right to change their order. To select a part, double click anywhere on the line for the desired part. The part will then appear in the Selected Items area at the bottom of the dialog. You can assign multiple part numbers to a single symbol, if necessary. If you wish to assign more than one of the same part number, you can make an entry in the Quantity column in the lower part of the dialog. By default, the first part you select is the “primary” part number and is marked with a key-shaped icon (see page 298). If you change your mind and wish to “un-assign” a selected part number, double click on its line in the Selected Items area of the dialog. 295

Using Drawing Elements

The display of available parts initially lists any parts that are associated with the symbol that you are placing (for example, if you are in the schematic drawing mode, by the value in the Schematic Symbol column). Sorting part numbers - By clicking on the column heading you can sort the listed parts by the values in that column. Filtering part numbers - At the top of the Select Part Number dialog there is an area that allows you t filter the parts listing.

Select the Apply Project Filter checkbox to use the project parts filtering that was set up in the Default Project Properties dialog in addition to the filtering you are performing here (see page 71). There is a drop-down list for selecting the parts database field to which you wish the filtering to apply. In the Like field enter the value by which you wish to filter. This can include wildcard (*) entries such as *700* for any part numbers containing the number 700. Select the Apply Filter button to list the part numbers that match the filter. Select the Clear Filter button to remove the filter. Note:

When you enter the part number dialog, the software filters the parts database to only show part numbers for the symbol type to which you are assigning the part number. If you press the Clear Filter button the symbol name filter will also be removed. Additional filtering can be done using the drop-down list in each column heading that allows you to filter the listing.

Select All to display all parts. Select Blanks to display all records with no entry in that field. Select Non blanks to display all records where that field is not empty. You can also select any values that are already displayed in that column (TB in the example above). Select Custom to create a custom filter. The following dialog will appear:

296

Using Drawing Elements

The dialog will display the name of the current data field and provides two sets of fields for entering criteria. You can use one or both sets of fields. You can relate the two sets with an And condition or Or condition by selecting the appropriate radio button. The first field for each set of criteria allows you to select whether the criteria equals, does not equal, is greater than, is greater than or equal to, is less than, or is less than or equal to the value in the second field. The following example would display parts that have either PBNO or PBNC in the Schematic_Symbol field.

Select OK to apply the filter to the parts listing. Create a new part number - If you find you need to add a part number to the parts database, you can select the Create Part Number button in the Select Part Number dialog. After entering the new part number, you will be taken to the Parts Database Editor dialog (see page 630) where you can enter additional data. Use the Panduit button in the Select Part Number dialog to display the Panduit Form dialog which allows you to filter and select the best available Panduit wire containment parts. See page 640.

297

Using Drawing Elements

When you have selected the desired part(s), select the OK button to assign parts to the symbol. The selected symbols will appear in the Device Properties dialog.

Selected parts

By default, the first part you select will be marked as the “Primary” part number. This is the first of the selected parts that will be prompted when panel layout drawings are created. If you have selected multiple parts, you can choose a different one as primary if necessary. You can also use the Add button in the Device Properties dialog to assign a part number. When you select this button a blank set of part number fields are added and you can enter the desired part number here without going to the parts database. Note:

If you enter a new part number using the Add button it will only be assigned to this part; it will not be added to the parts database and will not be available for any other part. Select OK to complete the placement of the symbol. If you wish to see assigned part numbers displayed in the drawing beside the symbols, select the # button on the Display Settings toolbar. You can also use the View Options function under User Options in the Options dialog (see page 427).

298

Using Drawing Elements

Drawing Mode Manager The Drawing Mode Manager allows the user to edit the text that appears in menus and dialog boxes for any given drawing mode. This includes menu selections and the labels for buttons and fields in the dialog boxes. To activate the Mode Manager, select Manage > Mode Manager. The following dialog box will be displayed:

Existing drawing modes are listed in the Mode area on the left side of the dialog. The Internal Parts Database field indicates which field in the parts database contains the symbol name that is associated with each drawing mode.

Edit an Existing Drawing Mode To edit an existing drawing mode, use the following steps: 1. Select the desired mode in the Mode area on the left side of the dialog. 2. Select the desired language in the Language field at the top of the dialog. 3. Click on the “+” icon beside the “promis•e” entry in the center column. The display will expand to show all the dialogs for the selected drawing mode.

299

Using Drawing Elements

4. Click on one of the dialog names that you wish to edit. The field labels, button labels and prompts for that dialog will be listed on the right side of the dialog in the Unknown Mode column.

5. If you wish to compare these entries with another mode, you can select the other mode in the Reference Mode field. The corresponding entries for this mode will then appear in the Reference Mode column. If you wish to copy all the entries in the Reference Mode column into the Unknown Mode column, select the Copy button next to the Reference Mode field. You will be warned that this will overwrite the existing entries in the Unknown Mode column. 6. Select Apply or OK to save your changes.

Create a New Mode To create a new mode, use the following procedure: 1. Activate the Mode Manager (Manage > Mode Manager). 2. In the Language field, select the dialog language for the dialogs in the new mode. 300

Using Drawing Elements

3. Select the New button. The New/Rename Mode dialog will appear.

4. Enter a name for the new mode. This name must include the word “Mode” at the end (example: PID Mode). 5. Select OK. The name of the new mode will appear in the list of modes on the left side of the Mode Manager dialog. 6. Select (highlight) the name of the new mode and follow the instructions for editing an existing mode in order to make text changes for the new mode (see page 300). 7. Add a symbol field for the new mode in the parts database (example: PID_Symbol). This field will hold the names of symbols that will represent various parts in the new drawing mode. 8. Use the database Edit function in the promis-e Setup dialog to map the new database field to one of the unused “User” fields. See page 417.

Rename a Mode To rename a mode: 1. Activate the Mode Manager (Manage > Mode Manager). 2. In the Mode area of the dialog, select (highlight) the mode you wish to edit. 3. Select the Rename button. The Mode Create or Rename dialog will appear with a field showing the current mode name and a field for entering a new name. 4. Enter the new mode name in the Enter a New Name field. 5. Select OK.

301

Using Drawing Elements

Edit Drawing Elements Many editing functions can be found in the AutoCAD Modify menu. Other special functions are located in the promis•e menus.

Delete (Erase) Drawing Elements To erase (delete) an item or items from a drawing: 1. Select the object(s) you wish to delete, then right click on the objects and select Delete from the popup menu. In the AutoCAD version of the software you can also use the Modify > Erase function.You will be prompted on the command line to “Select objects.” Select the objects you wish to delete by clicking on them or by defining a window around them. Then press or click the right mouse button. In the MicroStation version of the software you can also use the Delete Element button in the Main tool box.

Copy Drawing Elements To copy an item or items in a drawing: 1. Select the object(s) you wish to copy, then right click on the objects and select Copy from the popup menu. 2. You will be prompted to “Specify base point” (AutoCAD version) or “Enter first point” (MicroStation version). Select a point on the drawing that will be the reference point of the copied objects. 3. You will be prompted to “Specify second point of displacement” (AutoCAD version) or “Enter point to define distance and direction” (MicroStation version). Select the destination reference point for the copied objects. The copied objects will then appear at the new location. In the AutoCAD version of the software you can also use the Modify > Copy function. In the MicroStation version of the software you can also use the Copy button in the Main tool box.

302

Using Drawing Elements

Move Drawing Elements To move an item or items in a drawing: 1. Select the object(s) you wish to move, then right click on the objects and select Move from the popup menu. 2. You will be prompted to “Specify base point” (AutoCAD version) or “Enter first point” (MicroStation version). Select a point on the drawing that will be the reference point of the selected objects. 3. You will be prompted to “Specify second point of displacement” (AutoCAD version) or “Enter point to define distance and direction” (MicroStation version). Select the destination reference point for the selected objects. The objects will then be moved to the new location. In the AutoCAD version of the software you can also use the Modify > Move function. In the MicroStation version of the software you can also use the Move button in the Manipulate tool box or you can simply select the elements and drag them to a new position.

303

Using Drawing Elements

Replace Symbol With the Replace Symbol function you can replace one type of symbol with another, on one page, on selected pages, or throughout a project. 1. Select Review/Revise > Replace Symbol. The Replace Symbol dialog will appear.

2. Use the Search field to select whether the replacement will occur on the current page, on selected pages, or in the entire project. 3. In the Find Symbol area, choose the symbol that will be replaced. If you select the Select Symbols radio button, the Select button will become active and you can select one or more symbols in the current drawing. Only the individual symbol(s) you select will be replaced. After selecting the desired symbol(s), right-click or press to return to the Replace Symbol dialog. If you select the Enter Symbol Name radio button, you can enter the symbol name or use the browse button to select from a list of symbols. 4. In the Replace with field, select the symbol that will replace the selected symbol(s). Use the browse button to make the selection. The Select Symbol dialog will appear. You can distinguish between the symbol in the catalog and the symbol in the project by looking at the Catalog column. This column indicates whether the symbol exists in the project or in a specific catalog as shown in the following figure. 304

Using Drawing Elements

Symbol exists in project or in catalog

5. Use the checkboxes in the Maintain on New Symbol area to select aspects of the existing symbol that you wish to preserve. 6. If you select the Use New Symbol Settings checkbox you can make settings that will apply to the replacement symbols. 7. Select OK in the Select Symbol dialog and in the Replace Symbol dialog to make the replacement.

305

Using Drawing Elements

Replace Device ID The Replace Device ID function allows you to renumber device IDs so that they consecutively follow the project’s device ID format. This is useful if there has been editing within the project and the symbol IDs no longer represent their positions in the schematic, or if there are gaps in the ID sequences. 1. Select Review/Revise > Replace Device ID. The Replace Device ID dialog will appear.

2. Use the Search field to select whether the renumbering will occur on the current page, on selected pages, or in the entire project. 3. To renumber device tags, select the Device Tag checkbox. All the devices IDs in the selected portion of the project will be renumbered according to the format that was selected in the Display Formats dialog in the project Options. See page 75 for more on device ID formats. 4. To renumber terminals or pins, select the Terminal/Pin-Plug checkbox. The First Number field will become active where you can enter the number that the first terminal (pin) in each strip (plug) is to have. Select either the X or Y sort direction in the Sort Direction field to determine the direction in which terminal numbering will proceed (X=horizontal, Y=vertical). Terminals or pins are numbered in ascending order of X coordinate and descending order of Y coordinate. If direction X is specified, terminals on the same X coordinate as one another are numbered first, followed by terminals on the next higher X coordinate, and so on across the page. The same applies by

306

Using Drawing Elements

analogy for direction Y. Terminal or pin numbers which are part of a macro are treated as a single unit and numbered in such a way as to indicate their association with one another. 5. To renumber IDs to match PLC addresses, there are two checkboxes. The Apply Schematic (PLC wired Device ID) format checkbox will assign the PLC address to the first non-terminal device connected to the PLC. The Apply Schematic (PLC wired Terminal ID) format checkbox will assign the PLC address to the first terminal connected to the PLC. These formats can be edited in the project Options, Display Formats dialog. See page 75. 6.

Select the OK button to perform the renumbering operation.

Replace Part Number The Replace Part Number function allows you to replace assigned part numbers throughout a project. 1. Select Review/Revise > Replace Part Number. The Replace Part Number dialog will appear.

2. Use the Search field to select whether the replacement will occur on the current page, on selected pages, or in the entire project. 3. There are two fields labeled Old and New. In the Old field enter the existing part number that you wish to change. (You can select the browse button in the Old field to see a list of existing part numbers in the current project. You can select from this list.)

307

Using Drawing Elements

4. In the corresponding New field to the right, enter the new part number that will replace the old part number. You can use the browse button in the New field to display the Select Part Number dialog (see page 295). After you complete a set of old and new values, you can click below them to enter additional sets. 5. Select the OK button to execute the change. The old part number will be changed to the new part number wherever it has been assigned in the selected portion of the project.

Replace Text The Replace Text function allows you to globally replace device tags, symbol text or standard text on the currently active drawing page. 1. Select Review/Revise > Replace Text. The Replace Text dialog will appear.

2. Use the Search field to select whether the replacement will occur on the current page, on selected pages, or in the entire project. 3. In the Text Type field, select the kind of text you are replacing. The choices are: Text (normal drawing text), Device Tag and Symbol Attribute. 4. In the Old field enter the text that you wish to replace. Any text entered will be treated as a wildcard entry. In other words, it will find the specified characters even if they exist in a longer string of text (of the selected type). 5. In the New field enter the new text that is to replace the old text. 308

Using Drawing Elements

6. Select the Case Sensitive checkbox to make the replace function apply only to text that exactly matches the upper/lower case letters entered in the Old field. 7. Select the OK button to execute the replace. 8. The software will search for the first occurrence of the old text. It will then display the text in the dialog box.

To Replace One Occurrence of the Text – Select the Exchange button. To Replace All Occurrences of the Text – Select the Exchange All button. To Skip the Replace for the Current Occurrence – Select the Next button. The current occurrence will remain unchanged and the software will seek the next occurrence. To Exit the Replace Function – Select the Cancel button.

309

Using Drawing Elements

Replace Symbol Attributes The Replace Symbol Attributes function allows you to replace attribute text of any existing symbols based on device ID and attribute prompt from a text file. 1. Select Review/Revise > Replace Symbol Text. The Replace Symbol Attributes dialog will appear.

2. In the Replace In area, select the radio button for Project if you wish to replace text throughout an entire project. Select the Active Page radio button if you wish to replace text only on a selected page. 3. In the Selected Project field, use the browse button to select the project where the replacement will occur. 4. In the Selected Page field, select the page of the project on which you wish the replacement to occur. (This field is only active if the Active Page radio button is selected). 5. In the Input File field, use the browse button to locate and select the file that contains the replacement symbol text. The file containing the symbol text should be an ASCII file with lines containing the following information, each item in quotes and separated by commas: “installation”,“location”,“device tag”,“attribute name”, “new text string” 6. Select the OK button to perform the replacement.

310

Using Drawing Elements

Replace Title Block If you wish to replace the title block on one or more pages with a different title block, use the following procedure. 1. Select the Review/Revise > Replace Title Block function. The Replace Title Block dialog will appear.

2. In the Search field, select how many pages you wish to affect with the change. There are three choices: Entire project - perform the replacement on all pages containing the selected (old) title block. Current page - perform the replacement on the current page only. Select pages - perform the replacement on all pages containing the selected title block. 3. In the Old field, select the existing title block that you wish to replace. When you click inside the Old field, a browse button will appear which you can select to display a list of title blocks used in the project. Click on the name of the desired title block and select OK. Note:

If there is a default entry in the Name field, you may need to clear it to see a complete list of title blocks.

311

Using Drawing Elements

4. In the New field, select the name of the title block that is to replace the old title block. Use the browse button to display the Select Title Block dialog where you can select the desired new title block.

5. If you wish to replace more than one type of title block, you can create additional Old/New pairs.

6. Select the OK button to perform the title block replacement.

312

Using Drawing Elements

Replace Page Format The Replace Page Format function allows you to replace the page format used by one or more pages of your project. 1. Select Review/Revise > Replace Page Format. The Replace Page Format dialog will appear.

2. Use the Search field to select whether the replacement will occur on the current page, on selected pages, or in the entire project. 3. In the Old field, select the existing page format that you wish to replace. When you click inside the Old field, a browse button will appear which you can select to display a list of page formats used in the project. 4. In the New field, select the name of the page format that is to replace the old page format. Use the browse button to display the Select page format dialog where you can select the desired new page format. 5. If you wish to replace more than one page format, you can create additional Old/New pairs. 6. Select the OK button to perform the replacement.

313

Using Drawing Elements

Align Components If there are symbols in a drawing that are not lined up and you wish to have them so, you can use the Align Components function to align them in one simple procedure. 1. Select the Design > Align Components function. 2. You will be prompted on the command line to “Select symbols.” Select the items you wish to align. Right click or press when all the symbols are selected.

Select symbols Select lineup point

314

Using Drawing Elements

3. You will be prompted to “Select the first point” and then to “Select the second point.” Select two points that define a line upon which you wish the symbol reference points to be located. The symbols will move to line up on this line.

Select first point

Select second point

The symbols will move to line up on this line.

You can align objects horizontally or vertically according to the points that you select.

315

Using Drawing Elements

Edit Components You can use the Edit Components function to perform the same operation on a selected group of symbols. 1. Select Design > Edit Components. 2. You will be prompted to Select Objects. Select the desired items either by windowing around them or by clicking on individual items. Right click or press to complete the selection. 3. The following pop-up menu will appear.

Select the desired operation from the menu. If applicable to the selected items, the operation will be prompted for each item sequentially.

316

Using Drawing Elements

Wiring Diagrams A wiring diagram is a drawing where layout symbols represent devices in the control system. Unlike panel layouts, the software will place connection information beside each layout symbol in the wiring diagram to show what the device is connected to. The connection information comes from the schematic drawings or shortest distance routing. Wiring diagrams are useful for installation and troubleshooting. Schematic Diagram

Wiring Diagram

CR203 1273 A1

A2

Part Number: 700-N800-A1 Parts Database

When creating a wiring diagram, you select items from a list of device IDs that have already been used in a schematic drawing. The software knows the part number that was assigned to the device ID. It then uses the information in the parts database to prompt an appropriate wiring diagram symbol for that part. You can make settings related to wiring diagrams in the Wiring Diagram Settings dialog (Devices tab). See page 100.

317

Using Drawing Elements

Wiring Diagram Symbols vs. Wiring Diagram Charts In order to be prompted with a wiring diagram symbol while creating wiring diagrams, you must assign the symbol name in the Wire_Diagram_Symbol field in the parts database records for the parts that you use in your projects. A number of wiring diagram symbols are included with the software. The names of these symbols begin with “W-”. If you create your own symbols it is recommended that you follow this naming convention, although it is not required. Rather than using wiring diagram symbols, you also have the option of representing devices with wiring diagram charts. These are small tables that show each device’s connection information. No symbol creation or parts database editing is required when using wiring diagram charts. Wiring Diagram Symbol

Wiring Diagram Chart

You can make settings related to wiring diagram symbols in the Wiring Diagram Settings dialog (Devices tab). See page 100. You can make settings related to wiring diagram charts in the Wiring Diagram Settings dialog (Wiring Diagram Charts tab). See page 104. See page 360 for information on creating wiring diagram symbols.

318

Using Drawing Elements

Create Wiring Diagram To create a wiring diagram, use the following procedure: 1. Create a new page and select the Wiring Diagram Mode for the drawing mode. (You can also switch an existing page to Wiring Diagram Mode.) 2. Select the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device ID function. The Insert Symbol(s) dialog will appear.

See page 219 for more information about this dialog. When working on a wiring diagram page, there is one additional checkbox, Always Place Wiring Diagram Chart, which you can select if you wish to place charts instead of wiring diagram symbols.

319

Using Drawing Elements

3. Select one or more items to place in the drawing (hold down the or keys to select more than one item). Select the Place Symbols button. If you select more than one item you can place them as a group. You can make settings to determine how symbols are placed as a group. To do this, select the Group Settings link in the lower left corner of the Insert Symbols (by Device ID) dialog. See page 548 for an explanation of these settings. Note:

Do not use the option Use X, Y from Parts database option in the Group Settings dialog; the X and Y values in the parts database represent the footprint of the panel layout symbol only. 4. You will be prompted to pick an insertion point in the drawing. Click on the desired point. The symbol or chart will appear at this point. 5. The Symbol Text dialog will appear if the symbol includes any symbol text. Make any desired changes to the displayed text. You can de-select the Visible checkbox for a text if you wish it to be hidden in the drawing. 6. If connection information does not appear at the wiring diagram symbol, you can select the promis-e Output > Update Wiring Diagram function. The Update Wiring Diagram dialog will appear.

This dialog allows you to select the pages that will be updated. There are also checkboxes that allow you to include (by selecting the checkbox) or exclude (by de-selecting the checkbox) Terminals/Plugs, Devices and Cable Cross References. Select OK to update the drawing with connection information. If you wish the connection information to appear automatically as you place symbols, you can select the Dynamically Update Connections checkbox in the Wiring Diagram Settings dialog (Devices tab). See page 100.

320

Creating Drawing Elements

6

Creating Drawing Elements This section describes how users can create custom symbols, macros, and other elements for use in promis•e drawings.

Managing Symbols and Symbol Catalogs Symbol Catalogs and Directories Symbols, macros and device families for a given type of application or drawing format are organized into symbol catalogs, also known as symbol libraries. There are available catalogs for ANSI-IEEE (electrical), IEC (electrical), ISA (process control), hydraulic, pneumatic and various other symbols. Symbol Catalog Path The catalog path determines which catalogs are available when creating projects. The catalog path is set in the promis•e setup mode (see page 407). The first directory named in this path is the directory where all newly created symbols will be stored. Edit the path statement if you wish symbols to be stored in a different directory. You can view and edit the symbol catalog path in the promis•e Setup dialog. There is a Modify Catalog Path button in the catalog manager toolbar (see page 323) that will take you to the setup dialog. You can also select the promis•e Setup toolbar button in the Project Manager.

Catalog Manager The Catalog Manager provides an easy, organized interface to promis•e symbol catalogs that is similar to the Windows Explorer. It allows you to copy, cut and paste items between catalogs, and create new catalogs. The Catalog Manager also allows you to create and edit device families. Note:

The Catalog Manager has an Auto Hide button in the lower left corner of the dialog that sets whether or not the information area of the Catalog Manager will be hidden if you move the cursor back to the drawing area (so it is not in the way). If auto hide is turned on, you can click on the Catalog Manager title bar to display the full dialog. 321

Creating Schematic Elements

To access the Catalog Manager, select Design > Catalog Manager. The following dialog will appear

There is a folder on the left side of the dialog for symbol catalogs. By clicking on the “+” icon next to the folder, you can expand the display to show a sub-folder for each symbol catalog on your system. Each catalog has sub-folders for symbols, macros, title blocks and families. When you select (highlight) one of these sub-folders, the contents of that folder will be listed in the right side of the dialog.

322

Creating Drawing Elements

On the right side of the catalog manager is a toolbar that allows you to perform various operations. If you hover the cursor over a button, a tooltip will appear that identifies the function. Toolbar

When you select an individual symbol in a catalog, a thumbnail view of that symbol will appear at the bottom of the catalog manager dialog. If you wish to view a folder as thumbnails (rather than file details) select the Thumbnail button on the toolbar. Select the Details button to return to the file details view.

323

Creating Schematic Elements

Renaming Items If you wish to rename symbols, macros or title blocks, right-click on the item in the the Catalog Manager and select Rename from the pop-up menu. The Modify dialog will appear.

Change the name of the item and the description (optional) and select OK. Searching for Items If you wish to search the listing of items in the Catalog Manager, select the search button (binocular icon). The Search dialog will appear:

Select the radio button for Name or Description depending on what you wish to search for. Then enter a search string in the Search string field. You can make wildcard (*) entries. Select OK. The listed items will be reduced to any items that match your search string. Moving Items from Catalog to Catalog Use the following procedure to copy symbols, macros, families and title blocks from one catalog to another. 1. Using the Catalog Manager, open the folder for the catalog that contains the items you wish to copy. 2. Select the sub-folder for the items you wish to copy (Symbols, Macros, etc.). The items in that catalog will be listed on the right side of the dialog. 324

Creating Drawing Elements

3. Highlight the names of the items that you wish to copy. 4. Copy the items by one of these methods: A. Right click on the selected items and select Copy from the popup menu. B. Use the Copy toolbar button. 5. Open the folder for the catalog where you wish to place the copied items. 6. Select the sub-folder where you wish to place the copied items (Symbols, Macros, etc.). 7. Paste the items using one of these methods: A. Right click on the sub-folder and select Paste from the popup menu. B. Use the Paste toolbar button. Note:

If you are copying macros or families, either the individual symbols included in symbol or macro should also be copied to the new catalog or the catalog path to the original catalog should be included on the system where you will use the copied items.

Note:

If you wish to remove the items from the original catalog at the same time, use the Cut function instead of the Copy function.

Deleting Items from a Catalog 1. Using the Catalog Manager, open the folder for the catalog that contains the items you wish to delete. 2. Select the sub-folder for the items you wish to delete (Symbols, Macros, etc.). The items in that folder will be listed on the right side of the dialog. 3. Highlight the names of the items that you wish to delete. 4. Delete the items using one of these methods: A. Right click on the selected items and select Delete from the popup menu. B. Use the Delete toolbar button. Creating a New Symbol Catalog Path and File In the Catalog Manager you can use the Modify Catalog Path toolbar button which will take you to the promis•e Setup dialog. See page 411 for additional instructions.

325

Creating Schematic Elements

Categories Inside a Catalog “Categories” are divisions (sub-folders) that you can create within a catalog. This allows you to group items within the catalog in a way that is convenient for you. To create a category, open the Catalog Manager, right click on the desired catalog name, and select New Category from the popup menu.

The New Category dialog will appear, allowing you to enter a name for the category. Enter the name and select OK. Once the category is created, you can copy items into it by dragging from the right side of the dialog into the category folder.

Export and Import Catalogs The Catalog Manager has an export function that creates a backup file of an entire catalog or of selected elements within a catalog. This exported file is useful both as a backup and as a way of providing catalogs to another user. 326

Creating Drawing Elements

Export Catalog To export catalog content: 1. In the Catalog Manager, if you wish to export an entire catalog, highlight the name of a catalog. If you wish to export selected items in a catalog, highlight the names of the desired symbols, macros, title blocks, or families. 2. Select the Export Catalog button on the right side of the Catalog Manger.

Export Catalog button

3. The Export Catalog dialog will appear.

In the Export Path field, use the browse button to select the folder where the backup file will be stored. When you select the browse button, the Save As dialog will appear, allowing you to select the folder and also enter a name for the backup file in the File name field. This file will be given a .ctlg extension automatically. 327

Creating Schematic Elements

4. Select the With Category Info checkbox if you wish to include the category information (see page 326) in the backup file. 5. Select OK to create the backup file. The information in this file can be restored with the Import Catalog function.

328

Creating Drawing Elements

Import Catalog Information stored in a catalog backup file can be restored with the Import Catalog function. To import catalog content: 1. In the Catalog Manager, select the Import Catalog button on the right side of the Catalog Manger.

Import Catalog button

2. The Import Catalog dialog will appear.

In the Catalog File field, use the browse button to locate and select the catalog backup file (.ctlg extension).

329

Creating Schematic Elements

In the Target Path field, use the browse button to locate and select the folder where you wish to restore the catalog (or the folder containing the existing catalog into which you wish to restore the items). If you are going to restore the backup as a separate catalog, enter the name that you wish the restored catalog to have in the Catalog Name field. If you wish to restore the backed up items into an existing catalog, select the To Existing Catalog checkbox, then select the desired catalog in the Existing Catalog field. 3. Select OK to restore the backed up items.

330

Creating Drawing Elements

Create Symbols Symbol Elements Creating a symbol involves drawing the symbol itself and also defining the related information shown in the following illustration. CR 103 8501XD1000V02

Device ID Part Number

Reference Point

Connection Points A

Connection Point Text

B

CONTROL RELAY

Symbol Text

ELEMENTS OF AN ANSI-IEEE SYMBOL Reference Point A1

Device ID

-K2 8501XD1000V02 A2

Connection Points

Connection Point Text

Part Number

LOW TEMP RELAY

Symbol Text

ELEMENTS OF AN IEC SYMBOL

Device ID – A device ID tag must be defined for intelligent symbol types. The rest of the device ID is added to this tag at the time the symbol is placed on the drawing. In the illustration above, “CR” is used as the tag for control relay device IDs. The rest of the ID is filled in automatically when the symbol is placed in a drawing and might consist of consecutive numbers, page number, line number, or a combination of these (this is determined in the Project Parameters dialog box when a new project is created). Insertion Point – An insertion point must be defined. This point will be positioned on the cursor when the symbol is placed in the drawing. Connection Points – These points determine where wires will break when the symbol is placed on a wires or when a wires is drawn through the symbol. Wires must be drawn to connection points on symbols to allow the connections to appear in the wire list.

331

Creating Schematic Elements

If desired, Connection Point Text can be defined that will automatically label the connection points when the symbol is placed (such as A and B terminations on a relay coil). Symbol Text – This is optional, additional text which will appear with the symbol. Symbol text can be fixed text, or it can be configured to prompt the user for information (Amp values, for example) when the symbol is placed. Part Number (Optional) – You can enter a part number during symbol creation so that this part number will be automatically prompted whenever the symbol is placed.

332

Creating Drawing Elements

Symbol Creation Procedure Symbols created with this procedure become part of a promis•e symbol catalog and can be accessed at any time during drawing creation. The symbol will be stored in the first catalog search path (see page 411). To create a symbol: 1. Select Manage > Create Symbol. The following dialog will appear. Note:

The Symbol Creation Wizard dialog consists of step buttons on the left and a settings area on the right. There is an Auto Hide button in the lower left corner of the dialog that sets whether or not the settings area will be hidden if you move the cursor back to the drawing area (so it is not in the way). If auto hide is turned on, you can click on the desired step button to display the setting area again.

Auto Hide button

333

Creating Schematic Elements

In this step you have four options for creating a symbol: • Select the New Symbol (From Scratch) radio button if you are creating a

Note:

new symbol that will be added to the catalog and you will be drawing the graphics as you create the symbol. • Select the New Symbol (Import Symbol Graphics) radio button if you are creating a new symbol that will be added to the catalog and you will be using existing graphics (blocks or cells or elements on a drawing) while creating the symbol. • If you wish to select an existing symbol on which to base the new symbol, select the New Symbol (Based on Another Symbol) radio button. A field is provided where you can enter the existing symbol’s name or select the browse button to display the Select Symbol dialog from which you can preview and select a symbol. • If you merely wish to edit some aspect of an existing symbol (without creating a new symbol), select the Modify Existing Symbol radio button and use the browse button to select it. The step numbers shown in the Symbol Creation Wizard will vary, depending on which radio button you selected in step 1. Select the Next button to continue.

334

Creating Drawing Elements

2. Import Symbol Graphics - The following dialog will appear if you selected the New Symbol (Import Symbol Graphics) radio button in step 1 (if you did not, continue to the next step).

In this step you define the graphic elements of the symbol. There are several ways to accomplish this. You can: • Select elements that already exist in the current page • Draw the desired elements • Use an existing block (AutoCAD) or cell (MicroStation)

To select elements in the current page, select the Select Objects button. In the drawing screen, you will be prompted to select objects. Click on or window around the objects that will make up the symbol. Press when all items have been selected. Select the Next button to continue to the next step. If you wish to de-select the objects you have selected, click on the Clear Selection button. To draw elements for the symbol, go to the drawing screen, draw the symbol graphics using the line, circle, rectangle and other drawing tools as needed. (Note: use lines, not wires to draw symbol graphics.) When the desired graphics are drawn, return to the Symbol Creation Wizard and use the Select Objects button as described above. Select the Next button to continue to the next step. If

335

Creating Schematic Elements

you are basing the new symbol on an existing symbol (selected in step 1), the graphic elements of that symbol will appear in the drawing area when you define the device ID in a later step. To use an existing block, select the browse button next to the Block/Cell field. Browse to the desired block file and select the Open button. The path and filename for the block or cell will appear in the Block/Cell field. If the block contains attribute text, select the Extract Block Attributes button to list these in the Mapping Attributes area of the dialog. You can then use the right-hand column to assign these to a corresponding promis•e attribute.

When you click in the promis•e Attribute column, a list of available attributes will appear from which you can make a selection.

Note:

If you don’t wish to map the attributes at this time you can do so later in the Specify Attributes step. Select the Next button to continue. A blank drawing screen will appear with the prompt “Select block insertion point” click on a point in the drawing screen to insert the block. Select the Next button to continue.

336

Creating Drawing Elements

3. Specify Symbol Type - The following dialog will appear. Note:

If you are creating a symbol from scratch, a blank drawing screen will appear. Draw the symbol graphics using the line, circle, rectangle and other drawing tools as needed. Use lines, not wires to draw symbol graphics. Be aware of the grid spacing that will be used in your drawings so that connection points are properly spaced; connection points must always be on this grid. When the desired graphics are drawn, return to the Symbol Creation Wizard and continue.

Define the characteristics of the symbol that determine how the symbol behaves in drawings. The Preferred Orientation radio buttons determine how the software will look at the symbol when generating a connection list. It also determines how wires will be broken or closed when the symbol is placed or moved. Select Horizontal if the symbol is to be scanned from left to right (in other words, if the wire will be horizontal in relation to the symbol). Select the Vertical button if the symbol is to be scanned from top to bottom (i.e., if the wire will be vertical in relation to the symbol, as in IEC format drawings).

337

Creating Schematic Elements

Preferred orientation horizontal

Preferred orientation vertical

As an option, you can specify a prefix for the cross reference for this symbol. In the Cross Reference Prefix field, select a prefix from the drop-down list (NO, NC, INPUT, OUTPUT). If you wish to accentuate this cross reference text, there is an underscore setting in the Device Cross Referencing dialog (see page 79). In the Symbol Type area, select the radio button for the symbol type that best matches the symbol you are creating. Select the Next button to continue. 4. Import Connection Points - The following dialog will appear.

This step allows you to import connection point designations from an existing symbol or family. These can then be used in the “Place Connection Points” step, saving you from having to remember and re-enter this information. If you don’t wish to import connection points, select Next to go to the next step. Note:

If you are basing the new symbol on an existing symbol (selected in step 1), the connection points of that symbol will appear in the drawing area when you define the device ID in a later step, so you can skip this step. Click on the Select Symbol button to display the Select Symbol dialog from which you can preview and select a symbol.

338

Creating Drawing Elements

If you are creating a panel layout or wiring diagram symbol, the Import Connection Points From a Family radio button will be available, allowing you to import connection designations from parent and child symbols at the same time. Use the Select Family button to select the desired family. Select the Next button to continue. 5. Specify Device ID - The following dialog will appear.

In this dialog you enter a tag mnemonic. This is the portion of the device tag that will be given to every instance of this symbol, such as “K” or “CR” for a relay (see page 77). Select the Suppress Display of ID checkbox if you wish the device ID to be suppressed by default. When the symbol is placed, the Suppress Device ID checkbox in the Device Properties dialog will be selected by default. (See page 221.) Select the Default Tag = ? checkbox if you wish the user to be prompted to enter the device tag when the symbol is placed instead of having the software automatically assign the device tag. Typically this is done for child symbols so that you can associate the child symbol with the device tag of a selected parent symbol. When the symbol is placed, the Device Tag field in the Device Properties dialog (see page 221) will show the tag mnemonic followed by a “?”.

339

Creating Schematic Elements

Enter the desired character(s) for the tag in the Tag Mnemonic field. Then select the Place button to select a position for the device tag by clicking in the drawing. (Note: you may wish to zoom in on the graphic before selecting Place.) After you select a position, the dialog will reappear with the coordinates of the selected point in the X and Y fields. Coordinates are from the drawing origin. You can adjust the values, if desired. If the symbol type you selected in step 2 was Terminal or Plug, there will also be Terminal/Pin # fields in the dialog. The Place button for these fields allows you to select a position for the terminal block number on a terminal symbol. In other words, the device tag will identify the terminal strip and then you will have this second value to identify the block within the terminal strip. Similarly, for plug symbols you can pick a position for the pin number. After you pick a position, the coordinates will appear in the X and Y fields.

Use the Default Text Style field to set the appearance of the device tag. Select the Edit button to display a dialog where you can make various text settings. Use the Text Align field to set the orientation of the text to the point that is selected. Text will be placed in relation to the selected point as shown: Top Left:

TEXT

Top Center:

TEXT

Top Right:

TEXT

Middle Left:

TEXT

Middle Center:

TEXT

Middle Right:

TEXT

Bottom Left:

TEXT

Bottom Center:

TEXT

Bottom Right:

TEXT

Baseline Left:

TEXT

Baseline Center:

TEXT

Baseline Right:

TEXT

Use the Insert Symbol button to place an existing symbol in the symbol you are creating. This is useful, for example, if you wish to put contact symbols in a cross reference symbol for a relay or add fuse symbols to a disconnect switch. 340

Creating Drawing Elements

When you select the button, the Insert Symbols dialog appears, allowing you to select a symbol. If you only want the graphic portion of the symbol you are inserting, you will have to delete the unwanted connection points, etc. Select the Next button to continue. 6. Place Connection Points - The following dialog will appear.

If you have imported connection points in an earlier step or are basing the new symbol on an existing symbol, the connection points will be listed. If not: A. Enter the number of connection points that the symbol will have in the Number of Connection Points field. Press the key. Fields will appear for the number of connection points that you entered.

341

Creating Schematic Elements

B. For each connection point, enter in the Visible Text field any connection point designations that you wish to appear beside the connection point. If you want hidden text to be associated with the connection point, enter it in the Hidden Text field. C. In the Type column, select the type of connection point being defined. The choices in the drop-down list will vary depending on the kind of symbol being created. Choices include Schematic, Hydraulic, Pneumatic and PLC. D. In the Potential Group field, you can assign a potential group name. Usually each connection point has a different potential group name. If you make no entry in this field, the software will assume the connection points have different potential groups. However, if two or more connection points on the symbol are given the same potential group name and are connected to wires, the same potential (wire number) will be assigned to these wires. In other words, the potential will carry through the symbol. This is useful when working with flex I/Os. Note: when creating terminal symbols, the same potential group name is assigned to all connection points by default. E. If you are creating a terminal or plug symbol, there will be a Configuration field for each connection point where you can designate which side of the terminal or plug the connection point is to represent, or if it is to be a jumper.

F. (At this point you may wish to zoom in on the symbol graphic.) When you are ready to position the connection points, select (highlight) one from the list and select the Place button. Following the prompts on the command line, select the position for the connection point and then the position for the connection point text. Repeat this step for each additional connection point. Use the Select All button if you wish to select all the connection points and place them one after another. Note:

342

It is important to turn on the Snap function when placing connection points so that they are correctly positioned on the drawing grid. Connection points must always be on this grid.

Creating Drawing Elements

G. If you check the Array checkbox you will be able to place a group of connection points in one step. (Use the Select All button and when you place the connection points. The Array dialog will appear.)

This dialog allows you to define the number of rows and columns, enter spacing (offset) values for the connection points and set the placement priority for rows and columns. Use the Default Text Style fields to set text parameters for the connection point text (before they are placed). There are separate fields for Connection Point, PLC Address and PLC Function Text. These settings can be overridden by the Use Text Style checkbox under Symbol Text in the project options Text Settings dialog (see page 98). Use the Text Align field to set the orientation of the text to the point that is selected. If you imported an existing block with attributes in an earlier step, you can use the Map Connection Point Text button to select the existing text and then choose a connection point position. Follow the prompts.

343

Creating Schematic Elements

If you select the Connection Point Editor button, all the connection points will be listed together in a table-format editor allowing you to easily edit various parameters. It is possible to select multiple connection points in this editor and assign the same value to all of them.

Select the Next button to continue.

344

Creating Drawing Elements

7. Specify Attributes - The following dialog will appear.

Symbol attributes can be set up to prompt for text that is entered by the user at the time the symbol is placed. Select the desired attribute from the list and then select the Place button (the one immediately below the attribute list) to place in on the symbol. There are tabs that group the available attributes into Standard Attributes, Cross Reference Attributes and Part Database Attributes. If you wish a particular value to be assigned automatically to this symbol whenever it is placed, scroll down to the relevant attribute and enter the desired value in the Default Value column. For example, you can enter a part number for the PartNumber attribute that you always want to assign to this symbol. After you place an attribute in the drawing, it will be marked in the list with an “X” in the left-most column. If you are basing the symbol on imported symbol graphics with attributes, the Map Existing Text button will be active. This allows you to map an attribute from the list to one that exists in the drawing. Select the desired attribute from the list, select the Map Existing Text button, and then click on the desired attribute in the drawing.

345

Creating Schematic Elements

If you wish to combine attributes, select the Build button to display the Build Expression dialog. Here you can select and combine attributes into an “expression.” Select an attribute and use the Add to Expression button to add it to the expression displayed at the bottom of the dialog.

Select OK to return to the symbol creation wizard and then use the Place button to place the expression. If you wish to add an attribute to the list of attributes, select the “+” button at the bottom of the list. The Append Attribute dialog will appear.

346

Creating Drawing Elements

Enter values for the name of the attribute, a prompt that will appear when the symbol is placed, a default value, and whether the attribute will be visible or invisible in the drawing. Select the “Use same text” checkboxes to use the same values in all languages. Select OK to enter the new attribute. It will now be available when creating new symbols. Use the Text Style field to set text parameters for the attribute texts (before they are placed). Use the Text Align field to set the orientation of the text to the point that is selected. The cross reference attribute can be placed on a standard symbol to control the position of cross reference text if it is a child symbol or duplicate ID. Select the Next button to continue.

347

Creating Schematic Elements

8. Specify Position - The following dialog will appear. In this dialog you select the insertion point for the symbol and for the cross reference text (if any).

The insertion point represents the cursor position when the symbol is placed in the drawing. It determines how the symbol is placed in relation to the selected point. Use the Pick Point button and click on the desired point in the drawing screen. The coordinates of the selected point will appear in the X and Y fields. These values can be adjusted if desired. Select the Snap to Endpoint checkbox if you wish the symbol to automatically snap to the nearest endpoint of the wire upon which it is placed. This feature is often used for wirelink symbols and PLC child symbols. The cross reference symbol position will determine where the cross reference symbol for a parent symbol will appear in relation to the symbol (if there is a cross reference symbol). Use the Pick Point button and click on the desired point in the drawing screen. The coordinates of the selected point will appear in the X and Y fields. These values can be adjusted if desired. Use the Delete button to remove a selected point. Select the Next button to continue.

348

Creating Drawing Elements

9. The following dialog will appear. In this dialog you enter the symbol’s name and description and select a catalog in which it will be saved.

Enter a name for the symbol in the Symbol Name field. Enter a description for the symbol in the Description field. Use the Search Language Phrases button to select and place phrases from the language database into the Description field. These phrases are displayed in the language that is currently selected (Project Options - Display Languages). In the Save in field, select the symbol catalog in which the symbol will be stored. Select Finish to save the new symbol.

349

Creating Schematic Elements

Modify an Existing Symbol If there is an existing symbol that you wish to modify, use the following procedure: 1. Select Manage > Create Symbol. The following dialog will appear.

2. Select the Modify Existing Symbol radio button. Enter the existing symbol’s name in the field or select the browse button to display the Select Symbol dialog from which you can preview and select a symbol. 3. Select Next to continue. The selected symbol will appear on the drawing screen so that you can change the graphics, if desired. To change other aspects of the symbol, go to the appropriate step of the Symbol Creation Wizard and follow the same instructions used for creating a new symbol (see page 333). 4. When you have made the desired changes, go to the last step of the Symbol Creation Wizard and select the Finish button to save the symbol. 5. You will be prompted that the symbol already exists and asked if you wish to overwrite it. Select Yes.

350

Creating Drawing Elements

Creating an Example PLC Parent Symbol Programmable logic controllers (PLCs) are a part of many control systems. With promis•e, symbols can be created that represent PLC input and output modules. The symbol can be designed to prompt the user for information such as rack and module number, and automatically place address numbers and descriptive text. In this section we will create an example PLC symbol like the one shown below called EXPLC8. L1 101 102 103

L2

ANSI-IEEE Example RACK: 1

PLC102

104 01

1002

107 108

Limit sw. 2

1005

Limit sw. 3

1006

Limit sw. 4

1007

Limit sw. 5

1008

Limit sw. 6

Descriptive Text

06

117 118

1004

I/O Addresses

05

115 116

Limit sw. 1

04

113 114

1003 03

111 112

Terminal Numbers

02

109 110

Rack And Module Group

1001

105 106

Device ID

MODULE: 0

07

119 08

351

Creating Schematic Elements

IEC Example

-S9

02

03

04

05

06

1001/01

1001/02

1001/03

1001/04

1001/05

1001/06

LINE 6 START

-S8

LINE 5 START

-S7

LINE 4 START

01

-S6

LINE 3 START

RACk: 03

-S5

LINE 2 START

PLC102

-S4

LINE 1 START

-S3

-S10

07 1001/07

08 1001/02 8

Device ID

Rack And Module Group

Terminal Numbers

I/O Addresses

LINE 8 START

LINE 7 START

MODULE: 02

Descriptive Text

This symbol is considered a parent symbol. Child symbols for the individual I/O points can be located throughout the schematics in the same project. The following procedure describes how to create a symbol for an eight point PLC input module. 1. Select the Manage > Create Symbol function. The Symbol Create Wizard will start. In this example we are creating a symbol “from scratch” so select the New Symbol (from Scratch) radio button in the first step and then select Next.

352

Creating Drawing Elements

2. In step 2, select the symbol’s orientation (how wires will connect). Usually this is Horizontal for ANSI-IEEE drawings and Vertical for IEC drawings. Also select the PLC radio button to define the symbol type.

Select Next to continue. 3. We will skip step 3 (Import Connection Points) of the Symbol Create Wizard because we are not going to import connection points in this example. However, it is possible, if you have an existing PLC symbol with a similar connection point layout, to import them and save some time. However, at this point we can draw the graphics of our symbol. Use the Draw > Line function to draw the sides of a rectangle about 2 x 9 inches (50 x 230 mm.). It must be long enough for the input lines and wide enough for the address text. If necessary the rectangle can be redrawn before saving the symbol. If desired, use the circle and drawing line functions to draw terminal screw heads. (There is also a symbol named “SCREW” included in the library. You will have to select a smaller grid size to do this, but place the screws on your standard schematic line (grid) spacing. Leave about 1 inch (25 mm) free at one end of the box for rack and module information.

353

Creating Schematic Elements

101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115

Continue to step 4. 4. In step 4 (Specify Device ID) enter “PLC” in the Tag Mnemonic field. Select the Place button and click on a the desired position for the device ID in the drawing. Select Next to continue.

354

Creating Drawing Elements

5. In step 5, define the symbol’s connection points. Enter the value 8 in the Number of Connection Points field. Press the key. Eight fields will appear in the dialog.

In the Visible Text column, enter a connection point designation for each connection point: 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08. (These designations will be overwritten if the device family that is selected when the symbol is placed contains different designations.) The Type field should contain the entry “PLC Address” automatically because we defined this as a PLC symbol in step 2. In the Input/Output column, select whether each point is an input or an output. Text Settings - If you wish to set the default text styles, make the desired settings in the Default Text Style area before you place the connections points. Changes to text settings will not affect connection points that have already been defined. These settings can be overridden by the Use Text Style checkbox under Symbol Text in the project options Text Settings dialog (see page 98).

355

Creating Schematic Elements

To position the connection points, select (highlight) one from the list and select the Place button. Use the Select All button if you wish to select all the connection points and place them one after another. Following the prompts on the command line, select the position for: A. Connection point - The point where the wire will attach to the symbol. B. Connection point text - The connection point designations you entered above in the Visible Text column. C. Address text - The PLC address for each point. Note that the addressing format is set in the project options PLC dialog (see page 88) - it is not part of the symbol itself. D. Function text - Descriptive text for each point. E. Repeat these steps for each additional connection point. 6. In step 6 symbol attributes can be set up to prompt for and display text that is entered by the user at the time the symbol is placed. With this symbol, we want the user to be prompted for rack and module numbers. First we must enter plain text on the symbol to act as labels for these values. Enter the words “RACK:” and “MODULE:” as shown.

356

Creating Drawing Elements

Then in the step 6 dialog, make any desired text settings for the rack and module values in the Text Style field. Then scroll down the list of attributes (the Standard Attributes tab should be selected) pick the Rack attribute, select the Place button at the top of the dialog and click on a position next to the “RACK:” text that you placed in the symbol.

Do the same for the Module attribute. The attribute value positions will be marked by “?” characters.

Select Next to continue. 357

Creating Schematic Elements

7. In step 7, select the insertion point for the symbol.

Select the Pick Point button in the Insertion Point area of the dialog and click on the upper left corner of the symbol. A red arrow marks the selected point. Select Next to continue.

358

Creating Drawing Elements

8. Finally in step 8, name and save the symbol. Enter “EXPLC” in the Symbol Name field. Enter a description of the symbol in the Description field. In the Save in field you can select the catalog in which to save the symbol.

Select the Finish button to save the symbol.

359

Creating Schematic Elements

Create Wiring Diagram Symbol Wiring diagrams are graphical representations of connection information. The wiring diagram includes a wiring diagram symbol for each device in the schematic with connection data appearing next to it. (Alternatively, wiring diagrams can use tables to display connection data, in which case special wiring diagram symbols are not required.) See page 318 for more information. A number of wiring diagram symbols are provided with the software. These have symbol names that begin with “W-” characters (but this naming format is not required). General Points About Wiring Diagram Symbols Wiring diagram symbols are related to the schematic symbols by the connection point text; the wiring diagram connection point must have the same value as the corresponding connection point in the schematic. Every connection point has a sequence number that uniquely identifies it. The sequence number is defined by the order in which the connection points are inserted in the symbol during symbol creation. Depending upon whether the schematic symbol has a family or not will determine how the wiring diagram function relates the connection points from the schematic to the wiring diagram symbol. No family assigned - When there is no family defined the software will simply match the connection point sequence numbers from the schematic symbol with the wiring diagram symbol as shown below: Schematic Symbol

Wiring Diagram Symbol

Sequence Number

Connection Point

Sequence Number

1

X1

1

2

X2

2

Family assigned - When a family has been defined we must look at the family definition and how the wiring diagram symbol was created. Within this case there are two possible scenarios depending upon how the user created the wiring diagram symbol: 1. The user creates the wiring diagram symbol with a sufficient number of connection points to handle all the possible connection points that might exist in the schematic. The user does not associate any particular role (parent, child, etc.) to these connection points. If no role is defined for the wiring diagram connection points, the software identifies the different roles in the family and sorts the connection points in the order that the roles are listed in the family definition. Then it sorts the connection 360

Creating Drawing Elements

points within each role by their connection point sequence number. The software then matches the first schematic connection point with the first wiring diagram connection point and so on down the line. The result would be the mapping shown in the following table: 2. The user creates the wiring diagram symbol with a sufficient number of connection points to handle all the possible connection points that might exist in the schematic. The user associates a role (parent, child, etc.) to each connection point. The most complicated example of this type would be a family like "2FC" for a form C contact configuration. This type of family has alternate symbols defined for it where at least one of the alternate symbols requires three connection points whereas the other symbols only require two connection points. The only way to make sure that the software maps the connection points correctly would be to associate each wiring diagram connection point with a particular role in the family. In order to handle terminal symbols that have a family associated with them, some special steps are required. When you have a family of terminals you will often have one single wiring diagram symbol that represents several terminal numbers. In this case the user can place multiple terminal number attributes and associate a role with each terminal attribute. This will be used as the common thread to relate the connection points with a particular terminal number attribute. Four Pole Relay Example In this example we will create a wiring diagram symbol for a four pole relay. 1. Select the Manage > Create Symbol function. The Symbol Create Wizard will start. In this example we are creating a symbol “from scratch” so select the New Symbol (from Scratch) radio button in the first step and then select Next.

361

Creating Schematic Elements

2. In step 2, select the Wiring Diagram radio button to define the symbol type. (The other settings in this dialog are not relevant for wiring diagram symbols.)

Select Next to continue.

362

Creating Drawing Elements

3. In step 3 (Import Connection Points) of the Symbol Create Wizard we can import connection points from a similar symbol or family to save time. First, however, we will draw the graphics of our symbol. Use graphical drawing functions (not wires). Make the symbol approximately 4 inches (100 mm) tall.

Once the graphics are drawn, select the Import Connection Points From a Family radio button.

Then select the Select Family button. The Device Family dialog will appear. Select the family 22, which consists of a relay with 2 normally open and 2 normally closed contacts. Select OK in the Device Family dialog. Select Next to continue to the next step.

363

Creating Schematic Elements

4. In step 4 (Specify Device ID) you can enter something in the Tag Mnemonic field if you wish there to be a default device tag, but it is not required. The ID will be taken from the schematic symbol that the wiring diagram symbol is representing.

Enter a question mark as a default value in the Tag Mnemonic field. If desired, you can make text settings for the device ID in the Default Text Style field. Select the Place button and click on the desired position for the device ID in the drawing. Place at position where device ID is to be displayed

?

Place symbols

364

Creating Drawing Elements

Use the Insert Symbol button in step 5 to select and insert the coil (CR) and contact (CRNO, CRNC) symbols. This will visually mark the position of the parent and child symbol data. Delete the function text for the coil symbol. Select Next to continue. 5. In step 5 we will place connection points on the symbol to set where the connection information will be displayed.

The imported connection points from the family that we selected in step 3 are displayed. The Visible Text entry (?) is a default value for the connection point text. The software will replace the visible text with the connection expression defined in the Wiring Diagram Settings dialog (see page 100). The Hidden Text entries are the connection point designations that were defined in the family. (If we had not imported connection points from a family or symbol we could make an entry in the Number of Connection Points field to create the connection points.) Because we imported connection points for this symbol from an existing family, there are also entries in the Role column for each connection point indicating the parent or child that the connection applies to. 365

Creating Schematic Elements

Make the desired text settings before placing the connection points. Use Middle Right text alignment for connections on the left side of the symbol. Use Middle Left text alignment for connections on the right side of the symbol. Select a connection point and then the Place button. You will be prompted on the command line to select the connection point position and then the connection point text position. The placement of the connection points isn’t critical, but they should be on the same side of the symbol as the corresponding connection point text. After a connection point is placed, it is marked with an “X” in the symbol creation wizard in the left-most column. You can use the Connection Point Editor button to display all the placed connection points in a single table for easy editing of various settings. Select Next to continue. 6. In step 6 you can specify symbol attributes. We will not be using attributes in this example. Select Next to continue. 7. In step 7, select the insertion point for the symbol. Select the Pick Point button in the Insertion Point area of the dialog and click on the upper left corner of the symbol. A red arrow marks the selected point.

? ?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

Select Next to continue.

366

Creating Drawing Elements

8. Finally in step 8, name and save the symbol. Enter “W-EXWDG” in the Symbol Name field. Enter a description of the symbol in the Description field. In the Save in field you can select the catalog in which to save the symbol.

Select Finish to save the symbol.

367

Creating Schematic Elements

Terminal Symbol Example Wiring diagram symbols can be made to represent a single terminal or a group of terminals. The following example shows how to create a symbol that represents a group of six terminals. In this example we will import connection points from a family called 6BLOCK. This family is not provided with the software, but can easily be created in the Catalog Manager (see page 396). Use the following entries:

After you have created the family, use the following steps to create the wiring diagram symbol: 1. Select the Manage > Create Symbol function. The Symbol Create Wizard will start. In this example we are creating a symbol “from scratch” so select the New Symbol (from Scratch) radio button in the first step and then select Next.

368

Creating Drawing Elements

2. In step 2, select the Wiring Diagram radio button to define the symbol type. (The other settings in this dialog are not relevant for wiring diagram symbols.)

Select Next to continue.

369

Creating Schematic Elements

3. In step 3 (Import Connection Points) of the Symbol Create Wizard we can import connection points from a similar symbol or family to save time. First, however, we will draw the graphics of our symbol. Use graphical drawing functions (not wires). Make the symbol approximately 3.5 inches (90 mm) tall.

Once the graphics are drawn, select the Import Connection Points From a Family radio button.

Then select the Select Family button. The Device Family dialog will appear. Select the family 6BLOCK. Select OK in the Device Family dialog. Select Next to continue to the next step.

370

Creating Drawing Elements

4. In step 4 (Specify Device ID) you can enter something in the Tag Mnemonic field if you wish there to be a default device tag, but it is not required. The ID will be taken from the schematic symbol that the wiring diagram symbol is representing.

Enter a question mark as a default value in the Tag Mnemonic field. If desired, you can make text settings for the device ID in the Default Text Style field. Select the Place button and click on the desired position for the device ID in the drawing. This text will take the terminal strip ID when the symbol is placed. The terminal numbers from the imported family are also listed in step 4. Place these terminal number attributes in the drawing by first selecting (highlighting) a terminal and then selecting the Place button. You can place them one at a time or you can use the Select All button to place them one after another in the drawing. If you have the Array checkbox selected when you use the Select All button, the Array dialog (see page 343) will appear when you place the terminal numbers, allowing you to enter spacing values and place all the numbers with one click. After a terminal number is placed, it is marked with an “X” in the symbol creation wizard in the left hand column. 371

Creating Schematic Elements

Place at position where device ID is to be displayed

? 1 2 3 4

Place terminal number attributes Note:

5 6

If the terminal numbers were not defined in the family, you can leave the terminal attributes as a question mark and they will be filled in with the numbers used in the schematic when you place this symbol. Select Next to continue to the next step. 5. In step 5 we will place connection points on the symbol to set where the connection information will be displayed.

372

Creating Drawing Elements

The imported connection points from the family that we selected in step 3 are displayed. The Visible Text entry (?) is a default value for the connection point text. The software will replace the visible text with the connection expression defined in the Wiring Diagram Settings dialog (see page 100). The Hidden Text entries are the connection point designations that were defined in the family. (If we had not imported connection points from a family or symbol we could make an entry in the Number of Connection Points field to create the connection points.) Because we imported connection points for this symbol from an existing family, there are also entries in the Role column for each connection point indicating the terminal number that the connection applies to. The terminal symbols have multiple connection points (designated I, E, J in our example). We will only place the “I” and “E” connection points in our wiring diagram symbol to represent the “internal” and “external” sides of the terminals. Make the desired text settings before placing the connection points. Use Middle Right text alignment for connections on the left side of the symbol. Use Middle Left text alignment for connections on the right side of the symbol. Select a connection point and then the Place button. You will be prompted on the command line to select the connection point position and then the connection point text position. The placement of the connection points isn’t critical, but they should be on the same side of the symbol as the corresponding connection point text. After a connection point is placed, it is marked with an “X” in the symbol creation wizard in the left-most column. You can use the Connection Point Editor button to display all the placed connection points in a single table for easy editing of various settings. Select Next to continue. 6. In step 6 you can specify symbol attributes. We will not be using attributes in this example. Select Next to continue.

373

Creating Schematic Elements

7. In step 7, select the insertion point for the symbol. Select the Pick Point button in the Insertion Point area of the dialog and click on the upper left corner of the symbol. A red arrow marks the selected point. ? ?

1

?

?

2

?

?

3

?

?

4

?

?

5

?

?

6

?

Select Next to continue. 8. Finally in step 8, name and save the symbol. Enter “W-EXTB6” in the Symbol Name field. Enter a description of the symbol in the Description field. In the Save in field you can select the catalog in which to save the symbol.

Select Finish to save the symbol.

374

Creating Drawing Elements

Create Panel Layout Symbol Some special considerations are necessary when creating panel layout symbols. To create a panel layout symbol: 1. Select Manage > Create Symbol. The following dialog will appear.

2. Select the first radio button, New Symbol (from Scratch) if you intend to draw the graphics for the symbol. Select the second radio button, New Symbol (Import Symbol Graphics), if you intend to import existing graphics for the symbol. You can also base a new symbol on an existing symbol, but for these instructions we will assume you are creating an entirely new symbol. Note:

The Symbol Creation Wizard step number will vary depending on your choice in Step 1. Select the Next button to continue. 3. If you chose to import graphics, select the desired graphics. See page 335 for more information.

375

Creating Schematic Elements

4. In the Specify Symbol Type step, choose the Panel Layout radio button. (The Preferred Orientation setting is not important for panel layout symbols.) Note:

If you are creating a symbol from scratch, a blank drawing screen will appear. Draw the symbol graphics using the line, circle, rectangle and other drawing tools as needed. Use lines, not wires to draw symbol graphics. Be aware of the grid spacing that will be used in your drawings so that connection points are properly spaced; connection points must always be on this grid. When the desired graphics are drawn, return to the Symbol Creation Wizard and continue.

Select the Next button to continue.

376

Creating Drawing Elements

5. Import Connection Points - The following dialog will appear.

This step allows you to import connection point designations from an existing symbol or family. These can then be used in the “Place Connection Points” step, saving you from having to remember and re-enter this information. If you don’t wish to import connection points, select Next to go to the next step. Panel layout symbols need connection points if you intend to use the shortest distance wire routing function. The connection points help establish precise wiring distances between components. Note:

If you are basing the new symbol on an existing symbol (selected in step 1), the connection points of that symbol will appear in the drawing area when you define the device ID in a later step, so you can skip this step. Click on the Select Symbol button to display the Select Symbol dialog from which you can preview and select a symbol. Select the Import Connection Points From a Family radio button if you wish to import connection designations from parent and child symbols at the same time. Use the Select Family button to select the desired family. Select the Next button to continue.

377

Creating Schematic Elements

6. Specify Device ID - The following dialog will appear.

In this dialog you enter a tag mnemonic. This is the portion of the device tag that will be given to every instance of this symbol, such as “K” or “CR” for a relay (see page 77). Note:

If you are placing panel layout symbols using the Symbol by Device ID function, the existing device ID will replace any tag that was defined during symbol creation. Select the Suppress Display of ID checkbox if you wish the device ID to be suppressed by default. When the symbol is placed, the Suppress Device ID checkbox in the Device Properties dialog will be selected by default. (See page 221.) Select the Default Tag = ? checkbox if you wish the user to be prompted to enter the device tag when the symbol is placed instead of having the software automatically assign the device tag. Typically this is done for child symbols so that you can associate the child symbol with the device tag of a selected parent symbol. When the symbol is placed, the Device Tag field in the Device Properties dialog (see page 221) will show the tag mnemonic followed by a “?”.

378

Creating Drawing Elements

Enter the desired character(s) for the tag in the Tag Mnemonic field. When you have entered all the data for the device tag, select the Place button (the one below the Tag Mnemonic field) to select a position for the tag by clicking in the drawing. (Note: you may wish to zoom in on the graphic before selecting Place.) After you select a position, the dialog will reappear with the coordinates of the selected point in the X and Y fields. Coordinates are from the drawing origin. You can adjust the values, if desired. If you are creating a terminal strip layout symbol, enter a value in the Seq No field to define a position on the terminal strip. Enter a value in the Terminal Number field to define the terminal number label. To create fields for additional terminals, select the “+” button. Use the Place button (the one below the Terminal Number field) to place these terminal designations. You can place them individually by selecting a terminal number followed by the Place button. You can also use the Select All button followed by the Place button to place them one after another in order. If you select the Array checkbox, the Array dialog will appear (see page 343) allowing you to enter settings and place all the terminal designations with one click. Use the Default Text Style field to set the appearance of the device tag. Select the Edit button to display a dialog where you can make various text settings. Use the Text Align field to set the orientation of the text to the point that is selected. Use the Insert Symbol button to place an existing symbol in the symbol you are creating. This is useful, for example, if you wish to put contact symbols in a symbol for a relay or add fuse symbols to a disconnect switch. When you select the button, the Insert Symbols dialog appears, allowing you to select a symbol. If you only want the graphic portion of the symbol you are inserting, you will have to delete the unwanted connection points, etc. Select the Next button to continue.

379

Creating Schematic Elements

7. Place Connection Points - The following dialog will appear. As stated earlier, you will need connection points on the panel layout symbol in order to use the shortest distance wire routing function.

If you have imported connection points in an earlier step or are basing the new symbol on an existing symbol, the connection points will be listed. If not, you can place connection points using this dialog, see page 341 for instructions. The connection point text you enter must match the connection point text on the corresponding schematic symbol. On panel layout symbols, there are extra data columns available for connection points: Additional Wire Length - An optional field for additional wire length (in inches or mm). This is to be added to the length of the wire going to this connection point. This value can be used to account for the distance the terminal is raised from the surface of the panel (the “Z” dimension). Direction to Wireway - This field should contain one of the following single upper case letters which represent the direction a wire should take from the connection point to enter a wireway. U - Up D - Down L - Left 380

Creating Drawing Elements

R - Right N - Find nearest wireway. This value is used as a default in most cases and assumed when the field is blank. X - Route without wireway. Typically used where two components must be connected with a short flying wire without the aid of a wireway. Role - This field is only used if you have imported connection points from a family. The field will be populated with the roles (for example, Parent, Child1, Child2, etc.) from the selected family. You can associate a connection point to a particular role by selecting the role. This is useful if you would like to make a generic symbol that can be used with multipole families where the connetion point text could change. Select Next to continue.

381

Creating Schematic Elements

8. Specify Attributes - The following dialog will appear.

Symbol attributes can be set up to prompt for text that is entered by the user at the time the symbol is placed. Select the attributes you wish to add to the layout symbol. Use the Place button to position them on the symbol. After you place an attribute in the drawing, it will be marked in the list with an “X” in the left-most column. If you plan on using the Wiring Rules version of the Shortest Distance wire routing function, there are two special attributes to be added to layout symbols for mounting panels: “PanelName”and “ExitPoint”. The PanelName attribute prompts for the panel identifier. These names determine the sorting order of panels and are defined in your wiring rules file. If only one panel name will be associated with this layout symbol, enter it in the Default Value field. The ExitPoint attribute defines the point(s) where wires leave the panel. Enter exit point coordinates in the Default Value field using the format x,y;x2,y2 where x,y are the X-Y coordinates of the first exit point and x2,y2 are the coordinates for the second exit point. Separate the coordinates with a semicolon. These coordinates are relative to the insertion point of the panel. 382

Creating Drawing Elements

Select Next to continue. 9. Specify Position - The following dialog will appear. In this dialog you select the insertion point for the symbol.

The insertion point represents the cursor position when the symbol is placed in the drawing. It determines how the symbol is placed in relation to the selected point. Use the Pick Point button and click on the desired point in the drawing screen. The coordinates of the selected point will appear in the X and Y fields. These values can be adjusted if desired. Select the Next button to continue.

383

Creating Schematic Elements

10. The following dialog will appear. In this dialog you enter the symbol’s name and description and select a catalog in which it will be saved.

Enter a name for the symbol in the Symbol Name field. The symbols provided with the software follow a naming format whereby layout symbol names begin with “L-” but you are not required to follow this convention. Enter a description for the symbol in the Description field. Use the Search Language Phrases button to select and place phrases from the language database into the Description field. These phrases are displayed in the language that is currently selected (Project Options - Display Languages). In the Save in field, select the symbol catalog in which the symbol will be stored. Select Finish to save the new symbol.

384

Creating Drawing Elements

Create Macro A macro is a group of schematic elements that are stored as a group and can be placed in a drawing in one step. The macro can contain multiple symbols. If, for example, there is a particular circuit which is needed repeatedly, you can store it as a macro and place it quickly and easily. Symbols within the macro are recognized and automatically addressed by the software (and can be modified by the user) just as when individual symbols are placed in a drawing. Any part numbers assigned to the symbols will also be saved with the macro. Custom title blocks and drawing borders can be stored as macros and can be placed automatically on any new drawing. Macros can be created on a blank page, or a portion of an existing drawing can be stored as a macro.

Macro Creation Procedure To create a macro, use the following procedure: 1. Display an existing drawing page that contains the elements you wish to include in the macro, or place these elements on a page. 2. Select the Manage > Create Macro function.

385

Creating Schematic Elements

3. The Create Macro dialog will appear.

Enter a name for the macro in the Name field. No spaces are allowed in the name. 4. Enter a description for the macro in the Description field. 5. In the Catalog field, select the symbol catalog in which the macro will be stored. 6. Select a base point for the macro. This is the insertion point that determines where the macro will be positioned in relation to the point selected when it is placed in a drawing. Use the Pick Point button to select a base point in the drawing. You can also enter coordinates for the base point in the X and Y fields. (For macros such as title blocks that are automatically placed by promis•e in the same location, use a base point of x:0.000, y:0.000.) 7. Select the objects that will comprise the macro. Click on the Select Objects button and then select objects by windowing them (or selecting individually) on the drawing page. Press the key or right-click when all items have been selected. The Create Macro dialog will reappear. Select the Group Terminals checkbox if you wish any terminals in the macro to keep their current terminal numbers when the macro is placed. 8. Select OK to store the macro. The macro will now be available when you use the Components > Insert Macro function. 386

Creating Drawing Elements

Create Title Block Macro A page title block is created and stored as a macro. Variable text can be placed in the title block when it is created, and these texts are automatically replaced with project data (date, project name, page number, etc.) when the page is displayed. A default title block can be named in the Default Project Properties dialog box when a project is created (see page 71). This will be placed automatically on every page in the project. An appropriate title block can also be specified in the New Page dialog box when a drawing page is created (see page 158) which will override the default title block. Existing title blocks in a drawing can be changed using the Modify Page function (see page 169). Title Block Creation Procedure – Use the following steps to create a title block macro: 1. Select the Configure > Title Block Designer function. The following dialog will appear Note:

The Title Block Designer dialog consists of step buttons on the left and a settings area on the right. There is an Auto Hide button in the lower left corner of the dialog that sets whether or not the settings area will be hidden if you move the cursor back to the drawing area (so it is not in the way). If auto hide is turned on, you can click on the desired step button to display the setting area again.

If you wish to use an existing title block as the starting point for a new title block, use the browse button in the Existing Title Block field to locate and select the desired title block. In the Page Format field, select the page format with which the title block will be used. You will be provided with a drawing screen in the size of the selected format. 387

Creating Schematic Elements

If you wish to create a title block completely from scratch without using an existing title block, continue to step 2. 2. Select the Next button to continue. A blank drawing page will open. If you selected an existing title block, it will be displayed. The following dialog will appear:

This dialog allows you to place variables such as project name, page number, etc. that will be filled in automatically when the title block is used in a project. First, however, if you are creating an entirely new title block you may wish to create the outlines of the title block using graphical lines or graphical boxes. Do not use wires. You can bring in existing DWG files using the Insert > Block function (AutoCAD text attributes will not be recognized). You can also place fixed text to label the various sections of the title block. Position these elements on the blank drawing page where you wish them to appear when you use the title block on a new page. DATE

NAME

PROJECT

DRAWING NO. JOB NO.

DRAWN BY CKD BY

388

PAGE DESCRIPTION:

SHEET OF

Creating Drawing Elements

To add variable text, select them from the list in the Title Block Designer dialog. The variables are divided into categories (System, Project, etc.). Click on the “+” icon beside each category to display the available variables. If you point at the variable name, a description of the variable will appear at the cursor. Click on the desired variable and then select the Place button. See page 393 for a list of variables.

After selecting the Place button, click on the position in the title block where you wish the variable information to be displayed. The variable name will appear at this position. DATE

PROJECT

NAME Address_001

DRAWN Page.Description_004 Page.Description_002 BY CKD Page.Description_005 BY Page.Description_003

Address_002

ProjectName Project.Descriptions_001

Address_003

PAGE DESCRIPTION:

Address_004

Page.Description_001 Page.Description_018

DRAWING NO. Project.Descriptions_003 JOB NO. Project.Descriptions_002 SHEET Page OF Project.TotalPag

Although the variables may appear to overlap or extend outside the desired area, keep in mind that the data that is displayed in the drawing may be shorter than the variable name. To format the text in the title block, use these steps: A. First select the Edit button in the Text area of the Title Block Designer dialog to display the Edit Text Format dialog.

389

Creating Schematic Elements

B. Make the desired settings here. This dialog is similar to the Edit Text Style dialog (see page 99). One important difference is the Text Align field which allows you to set in which direction the data will be placed from the variable’s insertion point. Select OK when the desired settings are made. C. Then select the Select Texts button in the Text area of the Title Block Wizard dialog. Click on the variable name(s) in the drawing that you wish to format. Press or right click when you have selected the desired variables. D. Then select the Apply Text Style to Selected Texts button in the Text area of the Title Block Designer dialog to apply the new style.

390

Creating Drawing Elements

3. Select Next to continue. The next dialog will appear, allowing you to specify and position a logo file in the title block. This file must be in the DWG format.

Select the logo file using the browse button next to the Logo field. Once you have selected the file you can position and size it in the title block using one of two methods. You can enter two coordinates (X1,Y1 and X2,Y2) that define a rectangular area, or you can select the Specify on Screen button and define an area on the screen by windowing it (click to select the opposite corners). If you wish to remove a logo that has already been placed, select the Remove Logo button.

391

Creating Schematic Elements

4. Select Next to continue. The next dialog will appear, allowing you to name and save the title block.

Enter a name for the title block in the Name field. In the Catalog field, select the catalog in which you wish to store the title block from the drop-down menu. In the Description field, enter a description for the title block. 5. Select the Finish button to store the title block macro. To use the new title block, you can select it in the Title Block field of the New Page dialog or you can set it as the default title block for a project in the Default Project Properties dialog (see page 71). Note:

392

To change the title block on an existing page, you must use the Review/Revise > Replace Title Block function.

Creating Drawing Elements

Available Title Block Variables System Variables Variable

Description

Today

Displays current date when page is created or plotted

Now

Displays current time when page is created or plotted

Address_001 to Address_020

Address file lines 1 to 20. Entered in Project Options, Address File dialog.

UserName

User Name. Entered in User Options, User Name dialog.

Project Variables Variable ProjectName

Description Name of project. Entered in New Project dialog.

Project.TotalPages

Total drawing pages in project.

Project.DateCreated

Project creation date

Project.Descriptions_001 (Project Description)

Project Description. Entered in first field of Project Description dialog accessed from New Project or Modify Project dialog.

Project.Descriptions_002 (Job Number)

Job Number. Entered in second field of Project Description dialog accessed from New Project or Modify Project dialog.

Project.Descriptions_003 (Drawing Number)

Drawing Number. Entered in third field of Project Description dialog accessed from New Project or Modify Project dialog.

Project.Descriptions_004 to Project.Descriptions_020

Additional project description fields. Entered in Project Description dialog accessed from New Project or Modify Project dialog.

Project.RevisionNo_001 to Project.RevisionNo_005

Project revision number. Entered in the New Revision Number field of the Add Project Revision dialog.

Project.RevisionUser Name_001 to Project.RevisionUser Name_005

User who created project revision. User name is entered in User Options, User Name dialog

Project.RevisionCheckedBy_001 to Project.RevisionCheckedBy_005

Project revision checked by user name. Entered in the Edit Project Revision dialog accessed from the Project Manager.

Project.RevisionCheckedDate_001 to Project.RevisionCheckedDate_00 5

Project revision checked date. Entered in the Edit Project Revision dialog accessed from the Project Manager.

393

Creating Schematic Elements

Variable

Description

Project.RevisionDateCreated_001 to Project.RevisionDateCreated_005

Date the project revision was created.

Project.RevisionDescription_001 to Project.RevisionDescription_005

Project revision description. The short description entered in the Add Project Revision dialog.

Project.LastPageNo

Page number of last drawing page in project.

Drawing Set Variables Variable

Description

DrawingSet

Current drawing set.

DrawingSet.TotalPages

Total number of pages in current drawing set.

DrawingSet.Description_001 to DrawingSet.Description_005

Drawing set descriptions 1 to 5. Entered in Project Manager, Drawing Set tab.

Installation Variables Variable

Description

Installation

Current installation.

Installation.TotalPages

Total number of pages in current installation.

Installation.LastPageNo

Page number of last drawing page in current installation.

Installation.Description_001 to Installation.Description_005

Installation descriptions 1 to 5. Entered in Project Manager, Installation tab.

Location Variables Variable Location

394

Description Current location.

Location.TotalPages

Total number of pages in current location.

Location.LastPageNo

Page number of last drawing page in current location.

Location.Description_001 to Location.Description_005

Location descriptions 1 to 5. Entered in Project Manager, Location tab.

Creating Drawing Elements

Page Variables Variable

Description

Page

Name of current page. Entered in New Page dialog.

Page.DateCreated

Page creation date

Page.Next

Next page number.

Page.Previous

Previous page number.

Page.Description_001(Description)

Page Description. Entered in the Description field of the New Page or Modify Page dialog.

Page.Descriptions_002(Date Drawn)

Page date drawn. Entered in second field of Page Description dialog accessed from New Page or Modify Page dialog.

Page.Description_003(Date Checked)

Date checked. Entered in the Date Checked field of the New Page or Modify Page dialog.

Page.Description_004(Drawn By)

Drawn By name. Entered in the Drawn By field of the New Page or Modify Page dialog.

Page.Descriptions_005(Checked By)

Checked By name. Entered in the Checked By field of the New Page or Modify Page dialog.

Page.Descriptions_006(Date Revised)

Date Revised. Entered in the Date Revised field of the New Page or Modify Page dialog.

Page.Descriptions_007(Revised By)

Revised By name. Entered in the Revised By field of the New Page or Modify Page dialog.

Page.RevisionNo_001 to Page.RevisionNo_005

Page revision number. Entered in the New Page Revision Number field of the Add Page Revision dialog.

Page.RevisionUser Name_001 to Page.RevisionUser Name_005

User who created Page revision. User name is entered in User Options, User Name dialog

Page.RevisionDateCreated_001 to Page.RevisionDateCreated_005

Date the Page revision was created.

Page.RevisionDescription_001 to Page.RevisionDescription_005

Page revision description. The short description entered in the Add Page Revision dialog.

395

Creating Schematic Elements

Create Family You can create a device family in the Catalog Manager. Note:

You can also create a family while working on a drawing using the Family on the Fly function (see page 234). Use the following procedure. 1. Open the Catalog Manager (select Design > Catalog Manager). 2. Open the folder for the catalog in which you wish to create a family.

3. Select the Families group inside the catalog. The existing families in the catalog will be listed on the right side of the dialog.

396

Creating Drawing Elements

4. Select the New Family function either by selecting the New Family toolbar button or by right-clicking on one of the existing family names and selecting New Family from the popup menu. The New/Modify Family dialog will appear.

5. In the Family Name field, enter a name for the new family.

397

Creating Schematic Elements

6. Select the Description button and a dialog will appear with four text fields that allow you to enter descriptions of the family.

Enter the desired text and select OK to return to the New/Modify Family dialog. 7. In the Family Type field, select one of the following: Standard, Cable, or Terminal/Pin-Plug depending on the type of device that is being represented. If you selected the Terminal/Pin-Plug type, there will be a With Parent checkbox next to the Family Type field. If you select this checkbox you will be able to create a terminal family that includes a parent symbol.

398

Creating Drawing Elements

8. Once you enter a name for the new family and select a type, fields will appear in the lower part of the dialog that allow you to specify the symbols that will be included in the family.

These fields will be labeled differently depending on the type of family that you selected. For standard type you will be defining parent and child symbols. For cables you will be defining conductors and for the terminal type you will be defining terminals/pins (with a parent symbol optional). A. When you click inside the Symbol Name field you will see a browse button. Click this button to display the Select Symbols dialog from which you can preview and select a symbol.

399

Creating Schematic Elements

B. When you click inside the Connection Points field, the Connection Points dialog will appear. Here you can enter connection point text for each connection point. If you wish the text to appear in the drawing enter it in the Visible field. If you wish the text to be invisible, enter it in the Hidden field. Select OK when you have entered the desired texts.

Note:

The software will concatenate the visible and hidden text together to form a unique connection point name that is used by certain functions of the software. C. If you are creating the terminal/pin-plug type of family, there will also be a Number field. This field gives you the option to define a terminal or pin number for each child symbol.

400

Creating Drawing Elements

D. (Optional) If you wish to have alternate symbols, you can select the “+” button to create additional columns for entering symbols, connection points and numbers. By entering alternate symbol names in the family, the user will have a choice of symbols in the Device Usage Chart dialog when placing members of the family. One example is a Pin-Plug family where you may wish to have a choice of pin symbols pointing in different directions. In the following figure, the first set of symbols has been entered.

Select “+” button

When you select the “+” button, a new set of columns is created which you can use to enter alternative symbols and connection point text. You can define more than one alternative symbol.

If you wish to remove one of these alternative symbols, click on one of the columns for that symbol and select the “X” button. When prompted, select “Yes” to confirm the deletion.

401

Creating Schematic Elements

9. (Optional) If you wish to create potential groups within the family, select the Edit Group button. If two or more connection points on the symbol are given the same potential group number and are connected to wires, the same potential (wire number) will be assigned to these wires. In other words, the potential will carry through the symbol. This is useful when working with flex I/Os. Note: when creating terminal symbols, the same potential group number is assigned to all connection points by default. When you select the Edit Group button the Edit Potential Group dialog appears.

A default potential group name is assigned to each connection point. To create a group where the potential will pass through the symbol, edit the group names so that both connection points have the same group name. Select OK to save the changes. Note:

Potential groups defined in a family will override any potential groups that were defined during symbol creation (see page 342). 10. In the Cross Reference Symbol area of the dialog you can define a symbol to hold the cross reference information for the parent/child symbols. When you click inside the Symbol Name field you will see a browse button. Click this button to display the Select Symbols dialog from which you can preview and select a cross reference symbol.

402

Creating Drawing Elements

In the X Offset and Y Offset fields enter values to determine where the cross reference symbol will appear on the drawing. For the Y offset value there is an additional field where you must select from the drop-down list whether the values represents Offset From Insertion Point (the parent symbol’s insertion point - typical for ANSI drawings) or Offset From 0 (the bottom of the page typical for IEC drawings). 11. When you have entered all the family information, select the OK button to save the family in the catalog.

403

Creating Schematic Elements

Modify Family If there is an existing family that you wish to modify, use the following procedure: 1. Select Design > Catalog Manager. The Catalog Manager dialog will appear. 2. If it is not already selected, select the Families folder of the desired symbol catalog. Select the Detailed view to see the list of available families.

404

Creating Drawing Elements

3. Right click on the name of the family you wish to modify and select Modify from the popup menu. The New/Modify Family dialog will appear with the information for the selected family. All the fields will be accessible except Family Name and Catalog Path.

4. Enter or change information as described in the section on creating a family (see page 396). 5. Select OK to save the modified family information.

405

Creating Schematic Elements

406

Options

7

Options There are a variety of parameters that can be set that determine how the software will operate. Most of these system-related settings are found in the promis•e Setup dialog and in System Options and User Options. (Project-related settings are described in Section 3. See page 67.)

promis•e Setup Select Configure > Setup. (You can also select the promis•e Setup toolbar button in the Project Manager.) The following dialog will appear.

407

Options

The following settings can be made: Setup Configuration You can save and load different setup configurations for use under different conditions. For example, if you have a laptop computer that accesses projects and catalogs over a network at the office, you may need a different configuration if you wish to work at home or on the road. The drop-down list shows the configurations that are available. By default the software includes two predefined setup configurations: ANSI-IEEE and IEC. These allow you to easily switch between ANSI-IEEE and IEC versions of the software. To create a new configuration: 1. Select the New button. 2. Enter the new configuration name in the dialog that appears. 3. Select OK. 4. With the new configuration name selected, make the desired settings and select the Apply button to save them. Project Database Make settings here to set the connection to the project database. Select the appropriate radio button for the project database server. You may choose between SQL Server/MSDE and Oracle. Server name field - By default, the software installs an instance of SQL Server 2005 on your local machine. The promis•e Setup dialog is automatically configured to use this local server. In this case, the server name will be set to: (local)\ECTECAD. The parameter (local) is a special variable that automatically matches the name of your computer so it is not necessary to enter your computer name if you use this parameter. If you wish to configure the software to look at a different database server then you must enter the appropriate server and instance name. The format should be as follows: YourServerName\Instance Example: MyServer\ECTECAD Database field - Enter the name of the promis•e database to which you wish to connect. By default, the software creates a database named, “promise.” Note:

408

If you install the software again without deleting the original database, the installation will connect to your existing database provided that the new version of promis•e does not require a newer version of the database. If the installation does require a newer version of the database, it will create a new database named "promise1" so that it does not overwrite your previous database.

Options

Connect using settings - If you previously selected the SQL Server/MSDE radio button, you may choose between using Windows Authentication or SQL Authentication by selecting the desired radio button. Windows Authentication will use your Windows login name to determine what security rights you have to the promise database. If you specify SQL Authentication then your database administrator will have to create a login and password for you in SQL server and you should enter this login and password in the login and password fields shown below:

If you previously selected the Oracle radio button then the connection settings will change as shown below:

You must now enter a valid Oracle login name and password which should be provided by your database administrator.

409

Options

System Paths In this part of the dialog you set the paths to important files used by the software. In the Select System Path Management Method field, select either Manage Data Folder Path or Manage Individual Paths. If you select Manage Data Folder Path you set a path to the promis•e data folder (and therefore to the project folder, templates, page formats, and project profiles that are within this folder). If you select Manage Individual Paths you can set these paths individually. Manage Data Folder Path

Manage Individual Paths

The following paths can be set. Parts Database - Select the name of the parts database that you wish to use in the Parts Database field. Select the Edit Parts Database button to make configuration settings related to the parts database. For more information, see page 413. Language Databases - This path goes to the file that defines the foreign language text. The default filename is Multi_Language_UI.mdb. 410

Options

System Option Profile - Path to the file that contains the default System Options (see page 418). The default filename is default.SystemOptions.xml. This path can be shared on a network so that all users are using the same settings. Project Option Profile - Path to the file that contains the default Project Options (see page 67). The default filename is ANSI-IEEE.ProjectOptions.xml or IEC.ProjectOptions.xml. This path can be shared on a network so that all users are using the same settings. User Option Profile - Path to the file that contains the default User Options (see page 423). The default filename is default.UserOptions.xml. This path can be shared on a network so that all users are using the same settings. Project Profiles Path - Path to the folder that contains the predefined formats for IDs, cross references, etc. Page Format Path - Path to the folder that contains the drawing page formats. Templates Path - Path to the folder where templates for reports and graphical plans are stored. Default Project Folder - Default path to the folder where projects are stored. Select the Restrict Project Creation to Default Project Folder checkbox to prevent new projects from being created in other folders. Note:

Select the Restore Defaults button to reset the System Paths to their default settings.

Catalog Paths The Catalog Paths area of the promis•e Setup dialog contains paths to symbol catalogs. To see the entire path, point your cursor at the path and it will pop up as a tooltip. You can have multiple paths; the order of the paths determines the search priority that the software uses when accessing symbols and families. The Add Catalog Path function also allows you to create a new catalog file. To add a new catalog path: 1. Select the “+” button in the Catalog Paths area of the promis•e Setup dialog. The Add Catalog dialog will appear.

411

Options

2. Use the browse button beside the Catalog Path field to locate and select the desired catalog folder. 3. Select OK. To create a new catalog folder: 1. Select the “+” button in the Catalog Paths section of the promis•e Setup dialog. The Add Catalog dialog will appear. 2. Select the New button in the Add Catalog Path dialog. The Create Catalog dialog will appear.

3. In the Path field enter the path or browse to the folder (such as the Program Files\ECT\CommonData\Catalog folder) where the new catalog will be located. If you wish to create a different folder to hold the new folder, there is a Create New Folder button available after you select the browse button. 4. In the Name field enter a name for the catalog. 5. Select OK in the Create Catalog dialog. In the specified folder, the software will create a sub-folder for the new catalog (using the name you entered. Inside this will be sub-folders for symbols, macros, families and title blocks. 6. After you select OK in the Create Catalog dialog, the Add Catalog Path dialog will re-appear. You can now add a path to the new catalog to make it available in promis•e. To change the order of the paths, highlight the path in the Catalog Paths section of the promis•e Setup dialog and use the up or down arrow button in the dialog to move it up or down the list. Paths at the top of the list are first in the search priority. To delete a path, highlight the path and select the delete (“X”) button in the dialog.

412

Options

Parts Database Path The software can be configured to access different parts databases. The Parts Database Path field and its associated buttons in the promis•e Setup dialog allow you to select, define and edit access to these databases. To select a database - Select the desired database name in the Parts Database Path field drop-down list. The selected database is the one the software will use when you assign part numbers, generate reports, etc. To edit a database name - First select the database name in the Parts Database Path field. Then select the Edit button. The Edit Parts Database dialog will appear.

In this dialog you can (if applicable) change the path to the database file, change the connection string, change the table or change the SQL query.

413

Options

To create a database name: 1. Select the New button in the promis•e Setup dialog. The Add Parts Database dialog will appear.

2. Enter a name for the new parts database in the Parts Database Name field. 3. In the Database area of the dialog, either A. Select the Use File radio button if you wish to connect by selecting a MS-Access database file. Use the Browse button to select the desired file. (For SQL Server and Oracle you must select Use Connection String.) B. Select the Use Connection String radio button if you wish to build a connection to a database. Select the Build button to begin the process. The Build dialog will appear.

In the Database Type field select the type of database you will be using, MS 414

Options

Access, SQL Server or Oracle. Once you select the database type, additional fields will appear. For MS Access:

Use the browse button to locate and select the .mdb file. Select OK to return to the Add Parts Database dialog. For SQL Server:

For SQL Authentication your database administrator will have to create a login and password for you in SQL server. Enter these in the Login name and Password fields Select OK to return to the Add Parts Database dialog.

415

Options

For Oracle:

Enter a valid Oracle user name, password and server name which should be provided by your database administrator. Select OK to return to the Add Parts Database dialog. 4. Once you have selected a database, you can select a table or construct a query in the Add Parts Database dialog.

The SQL Query field can be used to access fields that belong to different tables.

416

Options

5. Select the Next button to continue. The Field Mapping function will appear, allowing you to map the fields of the selected database in the Name column to the promis•e parts database fields in the Internal (promis-e) Name column.

In the Display Name column, enter the label that will appear beside the field in the Parts Database Editor dialog (see page 630). In the Category column, enter the field grouping in the Parts Database Editor dialog to which the field should be assigned (Price, Dimensions, etc.). If you are accessing a parts database from an earlier version of the software (prior to promis•e 2007), you can select the Default Mapping button to map all the fields to the corresponding new fields. There are unused fields (labeled user1, user2, etc.) that you can use to map new fields. 6. Select the Finish button to complete the new database connection.

417

Options

System Options Select Configure > Options. The following dialog will appear.

Select System options here

Command Protection The command protection mode allows you to restrict access to promis•e functions. Users can be categorized into a number of levels or “roles.” A different combination of functions is allowed or not allowed for each role. User names must match an individual’s Windows login user name. To configure command protection, select the Command Protection function in the System Options dialog. The following fields will appear.

418

Options

Select the Enable Command Protection checkbox followed by the Apply button to activate command protection. There are two tabs in the command protection screen: Manage Users and Manage Roles. The Manage Users tab allows you to assign roles to users of the software. To add a user to the list, select the Add button. Default entries will then appear in the User and Role columns. You can edit the user name by clicking in the User field. User names must match an individual’s Windows login user name. You can assign a role to the user by clicking in the Role field and selecting one from the drop-down list. The default roles are Administrator, Catalog & Database Admin, User and Viewer.

The Manage Roles tab allows you to select the functions that are available in each role and to create or delete roles as needed.

419

Options

To change the available functions in a role, select (highlight) the role and then select the Modify button. The Edit Role dialog will appear.

The functions are organized into groups (Catalog Management, Components, etc.). Click on the “+” icon beside the group name to display the functions in the group.

Click the checkbox beside the function name to make it available or unavailable. Available functions will have a checkmark beside the function name. You can use the checkbox beside the group name to select or de-select all the functions in that group. Select the OK button in the Edit Role dialog followed by the Apply button to enter the changes.

420

Options

To create a new role, select the Add button in the Manage Roles tab. The Edit Role dialog will appear.

Enter a name for the new role in the Role name field. Enter a description in the Description field (optional). Then select the functions that are to be available in this role. The functions are organized into groups (Catalog Management, Components, etc.). Click on the “+” icon beside the group name to display the functions in the group. Click the checkbox beside the function name to make it available or unavailable. You can use the checkbox beside the group name to select or de-select all the functions in that group. Available functions will have a checkmark beside the function name. Select the OK button in the Edit Role dialog followed by the Apply button to enter the changes. To delete a role, select (highlight) the role in the Manage Roles tab and then select the Remove button. The default roles cannot be removed.

421

Options

Symbol Texts Symbol texts are attributes associated with a symbol that can contain a value related to a specific property. Examples would be text that shows a value for current, VA, RPM, etc. The Symbol Text mode in the System Options allows you to determine whether or not symbol text will appear at child symbols. Select the Symbol Texts function in the System Options dialog. The following fields will appear.

For each symbol text attribute, select the Shared Value checkbox if you wish the attribute text to appear at the child symbol in addition to at the parent symbol. Select the Shared Value Over Sub ID checkbox if you wish the attribute text to appear at sub IDs, i.e., symbols that share the same ID as the parent but are not part of the device family. Select the Apply button to save the settings.

422

Options

User Options Select Configure > Options. The following dialog will appear.

Select user options here

Language On Dialogs Select Language On Dialogs in the Options dialog. The following screen will appear.

Select the language from the drop-down list that you wish to use in the software’s dialogs. Select Apply to use the selected language.

423

Options

Startup Interface Select Startup Interface in the Options dialog. The following screen will appear.

The radio button that you select here determines whether the software will start with the Welcome dialog or the Project Manager. If you are running the MicroStation version of the software and have the Project Wise document management software installed, you can select the Log Into Project Wise on Startup checkbox to automatically log into Project Wise.

User Name Select User Name in the Options dialog. The following screen will appear.

The User Name field allows you to enter the user name of the person operating the software. This should correspond to the user’s Windows login name, especially if you are using the Command Protection feature (see page 418). Enter the desired name and select the Apply button. This user name will also appear in the Project Manager “Details” view in the User column to identify who currently has a drawing page open. See page 51.

424

Options

Validation Prompts Select Validation Prompts in the Options dialog. The following screen will appear.

In this screen you can make selections to set whether or not the software will prompt you for certain conditions. In the Multi-Document Options area you can select how you wish the software to respond when you open or switch to another document without saving the changes in the current document. Select the Prompt for Saving Page When Switching Documents if you wish the software to notify you when you switch documents when you have unsaved changes. The Save Changes dialog will appear. Select the Enable Command Log checkbox if you wish to create a text file that saves the sequence of functions that you use in the software. This is useful for troubleshooting. When you select the checkbox, the path field becomes active, allowing you to browse to the desired directory and specify the filename. The default filename is CmdHis.txt. Select the Prompt For Device Properties checkbox if you wish the software to display the Device Properties dialog when you place a symbol in a drawing (see page 221). This dialog allows you to change the prompted device ID, search for part numbers, etc. If this checkbox is not selected, the software will place the symbol and automatically assign a device ID based on the project settings.

425

Options

When you select the Prompt For Maintaining Device IDs & Wire Numbers When Copying/Pasting checkbox you will be prompted when you copy elements using the copy to clipboard function (Edit > Copy). A dialog will appear with checkboxes that allow you to maintain device IDs and/or wire numbers on the copied elements. If you de-select the Maintain Device ID checkbox, the ID will be assigned per project defaults. If you de-select the Maintain Wire Numbers checkbox the wire number will be omitted on the copy.

In the Suppress Duplicate Terminal Number Prompt for the Following Terminal Numbers area you can enter a list of terminal numbers that are likely to be used more than once in a project. The software will not flag the numbers entered here as duplicate numbers. Select the Apply button to save the validation prompt settings.

426

Options

View Options The View Options mode allows you to make settings that determine how information is shown on the drawing screen. Select View Options in the Options dialog. The following screen will appear.

Select the Show Symbol Tooltips checkbox if you wish to see symbol information pop up at the cursor when you point at a symbol in a drawing. Information includes the device ID, family name, catalog name and symbol name. In the Display Settings area you can choose to show or hide various markings and other information. Select the checkbox for items that you wish to be displayed. Use the All On or All Off buttons to select or de-select all the checkboxes. In the Navigation area of the dialog you can adjust the automatic zoom that occurs when you use the navigator function to go to a drawing element (see page 178). Enter the percentage of zoom (0-100) in the Zoom field or drag the slider bar. The percentage of zoom will appear in the text box as you move the slide bar. The higher the zoom percentage, the closer the view will be to the searched element. Select the Zoom Off checkbox to turn off the automatic zoom. Use the Reset Dialog Boxes to Default Settings button to change the settings in this dialog back to the default values. There is also a group of display settings icons in the Design menu that allows you to display or hide elements as you work on a drawing. 427

Options

Plug-in Manager There are plug-in applications for promis•e that perform various specialized functions. It is possible for users to create their own plug-ins with the project API (Application Programming Interface). The Plug-in Manager allows you to view the plug-ins that are available on your system and activate or de-activate them. To access the Plug-in Manager select Manage > Plug-in Manager.

The Plug-in Manager dialog will appear. Any plug-ins that are installed on your system are listed. When you select the name of a plug-in, a description of the plug-in appears at the bottom of the dialog. The dialog displays plug-in name, the company that made it, the plug-in version number and whether it is active or not. A plug-in is active when a checkmark appears in the Active column. To de-activate (turn off) a plug-in, click on the checkbox in the Active column so that it is not checked. Some plug-in software functions are launched from the standard promis•e menus, however specialized plug-in functions are launched from the Plug-Ins menu, which is only present when you have specialized plug-in software modules installed.

428

Plotting and Publishing

8

Plotting and Publishing This section describes how to plot drawings in promis•e software. There are also instructions for the Project Publisher plug-in that allows you to output work in various formats.

Plot Page Function The plot page function allows you to select pages in the current project for plotting. There are two ways to access this function: • In the Project Manager, you can select File > Plot Page(s) (or the Plot Pages

toolbar button). • In the drawing screen you can select the Plot function in the promis-e

Output menu (a page must be open when you select the button). The Plot Page(s) dialog will appear listing the pages in the current project:

Select the page or pages you wish to plot and select the Print button. There are columns for Drawing Set, Installation, Location and Name. By clicking on the column heading, you can sort the column by the entries in that column. There is also a drop-down list in each column heading that allows you to filter the listing. Select All to display all pages. Select Blanks to display all pages with no entry in that column. Select Non blanks to display all pages where that column is not empty. Select Custom to create a custom filter. The following dialog will appear: 429

Plotting and Publishing

The dialog will display the name of the current column heading and provides two sets of fields for entering criteria. You can use one or both sets of fields. You can relate the two sets with an And condition or Or condition by selecting the appropriate radio button. The first field for each set of criteria allows you to select whether the criteria equals, does not equal, is greater than, is greater than or equal to, is less than, or is less than or equal to the value in the second field. Select OK to load the filter. Select the Print button to print the selected pages. The Page Setup dialog will appear (see page 431). Select OK or Plot in this dialog to send the pages to the currently configured printer or plotter.

430

Plotting and Publishing

Plot Current Page (AutoCAD Version) Use the File > Plot function to plot the currently displayed drawing page. This function (which is equivalent to the AutoCAD PLOT command) also displays a dialog box that allows various plot configuration settings to be made. The following Plot dialog box will appear. It has two tabs: Plot Device and Layout Settings.

Layout name – (Layouts are not used in promis•e - they are the same as Paper Space.) Displays the current layout name or displays “Selected layouts” if multiple tabs are selected. If the Model tab is current when you choose Plot, the Layout Name shows “Model.” Page setup name – Displays a list of any named and saved page setups. You can choose to base the current page setup on a named page setup, or you can add a new named page setup by choosing Add. Selecting Add displays the User Defined Page Setups dialog box. You can create, delete, or rename named page setups.

Plot Device tab Use the Plotter Configuration function to select a printer/plotter driver.

431

Plotting and Publishing

Use the Plot style table function to edit pen colors and line weights. Assign pre-set or customized color or monochrome pen mappings. Use the Edit or New buttons to modify or create style tables. Use the Plot stamp checkbox to place a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and/or logs it to a file. The Settings button displays the Plot Stamp dialog box, where you can specify the information you want applied to the plot stamp, such as drawing name, date and time, plot scale, and so on. (If no plot stamp file exists, you must enter the name of a new plot stamp file before the dialog will appear.) Use the What to plot functions to select which tabs to plot and the number of copies to plot. Current tab plots the current Model or Layout tab. (Although promis•e does not design in the Layout mode, layouts are supported.) If multiple tabs are selected, the tab that shows its viewing area is plotted. Selected tabs plots multiple preselected Model or layout tabs. To select multiple tabs, hold down while selecting the tabs. If only one tab is selected, this option is unavailable. All layout tabs plots all layout tabs, regardless of which tab is selected. Select the Plot to file checkbox if you wish to create a plot file of the current drawing. You can enter the desired filename and directory.

432

Plotting and Publishing

Layout Settings tab

Paper size and paper units Select the output Paper size format. Also select inches or mm as the units for the plot settings. Drawing orientation Select Portrait or Landscape orientation of the drawing on the paper. Selected orientation is indicated by the page icon. Also, select Plot upside down if desired.

433

Plotting and Publishing

Plot area In this area you can set additional plotting parameters as follows: Limits – Select to plot entire drawing area as defined by the drawing limits. Extents – Select to plot everything in the drawing (that part of the drawing that currently contains entities). Display – Select to plot what is currently displayed on the screen. View – Not accessible unless views are created in the software (this is an AutoCAD function). Type VIEW on the command line and you can save different views and plot them. Window – When selected, allows you to plot any portion of the drawing. Select the Window button. Then define two opposite corners of the area to be plotted. This radio button is grayed out until a window has been specified. Plot scale Scale – From the drop-down list, you can select Scaled to Fit to scale the plot as large as possible for the selected paper. You can also select from a number of scale ratios (1:1, 1:2, etc.). Custom – Indicates the relation between plot units of length and drawing units of length. This will change according to the selected scale. Scale lineweights – Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale. Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of printed objects and are plotted with the linewidth size regardless of the plot scale. Plot offset Select the Center the plot checkbox to center the plot on the paper. Or, you can set the origin of the plot by entering values in the X and Y fields.

434

Plotting and Publishing

Plot options Plot object lineweights – If you have turned off the Plot with plot styles checkbox, you can select this checkbox to use object lineweights in the plot. Plot with plot styles – Select this checkbox to plot using the plot styles applied to objects and defined in the plot style table. All style definitions with different property characteristics are stored in the plot style tables and can be attached to the geometry. This setting can replace pen mapping in earlier versions of AutoCAD. Plot paperspace last – Plots model space geometry first. Paper space geometry is usually plotted before model space geometry. Hide objects – Plots layouts with hidden lines removed for objects in the layout environment (paper space). Hidden line removal for model space objects in viewports is controlled by the Viewports Hide property in the Object Property Manager. This is displayed in the plot preview, but not in the layout.

Plot Current Page (MircroStation Version) Use the File > Print function to plot the currently displayed drawing page. This function displays a dialog box that allows various plot configuration settings to be made. The following Print dialog box will appear.

435

Plotting and Publishing

To print the page, select File > Print in the Print dialog or the Print toolbar button. To preview the page printout, select File > Preview in the Print dialog or the Preview toolbar button. In the General Settings area of the dialog make settings for the area or view to be printed, the color of the printout and the number of copies. In the Printer and Paper Size area of the dialog, select either the Windows printer or the Bentley driver. Also select the paper size and orientation (landscape or portrait). In the Print Scale and Size area of the dialog, you can adjust the Print Scale value and X and Y size values for the printout. In the Print Position area of the dialog make settings for the X and Y position drawing origin on the page. There is also a checkbox for auto-centering.

436

Plotting and Publishing

Project Publisher The Project Publisher is a function in promis•e that allows you to output drawings in various formats. You can also include various other files from outside promis•e such as Word documents and send them to the same folder as the published drawings. You can output the following information using the Project Publisher: • Send output to a printer or plotter • Combine drawings, reports and parts data into a single PDF file • Create DWF files with associated HTML pages • Output a set of drawing files while remapping layers and attributes • Include documents from outside promis•e in the folder with the drawings and

in the combined PDF project output file.

437

Plotting and Publishing

Starting Project Publisher To start the Project Publisher. 1. Start promis•e and open a page in the project from which you wish to publish drawings. 2. Select promis-e Output > Project Publisher. The Project Publisher dialog will appear.

The dialog is divided into two main areas: the left side where you select the function that you wish to perform, and the right side where information is displayed and entered or selected. In the function-select area of the dialog there are three groups of functions: Document Management, Configure Publisher and Publish. The Document Management functions allow you to select the drawings or other documents to be published. The Configure Publisher Functions allow you to configure the content, formats and destination for the output. The Publish functions allow you to create published output in selected formats.

438

Plotting and Publishing

File Manager The default function when you open Project Publisher is the file manager. You can also select this function by clicking on File Manager on the left side of the dialog. This function allows you to select the drawings that you wish to publish. The file manager display has an area on the left labeled Available Items. This is a list of all the drawings in the current project, as well as any files that are listed in the external links dialog (see page 440). There is also an item called “contents” that will create a table of contents of your published items. There are a number of data columns including filename, page number, installation, location, etc. There is a scroll bar at the bottom of the area that allows you to see them all. You can change the order of the columns by dragging the column heading to the desired position.

To select a drawing for publication, select the box beside the drawing name and then select the right arrow button. The drawing will be listed in the Items to Publish area of the file manager. You can select multiple pages by or keys while making selections. If you select the double right arrow button ( >> ), all the pages will be placed in the Items to Publish area. In the figure above, two drawings have been selected for publishing, along with a Word document, a pdf document and the Table of Contents feature. When external documents are included in the published output, they will be incorporated into the PDF output file, and they will be placed in the same folder with DWG and Web output. 439

Plotting and Publishing Note:

You must have MicroSoft Office 2007 on your system in order for the Project Publisher to include external documents in the project PDF output file. You can remove drawings from the Items to Publish list by selecting them and using the left arrow button, or by using the double left arrow button ( Run Reports function. The Run Reports dialog will appear.

457

Reports

The available report categories are listed on the left side of the dialog. Categories with available report formats will be marked with a “+” icon. Double click on the category name to display the reports inside.

Selecting and running a report Click on the checkbox beside the report name so that a checkmark appears. You can select multiple reports and print them all at the same time. Select the Run button to generate the selected reports. Note:

458

You can also create and save a report output configuration file that defines a preferred combination of reports and output formats. You can then select this file in the Configuration field. See page 463.

Reports

Select the output type There are two buttons and two checkboxes that determine the output medium. The following selections are available (you may select more that one for each report): Preview - Select this button to display the report on the screen. Text On Drawing - Select this button to place the report on a drawing page. Note:

To place a report on a drawing page, you must use a report template that is designed for this purpose. In the pre-configure reports, these are indicated by the word “- Drawing” in the report name. For example, “BOM_Itemized - Drawing (metric)”. To create custom Text On Drawing templates, see page 481. Print - This checkbox will send the report to a printer. A printer selection dialog will appear when you run the report. Output to File - This checkbox will cause the report to be stored as a file. When you select this checkbox, additional fields and checkboxes become active. Use the Save As field to browse to the folder where you wish to store the file. Checkboxes for the following file formats are available (you may select more that one for each report): CSV - Generates reports in the Comma-Separated Variables format. When this checkbox is selected, the Text Delimiter field becomes active which allows you to define the character that will separate values in the report. HTML - Generate reports in HTML format. A “Files” subdirectory is created for each report to hold images and other files related to the report. TXT - Generates reports in ASCII text format. XLS - Generates reports in the XLS format, compatible with Microsoft Excel spreadsheet software. MHT - Generates reports in the MHTML archived Web page format. This combines a web page and associated images into a single file which can be viewed using Internet Explorer. RTF - Generates reports in the Rich Text Format, which is compatible with Microsoft Word and other word processors. PDF - Generates reports in the Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format.

459

Reports

Sorting report contents Highlight the report name in the Run Reports dialog and select the Sorting button. The Sorting dialog will appear, listing the fields in the selected report.

If you wish to sort the report by the values in a certain field, select the desired field on the left side of the dialog and select the “+” button. The field will then be listed on the right side of the dialog. You can select multiple fields to sort by, in which case the data is sorted by the first field and when there are multiple items with the same value, these are sorted by the values in the second field. You can select whether the sorting is in ascending or descending order by clicking on the triangle icon so that it points up (ascending) or down (descending).

Select ascending or descending order

460

Reports

Filtering report contents You can create filters to define what should be included or excluded in a report. Highlight the report name in the Run Reports dialog and select the Filters button. The Filtering dialog will appear.

To create a filter: 1. Use the down arrow button in the Field field and select one of the report fields from the list. 2. In the Relationship field choose a comparison function. The available functions are = (equals), Like (wildcard), < (less than), > (greater than) and Not (not equal to). “Like” is a wildcard function that will include any items that contain the string that is entered in the Value field. 3. In the Value field enter the string that the filter function is to use to decide what to include or exclude from the report. 4. Select the OK button to create the filter. Filters are used until you return to the Report Filters dialog and select the Clear Filter link for that filter.

461

Reports

Report Options Select the Options button in the Run Reports dialog to make settings that affect report contents.

The following options are available: Replace multi-line character (^) with space - Select this checkbox to replace the line break character (^) with a space in the reports to be created. This character creates line breaks in text that is entered on a drawing. If you wish to keep the text line breaks in your reports, de-select this checkbox. Select parts on online pages only - Select this checkbox to include only items that exist in online pages. Include devices without a part number - Select this checkbox to include items that have no part number assigned. Include terminals - Select this checkbox to include terminals. Include part numbers that only exist in BOM explorer - Select this checkbox to include items that have been entered in the BOM Explorer but have not yet been used in a drawing.

462

Reports

Only list parts used on selected pages - Select this checkbox to only include items on selected pages. When you select the checkbox, a Select Pages button will appear. Use this button to display the Select Pages dialog where you can choose pages.

Creating a Report Output Configuration File You can create a configuration file that defines a combination of reports and output settings. This allows you to quickly select and run your preferred report outputs. The configuration file is selected in the Configuration field of the Run Reports dialog. To create a configuration file: 1. In the Run Reports dialog, select the checkbox for a report that you wish to include in your configuration. 2. Select the output destination(s) for the selected report (printer, output to file, file type, path, etc.). 3. In a similar manner, select each additional report that you wish to include and the output destinations for that report. 4. When you have selected all the desired reports, enter a name for your configuration file in the Configuration field. 5. Select the Save button. A message window will confirm that the file was saved. Now, when you enter the Run Reports dialog you will be able select your configuration file from the drop-down list in the Configuration field. The stored group of reports and output settings then will be immediately selected and will be ready to run.

463

Reports

Compile Connection Information function Ordinarily, the software will automatically compile the connection information that it needs to put in the reports. If for some reason you believe the latest connection information is not being used in the reports, you can manually update the connection information for the current project using the Manage > Compile Connections function. You can then generate the desired reports again.

464

Reports

Standard Reports The following pre-configured reports are provided with the software. Bill of Materials (Itemized) - Itemized bill of material. Bill of Materials (Quantified) - Quantified bill of material. Cable List - List of cables. Dimension List - Calculates total area, maximum depth and total weight of components used in project. Family List - List of device families. Field Wire List - List of cables, including connections of each conductor. Installations - List of installations in a project. Job Costing - Calculated cost of project including material, assembly, wiring time and mark-up. Manufacturers Parts - A listing of the parts records in the parts database. Macros - List of macros in the symbol catalog. Page Formats - List of available drawing page formats. Page List - A table of contents of the project, listing all pages. PLC List - A list of PLC modules in the project. Symbols - A list of symbols in the symbol catalog. Terminal strips - A list of terminal strips in the project. Terminals - A list of terminals strips in the project showing connections of each terminal. Wire Links - A list of wire link cross references in the project. Wire List - A list of wires including wire number, gauge, color, and From/To connection information. Wire Labels - A list of wire numbers which can be printed in the form of wire labels. Note:

When you see the word “- Drawing” in a report name, for example “BOM_Itemized Drawing (metric)”, it indicates the report is intended for Text on Drawing output.

465

Reports

Report Template Designer You can use the Report Wizard function to create your own custom report formats. Use the following procedure: 1. Select Configure > Report Template Designer. The following dialog will appear.

466

Reports

2. You can either edit an existing template that you created or create a new template. To edit an existing template that you created, select File > Open or the toolbar button for Open Report The following dialog will appear.

Select the existing report from the drop-down list in the Template field and then the OK button. To create a new template, select File > New or the toolbar button for New Report Template. The following dialog will appear.

In this dialog you select how you will create the template. Select the Predefined Report Type radio button if you wish to base your report on an existing report type. Select one of the report types in the drop-down list. Select the Customized by SQL Statement radio button if you wish to enter SQL statements to define the data that will be included in the report. When you select this radio button, the text field below it becomes available for entering the SQL 467

Reports

statements. A radio button, Limit recordset within project range also becomes available. Select this radio button if you wish the data in the report to be limited to the current project only. When you have selected the report type or entered the SQL statements, select OK to continue. 3. The Report Template Designer dialog will appear. The dialog has areas for performing different functions. Menus and Toolbar

Toolbox

Report Formatting and Preview area

Report Explorer, Properties and Fields

Menus and Toolbar - At the top of the dialog are menus and toolbars for major file-handling and formatting functions. See page 474. Toolbox - On the left side of the dialog is the toolbox area that provides a selection of standard controls that you can drag into the report template. This includes elements such as labels, lines, picture boxes, tables, and so on. See page 474. Report Formatting and Preview - The central area of the dialog is where you place and arrange the elements of the report. Select the Designer tab at the bottom of this area when you are placing or editing report elements. The report formatting area is divided into horizontal bands that represent different parts of the report page (header, body, footer, etc.). Select the Preview or HTML View tabs when you wish to see what the report output will look like. If you have a page open, data from that project will appear in the preview. 468

Reports

Report Explorer, Properties and Fields - On the right side of the dialog is an area that has several purposes. Select the Report Explorer tab to see an outline view of the report’s structure and the elements used in the report. You can use this view to select individual fields or controls and view their properties or delete them by means of the right-click menu. Select the Property Grid tab to set the properties of the currently selected report element. Select the Field List tab to display a list of available data fields. You can drag these fields into the report formatting area. You can adjust the size of these dialog areas by pointing the cursor at the edge of the area and dragging. You can close the dialog area by clicking on the “X” button for that area and re-display it using the View > Window menu. You can drag the Toolbox and the Report Explorer/Fields/Property Grid area so that they are free-floating windows. To dock them again with the Report Template dialog, drag them to either the right or left end of the ruler bar. 4. Global settings for the report. To do this, select the global settings button, which is the small button marked with a “>” character at the upper left corner of the Report Formatting area.

Global Settings button

When you select the button, a limited group of fields will appear beside the button. However, you can select the Property Grid tab and access all global settings for the report.

469

Reports

Note:

You must select the global settings button first before you will see these fields in the Property Grid tab. The important fields here are: Landscape - Select True in this field if you wish the report to be in landscape mode. Select False if you wish the report to be in portrait mode. Margins - Sets the page margins for the report. If you click the “+” icon beside the Margins field, you will see separate fields for top, bottom, right and left margins. PageHeight, PageWidth - Set the paper size here. Units are hundredths of an inch or tenths of a millimeter as set in the Report Unit field. Report Unit - Here you select whether the space units you enter for margins, paper size, etc., will represent hundredths of an inch or tenths of a millimeter.

470

Reports

5. In the Report Formatting area, create the bands that will make up the main areas of the report page. The different bands are marked by horizontal bars with the name of the band type.

Bands

The following band types are available: TopMargin - The area defined by the top margin value. Used for placing content at the top of each report page. ReportHeader - For content that will only appear at the beginning of the first page of the report, below the top margin. PageHeader - Used for placing content at the top of a report page, below the TopMargin. Mainly intended for displaying the header of a table, which has been continued from the previous page. Detail - The main content area of the report. GroupHeader - A header for a sub-section of data within the Detail band of the report (example: one cable within a field wiring report). The group header appears above the Detail band. GroupFooter - A footer for a sub-section of data within the Detail band of the report. Appears below the Detail band. ReportFooter - Used for placing content at the end of a report. PageFooter - Used for placing content at the bottom of a report page, above the BottomMargin band. Mainly intended for displaying the footer of a table, which is continued on the following page. BottomMargin - An area defined by the bottom margin value. Used for

471

Reports

placing content at the bottom of each report page. To insert a new band, right click in the desired part of the report formatting area and select Insert Band from the popup menu, followed by the desired band type.

If a band type is greyed-out in the menu, that means that it already exists in the report and cannot be placed again. To delete a band, right click anywhere in the band and select Delete from the popup menu. 6. Define the content of each band. You can make fixed entries or variable entries that will be replaced with project data or other information. Drag elements such as text boxes, picture boxes and lines from the Toolbox area into any of the bands. You can also select the Field List tab to display a list of available data fields and drag these into the bands.

Configure the report elements by selecting the element and then making settings in the Property Grid tab. See page 475 for some examples of defining common report elements: 472

Reports

7. Preview the report by selecting the Preview or HTML View tabs. If you have a drawing page open, data from that project will appear in the preview.

8. Save the report. Select the File > Save function or the Save toolbar button. The Save As dialog will appear, allowing you to enter a name for the report and select a folder in which to save it. The default folder is promis•e Data/Templates/Reports. To generate the report, select the promis-e Output > Run Reports function. See page 457.

473

Reports

Report Template Designer Toolbars Hover the cursor over a toolbar button to see a tooltip that describes its function. Main Toolbar (editing functions)

Formatting Toolbar (text functions)

Layout Toolbar (element positioning functions)

Most toolbar functions are also available from the Report Wizard pulldown menus.

Report Template Designer Controls (Toolbox) The following controls are available in the Toolbox area. To use them, drag them into one of the bands in the report formatting area. Once there, you can select them and format them in the Property Grid tab like other report elements. Pointer - A tool that allows you to select bands and report elements. Subreport - Subreport controls are used if there is a particular report structure that needs to be included in many reports and it needs to have a consistent appearance and functionality. A good example is a report header that always contains the same company information, who generated the report, the date, etc. Barcode - Represents a barcode in reports. Chart - Inserts a chart in reports. Use this control to show different data in a report using one or several Series View Types. A chart wizard allows you to format the chart once inserted. Checkbox - Inserts a check box in reports. Use this control to allow a user to display a true/false or Checked/Unchecked/Indeterminate state. Label - Inserts a label in reports. Use this control to place single-line or multi-line text in a report. Line - This control places a line in your report. PageBreak - Inserts a page delimiter into the report. 474

Reports

PageInfo - Use this control to display auxiliary information on report pages such as page numbers, the current date or user information. Panel - Inserts a control that can contain other controls. Use this control to group controls together which makes it easier to manipulate them. PictureBox - Inserts a control that can be used to insert images into your report. RichTextBox - Inserts a control that can be used to display, enter, and manipulate formatted text. Table - Inserts a table into the reports. ZipCode - Inserts a control that displays a zip code in a report.

Report Configuration Examples Here are some examples of defining common report elements: Project Name Drag a Label box from the Toolbox into the desired band.

Double click inside the label box and enter the text “Project Name:”. Stretch the box to the desired size by dragging one of the square handles on the edges of the field. You can format the text for font, size, etc., using the text functions in the formatting toolbar or in the Property Grid tab.

475

Reports

Select the Field List tab and open the “Project Fields” group. Drag the “Project” field into the report next to the label box. Resize this box as needed and format the text.

When the report is generated, the Project field will be replaced with the name of the current project. Example: Project Name: Paintline 2 Table (Columns) A table defines columns for data, causing the information in each row of the report to line up properly. To create a table, begin by dragging the Table control from the toolbox into the desired band of the report.

476

Reports

The default table has three cells (columns). You can resize the table by dragging the handles on the edge. You can also set the width and height of the table using the Size fields in the Property Grid tab.

Note:

If the entire table is selected, the size settings will apply to the table. If a single cell is selected, the size settings will apply to that cell. Making a single cell larger may reduce the size of the other cells because the total size of the table will remain the same. To add more columns, cells or rows to the table, select one of the cells, right click, and use the Insert function from the popup menu.

Page Numbers To add page numbers to the report pages, begin by dragging the PageInfo control from the toolbox into the desired band of the report. The PageFooter band would usually be the best place for page numbers.

477

Reports

You can make many formatting settings in the Property Grid tab. The PageInfo box you inserted must be selected (handles visible) in order to see its properties. If you click the “+” icon in the Font field, a variety of font setting fields become available. If you click in the PageInfo field, a drop-down list will be available that provides a number of predefined formats. NumberOfTotal is the default format. RomLowNumber is a lowercase roman numeral. RomHiNumber is an uppercase roman numeral.

You can make additional settings in the Format field of the Property Grid tab. Clicking in this field displays a browse [...] button which, if clicked, displays the Format String Editor dialog.

478

Reports

Here you can select an appropriate data type in the Category column and then select from various formats in the Standard Types tab. You can also go to the Custom tab and see a list of individual elements which you can type in the field at the top of this tab. The Sample field shows an example of what that format will look like with a real value. If you want to use the “Number of Total” format but don’t like the default “/” character that divides the two values, you can select NumberOfTotal in the PageInfo field, and make the following entry in the Format field: {0} of {1} When the report is run, the {0} will be replaced with the current page number and the {1} will be replaced with the total number of pages in the report. If you prefer, you can use any word or character in place of “of”.

479

Reports

Date-Time Drag a PageInfo control into the desired band. Select the PageInfo box so that the handles are visible. Then, in the Property Grid tab, click in the PageInfo field. A drop-down list will be available that provides a number of predefined formats. Select DateTime.

Click in the Format field of the Property Grid tab to display a browse [...] button. Click this button to display the Format String Editor dialog.

Select DateTime in the Category list. You will then be able to select various date and time combinations in the Standard Types tab. You can also go to the Custom tab and see a list of individual date/time elements which you can type in the field at the top of this tab. The Sample field shows how your selected format will appear in the report.

480

Reports

Text on Drawing Templates Special conditions must be met for creating templates that will place a report on a drawing page (Text on Drawing). The predefined Text on Drawing reports provided with the software are indicated by the word “- Drawing” in the report name. Follow these rules when creating Text on Drawing report templates: 1. Each column heading must be in the cell of a table and this table must be inside the PageHeader band. 2. Each data column must also be in the cell of a table and this table must be inside the Detail band. Column headings in table Data columns in table

3. Any variables placed outside of these tables will be ignored. 4. You can use plain text entries in other bands of the report, but variables will be ignored. 5. An exception to rule 2 is a Quantified Bill of Materials report. In this report the table containing the data columns must be placed in the GroupHeader1 band. This allows the sum of quantities to function properly. 6. Also in the Quantified Bill of Materials report provided with the software, the “Item” heading corresponds to a blank cell in the data table; no variable is used in this cell of the data table because the value of this field is automatically calculated by a script.

481

Reports

Engineering Design Considerations Report The Engineering Design Considerations function allows you to check for various conditions in your project that could cause problems if not corrected. 1. Select Review/Revise > Engineering Design Considerations. The following dialog will appear.

2. Select a Range radio button to determine how much of the project you wish to include in the check. The choices are: Current active page, Whole Project and Pages. If you choose Pages, the Select Pages button becomes active, allowing you to display the Select Pages dialog. 3. The conditions for which you can check are grouped into three categories: Connections, Cable and Symbol. Select the desired conditions so that a checkmark appears beside the condition name. You can select the category name to automatically select all the conditions in that category. 4. Select the Check button to check for the selected conditions. 482

Reports

5. The result of the check (Consideration Report) is displayed in the same dialog.

You can leave this report open as you work on correcting the various conditions. If you select the checkbox in the Status column, the item will appear with strikethrough characters, allowing you to “cross off” items on the list. If you wish to save the report, select the Export link. This will display the Save As dialog where you can save the report as a MS Excel (xls) file. To run another check, select the Options tab to display the list of conditions again.

483

Reports

Graphical Parts List The promis-e Output > Graphical Parts List function produces a parts list on one or more drawing pages. This report includes a graphical representation of the symbols associated each part number. Cross referencing information is included to show where each instance of the symbol is located including parent and child symbols.

To create a graphical parts list you must do the following things first: • Create a page macro that contains the desired columns and headings. • Create a graphical parts list macro for each symbol. • Create a cross reference macro for each symbol. • In the parts database, assign the name of the corresponding graphical parts list

macro to each part number using the Macro_List field.

484

Reports

Create page macro This macro contains the column headings of the list. See the following example. 1. On a blank page, enter the desired text and dividing lines. 2. Select Manage > Create Macro. 3. Enter an appropriate name for the macro. 4. Select or enter a base point of X=0, Y=0. 5. Select the Select Objects button and select the items to include in the macro. 6. Select OK to save the macro.

Create graphical parts list macro and cross reference macro These macros contain the desired fields from the parts database to identify the part number and the corresponding schematic symbol. You must create these for each component type. For positioning and sizing reasons it is probably easier to draw both macros at the same time and save the parts as separate macros. See the following example:

{

{ Cross reference macro Graphical parts list macro

The graphical parts list macro has information about the part number and symbols. The cross reference macro shows where the part number is used in the project. It contains the device ID as well as a cross reference to indicate the location where the device ID occurs.

485

Reports

Use the following procedure: 1. On a blank page, enter the desired text, symbols and dividing lines for the graphical parts macro.You may also wish to draw separate lines for area that will be the cross reference macro. In the graphical parts list macro area, use variable names for description, part number, etc. You must include the question mark. The following variables are available: ?descr Description ?techdate_1 First extended description field (Detailed_Description1) ?manufact Manufacturer ?partnumber Part number 2. Place the schematic symbol that is used to represent the part number. Delete the device ID after placing the symbol; in this case, it doesn't have a function. 3. In the cross reference macro area, enter the variables for the cross references. The following variables are available: ?devid Device ID ?inst Installation ?loc Location ?inst_loc_devid Installation - Location -Device ID ?page_inst Installation in which the component was placed ?cr0 Cross reference to the position of the symbol in the schematic diagram. For symbols with parent/child relationships, it refers to the parent. ?cr1,?cr2,?crx Cross references of the device child symbols. The order and quantity corresponds to that in the family definition. ?ftext0 Function text of the parent symbol. ?fext1-?ftextx Function text of the child symbols. 4. Select Manage > Create Macro . 5. Enter an appropriate name for the graphical parts list macro.

486

Reports

6. Select a base point in the upper left corner of the macro.

Graphical parts list macro base point Cross reference macro base point

7. Select the Select Objects button and select only the items to include in the graphical parts list macro. 8. Select OK to save the graphical parts list macro. 9. Select Manage > Create Macro to create the cross reference macro. 10. Enter the same name you used for the graphical parts list macro but add “_CR” to the end of the name. For example, if you called the graphical parts list macro “GRAPH-RELAY” you must name the cross reference macro “GRAPH-RELAY_CR”. 11. Select a base point in the upper left corner of the cross reference macro. 12. Select the Select Objects button and select only the items to include in the cross reference macro. 13. Select OK to save the cross reference macro.

487

Reports

Edit parts database Add the graphical parts list macro name in the parts database to all matching parts in the Macro_List field.

Assign graphical parts list macro name to parts records

488

Reports

Run the Graphical Parts List To run the Graphical Parts List: 1. Select promis-e Output > Graphical Parts List. The New Page dialog will appear.

2. Enter or select the desired drawing set, installation, location, page name, page format for the drawing. If the list occupies multiple pages, the entered page name will be the first page. 3. In the Page Macro field, select the page macro (header) you created for the graphical parts list. See page 485. 4. Select the OK button to continue. The Graph Setting dialog will appear.

489

Reports

Use the Filter fields to limit the graphical list to the parts used in a selected installation or location. Use the Page Margins fields to define the area of the page that will used for the list. 5. Select OK to generate the drawing pages that contain the list.

490

Reports

Forced Routing Manager The Forced Routing Manager allows you force the sequence of connections between devices without using diagonal wires. This forcing affects the output of the wire list and the shortest distance routing function. You may wish to use the Forced Routing Manager because, in some cases, the connections determined by the shortest distance routing function may not be the most efficient or practical for a layout, or you may find it difficult to use diagonal wire connections in your schematic. Also, you may need to add terminals or plugs that don’t exist in the schematic drawings but are required to assemble the equipment in the real world. By using forced routing to define specific connections where needed and then running the shortest distance routing function you can generate a more accurate wire routing list. To access the Forced Routing Manager you can: • Select Review/Revise > Forced Routing Manager, or • Right-click on a wire and select Forced Routing Manager from the pop-up

menu The Forced Routing Manager dialog will appear. If the user selects this function from the drop-down menu the dialog will list all the potentials in the project with the first potential in the list highlighted by default. If, however, the user right clicks on a particular wire in the schematic, the software will only load that wire in the list.

491

Reports

The Forced Routing Manager dialog has three tabs: Arrangement View, Wire List View, and Split View.

Arrangement View tab In the Arrangement View tab of the Forced Routing Manager dialog (see previous figure), potentials are listed in alphanumeric order by name. Potentials that have not been named will be given an identifier of “Unnamed.” You can also type in the complete name or part of the name of a potential (wildcards * should be recognized) into the Search Potential field and select the “->” button to jump to that potential in the arrangement view and automatically expand that potential. Clicking the search button again will jump to the next potential that matches it.

492

Reports

Potential Groups In the Forced Routing Manager, connections are listed under each wire number, organized in “potential groups.” A potential group represents all the devices that are daisy-chained off one side (internal or external) of a terminal block or pin. (If there are no terminals or pins on a wire, then the potential group will contain all the connections on that wire. In the Arrangement View of the Forced Routing Manager you can expand or collapse each potential group by clicking on the “+” or “-” icons to show or hide the connections in the group.

Changing the Order of Groups and Connections You can change the order of the connections within the groups and move connections from one group to another. To change the order of groups and connections: 1. In the Arrangement View tab, highlight the potential group or connection that you wish to move. 2. Select the up arrow or down arrow button to move the item up or down in the listing. Note:

You can also change the order of connections by dragging them up or down and dropping them at the desired position. You cannot move a connection from a sub-group to a higher level or vice versa.

493

Reports

Adding a Potential Group You can add a potential group when you need an additional terminal or plug. 1. There are two ways to add a new potential group in the Forced Routing Manager: • Select a potential (wire) name and click the Add Group (the large “+”) button

or right click on the potential name and select Add Group from the pop-up menu. The Insert Device dialog will appear, where you can create the potential group with an existing unused terminal/plug connection point or add a new terminal/plug. The new group will be added to the end of the potential after the existing potential group(s). • Select a potential group name or a connection within a group and click the Add Group (the large “+”) button. The Insert Device dialog will appear, allowing you to create the potential group with an existing unused terminal/plug connection point or to add a new terminal/plug. You will be asked if the new connection group is to be inserted before or after the current potential group.

494

Reports

2. The Insert Device dialog appears when you add a group. Select a radio button for the type of device you are inserting: Terminal device, or Pin/Plug device. 3. Select the radio button to determine whether you will use a New ID or and Existing ID for the terminal or pin/plug. 4. If you are using a new ID, enter its device tag in the Device Tag field and select the desired installation and location. If you are using an existing ID, select the Search ID button. The Search dialog will appear, allowing you to select one of the available terminal or pin/plug IDs.

Select the desired ID in the Search dialog followed by OK. The selected ID will appear grayed out in the Insert Device dialog. 5. (Optional) If you are using a new ID, you can select a device family for the new group in the Family field. If you pick a family you will be prompted to pick a role in the device usage chart which will automatically populate the symbol name. 6. Select a symbol for the new group in the Symbol field. Use the browse button to display the Select Symbol dialog. 7. Enter a terminal or pin number in the Terminal Number field. If you are using an existing device tag, you will be prompted automatically with the first available terminal number. 8. Select the connection point for the new group in the CP Text field. 9. (Optional) Select a part number for the new group in the Part Number field. 10. Select the OK button to add the new group.

495

Reports

Connections that don’t exist in the schematic are marked with double angle brackets (>) in the Forced Routing Manager.

Add a Device to a Potential Group To add a device to a potential group: 1. Highlight the potential group heading or a connection within the group and select the Add Device (small “+”) button. You can also right click on the potential group heading or on a device in the group and select Add Device from the pop-up menu. 2. The Insert Device dialog will appear (see page 494). Fill in the dialog fields the same as when adding a group. In addition to terminal device and pin/plug device, you have a radio button for Normal device which consists of non-terminal/pin/plug symbols. 3. Select OK to add the device. Create a Single Point Connection In the Forced Routing Manager you can designate a connection as a “single point connection.” This indicates a device with only one connection. This kind of device must be at the end of a daisy chain. To create a single point connection: 1. In the Arrangement View tab, select the desired connection. (A connection must be at the end of the potential group before it can be made a single point connection.) 2. Select the Single Point Connection (red asterisk *) button. You can also right click on the connection and select Single Point from the pop-up menu. Single point connections are marked with an asterisk.

496

Reports

To remove the single point connection designation, select the connection and select the Single Point Connection button again. The asterisk will be removed from the connection. Star Groups and Wirelinks When a connection is made through a wirelink of the star group type, any connections that go through the wirelink are highlighted in red.

497

Reports

Wire List View tab The Wire List View tab of the Forced Routing Manager dialog displays details of the connections within the potential group that was selected in the Arrangement View tab. Any changes that you made in the Arrangement View tab are reflected in the wire list view. In the Wire List View, potential groups are separated by a shaded bar.

498

Reports

Forcing Connections In the Wire List View tab you can force connections. To force a connection: 1. Select the connection (row) that you wish to force. You can select more than one at a time by holding down the or keys while selecting. 2. Select the Force button. Forced connections are indicated in the Wire List View by blue text and by a forced connection icon

Note:

in the left-most column.

The use of diagonal wires in the schematics is considered to be a forced connection that can only be changed in the schematics. These wires have a text color of green to indicate these are forced connections that can only be changed in the schematics. They are also marked by a diagonal wire icon

in the left-most column.

To remove forcing from a connection - Select the forced connection and then select the Unforce button. Changing Wire Properties In the Wire List View tab you can change the wire properties. There are columns in that display various wire properties. You can determine which properties are displayed by right-clicking in the Wire Properties heading. The available properties are listed. If you select the checkbox for the desired property, it will be displayed. Similarly, you can hide a property by de-selecting its checkbox.

499

Reports

When you click in one of the property fields for a given connection you will be able to either enter a value or select from the available values. Values in the drop-down lists are the default values from the Wire Options dialog (see page 105). Note:

500

If you set the value in the Use field, that may pre-define certain other wire properties that you won’t be able to change without changing the Use value.

Reports

Split View tab The Split View tab of the Forced Routing Manager dialog is a combination of the Arrangement View tab and the Wire List View tab. It allows you to perform the functions of both tabs, however you have to do more scrolling to see the wire list information. When you highlight a connection in the Arrangement view, the software highlights the related connection in the Wire List view.

Import Legacy Connection List If you have used the Forced Routing Module in legacy versions of promis•e, you can import your previous forced connection files into the current version of the software. First you must convert the legacy project to the latest format using the Migration Wizard (see page 118). The Migration Wizard will make a copy of the "CLIST" folder from the legacy project to the new project inside the “Legacy Data” folder.

501

Reports

You can then click the Import Legacy Connection List button in the Force Routing Manager. This will display a browse dialog that allows you to browse to your Forced Connection List files. The browse dialog will filter for *.xml file types. Select a file and click the OK button. The software will read the XML connection list file and search by wire number and device ID to identify the connections and update the promis•e database to match the forced connections specified in the legacy connection list. It will update wire properties and add virtual devices that may not have existed in the schematic based upon the connection list file. The Alerts window will print any errors or problems encountered with the import.

502

Reports

Panduit Labels Function The Panduit Labels function allows you to generate labels for the wires, cables and devices in your project. You can select a Panduit label part number so that the output will be correctly formatted for use in the Panduit Easy-Mark label-printing software. Use this procedure: 1. Select the promis-e Output > Panduit Labels function. The Panduit Labels dialog will appear.

2. Select the radio button for the category of label that you wish to print: Wire Labels, Cable Tags or Device Labels. 3. Select a Panduit part number for the label. To do this, click on the Select Label button. The Panduit Form dialog will appear. This is a special parts selection form for Panduit parts.

503

Reports

The form will be filtered automatically for part numbers that correspond to Panduit labels. For more information on how to select parts in this dialog, see page 640. Once you have found the desired part number, highlight it and select the OK button. 4. The Panduit Labels dialog will re-appear with the selected part number displayed. Enter a value in the Quantity Per Wire (or Per Device or Per Cable) field to determine how many labels will be created with each wire number or ID. 5. The filter fields in the center of the dialog will vary depending on the label category you selected in step 2. These allow you to filter the range of items in your project that will be included in the output.

504

Reports

For wires, define a range of wire sizes by selecting an upper and lower value in the Gauge1 and Gauge2 fields. If you have assigned wire colors, you can limit output to a selected color in the Color field. You can also limit the output to a selected Installation or Location using the provided fields.

For cables, you can define a range of cable diameters by selecting an upper and lower value in the Diameter = fields. You can also limit the output to a selected Installation or Location using the provided fields. In the Export Full ID field you can select when the full ID (Installation-Location-Device Tag) will be included on the label rather than just the Device Tag. Select Never, Always, or When Cable Leaves Enclosure.

For devices, you can limit the output to a selected Installation or Location using the provided fields. In the Device Group area, you can select checkboxes for categories of devices (this corresponds to the values in the Category field of the 505

Reports

parts database). Select the top (blank) checkbox for items that have no entry in the Category database field. In the Label area select whether the label will include only the device tag or the full device ID (Installation-Location-Device Tag). 6. If you are going to use Panduit’s Easy-Mark label printing software, select the Config Easy-Mark button. (The Easy-Mark program allows you to see labels on-screen as they will appear when printed.) The Panduit Easy-Mark Configuration dialog will appear.

In the Location of Easymark.exe field, use the Browse button to locate and select the path to this file. In the Labels per row field, enter the number of labels you wish to print per row in the Easy-Mark software. Select Save to save your settings. 7. Also, if you are going to use the Easy-Mark label printing software, select the Start Easy-Mark checkbox. When this is selected, the output will be sent to the Easy-Mark software when you select the Export button. 8. If you wish to export the label information to a CSV (comma-separated variable) file, use the Browse button beside the Export To field, browse to the desired folder, and enter the desired file name. This information will then appear in the Export To field Note:

If you select an existing CSV file, the contents will be overwritten. 9. Select the Export button in the Panduit Labels dialog to send the selected label data to the Easy-Mark software, to a CSV file, or to both, depending on your settings.

506

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

10

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan promis•e has functions that automatically compile information on all the terminals that exist in the project drawing pages. The user can view and edit this information in a table format. Graphic drawings of terminal strips can also be generated automatically. There are also Pin-Plug Plan functions that operate in the same manner as the terminal plan functions except that they gather and display pin and plug information rather than terminal and terminal strip information.

Terminal Plan Overview Steps of Terminal Plan Creation Once the schematics in the project are complete, use the following steps to create a terminal/cable plan. (More detailed information is given in the following sections.) 1. Open a page in the desired project. 2. Activate the Review/Revise > Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager function. This function automatically generates a list of terminals and terminal connections according to the information in the project schematics. 3. The Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager dialog box will appear. (See page 512.) Select the strip(s) that you wish to edit. 4. The connections for the selected terminal strip(s) will be displayed in the Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager dialog box. Changes can now be made, such as cable assignment, assigning connection designations, sorting terminals, inserting spare terminals, and other operations.

507

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

5. Use the promis-e Output > Run Graphical Plan function to automatically create drawing pages showing a representation of selected terminal strips. Terminal Plan Creation Steps

CREATE SCHEMATICS

EDIT TERMINALS New destinations Change terminal numbers Assign part numbers Assign cables

GRAPHICAL TERMINAL PLAN & TERMINAL LISTS

Customization – Default formats for terminal lists and graphical terminal plans are included with the software. These formats can be customized to suit the user’s requirements. Use the Configure > Graphical Plan Designer function.

Connection Point Designations and Jumpers Connection Designations – Generally, terminals have connections on two sides. The terms “internal and external,” “from and to” or “source and destination” may be used to describe these two “sides” of connections to terminals. The assignment of a “side” designation to a terminal connection can be based on positioning in the schematic (left or right of the terminal symbol) or by manual assignments made by the user. Terminal connections also can be designated as jumpers. Default connection designations are defined at the connection points of terminal symbols. In other words, a connection point can be “set” so that anything connected to it is considered an internal connection, external connection, or a jumper. This setting can be made in several different ways: 1. The designation of terminal connection points can be defined when the terminal symbol is created by entering visible or hidden text for each connection point. See page 510.

508

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

2. Connection points can be designated after the symbol is placed in a schematic by right clicking on the symbol and selecting Connection Point on the popup menu. The Modify Connection Point Texts dialog will appear.

You can change the type of connection point by changing the letter that appears in the Visible Text column. In this example, I is for Internal, E is for External and J is for Jumper. Selecting the Reverse Order button will reverse the order in which the connections are listed in the dialog. In the Configuration column there is an entry that indicates the side of the terminal plan on which information for this connection will appear. This is defined when you create the symbol. If you change the entry in the Visible Text column to one that is not defined in the symbol, you will be able to change the entry in the Configuration column.

Connection Search Priorities The Review/Revise > Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager function causes the system to look along the wires in both directions from each terminal in the schematics. Wire link references are also analyzed. The software uses search priorities in cases where a potential has more than two devices connected. These priorities are the same as those used for other functions that require device connection information. See page 276. 509

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Connection Point Designation Display on Drawing You can view terminal designations on the drawing. 1. First, zoom in on the terminal symbol. Select the toolbar button for display connection points (if it is not already selected).

2. Then select the toolbar button for display terminal connection point texts.

The connection point designations will appear beside each terminal connection point.

510

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Terminal Plan Functions Functions related to the terminal plan: Review/Revise > Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager – Terminal plan editor (table format). See page 512. promis-e Output > Run Graphical Plan – Generates a graphical terminal plan. See page 532. Configure > Graphical Plan Designer – Create and store custom configurations for graphical terminal plans. See page 537. In addition, terminal lists can be generated under the promis-e Output > Run Reports function with the Terminals and Terminal Strips reports.

511

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager The terminal/pin-plug manager compiles a list of terminals in the current project and allows the user to select and edit the terminal information. To enter the terminal plan editor, first open a page in the desired project and then select Review/Revise > Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager. The Terminal Manager dialog will appear.

The terminal strips in the current project are listed on the left side of the dialog in a tree view grouped by installation and location.

512

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

To edit a terminal strip, select the strip’s ID on the left side of the dialog so that it is highlighted. The terminal information for that strip will then appear on the right side of the dialog.

For each terminal in the strip, there is a series of columns with different types of information. Information about the terminal is in the center group of columns and information about the devices connected to the terminal appears to the left and right.

513

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

You can right-click in the column group headings to determine which columns are displayed. Select the checkbox for those columns that you wish to see.

When you select a terminal on the right side, you can also see this information in the Properties tab on the left side of the dialog. You make assignments in the Part Number(s) field in this tab. If you select multiple terminals you can make the same assignment to them all.

514

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

The following columns are available: Target Data Wire Label - Indicates the wire label of the wire connected to the connection point. Wire Use - Indicates the wire use (layer) on which the wire is located. See page 108. Gauge, Color - Properties of the wire connected to the terminal. Cable - If the terminal is connected to a cable, the cable device ID and conductor are identified here. Device ID - Indicates the device ID of the device to which the terminal connection point is connected. CP - Indicates the connection point text of the device to which the terminal connection point is connected. Terminal Data Position - Indicates the position of the terminal in the terminal strip. CP - Indicates a connection point on the terminal symbol and the designation of the connection point. See page 508. Terminal # - The terminal number assigned to the terminal. Jumper - If a jumper connection exists, the terminal number of the terminal to which the jumper connects will be listed. Page Line # - Indicates the line number on which the terminal is placed. Part Number - The part number assigned to the terminal. Family - If the terminal is part of a device family, it will be indicated here. This is particularly useful for devices such as 3-tier terminals to be assigned to a family. Graphical Plan Symbol - The symbol that will represent the terminal in a graphical terminal plan.

515

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Terminal Editing Functions You can access the terminal editing functions through the menus or through the toolbar at the top of the Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager dialog.

The following functions are available: Change Terminal Order You can change the order in which the terminals are listed in the terminal manager by using the up and down arrow buttons in the terminal manager toolbar. Select (highlight) the desired terminal and then select the up or down arrow button to move it up or down the list. You can also change a terminal’s position by dragging it and dropping it in the list. Note:

Terminals that belong to a family cannot be moved. If you wish to actually change the terminal numbers to reflect the order in which they are listed, use the Renumber > Incrementally function (see page 517).

Sort Terminals Use the Sort menu in the Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager dialog to change the order in which terminals are listed in the terminal manager.

The following choices are available: By Terminal # - Sort in numerical order by terminal number. By Part Number - Sort terminals alphanumerically by part number. By Potential - Sort terminals by the potential to which they are connected. By Position - Sort terminals by position number. Select submenu for left or right side. 516

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

By Target Device ID - Sort alphabetically by the target device ID. Select submenu for left or right side. By Wire Label - Sort terminals alphanumerically by wire label. Select submenu for left or right side. By Wire Use - Sort terminals by wire use column. If you select the same function again, the order will switch between “lowest to highest” and “highest to lowest.” Renumber or Rename Terminals Use the renumber functions in the Edit menu in the Terminal Manager dialog to renumber or rename terminals in the selected strip. There are also toolbar buttons for these functions.

The menu allows you to: Renumber Incrementally - To renumber terminals incrementally: 1. Select a terminal strip. 2. Select (highlight) the terminals that you wish to renumber. 3. Select the Edit > Renumber Incrementally function. You will be prompted to enter a start number.

4. Enter the lowest number to be assigned to the selected terminals and select OK.

517

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Renumber by Potential - This function will renumber terminals using the order of the potentials connected to each terminal. 1. Select a terminal strip. 2. Select (highlight) the terminals that you wish to renumber. 3. Select the Edit > Renumber By Potential function. You will be prompted to enter a start number. 4. Enter the lowest number to be assigned to the selected terminals and select OK. Rename Terminals - This function will rename the terminal strip of any selected terminals. This has the effect of moving the terminals to another strip. This function is in the Edit menu and in the toolbar. 1. Select a terminal strip. 2. Select (highlight) the terminals that you wish to assign to a different terminal strip. 3. When you select the Edit > Rename function, you will be prompted to enter a terminal strip name including installation, location and device tag.

4. Select OK. The selected terminals will be moved to the specified terminal strip. If the strip did not previously exist, the strip now will be listed in the terminal manager. Clip Jumpers You can designate two terminals on the same strip as being connected with a clip jumper. Use the following procedure: 1. Select a terminal strip. 2. Select (highlight) a terminal connection that you wish to connect with a clip jumper. This terminal must be one that can be legitimately connected to another terminal or terminals, i.e., there must be a direct connection between them in the schematic. 518

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

3. Select the Jumpers > Clip Jumper function. The connection will be indicated by a blue line to the left of the data columns that connects the two terminals. Clip jumper

Wire Jumper If two terminals have been connected by a clip jumper and you wish to return to a wire connection, you can use the wire jumper function. 1. Select one of the terminals that has a clip connection. 2. Select the Jumpers > Wire Jumper function. The Wire Jumper dialog will appear.

The terminal you selected will appear in the From column and the terminal it connects to will appear in the To column. You must specify which connection point on each terminal should be connected. For each terminal you can only select one connection point, either on the left or right side. When you click in the Left or Right fields, the available connection points will appear in a drop-down list.

519

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

3. When you have selected the desired connection points, select the OK button. The blue clip jumper line will be removed from the left column and the target columns will be updated with the wire connection. Insert Device The Insert Device function allows you to insert a part number into the terminal strip that represents an additional component of the terminal strip such as a spacer or end block. By inserting such a device that might not appear in the schematic, its part number will be included in the bill of materials and it can also appear in the graphical terminal plan. 1. Select a terminal strip. 2. Select (highlight) the terminal after which you wish to insert a device.

520

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

3. Select the Accessories > Insert Device function (or the Insert Device toolbar button). The Select Part Number dialog will appear.

4. Select the desired device part number by double-clicking on it. Selected part numbers appear in the lower, Selected Items area of the dialog. Select OK to assign the part number. The part number will be included in the terminal strip after the selected terminal.

You can remove a device that you added with the Accessories > Delete Device & Spare function.

521

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Insert Spare Terminal The Insert Spare function will insert one or more extra terminals into the selected terminal strip. 1. Select a terminal strip. 2. Select the Accessories > Insert Spare function (or the Insert Spare toolbar button). The following dialog will appear.

3. In the Enter First Number field enter the starting (lowest) number for the terminal(s) you are inserting. 4. In the Enter Quantity of Spares field enter the quantity of terminals you wish to add. 5. The Specify Type of Spare field lists the existing terminals in the strip. If you have more than one type of terminal in the strip you can select the type that you wish to use as spares. 6. Select OK.

522

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

The spare terminals are added to the terminal strip. They are labeled as “Spare” in the Type column.

If you enter the number of an existing terminal in the Insert Spares dialog, the software will ask if you wish to duplicate the terminal. If you answer Yes it will create a spare terminal with the same number. You can remove spare terminals that you added with the Accessories > Delete Device & Spare function. Once you create a spare terminal, you can define targets for it by clicking inside the Device ID field on the Left Target or Right Target side of the terminal. A browse button will appear in the field. Select this button and the Define Target dialog will appear:

Select or enter the desired target for the spare terminal including Installation, Location, Strip and Number. Select OK to enter the target information.

523

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Delete Device or Spare Terminal You can delete a device or spare terminal that you have added to a terminal strip. 1. Select a terminal strip. 2. Select (highlight) the spare terminal(s) or devices that you wish to delete. 3. Select the Accessories > Delete Device & Spare function. 4. You will be asked if you wish to delete the items. Select Yes. The selected items will be removed from the strip. Swap Terminal Targets You can switch terminal targets from the left side to the right side of the terminal manager: 1. Select the desired terminal. 2. Select the Edit > Swap Targets function or the Swap Targets toolbar button. The target data will change positions from one side of the terminal to the other. Hide/Show Rows You can choose to hide rows in the terminal manager if there is information you would rather not see. 1. Select the desired row(s). 2. Select the Hide/Show Rows button in the toolbar. The selected rows will be removed from the terminal manager display. To show the hidden rows, select the Hide/Show Rows button again.

524

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Assign Cable You can assign the conductors of a cable to a group of terminals using the Assign Cable function. Cables assigned in the terminal manager will be added to the schematic drawing automatically. 1. Select a terminal strip. 2. Select the Cable field (either right or left side) for the terminal connections to which you wish to assign a cable. Select an individual connection on each terminal (hold down the key while making the selections).

525

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

3. Select the Assign > Cable function. A dialog will appear prompting you to select a cable symbol

You can select a symbol from the list, enter a symbol name in the Name field, or you can search for a symbol by entering part of its description in the Description field and selecting the Search button. Any symbols with descriptions that contain the search term will be displayed. When you have selected the symbol, select the Place Symbol button. 4. The Device Properties dialog will appear. Enter a device ID for the cable. If desired, use the Search button to assign a part number. You must also select a device family for the cable in the Family field. This determines the number of available conductors in the cable. Select OK to continue.

526

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

5. The Device Usage Chart dialog will appear.

Select OK to continue. 6. The Device Properties dialog will re-appear. Select OK to continue.

527

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

7. The Cable Text dialog will appear. Here you can enter descriptive texts related to the cable.

Enter any desired descriptions and select OK to continue. The cable conductor assignments will be indicated in the Cable column of the terminal manager. The cable will also appear in the schematic diagram.

528

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Assign Part Number to Terminal You can assign a part number to one or more terminals using the Assign Part Number function. When you view terminals in the terminal manager, any assigned part number will be will be listed in the Part Number column.

To assign a part number in the terminal manager: 1. Select a terminal strip. 2. Select (highlight) the terminal(s) to which you wish to assign a part number. You can also use the Properties tab to assign part numbers.

529

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

3. Select the Assign > Part Number function or the Part Number toolbar button. (Alternatively, you can click inside the Part Number field for the terminal and select the browse button.) The Select Part Number dialog will appear listing the available terminal part numbers.

Select the desired part number by double-clicking on it. Selected part numbers appear in the lower, Selected Items area of the dialog. Select OK to assign the part number. 4. The selected part number now will be listed in the terminal manager. It also will be shown in the schematic, bill of material, etc. To delete an assigned part number: 1. Click inside the Part Number field and select the browse button. 2. Double-click on the part number listed in the Selected Items area of the Select Part Number dialog so that the part number is removed. 3. Select OK.

530

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Graphical Terminal Plan The software can create a graphical terminal plan, automatically generating drawing pages that show terminal strips with connection information for each terminal. In other words, it is a visual representation of a terminal strip along with useful connection information that a technician would need to wire the devices and terminals together. To do this, the software uses a designated graphical plan template, which graphically represents each terminal strip. Appropriate terminal information is then automatically placed at each terminal position. The user can select from a number of graphical templates provided with the software, or the user can create a custom template using the Configure > Graphical Plan Designer function.

531

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Graphical Terminal Plan Generation Use the following procedure to generate a graphical terminal plan. 1. Open a page in the desired project. This page must be set to the Graphical Plan drawing mode. 2. Select the promis-e Output > Run Graphical Plan function. The Run Graphical Plan dialog will appear.

3. Make settings for the graphical plan. The following settings are available: A. Create plan automatically or by selection - Select the Automatically radio button if you wish the software to place strips on a page. Select the By Selection radio button if you wish to select a position for the terminal strip on the page that is currently open.

532

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

B. If you create the graphical plans automatically you can select the Allow Multiple Strips Per Page checkbox to allow multiple strips on a single page if they fit. C. Graphical Plan Orientation Settings - In the Rotate Symbols field you can enter a rotation value so that the terminal strip or other symbol will run either vertically or horizontally. D. Cable Heading Options - In this part of the dialog you can select whether a cable connection is indicated by the conductor color (select Show Cable Conductor) or by a symbol such as an “X” (select Show Symbol). The symbol CROSS is included in the catalog for this purpose. E. Jumper Options - Use the Jumper Symbol field to select a symbol that will represent a jumper connection in the graphical plan. The symbol JUMPER is included in the symbol catalog for this purpose. F. Page Margins - In this part of the dialog you can define margins for the graphical plan page. G. Default Row Height - You can enter a default height value for table rows. 4. Select the strips that you wish to include in the graphical plan in the Select Strip(s) area of the dialog. In the Graphical Plan Template column you can select the template to use for the selected strip.

5. Select the Suppress Target Connection Point checkbox if you wish to omit the connection point from the from/to target information in the graphical plan. 6. Select the Place Strip(s) button. If you selected the automatic method of generating the graphical plan, the New Page dialog will appear.

533

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Enter a drawing set, installation, location and page number for the first page that will be created for the graphical plan. If additional pages are required they will follow the first page. You can also select a title block, page format and make other settings for these pages. Select OK to generate the graphical plan. You can view the plan by opening the pages that are created.

534

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

If you selected the “by selection” method of generating the graphical plan you will not see the New Page dialog, you will go to the currently open page and you will be prompted on the command line to select an insertion point. Select a point on the page that will be the upper left corner of the graphical plan for the strip. The strip will be placed on the page and the software will return to the Run Graphical Plan dialog, allowing you to select the next strip. When you return to the Run Graphical Plan dialog, strips and terminals that have been placed in a drawing are marked with a red “X” mark.

If terminals are marked with an exclamation point (!), it indicates that no part number has been assigned to the terminal symbol. You can click inside the Part Number field to get a browse button that will take you to the part number assignment dialog. A part number (with wiring diagram symbol) is required to ensure proper generation of the graphical plan.

How the software generates a graphical plan A graphical terminal plan is composed of a group of wiring diagram symbols, one for each terminal block. The symbol name is defined in the parts database in the Graphical_Plan_Symbol field. By using wiring diagram symbols, the software is able to update the connection information from the compiled connection list or from the shortest distance output. By having a separate field in the database to name a graphical plan symbol (in addition to a wiring diagram symbol), the same terminals can be placed in wiring diagrams and terminal plans at the same time. The format of the graphical plan is determined by a graphical plan template which defines the position of the wiring diagram symbols and the variables that will be filled in with connection information and other data. Templates may also include fixed text or variables that provide column headings.

535

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

The page margins entered in the Run Graphical Plan dialog are offsets from the Top, Bottom, Left, and Right sides of the page. These margins control the placement of the header blocks on the page and they also tell the software how many terminals in a strip can be placed on the page before a new page must be created. Assuming a vertical plan and automatic generation of the plans, the top margin will determine the vertical starting position relative to the boundary box of the header block. In other words, if the top margin is set to 1 inch then the top of the header block will be placed one inch from the top of the page. The left margin is used to position the header block in the horizontal direction. Once the wiring diagram symbols representing the terminals are placed, the software can add connection information to each symbol. If the Dynamically Update Connections checkbox is selected in the project Wiring Diagram Settings dialog (see page 100), the information will be added automatically. If this setting is not turned on, you can also use the promis-e Output > Update Wiring Diagram function to update the connection information on the drawing. If the user has already generated a graphical plan and he or she runs this graphical plan again using the Automatically radio button, the software will automatically delete the old terminal plan pages and regenerate them again. If, however, the user picks By selection when trying to regenerate this plan the software will check to see if there are additional terminals that have not been placed yet, and if this is so, the software will place the remainder of the terminals and not regenerate the entire plan. The user would have to manually delete the existing strip before he would be allowed to regenerate the whole strip at one time. When regenerating terminal plans or even creating new ones the software will perform error checking to make sure that the software doesn't overwrite existing pages that belong to other terminal strips or that contain other logical data besides the terminal plans the user is trying to regenerate. If this action would result in such an overwrite of a page the user will be given an error and not allowed to proceed. Compile Connection Information function Ordinarily, the software will automatically compile the connection information that it needs to put in the terminal plan. If for some reason you believe the latest connection information is not being used in the terminal plan, you can manually update the connection information for the current project using the Manage > Compile Connections function. You can then generate the desired terminal plans again.

536

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Graphical Plan Template Designer The Graphical Plan Template Designer allows you to create custom templates for graphical plans. 1. Select Configure > Graphical Plan Designer. The following dialog will appear. Note:

The Graphical Plan Template Designer dialog consists of step buttons on the left and a settings area on the right. There is an Auto Hide button in the lower left corner of the dialog that sets whether or not the settings area will be hidden if you move the cursor back to the drawing area (so it is not in the way). If auto hide is turned on, you can click on the desired step button to display the setting area again.

Select the New Graphical Plan Template radio button if you wish to create a completely new template. Select the Modify Existing Graphical Plan Template radio button if you wish to create a new template by editing an existing template. When you select this button, the filename field will become active. Use the browse button to locate and select the existing template file.

537

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

2. Select the Next button to continue. If you chose to create a new template, a blank drawing page will open. If you chose to modify an existing template, the file for that template will open. The following dialog will appear.

In the Select a page format field, select a page format to view while designing the template. Use the browse button to select from the available formats. This format appears as a visual reference only and is not saved as part of the template. (In other words, when you generate the graphical plan you can choose a different page format, if you wish.) The Variables area of the dialog provides a list of terminal plan variables that will act as place holders for information when placed in the template drawing. The variables are grouped into two categories: "Content" and "Header.” Content variables are for the body of the terminal plan. Header variables are used for column headings and similar purposes. Select the “+” icon to open either of these categories and display the variables inside. Select the desired variable, select the Place button, and then click at the desired position in the drawing. See page 541 for a list of variables.

538

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

In the Header variables list, there is a variable called . This variable allows you to create header entries that identify cables that are connected to the terminals. When you place this variable, the Cable Combo dialog will appear:

This dialog provides buttons for a variety of cable-related variables. When you select a button, that variable is added to the expression in the Variables field. This is the information that will be displayed in the graphical plan header. Make a numeric entry in the Cable Index field (1, 2, 3, etc.) to distinguish between the different cables that you place in the plan. When you are ready to place the expression in the plan, select the OK button and then select a position for the text. The Text Style field displays the text style that will be used for the variables. If you want to change the text style, use the Edit button to display the Edit Text Format dialog. In the Formatting area of the dialog, you can make a number of settings: 539

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Select the Vertical Plan radio button if you wish terminal information to be displayed from top to bottom on the page. Select the Horizontal Plan radio button if you wish information to appear from left to right on the page. Select the Place Column Separator button to define a column dividing line in the template. Click on a point where the line should begin. This will be marked in the template with an “X”. When the graphical plan is generated, the line will be extended from this point to match the amount of information in the column. Use the Place Table Start button to define a starting point for the data rows of the graphical plan. Select the button and click on the desired point. Use the Specify Insertion Point button to define the insertion point for the graphical plan template on the page. Select the button and click on the desired point in the drawing. Generally, you should select a point at the upper left corner of the template. When you generate graphical plans automatically, the insertion point will be placed on the page at the upper left as defined by the top and left page margins. 3. Select Next to continue.

Enter a filename for the template. If you are modifying an existing template, the existing name and path will be prompted and you can change it. You can also use the browse button to select the desired folder and then enter a filename. The default path for graphical templates is \promis•e Data\Templates\GraphicPlan. 4. Select the Finish button to save the new template.

540

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Graphical Plan Variables The following is a list of variables that can be used in a graphical plan template. Variable Name TC_

Description The installation name of the terminal/plug strip

TC_

The location name of the terminal/plug strip

TC_

The device tag of the terminal/plug strip

TC_

The complete device ID of the terminal/plug strip

TC_

The part number of the terminal/plug

TC_

The page.line number where the terminal is located

TC_

The Installation/page.line number where the terminal is located

TC_ to TC_

Symbol text attributes associated with the terminal symbol

TC_

This attribute is used as the insertion point of a graphical symbol that can be placed along with this terminal symbol. The insertion point is the intersection of this variable with the wiring diagram attribute. This is commonly used to indicate a diode or capacitor being jumpered across two adjacent terminals. The symbol to insert is specified in the Terminal Manager.

TC_

This is the insertion point for a terminal jumper symbol (usually a filled in circle). The insertion point is the intersection of this variable with the wiring diagram attribute.

TC_

The value of the wire number that is assigned to this wire in the schematic.

TC_

The gauge of the wire used in the schematic.

TC_

The color of the wire used in the schematic

TC_

The “Type” property assigned to the wire such as THHN

TC_

The voltage of the wire used in the schematic

TC_

The current of the wire used in the schematic

TC_

The wire part number used in the schematic

TC_ to TC_

The 10 user-definable wire properties

TC_

The installation of the symbol connected to a particular connection point of the terminal

TC_

The location of the symbol connected to a particular connection point of the terminal

TC_

The device tag and connection point of the symbol connected to a particular connection point of the terminal

TC_

This is the complete device ID and connection point of the symbol connected to a particular connection point of a terminal

541

Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan

Variable Name

542

Description

TC_

The function text of a PLC I/O point connected to a particular terminal

TC_ to TC_

Symbol text attributes associated with the symbol connected to the terminal connection point

TC_

The installation of the cable that is associated with the wire connected to a particular connection point of a terminal

TC_

The location of the cable that is associated with the wire connected to a particular connection point of a terminal

TC_

The device tag of the cable that is associated with the wire connected to a particular connection point of a terminal

TC_

The complete device ID of the cable that is associated with the wire connected to a particular connection point of a terminal

TC_

The name of the cable core/conductor color (connection point text) of the cable associated with the wire connected to a particular connection point of a terminal

TC_

The cable type defined in the family definition of the cable

TC_

The gauge of the cable defined in the family definition of the cable

TC_

The part number of the cable defined in the family definition of the cable

TC_

The length of the cable specified in the cable text attributes

TC_

The total number of cable conductors in the assigned cable



Places a user-defined combination of cable information

TH_

Places the terminal/plug strip installation in the graphical plan header

TH_

Places the terminal/plug strip location in the graphical plan header

TH_

Places the terminal/plug strip device tag in the graphical plan header

TH_

Places the complete terminal/plug strip device ID in the graphical plan header

TH_

Places the date and time in the graphical plan header

TH_

Places the user name in the graphical plan header

TH_

Places the project name in the graphical plan header

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

11

Panel Layout and Wire Routing This section describes how to generate panel layout drawings in promis•e software. There are also sections describing the functions that allow the software to route wires between devices.

Overview The automatic functions in promis•e allow you to quickly create a panel layout drawing based on existing information in your project, such as a control diagram or parts list. Alternatively, you can start by creating a panel layout drawing and then use that as a source for generating other things like schematics or parts lists. The parts database record for each part number has a field that allows you to specify which symbol should represent that part in schematic drawings. There is another field that allows you to specify which layout symbol should represent the part in panel layout drawings. Therefore, whichever you create first, -- schematic, panel layout, parts list, etc. -- the symbols you specify will appear in a “pick list” when creating another kind of drawing and the software will prompt you with the appropriate symbol, provided this information is in the database.

Symbols that represent the part number

A number of layout symbols are included with promis•e. The names of these symbols all begin with the letters “L-”. You can also create custom layout symbols. The parts database also contains dimensional information about components that is applicable to panel layouts. In addition, promis•e includes special drawing functions in the Panel Layout menu that make it easier to create layout drawings. 543

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Create Panel Layout First If you wish to begin your design by placing components in a panel layout drawing, use the following procedure: 1. Create a project and drawing page. When you create the page, use an appropriate scale factor in the Scale Factor field. 2. Set the software’s drawing mode to Panel Layout Drawing. You can select the drawing mode when you create the page, or you can select it from the drawing mode field on the drawing screen.

3. Place devices in the drawing using either the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Name or the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Part Number function. A number of layout symbols are included with promis•e. The names of these symbols all begin with the letters “L-”. You can also create custom layout symbols. You must assign a part number to each symbol if you later wish to place items from the panel layout into a schematic or other diagram by means of a pick list using the Insert Symbol By Device ID function. 4. If you have no preference for device IDs, simply accept the IDs that are prompted by the software. Later, when you create a schematic or other type of diagram, you can use the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device ID function to select and place the items from the panel layout. If you have made the schematic mode the primary mode (see page 87), then the device ID will be converted to the format used in the schematic diagram (such as page/line number). This conversion will occur both in the schematic and in the panel layout.

544

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Create Panel Layout Later If you wish to create a control diagram or parts list first and use that to generate the panel layout, use the following procedure: 1. As described on page 543, ensure that the parts database records specify an appropriate panel layout symbol for each part number. 2. Create a schematic or other diagram (hydraulic, pneumatic, etc.). You must assign a part number to each item if you later wish to select these items to place in a panel layout. Instead of a drawing, you can also create a parts list using the BOM Explorer in the Project Manager. 3. Create a drawing page for the panel layout. When you create the page, use an appropriate scale factor in the Scale Factor field. 4. Set the software’s drawing mode to Panel Layout Mode. You can select the drawing mode when you create the page, or you can select it from the drawing mode field on the drawing screen.

5. Use the special drawing functions in the Design menu to create wireways, DIN rails, etc. You can do this at any convenient time while creating the layout drawing. See page 551 for more about these functions.

545

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

6. Select the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device ID function to select and place the items from the diagram or parts list. The Insert Symbol(s) dialog will appear.

This dialog lists the items in the project having a device ID. You can sort the list by device tag, part number, etc., by clicking on the desired column heading. The Filter Devices fields on the left side of the dialog allow you to filter the list of displayed device IDs. By selecting the appropriate radio button you can restrict the filter to Terminal/Plugs or Devices (non-terminals/plugs). Select or enter any combination of Installation, Location, Tag, Part Number and Function Text and then select the Search button. Any device IDs that match all the entries will be listed. See page 219 for more about this dialog. 7. Select one or more items to place in the drawing (hold down the or keys to select more than one item). Select the Place Symbols button. The software will prompt the appropriate layout symbol for the selected item (assuming this information is in the parts database). You will be prompted on the command line to “specify insertion point.” Click at the desired position to place the layout symbol in the drawing.

546

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

The Device Properties dialog will appear for the symbol that you are placing. The device ID fields are filled in automatically. Select the OK button to assign the ID. If the item you wish to place has more than one part number assigned to it, there will be a checkbox in the Multiple Symbols column.

When you select this checkbox, the multiple part numbers are listed in a separate area at the bottom of the dialog. You can then select one or more of these for placement. If you do not select the checkbox, only the layout symbol for the primary part number will be placed.

547

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

If you select more than one item you can place them as a group. You can make settings to determine how symbols are placed as a group. To do this, select the Group Settings link in the lower left corner of the Insert Symbols (by Device ID) dialog.

Placement options allow you to select whether the symbols will be placed in a line from Left to right or from Top to bottom. If you choose Prompt for each symbol the software will allow you to pick a position for each symbol. If you place the symbols automatically in a line, the spacing options allow you set the distances between symbols. Use the X and Y fields to set a fixed distance between symbol reference points. Select Use X, Y from Parts database to use parts database height and width values to space symbols. You can also choose the Place on wires radio button to place symbols on existing wires, however this applies more to schematic drawings. Select OK to apply the group settings. If you place an item with a part number that does not have a layout symbol assigned in the parts database, the software will draw a box to represent the item in the layout drawing using the dimension data for that part. If the database does not contain dimension information for that part, the following dialog will appear, prompting you to enter X, Y and Z dimensions.

548

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

After you select OK, the software will draw a box in the layout using the entered dimensions. The box will be labeled with the device tag.

8. To select more items for placement, you can click the right mouse button or select the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device ID function again to return to the Insert Symbol(s) dialog.

If the Show Place Devices in Current Drawing Mode checkbox is selected, any items that have been placed in the layout drawing will be marked with an “X” in the left column. If this checkbox is not selected, items will removed from the list as they as they are placed. 549

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

9. As with schematic drawings, you can choose to display or hide part numbers, connection point text, etc., by selecting the appropriate buttons on the display settings toolbar.

10. If you wish to reposition any of the text associated with a layout symbol, right click on the text and select Text Position from the popup menu. You will then be able to move the text.

550

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Balloons You can create a numbered balloon beside a symbol in a drawing that indicates the position of that component in the bill of materials list. Balloons can be placed in any type of drawing, not just panel layouts.

Create Balloons To create a balloon, use the following procedure: 1. Display the drawing page. 2. Select the Design > Insert Balloon function. 3. The software will prompt you to “Select component for balloon.” Click on the desired layout symbol to select it. The following dialog will appear showing the part number of the selected symbol and a field for entering a balloon number.

4. Enter the desired balloon number in the Balloon Number field. You can also automatically enter the next available number by selecting the Next Available button. 5. Select OK in the Balloon Number dialog to continue. 6. The software will prompt “Pick leader start or balloon insert point.” Click on the point where you wish the head of the arrow from the balloon to appear. 551

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

7. The software will prompt “To point...?” Click where you wish the other end of the leader from the balloon to end. You can click on multiple points to create segments in the leader. (If you wish the balloon to appear with no leader, simply press , do not define any additional points.)

For a straight leader, click twice and press Enter.

For a segmented leader, click multiple times and press Enter.

For no leader, click once and press Enter.

8. Click the right mouse button or press to place the balloon itself.

552

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Assign Balloon Number in Device Properties Dialog Once you assign a balloon number to a symbol by placing a balloon, you will see the balloon number displayed in the Device Properties dialog if you edit the device ID of the corresponding symbol.

Balloon number

If desired, you can edit the balloon number in the Device Properties dialog. You can also assign a balloon number in the Device Properties dialog when entering or editing a part number for a symbol before you place the balloon itself. This balloon number will then be entered automatically when you add a balloon to the symbol later.

553

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Modify or Delete Balloons Use the following procedure. 1. Point to the balloon in the drawing and click the right mouse button. A pop-up menu will appear with Move, New, Modify and Delete options.

2. Select Move if you wish to reposition the balloon and leader. They will move with the cursor and you can click the left mouse button to set the new position. Select New if you wish to redraw the balloon and/or leader. You will be prompted to select the leader start and end points as before. Select Modify if you wish to change the balloon number. The Balloon Number dialog will appear. Enter the new number and select OK. Select Delete to remove the balloon from the drawing.

Set Balloon Appearance You can set the size of the balloon for various drawing modes and the size and color of the balloon number using the project options balloon dialog. See page 69.

Clear All Balloons In the project options balloon dialog, select the Clear All Balloons button to remove all assigned balloon numbers in the project. This will delete the balloons in the drawings and remove the item numbers from the project database. See page 69.

554

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Panel Layout Design Functions In the Panel Layout drawing mode, the Design menu contains a number of special functions that are useful for panel layout drawings. Note:

This version of the Design menu is only displayed when the software is in the Panel Layout drawing mode.

Insert DIN Rail The Insert DIN Rail function allows you to place a mounting rail for DIN devices in a panel layout drawing. To use the Draw DIN Rail function, select Design > Insert DIN Rail. The Draw Panel Layout Accessories dialog will appear.

Select one of the available DIN rail parts in the Select DIN Rail area. A preview of the selected part will be displayed in the Preview area.

555

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Enter a device tag for the DIN rail in the Device Tag field. You can hide this tag in the drawing by selecting the Suppress Device Tag checkbox. If you plan to use balloons in the drawing, you can assign a balloon number for the DIN rail in the Balloon field. Select the Next Balloon No button to automatically assign the next available balloon number. In the Note field you can enter descriptive text that will appear next to the DIN rail in the drawing. You must select the User Definable radio button to enable this field. If you select the Default to Name radio button, the description in the Name field of the parts database record will be used. In the Length field, enter a length for the rail. If you select you will define the length of the rail by picking points in the drawing.

556

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

To draw the rail select the Place button. You will be prompted on the command line to pick a position to insert the rail. If you selected in the Length field, you will be prompted to pick a start point and an end point to define the rail’s position. If you entered a length in the Length field, you will be prompted to select an insertion point and a direction point which determines the direction in which the rail will extend from the insertion point. Note:

You cannot define a length greater the value assigned in the parts database. The length value for panel layout accessories is stored in the database Z field. Device tag

Note

Once a DIN rail is placed you can change its properties by right-clicking on it and selecting Din Rail Properties from the popup menu.

Note:

If you create a DIN rail symbol, it should be drawn to the same length as the part number that is assigned to it in a drawing. For example, if you define a new part number for a DIN rail that comes in a specific length like 72 inches, you must create the DIN rail symbol to also be 72 inches long. If you don’t do that the software size calculations will be wrong when the you attempt to draw DIN rails. The length value for panel layout accessories is stored in the database Z field.

557

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Snap to DIN Rail The Snap to DIN Rail function causes layout symbols placed on a DIN rail symbol to automatically align their reference points to the center line of the DIN rail. To use the Snap to DIN Rail function, select Design > Snap to DIN Rail so that a checkmark appears beside the menu item. When placing a layout symbol that is to mount on the DIN rail, click on the rail and the symbol will align its reference point to the center line of the rail. Note:

Layout symbols to be used with the snap to DIN rail function should have their reference points located near the center of the symbol (vertically) so that they align properly with the center of the rail. To turn off the Snap to DIN Rail function, select Design > Snap to DIN Rail again.

Mounting Accessories Function The Mounting Accessories function provides an interface to the parts database for adding or editing parts data for items such as DIN rails. Select the Design > Mounting Accessories function. The Routing/Mounting Accessories dialog will appear.

558

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

To add a new DIN rail part, select the New button. To edit an existing part record, highlight the part number and select the Edit button. The New/Edit DIN Rail dialog allows you to enter or change information.

559

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Panduit Wire Containment Tools There are a number of functions in the Design menu (when you are in Panel Layout drawing mode) that relate to panel layouts, wireways, and Panduit products.

Panduit Wire Containment Panduit Auto Size Space Edit Wire Path Properties The Panduit Wire Containment function is a placement tool that allows you to place the wire path in a panel layout drawing and assign the hardware components to the path. The Panduit Auto Size Space function re-selects components based on the size requirement that the shortest distance program returns. The Edit Wire Path Properties function allows you to set various parameters relating to the wire path.

Panduit Wire Containment The Panduit Wire Containment function is used to draw a wire path on a panel layout drawing. The wire path is a line that represents the center line of a bundle of wires or cables (or a duct, conduit, etc.). There are two purposes for the wire path: • It defines a physical wireway on a panel which will contain the wires and

route them between the devices. • It defines an allowed route for wires that can be used by the Shortest Distance Wire Routing function. The shortest distance function analyzes the wire paths to create the optimum wire routing for each wire. Selection of components is aided by a Panduit selection tool that allows you to select and assign the parts (duct, conduit, ties, mounts, abrasion protection, clips, etc.) that will confine the wires on this path. Note:

560

The first time you run the Panduit Wire Containment function you will be prompted with a message “Current promis-e catalog does not contain symbol PANDUITWIRE. This symbol will be added to the catalog automatically.” This symbol is needed for the function to operate.

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Drawing a wire path To draw a wire path: 1. Open a panel layout drawing page on which you wish to define a wire path. 2. Select Design > Panduit Wire Containment. The Panduit Wire dialog will appear.

3. The Device ID entries in the Installation, Location and Device Tag fields will be assigned to all components assigned to the wire path being drawn. You can accept the prompted values or enter new values. 4. In the Color field select a color for the wire path as it will appear in the drawing. 5. In the Radius field, you can enter a radius value when components such as wire ties or wraps are used to produce a wire bundle that will create a curved, 90 degree bend rather than a right angle. When components such as wire duct are to be used the radius should be 0. 6. If you wish to segregate wires by voltage, enter the minimum and maximum voltages to be used for the current wire path in the Min Voltage and Max Voltage fields. Enter only numbers in these fields. These values will be used by the Shortest Distance Routing function.

561

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

7. Select the Draw Wire Path button. You will be prompted to start selecting points for the wire path. Select a new point each time you wish to change the direction of the path. After the final segment is drawn select the or key to end the sequence. The radius (if any) will appear once the path is complete.

Select point 1

Select point 2

Select point 3

Note:

Select point 4

If you are using a radius and draw a segment in the middle of the path that is too short to accommodate the radius, the curve will be “broken.” If the short segment is at the end of the path, the segment will be joined at a right angle with no curve.

The wire path should only include segments which will use the same hardware part numbers. If the path will require two different sizes of components, it must be drawn as two separate connected or intersecting wire paths. This is normally based on the number of wires that will be routed on a particular wire path. This means that if wire ducts will be meeting at a “T” intersection, the user should be placing at least two, and possibly three separate wire paths because two or three different wire duct sizes will be needed. If an angle is used, the duct on both sides of the angle will be given the same size. This also occurs with cable ties; at the point where a significant number of wires may enter or leave a bundle a new path should be created so that a different size tie can be assigned. Important:

562

For the shortest distance program to correctly route wires, separate wire paths MUST meet or intersect to allow the wires to leave one wire path and enter another.

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

8. After you draw the path, the Panduit Wire dialog will reappear. The ID of the path you just drew will appear in the Wire Path list. The total path length is displayed in the Wire path length field. You can delete the path that is currently selected in the Wire Path list by selecting the Delete button.

You can select another path on the current page for display or editing either by selecting it from the Wire Path drop-down list or by selecting the Pick Path button and clicking on the ID or line of the desired path in the drawing. Assigning Part Numbers to Wire Paths After a wire path is placed, you can start assigning parts to the wire path. This can be done before or after the shortest distance routing is run. You can specify the exact hardware you wish to use, or you can make a preliminary selection and allow the program to resize the components based on the shortest distance output. The wire areas can also be calculated manually using the fill area calculator. The parts to be used must be entered into the Panduit.MDB file located in the plugins\Panduit folder under your installation of promis•e (for example, Program Files\Bentley\promis-e\plugins\Panduit). The parts must also exist in the main promis•e parts database. If the software displays the message “records with missing part numbers are missing from the promis-e parts database” it means that part records exist in the Panduit.MDB file but not in your general parts database. This may occur if you have not merged your Panduit part records into your promis-e parts database. The Panduit part records exist in the table “parts_database to add to main database” in plugins/panduit/panduit.mdb. You may use the database merge tool or manually paste the records into your promis•e parts database using MS-Access. To assign part numbers to a wire path: 1. Open the page containing the desired wire path. 2. Open the Panduit Wire dialog. 3. Select the desired path ID in the Wire Path field. 563

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

4. Select the Select Panduit Parts button. The Part Number Assignment dialog will appear. This dialog allows you to pick a part number and to specify offset or spacing requirements for how the graphics will appear on the layout drawing.

5. To enter a part number, click on the Select button beside the Part Number field.

564

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

6. The following dialog will appear. Select the type of component you wish to assign to the path (Ties, Duct, etc.) and then select OK.

7. A part number selection dialog will then appear. The fields in the upper part of this dialog will vary depending on the type of part you selected in the previous dialog. If you wish to change the dialog to a different type of component, use the Change Type button and make the selection.

For more on using this dialog, see page 643.

565

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

8. When you locate the proper part, highlight it and select OK (or double-clicked on it) to add it to the Part Number Assignment dialog.

566

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

9. The other fields in the Part Number Assignment dialog allow you to make settings that determine how information is displayed in the drawing: The Justification field setting will determine where the part number will be drawn on the wire path: Start - This will place a single copy of the selected part number at the beginning of the wire path. End - This will place a single copy of the selected part number at the end of the wire path. Both - This will place two copies of the part, one at each end of the wire path. Continuous - This is used for components that do not require spacing. This would be true for wire duct or wraps which are one continuous piece. Spaced - This will place a part at the start of the wire path and at the end and at the spacing specified by the user. Spaced From Start - This will use the user-defined spacing from the start of the wire path. Spaced From Center - This will center the spacing. Space From End - This will space the devices from the end of the wire path.

567

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Start Position and End Position - The wire path is the center line for the wire bundle. Frequently the end point of the wire path will land within or beyond the actual wire ducts that may intersect. The start and end position values allow the user to specify that the hardware should start or end at an offset from the wire path. The user can enter numbers to offset either end, or the user can use the Select Point button and pick a point with the mouse. Selecting the Use First Point as Start or the Use Last Point as End checkboxes will align the hardware with the endpoints of the wire path.

Balloon - The user may associate a balloon number to the part if required. Select the Get Next button to insert the next unused balloon number. Spacing - In this field the user can enter a distance value to define a spacing interval for spaced type components. Quantity - Use this field to assign a quantity if more than one of the selected part number is being assigned to the wire path. The Redraw checkbox is used with the auto-size/auto-space function. Not checking this option will result in the graphics not being updated when components are automatically resized or re-spaced based on wire fill. The AutoSelect checkbox allows parts to be automatically changed or the quantity to be changed in the auto-size/auto-space function.

568

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Select the OK button to complete the part number assignment. The selected part number information appears in the bottom half of the Panduit Wire dialog for the selected path. If a duct part number is assigned to a wire path, it will appear in the panel layout as a green rectangle centered on the path. Manually Calculating Fill Area The shortest distance module will properly route all wires and determine the area needed for routing the wires. If the user does not have access to the shortest distance module, the Panduit Wire Containment utility allows the user to manually calculate the wire areas for each wire path. This tool allows you to assign the number of wires for each gauge and the number of each cable part number that will run through the wire path. The calculator then does the calculation to find the wire fill area for the wire path. Important:

The calculations do not fully take into account packing factors, additional airspace caused by non-uniform shapes, interlacing, bending radii or other factors that may affect the total area needed to pack the cables and wires. The results are only an approximate estimate and the user should err on the side of caution in selecting part numbers or specifying a percent fill factor. The user should always specify a percent fill of 50% or less.

Setup You must enter the diameters for all of the cable part numbers used in the project into the parts database. The user must also enter all of their wire diameters into the wire lookup table. All wires in the project should have their gauges defined and all cable should have part numbers assigned. The calculator will list any gauges and cable part numbers used in the current project. Operation 1. Select a wire path in the Panduit Wire dialog (see page 561) and then select the Calculate Fill Area button.

569

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

2. The Wire Calculator dialog will appear. This dialog lists all wire gauges and cable part numbers used in the project.

3. Enter a quantity value in the Quantity field for each wire gauge and cable part number that you to expect to pass through the currently selected wire path. 4. If you have used the Shortest Distance program, select the Refresh From Shortest Distance button to overwrite the displayed quantities based on the shortest distance routing. The quantities can be edited further if required. 5. The Recalculate button will perform the calculations and fill in the displayed area and weight. The formula used is to add the diameters of each cable and wire, divided by the total number of wires and cables to yield an average diameter. The wire area equals the number of wires and cables multiplied by the average diameter squared. See your Panduit catalog for the details of the formula used. The recalculate button must be used to reflect any changes. You can edit the weight and area values for each gauge using the Configure > Gauge Table Editor function. 6. Use the Save To Wire Path button to save the area and weight values for the wire path to use it for the Auto size/Auto space function.

570

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Panduit Auto Size-Space When you first place a wire path, you can assign a preliminary part selection to it. This preliminary selection should indicate the type of component. You can then use the Auto Size-Space function to automatically replace the preliminary selection with an appropriately sized part of the same type as the preliminary selection. This feature is especially useful when using the shortest distance function. At the time you place a wire path for the shortest distance program to use for routing, the number of wires going through a given wire path is usually unknown. The user can assign a preliminary part number to specify the type of hardware to use. Then the shortest distance program can compute the wire paths and the Auto Size-Space function can re-size the component. In the case of devices like cable ties mounts, the criteria of weight is used. You have the option to change the number of mounts OR the size of the mounts to account for the change in weight. If you choose not to use shortest distance output you can use the wire fill calculator to specify the exact number of wires to auto size-space for. Setup You must enter in the parts database the diameters for all of the cable part numbers used in the project. See the Configuration File Formats section of this manual (page 575) for information on which field to use. You must also enter all of their wire diameters into the wire lookup table. All wires in the project should have their gauges defined and all cables must have part numbers assigned. The calculator will list any gauges and cable part numbers used in the current project (see page 569). You should have either used the wire fill calculator OR run the shortest distance program to route the wires. Operation 1. Select the Design > Panduit Auto Size-Space function (you must be in the Panel Layout drawing mode).

571

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

2. The Panduit Auto Size and Space dialog will appear.

3. Selecting either the All or Select One Path radio buttons determines if all wire paths on the current page should be analyzed or if one particular path is to be analyzed. If one path is to be analyzed, select the ID from the drop-down list (or you can use the Pick Path button and then click on the desired path in the drawing). 4. Select the Use Shortest Distance Output checkbox if the shortest distance routing is to be used. If this checkbox is unchecked, the number of wires and cables in the path is taken from the fill area calculator (see page 569). 5. In the Select Part Number Type area of the dialog, select checkboxes for the types of components to analyze. For example, you may want to resize duct but not cable ties. Additionally, parts that were not marked with the AutoSelect checkbox when the preliminary part was selected will not be analyzed (see page 566). 6. The Auto-space checkbox only affects calculations for mounts and weight-rated, spaced devices. If Auto-space is on, the quantity of parts is changed to the total weight of the wires and cables, divided by the percent fill, divided by the weight rating of the selected part number. If Auto-space is off, the software will attempt to find a different size mount to carry the calculated weight. In either case, percent fill acts as a safety rating. A 50% fill would provide twice as many mounts or the same number with twice the capacity as would theoretically be

572

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

required. This is in addition to the margin for error that is built into the calculations because no adjustment is made for the density of the insulator being less than the density of copper. 7. Select the Change All radio button if you wish the software to automatically make all of the required changes to the wire paths being analyzed without giving you the opportunity to review or change the automatic selections. 8. Select the Step Through Changes radio button if you wish the software to stop execution at any wire path which does not have the parts or spacing that the program recommends. A dialog will appear that shows the changed values and you may cancel all changes, accept all, or make your own modifications and then accept the changes. 9. Select the Step Through All radio button if you wish the software to display a dialog at each analyzed wire path, even if no change was detected by the software. 10. The Preferred Duct Height (Z) value determines the selection of rectangular duct part numbers when there are multiple selections that would fit the area requirements. For example if a preliminary part with dimensions of 2 inches high and 2 inches wide was selected, the auto size might have a requirement for 6 square inches. This requirement could be met by a 2 inch high by 3inch wide duct, or 3inch high by 2 inch wide duct. Entering a preferred duct height of 2 would result in the 2 inch high part number being selected. 11. The Max % Fill field should have the percent fill to be allowed for duct and also provides a safety factor for mounts or other auto sized parts. For duct calculations the actual cross sectional area available is maintained in the database. (Nominal area calculated from the outside nominal dimensions is not used.) 12. Select the Start button to begin the analysis.

573

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

13. The software will select an appropriate part number based on your settings and the number of wires assigned to this path. If you selected the Change All setting, the software will run until all paths have been assigned parts. If you selected Step Through Changes or Step Through All, the software will display the following Part Number Modification dialog, either through paths requiring a different part number assignment or for all paths.

Select OK to accept the listed part. If you need to assign additional Panduit parts to the wire path, select the Select Panduit Parts button to display the Part Number Assignment dialog (see page 564). If you need to assign additional non-Panduit parts to the wire path, select the Select Other Parts button. Select the Cancel Auto-change button if you wish to skip the current wire path and continue with other paths (assuming you have selected all paths for the Auto Size-Space function). Select the Cancel Autosizing button if you wish to exit the Auto Size-Space function without making further assignments. When the Auto Size-Space function is complete, a “Finished” message is displayed.

574

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Configuration File Formats There are a number of configuration files that affect the operation of the Panduit utilities. CableFilter.xml This file allows the user to specify a field in the parts database to use for the diameter of cables. The path is plugins\Panduit\PanduitLabels\CableFilter.xml. To change the name of the field to use, change the name on the fourth line between and Example set to look for the field user2: user2

Panduit.mdb The Panduit.mdb file holds the part information for Panduit components in several different tables. Most of this information is specified by Panduit and should not require user modification, but there are some areas where users may want to make minor modifications. Component substitution - The Auto Size-Space function needs to know which components are can be substituted if a different size is required. This is done with a SUBTYPE field located in the Panduit_Duct, Panduit_Cable_Ties, Panduit_abrasion and Panduit_Wiring_Acc tables. Parts with the same values in these fields are considered to be of the same Type and the software will substitute parts with matching values. If the user wants to broaden or narrow the group of parts that can be substituted, these values can be edited. The current format is the first letter of the type of component, a “-” and a number (example: D-14). This format is not required and any characters can be used to define a Subtype. Part selection form modification - The user can modify the forms used for selecting part numbers by editing the index table. There are utilities in the Configure menu for editing the IndexTable and ButtonTable.

575

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Gauge Table Editor The Gauge Table Editor allows you to define diameters for the gauges used in your project. The names used for gauges can vary from company to company and this function ensures that your preferred gauge names have defined values. This information is used by the Shortest Distance Routing function and the Panduit Auto Size-Space function to make percent fill calculations. Select Configure > Gauge Table Editor. The Gauge Table Editor dialog will appear.

This dialog presents a list of multiple names for various wire gauges. The gauge names are listed in the Gauge column. The OD column lists Outside Diameter values for each gauge name. The Primary column indicates if this gauge name is the primary name of this Outside Diameter (OD) value. When the checkbox is selected the gauge name is the primary name. For example, say that the diameter 0.008 has four gauge names, “32AWG”, “32# AWG”, “32#”, “32”. If you select the Primary checkbox for “32AWG”, then “32AWG” will be displayed in the drop-down list of gauges when you assign or edit a wire number in promis•e. (The checkbox can be selected using the Edit function.) To edit gauge table values: 1. (Optional) Select the desired diameter value in the Outside Diameter List field. This will filter the display to include only gauge names that have the selected diameter assigned. 2. Select (highlight) the gauge name that you wish to edit. 576

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

3. Select the Edit button. Additional editing fields will appear in the dialog.

4. Make any desired changes to the Outside Diameter (OD) and Gauge (name) fields. You can also select or de-select the Primary checkbox. 5. Select the Apply button to enter the changes. Select the Cancel button to cancel entry of the new data. 6. Select the Save button to permanently save the new data in the list. Creating a new gauge name: 1. Select the New button. Additional editing fields will appear in the dialog. 2. Enter the wire diameter value in the Outside Diameter field. 3. Enter the gauge name in the Gauge field. 4. Select the Primary checkbox if you wish the software to consider this gauge name to be the default name for the entered diameter value. 5. Select the Apply button to enter the changes. Select the Cancel button to cancel entry of the new data. 6. Select the Save button to permanently add the new gauge name to the list. Deleting a gauge name: 1. Select (highlight) the gauge name that you wish to delete. 2. Select the Delete button. The selected gauge name will be removed from the list.

577

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

3. Select the Save button to permanently remove the gauge name from the list Note:

578

If you have selected one diameter value in the Outside Diameter List field and wish to return to displaying all diameters, select the blank entry at the top of this list.

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Shortest Distance Routing The Shortest Distance Routing Module creates a promis•e connection list that takes into account the physical location of components used on a layout page in order to minimize wire length. This shortest distance connection list is useful to those who do the actual wiring and troubleshooting of the components. The shortest distance wiring list can include multiple layout drawings (i.e., multiple panels). There are two methods of defining connections between panels: • The “standard method” which uses defined regions for each panel and

requires the user to create a region connection diagram to specify the connections from one region to another. • The “wiring rules” method which uses an XML file that contains rules for how wires are to be routed between panels. The wiring rules version also permits the user to define cases where additional terminals or plugs should be added to the connection group even though they are not shown in the schematics. The output from the Shortest Distance Module is an optimized wire list based on the physical layout of components and defined routes between panels that achieves a true “shortest distance” wire routing scheme. Wire lengths are calculated and provided as a field in the resulting connection list. In addition, the path that each wire takes through the wireways to establish a “From-To” connection is available for output in a report. The resulting connection list can significantly reduce the time required for the fabrication of the control panel. Also, the information from this list can be graphically reproduced on a termination (wiring) diagram.

579

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Shortest Distance Procedure - Standard Method The steps for the shortest distance routing function using the standard method are: 1. Create electrical schematics with wire connections between components. This allows the software to determine which devices are connected. 2. Create a panel layout that defines the spacial relationship between the components. This allows the software to measure the distance between components. 3. Create wire paths on the panel layout. This tells the software where it is permissible to route a wire on a panel. See page 561 for more on creating wire paths. Important:

For the shortest distance program to correctly route wires, separate wire paths MUST meet or intersect to allow the wires to leave one wire path and enter another. 4. Define regions on the panel layout drawing. A region typically represents a single panel. You might have one region for the items mounted on the door and another region for the items mounted on the back panel. Therefore, by defining regions you are telling the software which items are on the same panel. To create a region on a panel layout page: A. Display the desired panel layout page. B. Select the Design > Shortest Distance > Insert Region function. C. Define a rectangular region on the drawing by selecting two opposite corner points. This region should enclose all the items that share the same panel, including the panel symbol, if there is one.

580

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

D. The Region Editor dialog will appear.

Enter an identifying name for this region in the Region Name field. In the Boundary Coordinates area of the dialog, the X and Y coordinates you selected for the region will be displayed. If desired, you can change these values as well as entering Z coordinate values. E. Also in the Region Editor dialog are controls for defining exit points for the region. An exit point is where the wires will enter or leave the panel. The Exit Point Name field prompts the name of the next exit point that will be placed. This is a sequential name; the default first exit point name is “1.” You can change this to another number or to a letter if you prefer. To define exit points, select the Add button. The Region Editor dialog will close and you can select one or more exit points on the panel drawing for the current region. These points will be marked by a red circle with cross inside. Press the key or right click to return to the Region Editor dialog. Note:

You must place the exit point on or inside the boundary of the region. The exit points you have defined will be listed in the drop-down list below the Exit Point Name field. You can delete an exit point by selecting it from the list and then selecting the Delete button.

581

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

5. Define the additional regions in the project using the same steps. The regions can be on the same layout page or on a different page.

Region

Exit point

582

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

6. Next you must define the connections between regions so that the software knows how to route wires from panel to panel. Select the Design > Shortest Distance > Edit Region Connection function. The Region Connection Editor dialog will appear. This dialog will contain a series of boxes that represent the regions you have defined. Each box is labeled with the name of the region and the name of the exit point(s) that you created for that region.

A. Drag each region box to a convenient position for creating connection lines between them (you will be able to re-position the boxes later if necessary). B. To create a connection between panels, drag an exit point from one panel to the desired exit point on the next panel. A line will appear between the two exit points. The line represents the route (raceway, conduit, etc.) between the two regions. This line is elastic, so that if you move the region boxes around in the dialog it will stay connected to the two exit points.

583

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

You can also add junction boxes to the connection diagram. These are useful if you wish each region to have only one exit point. To add a junction box, select the Add Junction button. Junction boxes will be labeled Junction-1, Junction-2, etc., by default.

Junction boxes are also useful if you wish to provide a path to connect a region to several other regions.

584

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

C. Next, assign properties to the connection. Double-click on the desired connection line. The Raceway Properties Editor dialog will appear.

In this dialog you can: Use the Raceway Name Field to assign a name to the connection. Select the Shipping Split checkbox if there is a shipping split in the panels. A shipping split requires that connections will be made to spare terminals located on each side of the split before routing through raceways. (These spare terminals are not shown on schematic diagrams. See page 603 for more information.) Use the Part Number field to assign a part number to the connection. Select the browse button to open the part number selection dialog. Use the Description field to enter a description for the connection. Length, Height, Width, Diameter - Use these fields to enter dimensional measurements for the raceway. The Height and Width fields will be active only when the Rectangular Duct radio button is selected. The Diameter field will only be active when the Conduit radio button is selected. An entry in the Length field is required. Voltage: Minimum, Maximum - You can set an allowable voltage range for the connection by making entries in these fields. These fields will be evaluated if you activate the Segregate Wires by Voltage setting when running 585

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

shortest distance routing (see page 591). Select the Save button to save the connection information and close the dialog. D. Once your region connections are created, you can run the validity check, which will test the region connections for the following conditions: • Verify each junction box has at least two region connections connecting to

it. • Verify each region connection has a defined length attribute. • Verify each connection point has a corresponding exit point on the layout pages. • Verify that each region has at least one region connection connected to it. • Verify that exit points fall within the boundary of the region. • Any problem conditions will be listed in the dialog. To run the check, select the Validity Check button in the Region Connection Editor dialog. The Validity Check dialog will appear. Select the Validate button to start the check. Use the Save button to save a text file of the results. Select the Save button in the Region Connection Editor dialog to save your region connection information.

586

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

7. Next, make settings for the Shortest Distance Routing function. Select the Review/Revise > Shortest Distance function. The Shortest Distance Routing dialog will appear.

A. Select the Setup button. The Setup dialog will appear. Select the shortest distance method you will be using - in this case, Standard Version. Select OK.

B. Select the Route Project radio button if you wish to include all the panel layout pages in the project in the shortest distance routing. Then select whether your routing will be based on Panel Layout Pages or Wiring Diagram

587

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Pages. Wiring diagram pages should only be selected if you are using a legacy project from an older version of promis•e that allowed wiring diagrams to contain layout information. C. Select the Route Specified Pages radio button if you wish to limit the routing to selected panel layout pages. Use the Select button to display a dialog where you can select pages. D. Select the Connect to spare terminals at shipping split checkbox if there is a shipping split in the panels. (This checkbox does not appear when you use the Wiring Rules method.) A shipping split requires that connections will be made to spare terminals located on each side of the split before routing through raceways. (These spare terminals are not shown on schematic diagrams.) See page 603 for more information. E. Select the Create Log File checkbox if you wish to create a log file that records the progress of the shortest distance routing function when it is run. Select the Create Standard Log File radio button if you wish the log file to contain brief descriptions of each step. Select the Create Verbose Log File radio button if you wish the log file to contain detailed descriptions of each step. F. Select the Maintain Previous Shortest Distance Routing Result checkbox to keep the previous routing information for all potentials that have not been edited since the last time that shortest distance routing was run. Selecting this will reduce the time it takes to run the shortest distance routing and lessens the chance of an unexpected routing change.

588

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

8. To make additional settings for the shortest distance routing function, select the Setup button in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog. The Routing Options dialog will appear. This dialog has three tabs.

A. In the Connection Options tab, you can make these settings: Minimum Wire Length - The value entered in this field sets the minimum wire length. If the Shortest Distance Routing function calculates any wires to be shorter than this value, the minimum length will then be assigned.

589

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Maximum Direct Wire Length - If you have defined that a connection point should be wired direct rather than going through a wireway, but the direct wire length distance ends up being larger than the Maximum Direct Wire Length value entered here, then the program will route the connection through wireways even though it is marked as direct. Additional Length - This area contains two fields to enter values for additional wire length. If the wire length calculated by the Shortest Distance Routing function will be used for wire cutting, you may wish to add such an additional length to every wire to ensure there will be sufficient wire to reach the device. Use the Add Fixed Length field to add an absolute value. Use the Add % of Total Length field to add a percentage of the total wire length. You can enter values in both fields. If you enter values in both fields, the program will add both additional lengths to the total length of the wire. This allows you, for example, to use a percentage adder to compensate for the amount of winding and turning a wire does inside a wire duct while the absolute value is for connection-based compensation such as strip length or bending radiuses. When you enter a percentage value, enter it as a decimal fraction, not a whole number (for example, enter 0.10 not 10%). Connection Settings - In this area, when you select the Connect Single Wire Devices to Ends of Wire checkbox, devices that have connection points that can only accept one wire are connected at the beginning or end of a daisy chain. Note:

You can create single wire connections in the Forced Routing Manager (see page 496) or in the Parts Database in the Single_Wire_Connection field (see page 633). If you select the Treat Cables as Forced Connection checkbox, then you can represent a wire harness in your schematics by placing a cable symbol on each wire that is a part of a harness. Before running shortest distance, you can select this checkbox and the shortest distance program will treat every cable connection as a forced connection to ensure that the routing is done properly for the harnesses.

590

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Branch Labels - Select the Automatically Assign checkbox to assign branch labels to each branch of a wire in the shortest distance wiring list. These labels do not appear in the schematic. Select either the Alphabetic or Numeric radio button to set the format of the branch label, either Alphabetic (A, B, C...) or Numeric (1, 2, 3...). Select the Settings button to make additional branch label settings. The Automatically Assign Branch Label dialog will appear. This dialog shows the list of allowable letters (if you selected Alphabetic) and the first number (if you selected Numeric) that will be assigned to branches. You can change the list of letters or the first number as desired. Select OK to continue.

B. In the Raceway and Wireway Options tab, you can make these settings: Select the Segregate Wires By Voltage checkbox if you wish wires with different voltage ranges to be routed through separate wireways.

591

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

C. In the Compatibility Options tab, you can make these settings: Select the Legacy Terminal CP checkbox if you are using a legacy project. In these projects, connection points for terminals were identified as a combination of terminal number and then the Internal (I) or External (E) designation. For example, the external connection point of terminal TB2-1 would be “1E”. In current versions of the software, this combination is not necessary. D. Select the OK button in the Routing Options dialog to load your settings. 9. Use the Template button in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog to save your shortest distance settings. The Template Editor dialog will appear.

Enter a name for the template in the Template Name field and select the Save button. Previously saved templates are listed in the lower part of the dialog. You can designate one of these as the default template by selecting it and the selecting the Load button. 592

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

10. After you have made your settings, run the Shortest Distance Routing function by selecting the Start button in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog. When the function has finished analyzing your pages, the Validation Report dialog will appear.

This dialog will list any errors that occurred during the shortest distance analysis. You can also display the contents of the log file (if you chose to create one) by selecting the Log link. If any unexpected program errors occur, use the Internal link to view program information. You can save the validation results to an HTML file by selecting the Save As button. You can display the most recent validation report by selecting the Validation Report button in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog. 11. Run the wire list report to view the shortest distance routing that was created. The wire list contains fields for Route and Length that will be filled in with data from the shortest distance routing function.

593

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Shortest Distance Procedure - Wiring Rules Method Note: This section applies only to the Wiring Rules method, not the Standard method. For

instructions for the Standard method, see page 580. The wiring rules version of the Shortest Distance Routing function reads an XML file containing rules that determine how wires are routed between panels. This version is often used by switchgear companies who edit the rules file to suit their particular methods and requirements. These companies typically wire to terminals that are not shown in the electrical schematic diagrams. The steps for the shortest distance routing function using the wiring rules method are: 1. Create a wiring rules XML file that defines how panels or enclosures are to be connected. See Appendix B on page 671. 2. Create panel layout symbols for panels that include special attributes for panel name and exit points. See page 382 for more information. The PanelName attribute prompts for the panel identifier. These names determine the sorting order of panels and are defined in your wiring rules file. If only one panel name will be associated with this layout symbol, enter it in the Default Value field when creating the symbol. The ExitPoint attribute defines the point(s) where wires leave the panel. Enter exit point coordinates in the Default Value field using the format x,y;x2,y2 where x,y are the X-Y coordinates of the first exit point and x2,y2 are the coordinates for the second exit point. Separate the coordinates with a semicolon. These coordinates are relative to the insertion point of the panel. 3. Create special panel layout symbols for the extra terminals that will be placed on the panel layout. These are terminals that do not appear in the electrical schematics. The software will automatically assign these terminals for panel-to-panel connections. These symbols must include the attribute SDWReservedTerminal with an assigned value of SDW. Only terminals with SDW assigned to this attribute will be assigned automatically by the Shortest Distance program. (This attribute can be placed anywhere on the symbol as a “hidden” attribute.) There are two kinds of terminal symbols that you can create to add to the layout. One kind consists of a single layout symbol that represents multiple terminals. You would place multiple terminal number attributes on this symbol in the device ID step of the symbol creation process (see page 378). On this kind of symbol there must be two connection points for every terminal labeled with the

594

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

terminal connection designation (such as I or E for internal and external). Alternatively, you can use separate individual symbols for each terminal. This type of symbol would only have one terminal number attribute.

I 1

E

I

1 E

I 2

E

I

2 E

I 3

E

I

3 E

I 4

E

I

4 E Multiple separate terminal symbols

One terminal symbol with multiple connection points

When creating these symbols you must use the same connection point text used by the schematic symbol or family. 4. Create electrical schematics with wire connections between components. This allows the software to determine which devices are connected. You must also assign wire numbers to the wires. 5. Create layout diagrams using the special panel layout symbols for panels and terminals. A. When placing the panel symbols, the device ID will correspond to your naming convention for sections, compartments, etc. For example, the installation name of a panel symbol can represent the name of the section (unit, stack). The location name can represent a compartment within a section, if your designs make use of compartments. You can set this naming convention in the Wiring Rule Configuration dialog (see page 597). (Example) Section name

Compartment name (optional)

595

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

B. If your wiring rules require them, include extra terminals on these layouts that don’t exist in the schematics. Use the special terminal symbols you created in step 3. The software will automatically assign these terminals for panel-to-panel connections. These terminals must be placed inside the boundary of a panel (enclosure) symbol. 6. Create wire paths on the panel layout. This tells the software where it is permissible to route a wire on a panel. See page 561 for more on creating wire paths. 7. If you wish certain wires to be wired directly between devices (i.e., without going through terminals), assign the letter “D” to the wire in the User7 field, see page 600). 8. If you wish to group certain wires so that they are forced to connect to spare terminals sequentially, assign the same group number to each wire in the User8 field, see page 601). 9. Next, make settings for the Shortest Distance Routing function. Select the Review/Revise > Shortest Distance function. The Shortest Distance Routing dialog will appear.

A. Select the Setup button. The Setup dialog will appear. Select the shortest dis596

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

tance method you will be using - in this case, Wiring Rule Version.

B. In the Setup dialog, select the Configure button. The Wiring Rule Configuration dialog will appear.

In the Wiring Rule File field, enter the path and name of your wiring rules file (see page 671). You can use the Open File button to browse to and select the file. Use the New File button to save a new, empty wiring rule file. The remainder of this dialog is used to define how the device ID of your panel symbols corresponds to your naming convention for sections and compartments. Use the Section fields to define part of the device ID as the name of the section (unit, stack). In the Lookup Field, select either Installation or Location from the drop-down list. In the Type field, select whether the section names are Alphabetic or Numeric. In the # of Characters field enter the number of characters used by the section name. Use the Compartment fields to define part of the device ID as the name of the compartment. In the Lookup Field, select either Installation or Location from the drop-down list (leave blank if not used). In the Type field, select 597

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

whether the compartment names are Alphabetic or Numeric. In the # of Characters field enter the number of characters used by the compartment name. In the Panel/Enclosure field specify whether the device tag or the PanelName attribute of the panel symbol will hold the panel name. Select either Device Tag or Panel Name Attribute (leave blank if not used). Select OK to save your settings. These are saved in a file named EctRway.xml located in the Shortest Distance directory of the current project. See page 680 for more information. 10. Next, make additional settings in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog. Note:

The following two settings only appear when you have selected the Wiring Rules method. C. In the Shipping Splits field, enter the name of the section (or “stack” or “unit” depending on your terminology) where the shipping split will occur. Enter the lower number of the two sections that are divided by the split (for example, enter 2 if the split will occur between 2 and 3). If you have more than one shipping split, separate the names with a comma, for example: 2,5. D. In the Rule Set field, select the wiring rules set that you wish to use when generating the shortest distance data. Sets are defined within the wiring rules file (see page 673). E. The remainder of the settings in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog are described beginning with step B on page 587. 11. After you have made your settings, run the Shortest Distance Routing function by selecting the Start button in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog. When the function has finished analyzing your pages, the Validation Report dialog will appear.

598

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

This dialog will list any errors that occurred during the shortest distance analysis. You can also display the contents of the log file (if you chose to create one) by selecting the Log link. If any unexpected program errors occur, use the Internal link to view program information. You can save the validation results to a file by selecting the Save As button. You can display the most recent validation report by selecting the Validation Report button in the Shortest Distance Routing dialog. 12. Run the wire list report to view the shortest distance routing that was created. The wire list contains fields for Route and Length that will be filled in with data from the shortest distance routing function.

599

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Direct Wiring (Wiring Rules Method) Typically, connections between devices in different enclosures go through a terminal block. However the user may wish to have exceptions to this for certain types of wires so that they are directly wired from one device to another. In the wiring rules method, there are two ways the user can specify a direct connection: by defining a wiring rule for a certain wire type or by assigning the direct wire attribute to an individual wire. Direct Wire Rule - The wiring rules file (see page 671) can contain a rule that defines any wire gauges that will always be directly wired. You can also enter a part number for a cable that is to directly connect two devices. -



Direct Wire Attribute - You can specify direct wiring for any wire by assigning the value of “D” to the wire in the User7 attribute field. To do this, right click on the wire and select Edit Wire Number from the popup menu. The Edit Number Manual dialog will appear. (You must select the More Properties button to see the User fields.)

Enter “D” 600

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Enter “D” in the User7 field. Select OK.

Grouping and Sequencing Terminal Connections - Wiring Rules Method In cases where the software will automatically connect wires to terminals that are not shown in the schematic there may be situations where you wish to group certain wires together to ensure that they connect to spare terminals in a sequential manner. For example, suppose there are two wires connected to a battery, a positive and a negative, and they are connected to a device located in a different enclosure. Normally this would mean the software will daisy chain from the battery to a spare terminal before connecting to the device in the other enclosure. Most users would want the positive and negative wires connected to consecutive terminals with no other wires in between. To ensure that a group of wires are assigned to sequential terminals you can assign a group number in the User8 attribute field for each wire to be included in the group. To do this, right click on the wire and select Edit Wire Number from the popup menu. The Edit Number Manual dialog will appear.

Enter group number or name

Enter a unique group number or alphanumeric name in the User8 field. (You must select the More Properties button to see the User fields.) Select OK.

601

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

When making connections, the software will determine how many sequential terminals are required in order accommodate the group and will route connections to those terminals in sequential order. If not enough sequential terminals are available, the software will alert the user after routing is performed.

602

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Guidelines and Routing Rules This section contains information that you should be familiar with when using the Shortest Distance Routing function. Special rules that Shortest Distance uses when routing wires are described. Connect to Spare Terminals at Shipping Split (Standard Method) Spare terminals are created and assigned part numbers in the Terminal Manager. They can then be placed on a layout drawing like any other terminal symbol. Only wires that pass through region connections designated as shipping splits (when you edit the region connection properties - see page 585) will be forced to route to spare terminals before leaving a panel. When connecting to spare terminals, the software always routes to the closest unused spare terminal to the panel exit point. It then determines what side of the terminal to connect to based on what would be the shortest distance. The following figure shows how the Shortest Distance Routing function might route to spare terminals when this function is enabled. The dashed lines indicate the routing calculated by the program. The program routed from device A to the internal side of the spare terminal then left the external side of that terminal to the panel exit point since this would make the shortest connection. It then routed to the internal side of the spare terminal on the other panel page. It routed a second wire from the internal side of the spare terminal to device B since this was shorter than routing from the external side of the spare terminal.

603

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Panel Exit Points

1* A

2*

1*

3*

2*

4

3*

E

I

B

4 E

I

Spare Terminals

* Not a spare terminal

Single Wire Connections If there are too many single wire devices on a potential with no way for the program to connect them together without routing more than one wire to a single wire connection, the program will generate an error. For example, if A, B, and C in Figure 1 below are all single wire devices, the program cannot connect the devices without routing more than one wire to a connection point. To correct this, you must insert a terminal somewhere in the potential to make it possible to connect these devices as shown in Figure 2.

A

A B

B

C

C

Figure 1

604

Figure 2

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Terminal Stacker Feature (Standard Method only) The terminal stacker feature offers a solution to situations where you have multiple single wire connections that can’t be daisy-chained, as with conductors of a plug. To use the terminal stacker feature, place multiple terminals connected anywhere on the potential. The terminals must be clip-jumpered to each other.

Clip-jumpered terminals

Single wire connections

When you run the Shortest Distance Routing function, the software will automatically use the jumpered terminals for the single wire connections. Voltage Separated Wire Routes The Shortest Distance Routing program allows you to separate wires based on voltages to prevent your high voltage wires from passing through the same wireways as your low voltage wires (see page 591). To use this functionality, you must enter a voltage value in the Voltage field when you assign wire numbers to your schematics. Only enter numerical values in this field. When placing your wireways, you must assign a minimum and maximum voltage to each wireway. When Shortest Distance Routing is performed, it will look at the voltage assigned to each wire and route it through wireways that have a voltage range that supports the wire voltage. The range of acceptable voltages includes the minimum and maximum numbers.

605

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

In the following example, wire number 100 connects devices A and B together and has a voltage of 480. Wire number 200 connects devices C and D together and has a voltage of 120. The wires will be routed as shown. WW1 480-600V

A

C

WW5 120-240V WW3 480-600V

WW2 120-240V

WW6 480-600V

B

D

WW4 120-240V Wire 100

606

Wire 200

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Terminal Jumper Connections If two terminals are connected together, the Shortest Distance output will depend on the terminal designations that were specified. Generally, terminals have connections on two sides. The terms “internal and external,” “from and to” or “source and destination” may be used to describe these two “sides” of connections to terminals. The assignment of a “side” designation to a terminal connection can be based on positioning in the schematic (left or right of the terminal symbol) or by manual assignments made by the user. The left or right designation also applies to the connection’s position in the terminal plan. Terminal connections also can be designated as jumpers. See page 508 for more information. The following table lists different combinations of connections between terminal designations and how they will be handled by the Shortest Distance Module. The terminal device tags TB:1 and TB:2 are used as examples.

TB:1

TB:2

Shortest Distance Output

Left side (Internal or I)

Right side (External or E)

Left or right side (Internal or External)

Jumper

Error condition

Jumper

Jumper

TB:1:J to TB:2:J, Path = Jumper, Length = 0

From: TB:1:I to TB:2:E

Pin/Plug Connections The Shortest Distance Routing Module treats pin/plug connections like single-wire devices by allowing only one wire to connect to each connection point. Similar to a terminal layout symbol, each connection point on the plug layout symbol is identified by connection point text which distinguishes the male and female sides of the plug. Note: If several pin connections of a plug are jumpered together, the Shortest Distance

Routing program may encounter problems when attempting to connect the devices together. For a solution, see the Terminal Stacker feature, 605.

607

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Panduit Wire Terminations The Panduit Wire Terminations software is a set of tools that provides the following functionality: • It can take the physical routing and wire length information generated by the

Shortest Distance Routing function (see page 579) and place it in a file that can be read by your wiring department or an automated wire-cutting machine. It also allows you to error-check for any oversized or undersized wires based on the components’ uses. • The Panduit Wire Terminations software will also assign the correct terminator (lug, ferrule, or terminations such as rings, fork, spades, etc.). Note that some of the functionality can be used without using the Shortest Distance Routing program but in this case data such as wire length may not be available and routing of daisy chained wires will be based on the schematics which may not reflect “real world” routing.

Overview The Panduit Wire Terminations software has a number of utilities and features. The software is located in the PanduitWireTerminations folder located in the promis•e Plugins folder. When this folder is present, three functions are added to the promis•e menus: • Panduit Data Editor • Panduit Termination Editor • Panduit Wire Terminations

The functionality works as follows: Using the Panduit Data Editor, you enter information into a parts database for all components. The information will specify exactly which type of termination is acceptable on every wired device and every connection on the device. This will later tell the software what types of termination are acceptable on the devices. The user also enters the size of the terminal. This will allow the software to select the right size of termination. Instead of having to select every possible termination part type that a terminal will accept in the Data Editor, you may also select “classes.” A class is a user-defined group of terminal types. For example, if your company commonly uses five different types of ring termination, you can create a class called “Ring.” Then, when using the Data Editor, instead of having to individually assign five different Panduit ring types to a device, you can just select the “Ring” termination class. The software then knows that the device can accept any of the five types assigned to the class. Maintaining classes is done through the Panduit Termination Editor. 608

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

The Panduit Wire Terminations utility does the actual determination of components. As the project is completed, you must assign part numbers to devices and assign gauges to their wire connections. With this information, the software can look up the part number and connection point of each device and find the types of terminations that the part can accept. It can get the stud size and wire gauge needed to do proper sizing. All that is required is a method that will allow the software to select exactly which of the terminals allowed on a device will be used in the connection list. This is done through the Panduit Wire Terminations utility which allows you to set which types of connectors you “prefer” to use for the current project. You rank your preferences and the software will then select the highest ranking termination type from the allowed terminations and assign it to the wire. The final portion of the Panduit Wire Terminations utility is to create the actual output. The user may want a text report, and Excel file or to output the information directly to a wire cutting machine. All of these are possible through a formatting dialog.

Create or Edit a Class with the Panduit Termination Editor The Termination Editor allows you to combine several part number types into a single selectable Class. For example, instead of selecting five different types of Panduit ring terminals, you can just select a class called “Ring.” This greatly reduces the data entry that is required when editing the parts database to assign the types of terminations that a part will accept. It also allows you to assign your own preferred terminology for types of terminations instead of using the predefined Panduit part type codes. Lastly, it allows groups to be created that are tailored to the parts used at your company. Note:

This function requires that you have the Panduit.mdb database file in your plugins\Panduit folder.

609

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

To start the Termination Editor: 1. Select the Configure > Termination Editor function. The Termination Editor dialog will appear.

Filters Parts type selection area Selected types in the current class

The top part of the dialog allows you to select a class and filter the list of termination part types. The center part of the dialog lists the Panduit termination catalog types. The lower part of the dialog lists the types that have been assigned to the selected class. Use the Select Class field to select from a list of existing classes. The Description field contains a short description of the selected class. The filter area of the dialog operates in the same manner as the standard Panduit part selection utility (see page 643). When you select a filter, the part types that are listed are filtered accordingly. The Panduit Types area of the dialog displays the filtered Panduit Catalog type 610

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

designations. Double-click a catalog type to define it as valid for the current class. Items that are selected in this way are listed in the Selected area in the lower part of the dialog. The Selected area in the lower part of the dialog shows any types assigned to the current class. To remove a type, double-click on the type designation. To create a new class: 1. Select the New Class button in the Termination Editor dialog. The New Class dialog will appear.

2. Enter a name for the new class in the Class field. 3. Enter a brief description of the class in the Description field. 4. Select the OK button. The New Class dialog will close. The new class name and description will appear in the Termination Editor dialog. 5. Filter the list of termination types as desired and assign types to the new class. Types are assigned by double-clicking on a type in the center of the dialog. The types that have been assigned to the class are listed in the Selected area of the dialog. 6. Select the Save button. The new class will be saved and will now be available in the list of classes in the Select Class field. To edit a class: 1. Select the desired class in the Select Class field in the Termination Editor dialog. 2. Change the information for the class as desired. Selected types can be removed by double-clicking on the type in the Selected area of the dialog. 3. Select the Save button. The changed information will be stored. To delete a class: 1. Select the desired class in the Select Class field in the Termination Editor dialog. 2. Select the Delete Class button. 611

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

3. A dialog will appear prompting you to delete the class. Select the OK button in this dialog to delete the class. The class will be removed from the list of classes.

Edit Parts Database with Panduit Data Editor Gauge checking, termination assignment, and wire stripping are all based on information stored in the parts database. The program reads the shortest distance output to get the device ID and connection point text for each connection. It then looks at the project to get the first part number assigned to each device ID. It then looks into the parts database to find the connection point text on the part. The maximum gauge, minimum gauge, strip length, screw (stud) size and supported terminator types must exist for every connection point on every part to allow the software to provide the full export file. The Panduit Data Editor provides a method for entering the data that is much faster than entering the data as plain text. To use the Panduit Data Editor: 1. Select the Configure > Panduit Data Editor function. All of the entries for the parts database will appear in the Select Part Numbers dialog. The dialog functions the same as the standard promis•e part selection dialog, allowing the user to sort, group or move and filter by right clicking on the field heading.

612

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

2. Because parts with identical device families may have the same values for terminator types and gauges it is useful to sort by device family and then edit several part numbers at the same time. You can do this sorting by clicking on the header of the Device Family column. 3. Select the part numbers to be edited. You can use the or keys to select several parts at the same time. 4. Select the Assign Connection Points button and the Assign Connection Points dialog will appear with data for the first part number you selected.

5. If the first part number selected includes a device family in the database record, the program will automatically fill in the connection point texts available for the device family. You may also manually enter the connection point texts into the CP column. 6. If you wish to use the gauge checking function for selecting wire terminations, fill in the minimum and maximum wire gauge values that the connection will accept in the Min Gauge and Max Gauge columns. When you click inside one of these fields, a drop-down list of available gauge values will appear from which you may select. 7. The Stud column indicates the screw size of the terminal or a tab size and is used for sizing terminations. In this field also you may click to get a drop-down list of available values.

613

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

8. The Single Wire field contains a checkbox that can be selected to indicate single wire devices. This can be used with the shortest distance program to specify connections that only allow a single wire. This feature only works if your single wire database field is named “Single_Wire_Connection”. 9. Use the Strip Length field to define the strip length to be used on the wire. You may enter a length here or you can assign a generic strip length based on Gauge using a lookup table. This field is only used for display purposes on your report output and is not used in any selection criteria. 10. The Classes and Types field is used to assign classes and types to the connection. To do this, click inside the field and then select the Assign Classes and Types button. The Select Classes and Types dialog will appear.

11. In the Classes tab of the Select Classes and Types dialog you can select one of the classes you have previously defined by double-clicking on it. It will then appear in the lower, Selected area of the dialog. You can assign it to the connection by selecting the Apply button. In the Types tab you can see information on the existing Panduit catalog types. 12. In many cases the same type of wire and terminators are allowed on all or most of the connections on a device. If this is true, be sure all of the connection points are listed, then define the settings for the first connection point in the Assign 614

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Connection Points dialog. You can then use the Repeat CP 1 for All button. This will duplicate the settings of the first connection point on all of the other connection points. If only a few of the points are different, you can then manually edit them. 13. If you selected several part numbers for editing and they will have the same connection points and connection specifications, you can use the Update All Selected Parts button to copy the values displayed to all of the selected parts. 14. You can use the Next Part button to start editing the next selected part. 15. Select the Finished button when you are done editing the selected parts. You will return to the Select Part Numbers dialog. Special terminal block entry In the case of terminal blocks, the connection point text in promis•e will change for each block on the strip. Therefore it would be impossible to place down every possible terminal number. For terminal blocks, place a connection point text of “I” or “E” in the database and be sure that the Part_Type field in the promis•e parts database for the terminal block part number has “TB” or “TER” entered to designate that the part number is a terminal block.

Creating an Export File with the Wire Terminations Utility The function to create an export file will take connection information from the shortest distance program and the project. It will assign termination hardware to the wires and output the data in a user-specified format. Setup To create an export file you will need to have finished the schematics and panel layout, and have run the shortest distance routing program (see page 579). If you have not run the shortest distance program you will get output, BUT the length information will not be returned and therefore daisy-chained connection routing will be schematic-based. You will also need to have completed formatting files. Create an export file 1.

In promis•e, open the project to be exported. The shortest distance routing program should have been executed.

615

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

2. Select the Review/Revise > Wire Terminations function. The Project Preferences dialog will appear.

3. The software will search for all part numbers used in the project. It will find all allowed classes and types assigned to those part numbers and display them in the dialog. Terminations will be assigned to wires based on the display order. For example, if a part accepts the first type listed, that type will be assigned to the wire connected to that device. If the device does not have the first entry listed in its database record, the next type listed in the dialog is used. The software proceeds down the list until a supported termination type is found. 4. To move a selection higher or lower in the preferences, highlight a row and use the up and down arrow keys to the right. 5. Selecting the Show all checkbox will display all types even if none of the parts in the project will accept those terminations. This allows the user to create a general set of preferences and save them. The saved preferences can then be used over and over for any project. This is useful for setting up a company or customer standard set of preferences. 6.

616

Preferences can be saved or reloaded by using the file Save As and Open buttons.

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

7. The speed sort method allows you to rank the preferences by terminator characteristic. The standard sort method allows easy sorting when the user is familiar with the Panduit part types. The speed sort method is more useful if you want to set preferences based on the characteristics of the terminators. (See the following section on Speed Sort Method, page 617.) 8. The Use multiple connection substitution table checkbox allows you to use different terminations when a connection has two wires going to it instead of one. This is a typical scenario for tab/disconnect connections. This allows a standard disconnect to be used if a single wire is needed but if two wires are needed, the original part number is replaced with an alternate pair of part numbers which could be a regular disconnect and a “piggy-back” disconnect. See “Multiple connection Substitution.” 9. Selecting the Output button will open the Panduit Wire Terminations dialog to process the wire information and preferences and send the data to a file that is used during report generation. See the following section, Output the Wire Terminations, page 619. Speed Sort Method The Speed sort method allows the user to assign preferences based on criteria. 1. From the Project Preferences dialog choose the Speed Sort button. The Speed Sort dialog will appear.

2. Drag and drop the column heading to place your most important criteria to the left.

617

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

3. Drag and drop sub-branches within each branch so that your preferred types of lugs are at the top of the branches in the order that you want them assigned to connections. Dragging branches is done by selecting on a row with the mouse while pressing the key.

4. Select the OK button. The preferences will be translated to Panduit types and be displayed in the order of preference in the Project Preferences dialog.

618

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Output the Wire Terminations The Panduit Wire Terminations dialog has all of the functionality to format and create the final report output that will include the termination information. The Panduit gauge check program will read your connection list and based on maximum and minimum gauges entered into your parts database, it will report any wires that are oversized or undersized. 1. After you have assigned preferences in the Project Preferences dialog, select the Output button. The Panduit Wire Terminations dialog will appear.

This dialog has four tabs. The Create tab is used for actual file creation. The other tabs are for setup information.

619

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

2. In the Create tab, make the following settings: In the Output file field, enter the path and filename for the output file that will be created by the export tool. In the Output format field, enter the path and filename of a formatting file that specifies the structure of the export file. A large variety of formats are possible. See “Creating Format Files” on page 621. In the Header file field, enter the path and filename for the header file. A header file is a text file that serves as a heading to create column names in the output file. The Gauge Check button will return an error report for wires that are incorrectly sized. See “Checking Gauges” on page 625. Select the Assign Terminators button to create an MDB file of the assigned connection information. This file is created as an intermediate step so that you may manually or automatically modify the results before the final output. Select the Update BOM checkbox to send all of the assigned terminations to the project’s Bill of Materials. Any terminations previously written to the project are first deleted. The Post Process button allows you to write custom code to manipulate the Access database used to temporarily store the connection information. Selecting this button will run any EXE file named POST_PROCESS.EXE, which must be created by the user and placed in the PanduitDataEditor folder inside the Plugins folder of your promis•e installation. 3.

The File Format tab is used to structure and filter the information in the exported file. See “Creating Format Files” on page 621.

4. The Wire Lookups tab allows the user to assign new values to wires based on existing values entered into promis•e. This could be done to select a wire number based on gauge and color or a strip length based on wire gauge. See “Wire Lookup Values” on page 626. 5. The Location Lookups tab allow locations to be sorted in a non-alphanumeric sequence. See “Location Lookup Values” on page 627. 6. Select the Create button (in the Create tab) to create the specified output file.

620

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Creating Format Files The formatting tool allows you to select all of the connection information from promis•e and place it into a file in the format that you need. The tool will allow for creation of comma-separated files, fixed field width files, XML files, INI files and many other formats. It will also provide “lookup” capabilities. For example, a spool number can be assigned to a wire based on its gauge and color. 1. Open the File Format tab from the Panduit Wire Terminations dialog. The dialog is used to format the information for one wire. When the output file is created, the format is used over and over for each wire. The dialog also allows the user to filter out certain wires or to have them sorted with up to 15 nested sorts.

2. The Field column shows all of the data available from promis•e for the export file. Field value Wire Number seq. Wire Number SD Wire Number

Description Wire number A sequential number starting at 1 for each wire in the output file. A sequential number applied to each wire coming 621

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

from the shortest distance file. Wire Color Wire Color Wire Gauge Wire Gauge Length Length calculated by shortest distance routing From Strip Length From Strip length assigned from parts database To Strip Length To Strip length assigned from parts database Diameter (Use lookup 1) From the first value in the lookup table Type (Use lookup 2) From the second value in the lookup table Part Number (Use lookup 3)From the third value in the lookup table From Terminator Part number To Terminator Part number From Installation From device installation name From Location From device location name From ID Device tag of the From Device From Connection Point From Device connection point text Full ID:CP From Full From Device ID with CP text To Installation To device installation name To Location To device location name To ID Device tag of the To Device To Connection Point From Device connection point text Full ID:CP To Full To Device ID with CP text Wire Attribute 1 to 5 Five user wire attributes From Terminator From Terminator description assigned by program To Terminator To Terminator description assigned by program Komax header When “Y” is in the Use field creates a file header suitable for Komax wire cutting machines. Error Connection which could not be terminated because of missing part numbers or missing connection point information in the database connection point information will have the word error in this field. Using a filter value of “error” will filter out these wires. From Location lookup The lookup value associated with the “from” location name To Location lookup The lookup value associated with the “to” location name Branch Number A sequential number starting with 1 that is assigned to each existing wire number within a potential Use The Use assigned in the wire numbering dialog Voltage Voltage assigned in the wire numbering dialog Current Current assigned in the wire numbering dialog Part Number Part Number assigned in the wire numbering dialog Type Type assigned in the wire numbering dialog Cable Installation Installation of cable to which wire is assigned 622

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Cable Location Cable ID Cable Family Cable Type Cable Length Cable Conductor Cable Part Number Cable Gauge Wire Attribute 6 - 10

Location of cable to which wire is assigned ID of cable to which wire is assigned Family of cable to which wire is assigned Type of cable to which wire is assigned Length of cable to which wire is assigned Conductor of cable to which wire is assigned Part Number of cable to which wire is assigned Gauge of cable to which wire is assigned Additional user attributes assigned to wire

3. Click in the Use column to select which fields you will want in the export file. A “Y” will appear for all variables that are selected to be exported. (Click again to remove the “Y”.) 4. If a variable is supposed to use a specific number of characters, place the field width in the Fixed Width column. Entries that are too long will be truncated to this number and entries that are too small will be padded with extra spaces. 5. The Prefix field is for constant text that should be output before the value of the variable. For a comma separated file the lead text would be “ (a single quote) for the first variable and “,” (quote comma quote) for the remaining variables. For an XML or INI file format you would put in the label for the variable. 6. The Suffix field is for fixed text to place after the value of a variable. A “^” character should be used to specify that a new line should be inserted. 7. The Supp if from – to field allows you to suppress the installation and location variables when wires are routed entirely within a given installation/location. 8. The Sup. Prefix field allows the “ = + –” characters to be suppressed from the complete device ID (=installation+location-device tag). 9. The Sort field allows you to enter a number from 1 to 15 to specify levels of sorting in the file. 15 levels of filtering are supported. 10. The New File field specifies if a new file should be created when the value for this variable change. For example if you set part number to have the sort value of “1” and set the new file option, you will get a separate export file with each wire part number. The additional files will use the user specified output file name with a sequential number appended to the end. If you wish to use this option, click inside the field so that a “Y” appears. 11. The Swap option can be used for one value in the Field column. It will swap all “from” and “to” values based on what is alphanumerically higher in this field. This is most often used for swapping based on the terminator field so that a wire would have an “A” termination on the “from” side and the “B” termination on the “to” side. Without the use of the swap toggle, half of the wires would have an “A” termination on the “from” side and roughly half would have a “B” 623

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

termination on the “from”. The result would be setting up the machine twice as often as required. If you wish to use this option, click inside the field so that a “Y” appears. This toggle should be used for only one field. 12. The Prioritize field option causes the “from” and “to” to be temporarily swapped based on which value is higher in the prioritized field. This is only done to properly evaluate sorting and does not physically change the output of the individual lines as the Swap option does. This would typically be used for the “from” installation sort. If installations were named A through D, setting the prioritize and sort for from installation would insure that all wires within, or leaving installation A, were together. Without the prioritize option selected, wire from installation A to D would appear near the top of the sort and wires from D to A would appear near the bottom. Using the prioritize option allows the actual wiring to occur in a more orderly fashion. 13. The Filter field allows removal of records from the export. The entered values will be used for exclusion. For example: entering “SH,6,8,10” in the filter column for Gauge would exclude all records with a gauge of “SH”, 6, 8 or 10. Values should be comma separated and will be used as a string comparison with the exception of the Length field. A filter in the Length field will eliminate all records with a length shorter than the entered number. 14. The Sup. Field if empty option will suppress everything on that line if the variable has no value. 15. Use the Delete 16. Use the Duplicate

button to delete duplicated fields from the format. button to place a variable more than once. This may be

used when one end of the wire is to be labeled with the “to-from” targets and the other end of the wire is to receive the “from-to” targets. 17. Select each variable and use the up and down arrow buttons to put the variables in the order needed for the export file. 18. A line at the bottom of the dialog displays a sample line of output. 19. Use the Save button to save the settings to a specific file name or load already created files for further editing. 20. At the very bottom of the field listings is a field for “Komax”. Placing a “Y” in the use field will place a wire quantity and unique article name in each new file. This is required when exporting to a Komax wire-cutting machine.

624

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Checking Gauges The Panduit Gauge Check program will read your connection list and based on maximum and minimum gauges entered into your parts database, it will report any wires that are oversized or undersized. This can be especially useful for catching sizing errors on devices like fuses or motors which have a minimum gauge requirement or component that have a physical limit on wire size. For this function to work properly you must have the connection point texts for all of your parts entered into the parts database and the Gauge range. See the “Database Editor” for how to enter the data. Operation: 1. Complete the schematic by assigning wire gauges to the wires and part numbers to the devices. 2. Select the Gauge Check button in the Panduit Wire Terminations dialog (Create tab). 3. You will be prompted to display the created error file. 4. The file will display any wires listed in the shortest distance connection list that are outside of the range specified in the parts database. If connection point data is missing from the parts database it will also display an error.

625

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Wire Lookup Values Lookup values allow the user to specify values in the export file based on a combination of wire variable. For example, a color and gauge can be used to specify the part number for a specific wire spool. The gauge can be used to specify the wire diameter. This avoids having to fill these values into the wire attributes on every wire. However, if the values cannot be determined from a simple lookup, you may need to use wire attributes and place data on every wire. For example, if you require Outside Diameter and you are using two different types of wire, Gauge alone would not be enough to determine the correct diameter to use. You would have to use one of the wire attributes to specify wire type, when you create your schematics. Operation: 1. Select the Wire Lookups tab in the Panduit Wire Terminations dialog.

2. Fill in the values in the Lookup 1, Lookup 2 and Lookup 3 columns and the wire attributes that should correspond to them. 3. Use the Save button to save the entries.

626

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Location Lookup Values Location Lookup Values allow the user to modify sorting based on location. Normally all sorts are alphanumeric. If you have set location names and want to create wires in a non-alphanumeric sort, by entering lookup values for the set location names a non-alphanumeric sort can be achieved. For example: locations could be named for sub-panels within the enclosures. The locations names may be TOP, LEFT, MAIN, RIGHT, DOOR, and BOTTOM. With a normal alphanumeric sort the wires would be sorted in the order BOTTOM, DOOR, LEFT, MAIN, RIGHT, TOP. If users want the wires for the Door to be listed first and then the main panel, they can enter the location names in the Location Lookup dialog and enter a lookup value of “A” next to the “DOOR” and “B” next to the “MAIN”, etc. The wire sort will now list wires in location “DOOR” at the top and then location “MAIN”. Operation: 1. Select the Location Lookups tab in the Panduit Wire Terminations dialog.

2. Fill in the names of the locations in the Location column. 3. In the Lookup Value column place letters that when sorted alphanumerically will put the corresponding locations in the desired order. 4. Use the Save button to save your entries.

627

Panel Layout and Wire Routing

Komax Wire Cutting Machines The Panduit Wire Terminations assignment can be used for exporting to Komax wire cutting machines. A default Komax formatting file is included in the plugins folder. This formatting file will export wire to the Komax machine. Additional custom programming can be done by Komax. The developers at Komax can read in a CSV export from the Panduit Wire Terminations program and provide additional processing. This can be done to achieve further optimization to minimize machine setup and change over time. See your Komax representative for further details. It may also be useful to have a separate formatting file for listing out wires that will have to be created manually because they are too short or require gauges outside of the machines range. The second file should set filters to exclude the wires not exported to the Komax machine. It can be sent out as a text file or as a CSV file, readable by MS-Excel. Note that the Komax import requires metric dimensions. Use the conversion factor in the WDEsetting.CFG file to convert from your standard units.

628

Parts Database

12

Parts Database This section describes the promis•e parts database. This database contains part numbers and related information about the physical devices that will be used to build the projects that are designed with promis•e. As the user creates drawings, the user can assign part numbers to each symbol. Then, when the drawings are completed, the software can use the information in the database to generate an appropriate bill of material, purchase order list, etc., based on the schematic. Alternatively, the user can create a parts list first and pick from this list to place items in a drawing. For information on assigning part numbers to symbols, see page 294.

629

Parts Database

Parts Database Editor The Manage > Parts Database Manager dropdown menu provides access to the parts database editor.

This form displays the data fields for each part in the database. You can search for and display parts records, edit or delete existing records and create new records.

Database Data Fields Part_Number – This 30 character field holds the number by which the part is identified in the database and when assigning part numbers. Part numbers can include spaces. Category - Use this 50 character field to enter a description of the part. Manufacturer – Use this 30 character field to enter the manufacturer’s name.

630

Parts Database

URL - You can enter a complete URL (http://...) in this field. When you assign this part number to a symbol you can then right-click on the symbol in the drawing and select from the pop-up menu Hyperlink > Part Number URL to display and go to the URL. Catalog_Number - Use this 30 character field to enter the manufacturer’s catalog part number for the part. Supplier – Use this 30 character field to enter the name of the company from which you purchase the part. Part_Type - Use this field to assign the part a part type group of up to 3 characters. You can filter parts data by the Part_Type field so that only the parts from the selected group(s) will be listed in the Assign Part Number dialog box. Usually this field is used to distinguish different types of parts such as “TB” for terminal blocks, “PB” for pushbuttons, etc. Additional_Part - Use this field for additional part numbers that are associated with this part. This is useful for parts that are assemblies of multiple parts. These additional part numbers should have their own data records elsewhere in the parts database. When you click inside the Additional_Part field, a browse button will appear. This button will display the Select Part Number dialog allowing you to select one or more additional parts. Percent_Spare - Use this field to enter a percentage value to determine how many spares will be ordered for the quantity that is actually used in the design. For example, enter 10 for 10%. These spares are listed in the Project Manager Spare Parts tab (see page 53). Quantity_Per_Unit - This field allows you to determine how many items are represented by the part number when the part number is assigned. The default value is 1. An example for using this field is if you use connector pins that are provided in a bag holding 100 pins. By entering a value of 0.01 in the Quantity_Per_Unit field, you can assign the part number to a single pin in the schematic and it will be counted correctly as one pin rather than one bag of pins. Use_Unit - The units in which the item is used. For example, in the case of pins that are used individually but ordered in boxes, you might enter “Pins.” Order_Unit - The units in which the item is purchased. For example, in the case of pins that are used individually but ordered in boxes, you might enter “Boxes.” Buying_Price - Use this field to enter the billing price that the manufacturer charges for the part. Selling_Price - Use this field to enter the selling price that you charge for the part. Discount - Use this field to enter the percent discount.

631

Parts Database

Detailed_Description1 (to Detailed_Description5) - Use these five fields for extended descriptions of the part. X - Enter the X dimension (width) of the part. X and Y values are used to create a box in a panel layout drawing if no layout symbol is named in the Layout field. Y - Enter the Y dimension (height) of the part. X and Y values are used to create a box in a panel layout drawing if no layout symbol is named in the Layout field. Z - Enter the Z dimension (depth or length) of the part. Diameter - Use this field for a diameter dimension for items such as conduits. Location - Use this field to identify the location of components in an enclosure such as “panel” or “door.” Weight - Use this field to enter the weight of the part. Power_Consumption - Use this field to enter the power consumption of the part. Assembly_Time - Use this field to enter an assembly time value in minutes. Wiring_Time - Use this field to enter a wiring time value in minutes. Hour_Cost - Enter an hourly labor cost. This value can be used in job costing reports. Date_Created - This field holds the date that the part data was entered in the database. Date_Modified - This field holds the date that the part data was altered (edited). Device_Family - You can assign a device family to the part. If this is done, when the part is assigned to a symbol the device family is automatically assigned to the symbol and there is no need to select a family. In other words, it saves a step when placing parent symbols. (You have the option of changing this automatically assigned device family after the symbol is placed.)

632

Parts Database

Attribute_Text - Use this field to select a symbol attribute and assign a value to it. Once this is done, if the part is assigned to a symbol that includes this attribute, the attribute value will be assigned to the symbol automatically. To enter a value, click inside the Attribute_Text field and select the browse button that appears. The Attributes dialog will appear.

First select the “+” button to create an attribute entry. Then click inside the Attribute column to display a drop-down list of attributes. Select an attribute and then enter a value of up to 255 characters in the Value column. If you wish to assign another attribute to this part, select the “+” button. Use the “X” button to delete assigned attributes. Single_Wire_Connection - A comma-separated list of connection points that will only accept one wire connection. This information is used by the shortest distance wire routing function. Schematic_Symbol - Use this field to enter the name of the symbol that will represent the part in schematic diagram. For example, enter the symbol name PBNO for parts that are normally open pushbuttons (ANSI-IEEE format). This ensures that when the symbol is used in a schematic, the part will be listed in the Assign Part Number dialog box. If a part number applies to more than one symbol, you can enter multiple symbol names in the Schematic_Symbol field separated by commas up to the maximum width of the field (example: TBC1,X1). Layout_Symbol - Use this field to name the symbol that will represent the part in panel layout diagrams. If no symbol is named here, the part will be shown on panel layouts as a box having the size entered in the Dimensions fields. Wire_Diagram_Symbol - Use this field to enter the name of a wire diagram symbol that will represent the part in wiring diagrams.

633

Parts Database

Hydraulic_Symbol - Use this field to name the symbol that will represent the part in hydraulic diagrams. Pneumatic_Symbol - Use this field to name the symbol that will represent the part in pneumatic diagrams. Single_Line_Symbol - Use this field to name the symbol that will represent the part in single-line diagrams. Graphic_Plan_Symbol - Use this field to name the symbol that will be placed when a graphical plan is generated if the user includes the "terminal symbol" variable in his graphical plan template. The symbol itself is defined as a wiring diagram type symbol.

Parts Database Editor Functions There are a number of functions in the Parts Database Editor dialog for accessing and editing data records. Most of these are available in the toolbar at the top of the dialog.

Select Parts Database Use the Select Part Database field to select the database that you are accessing. Database connections are defined in the promis•e Setup mode (see page 407). Record Forward/Backward Use the “>” button to move forward through the database one record at a time. Use the “ Button Table Editor. The Button Table Editor dialog will appear.

When you select a button in the Button Name field, the database columns for that button will appear. To edit the displayed information, select the desired row and then select the Edit button. Editing (Setting) fields will appear for the selected row.

Edit the information as desired and select the Apply button.

647

Parts Database

To add a new row to the button table, select the New button. Blank setting fields will appear for the new row. Enter the desired information and select the Apply button. To delete a row from the button table, select the row and then select the Delete button. Select Save to save your changes to the database. The Index Table The Index table (IndexTable) allows control of the fields to display and the types of filter to use in each dialog.

The ID number determines the order in which the fields appear in the dialog. The lowest number is the first field to appear in the dialog. The entry in the Dialog_Title column must match the dialog title in the button table which in turn tells the software which query to use. You can take data from more than one table. In the Table_Name column, give the name of the table from which the data is coming. The Field_In_Database entry is the name of the field in the query. Show_In_Filter determines that that part will be displayed as a filter in the dialog. Filter_Type determines the type of filter that will be applied to that field. “Text” as a filter type indicates the records will be filtered for all records with the user-entered text as any part of the field. This is typically used for a description field where there are too many different entries to easily display in a list format. “Set” as a filter type will create a filter list that shows all possible entries that are available in the database for that field. Use this when the possible selections will fit in a manageable list. “CSV” is used when multiple entries may be available for a part. For example a lug may accept 12, 14, or 16 gauge wire. The data could be entered into the database as “12,14,16”. The software would create a list filter but it would see

648

Parts Database

this as three possible entries instead of one and 12, 14 and 16 would appear as separate selections in the list. The user could select any one of them and the part would be included in the filter. “Max”/”Min” are used when the user is expected to enter an actual value and all parts returned need to be above or below the user entered value. “URL” is used to designate a hyperlink field. The Filter_Label and Select_Label fields are used for the field name that will appear in the dialog. The toggles Show_In_Filter and Show_In_Selection determine if the field will be displayed as a filter field (such as the upper part of the dialog, selection field, neither or both. A tool is provided in promis•e for editing the Index table. Select Configure > Index Table Editor. The Index Table Editor dialog will appear.

When you select a button in the Button Name field and a dialog name in the Dialog field, the database columns for that button and dialog will appear.

649

Parts Database

To edit the displayed information, select the desired row and then select the Edit button. Editing (Setting) fields will appear for the selected row.

Edit the information as desired and select the Apply button. To add a new row to the Index table, select the New button. Blank setting fields will appear for the new row. Enter the desired information and select the Apply button. The up and down arrow buttons allow you to move a selected row up or down in the list of rows (which affect the order in which the fields appear in the dialog). The Exchange button allows you to the switch the positions of two selected rows. (Hold down the key to in order to select the second row.) To delete a row from the Index table, select the row and then select the Delete button. Select Save to save your changes to the database. Customization There are a number of customizations that can be done to the software to tailor it to your company. Adding product groups and dialogs The Button table can be edited to add additional selections under the Panduit button or create new buttons. This can be used to add new product groups or to divide up the current groups into smaller groups. This can be done to make the parts tables more manageable with better performance or to make separate product dialogs that are even more part-specific. 1. Create the new part tablesin the Panduit.mdb database. 2. Create a query to link the new table to the main promis•e parts database. 650

Parts Database

3. Enter a record for the new dialog in the Button table. You can do this either directly in MS-Access or by using the Button Table Editor (see page 647). 3

4

6

5

7

4. Create a name for the button to appear in the part selection dialog in promis•e. 5. Create a name for the dialog box for the custom table. 6. Place a check box in the Show field to make the button appear in the dialog. 7. Enter all of the fields from the query just entered in the Button table into the Index table. You can do this either directly in MS-Access or by using the Index Table Editor (see page 649). 8

9

10

11

12

14

15

13

14

8. Enter a unique number ID for the field to be displayed in the dialog. 9. Enter the same dialog title used in the Button table. 10. Enter the name of the table that the data is coming from. 11. Enter the field name from the database or query listed in the button table. 12. Enter a column heading for the field in the select (lower) portion of the parts dialog. 13. Enter a label for the Filter field in the filter (upper) portion of the parts dialog. 14. Turn on the fields that are to be displayed as Show_In_Filter and Show_In_Select columns.

651

Parts Database

15. Enter the type of filter to use: Text – allow the user to enter any text and return records that contain that text Max – Return all records that have values under the user-entered number. Min – Return all records over the user-entered number. Set – Display all possible entries in a list and return the records that match the user’s selection. CSV – Allow the files to contain comma-separated values. The values are displayed separately in a list and all records containing the selected value are returned. URL – A hyperlink is used in the column (Show In Filter should be set to on). Note:

A maximum of 15 filters may be used per dialog. Changing the order of the filters The order of the filters in the dialog box is based in the ID number. The easiest way to rearrange the order is to: 1. First, right-click in the Dialog_Title field and filter the name of the dialog you are working with. 2. Copy and paste each existing record to the bottom of the table in the order you want the fields displayed. 3. Delete the original entries. Display or hide filter or selection fields in the dialog The filters displayed may not be appropriate for your company. For example you may not want to display both inch and metric dimensions. 1. Toggle the “Show” settings in the Index table for the appropriate dialog and field to hide or display it. Adding buttons to the promis•e Part Selection Dialog You may divide separate groups of components into multiple buttons in the promis•e part selection dialog. The dialog will support up to four buttons.

652

Project API Builder

13

Project API Builder The Project API (Application Programming Interface) Builder can be used to automate the building of new projects or for changing existing ones. This tool requires that you have MS-Excel on your computer as the input file is an MS-Excel file with the ending "xls". When activated, the Project API Builder executes a series of functions that are defined in the Excel file. For complex applications, such as the building of attachments that are based on variables, additional software is necessary. This can be made with any development environment that runs on the operating system and can create or edit Excel files. For example, for databases, all that is necessary is an interface that changes the data into the Excel format of the project API builder.

653

Project API Builder

Project API Command File Format The Project API Builder supports two formats for the Excel command file: a legacy format and the standard file format.

Legacy File Format The first format is a legacy format used by the Project-API function of earlier versions of promis•e. This format can be recognized by a header row in line 1 that consists of “COM” in column A, “PAR1” in column B, “PAR2” in column C, and so on. Column A is for comments while subsequent columns contain function codes and parameter values.

For more information on this format consult the system manual for earlier versions of the software.

Standard File Format The second format is the format introduced with promis•e 2007. It supports some of the newer features of the software such as drawing sets. This format can be recognized by the second line which contains function code “SCRIPT” in column B with a value of “2” in column C. As with the legacy format, the first line is a header row that consists of “COM” in column A, “PAR1” in column B, “PAR2” in column C, and so on.

Column A is for comments. Column B holds function codes while subsequent columns contain parameter values related to the function.

654

Project API Builder

Available Functions The following functions are available for use in the Project API Builder. PRJ - Create/Open Project

Column B contains the function code PRJ. Column C contains the name of the project that will be opened or created. If you enter only the project name the software will use the default project folder specified in the promis•e Setup dialog. You can also enter a complete path for the project if you wish to use a different folder. Column D contains the name of a project from which the project settings will be taken. It's useful to define a master project with all necessary project parameters and use it here. This eliminates the need to define all the project parameters in the Project API Builder command file. If you leave the field blank, the software will use the default settings for new projects. Column E and above can contain project descriptions. You can enter as many descriptions as you wish. INS - Create/Open Installation

Column B contains the function code INS. Column C - Installation name. Column D and above - Installation descriptions. You can enter as many descriptions as you wish.

655

Project API Builder

PAG - Create/Open Page

Column B contains the function code PAG. Column C - Drawing set name Column D - Installation name Column E - Location name Column F - Page number Column G - Page format Column H - Page scale (enter “1” for 1:1, enter “2” for 1:2, etc.) Column I - Title block Column J - Drawing mode Column K - Use or overwrite existing page. Enter “0” to use an existing page. Enter “1” to overwrite an existing page. Column L - Page macro Column M - Device ID update mode. This setting determines how IDs and wire numbers are updated on macros when they are placed on the page. This setting affects all macros placed on the page unless the MAC function (see below) includes a similar setting, in which case the setting in the MAC function will override the setting in the PAG function for that particular macro. Enter one of the following values (0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32): 0 = Maintain Nothing 1 = Maintain Device ID Tag Only 2 = Maintain Wire Number Tag Only 4 = Maintain Wire Link Tag Only 8 = Maintain Device ID Complete 16 = Maintain Wire Number Complete 32 = Maintain Wire Link Complete Column N - Set page online or offline. 0 = Online page; 1 = Offline page Column O and higher - Page descriptions. You can enter as many descriptions as you wish. 656

Project API Builder

MAC - Insert Macro With this function you can insert a macro in a drawing.

Column B contains the function code MAC. Column C - Macro name Column D - Macro insertion point X coordinate Column E - Macro insertion point Y coordinate Column F - Macro insertion point Z coordinate Column G - Snap To Grid. 0 = No; 1 = Yes Column H - Device ID update mode. This setting determines how IDs and wire numbers are updated on macros when they are placed on the page. This setting will override the setting in the PAG function for this particular macro. Enter one of the following values (0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32): 0 = Maintain Nothing 1 = Maintain Device ID Tag Only 2 = Maintain Wire Number Tag Only 4 = Maintain Wire Link Tag Only 8 = Maintain Device ID Complete 16 = Maintain Wire Number Complete 32 = Maintain Wire Link Complete Column I - Allow sub-ID. If a device ID is assigned that belongs to a family that is already full, this setting allows the new item to be added to the family as an auxiliary child (sub-ID). 1 = Allow sub-ID. 0 = Do not allow sub-ID (device ID will contain a “?”).

657

Project API Builder

TXT - Replace Texts With this function, you can exchange various kinds of texts in a project with new values. You can enter codes to specify the type of texts that are to be replaced. If used after the MAC function, the TXT function will only affect the macro that was placed. You can reset the TXT function so that it affects the entire project by using the SPARE function.

Column B contains the function character TXT. Column C - #_OldText where “#” is the selection code that determines which type of text is to be replaced and “OldText” is the existing text to be replaced. See the section below for an explanation of the selection code. Column D - The new text string that is to replace the old text. Column E - The connection point and device ID replacement method. Enter one of the following values: 0 = Question mark on error 1 = Try alternate child on error 2 = Force new sub-ID on error Column F - Text attribute name. If you wish to limit the replacement to a single text attribute (see page 345) enter the attribute name here. Selection Code This number, used in the TXT function, defines the categories of text that will be included in the replacement. It consists of a number between 1 and 4095. Examples: 4_F1 means search for device ID F1 2048_X1:100 means search for the terminal block X1:100 You can combine multiple categories into a single code number by adding two or more codes and using that value. Example: 96_Stop means search Symbol text and Free texts for “Stop.” (32+64=96) 658

Project API Builder

The following are the individual codes: 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4095

Installation Location Device ID Part number Connection Point Symbol text Free texts Potential number Logical field texts Title block texts Cable texts Terminal blocks All information that can be found in the project

SPARE - Reset the TXT function When you use the TXT function following the MAC function, the TXT function will only apply to the last macro that was placed. By putting the SPARE function in the list of functions, the TXT function will be reset so that it applies to the entire project.

659

Project API Builder

SYM - Place Symbol With this function, you can place a symbol in a drawing.

Column B contains the function code SYM. Column C - Symbol name Column D - Family name Column E - Symbol insertion point X coordinate Column F - Symbol insertion point Y coordinate Column G - Symbol insertion point Z coordinate Column H - Symbol scale. Scale values allow the symbol to be reduced (0.5 for half size) or enlarged (2 for double size). Column I - Symbol rotation value. Column J - Mirror symbol 0 = No mirror 1 = Mirror on X axis 2 = Mirror on Y axis Column K - Auto ID assignment 0 = Yes - assign device ID automatically using the project’s default format. 1 = No

660

Project API Builder

LINE - Draw Wire Use this function to draw a wire in a drawing.

Column B contains the function code LINE. Column C - Drawing mode Column D - Wire X1 coordinate Column E - Wire Y1 coordinate Column F - Wire X2 coordinate Column G - Wire Y2 coordinate Column H - Wire color (on the drawing page) Column I - Line style

661

Project API Builder

Running the Project API Builder To run the Project API Builder, use the following procedure. 1. Select the promis-e Output > Project API Builder function. The following dialog will appear.

2. In the Instruction File field, enter or browse to the Excel instruction file. 3. (Optional) In the Log File field, enter or browse to the name of the log file. This file logs the functions executed by the Project API Builder as it runs. If there are problems you can examine the contents of the log file to see where the problems occur. If you enter the name of a log file that does not exist it will be created. If you enter or browse to the name of a log file that already exists, its contents will be overwritten when you run the Project API Builder. 4. Select the OK button to run the Project API Builder.

662

Appendix A - Engineering Design Considerations

A

Engineering Design Considerations As you work, the software may display an Engineering Design Consideration dialog. These dialogs call attention to conditions in your project that may cause errors or other undesirable results. You then have an opportunity to take an appropriate action.

This section lists the various Engineering Design Consideration messages that you may see. They are listed alphabetically. All instances of this symbol in the selected family have already been used in this project. Please select from the following choices: You are attempting to assign this symbol to a family where all the available positions have been filled. Your choices are: 1. Use the Search button to select a different family with more available positions. 2. Use the Append button to add the new symbol to the family as an auxiliary device. 3. Use the Cancel button to assign the symbol to a different device ID. Are you sure you want to assign a wire number to a cable? You are attempting to assign a wire number to the conductor of a cable. Select Yes if you want to do this. Select No to cancel the wire number assignment. Cannot create macro from a read only page. You are attempting to create a macro on a page that is set for read only. You must make the page writable before you can create a macro on this page.

663

Appendix A - Engineering Design Considerations

Device family of the part number does not match the family you assigned. The selected part number is associated with a family. You are attempting to assign it to a symbol that is associated with a different family. Device ID _____ already exists on page _____ line _____. Do you want to duplicate it? Using the same device ID for two different symbols could be a mistake. Select Yes if you wish to use the same device ID again for the current symbol. Select No if you wish to use a different device ID. Do you want to automatically exchange the symbols in the original family with the ones in the new family. Select Yes if you wish the software to transfer the symbols in the current family to positions in the new family. Select No if you wish to manually select where the symbols should go in the new family using the Exchange Family dialog. Do you want to delete all occurrences of this wire number throughout the project? The selected wire number exists elsewhere in the project, for example through a wirelink connection. Do you want to update all related symbols that share this Device ID? There are other symbols with this device ID. Select Yes if you wish to make the same change to all of them. Select No if you only wish to apply the change to the symbol you selected. If you change this setting, all branches of wire on this potential will be changed to the same wire properties. Are you sure you want to do this? The wire has more branches than the one selected. Select Yes to assign this property to all branches of the wire. Select No to cancel the property change. “_____” is reserved. This layer is required by the software.

664

Appendix A - Engineering Design Considerations

Layer “_____” contains wires. Deleting this layer will cause these wires to be moved to a general layer. Are you sure you wish to do this? If you delete this layer the wires it contains will be moved to a different layer. Select Yes to delete the layer. Select No to cancel the deletion. Note: “_____” could not be exchanged to the new family. It will remain in the original family. The software could not automatically find a position for the specified symbol in the new family. Part Number _____ does not exist in parts database. You cannot navigate to a part number that is not in the parts database. Please be aware that you are trying to connect a drawing line to a wire. Drawings can have two types of lines: wires and drawing lines. Drawing lines are simple graphic lines with no logical properties. Wires allow the software to recognize the connections between symbols and perform other functions such as automatic wire numbering. Use the functions in the Wiring menu to create wires. Some Wire Link IDs may need to be renamed since you have now changed the potential over a terminal setting. The connection information needs to be rebuilt. This could take a few minutes. Changing the potential over terminal setting can affect wire link IDs, requiring project connection information to be rebuilt. Terminal number already exists. Please specify a different terminal number. The terminal you entered already exists. You cannot define a duplicate terminal number in the Force Routing Manager. Terminal number _____ already exists on page _____, line _____. Do you want to duplicate the terminal number? The terminal you are placing has already been assigned to another terminal. Select Yes to duplicate the terminal number on the terminal you are currently placing. Select No to cancel assigning this terminal number. Terminal number _____ already exists on page _____, line _____. You cannot include duplicate terminal numbers in a family. The terminal you are placing belongs to a family. The terminal number you are assigning has already been used on the indicated page.

665

Appendix A - Engineering Design Considerations

Terminals with the same device ID were found vertically. Do you wish to update them all? Select Yes if you wish to apply this change to all terminals with the same device ID. Select No if you only wish to affect the selected terminal(s). The command cannot apply to all selected symbols. You are attempting to perform a function that is not appropriate for one or more of the symbols that you selected. The length you have entered exceeds the maximum length defined for this part number. The parts database record for this part includes a (maximum) length value. You have entered a value that exceeds this length. Enter a shorter length or select a part number with a greater maximum length. The part number you have selected does not match the existing family. Are you sure you want to do this? The parts database data for this part number indicates that it is associated with a different device family than the family currently assigned to the selected symbol. Select Yes to assign the part anyway. Select No to cancel the part number assignment. The software is attempting to mend two wires together that have different wire properties. You can choose to leave a gap between the wires or mend the wires together. If you choose to mend the wires you must select which set of wire properties you want the new wire to have. A device has been removed that separated two wires with different wire numbers or other properties. You can choose to leave a gap between the wires or mend them together. If you choose to mend them together, select the wire whose properties you wish to keep on the new, combined wire. The symbol you are trying to place is not compatible with the _____ drawing mode that you are currently in. You must switch into the correct mode before placing this symbol or place a different symbol that matches this drawing mode. The software is placed in different drawing modes to create different types of drawings. See page 196 for more information.

666

Appendix A - Engineering Design Considerations

The wire number(s) in the macro you are placing has already been used in the project. Please choose from the following options: The wires in the macro you are placing have wire numbers assigned that are already used elsewhere in your project. You can choose to have the software automatically assign new wire numbers to the macro or simply delete the wire numbers from the macro. There is already a symbol at position (_____). The function you are using will place a symbol where another already exists. Only one symbol can occupy a given position in the drawing. There is already a symbol at this position; you cannot insert another symbol here. Only one symbol can occupy a given position in the drawing. There is no active project to perform navigation. No project is currently active. Open a page in the project where you wish to navigate to make that project active. This command is protected by command protection. You do not have permission to use this function. The command protection mode allows functions to be restricted. Users are categorized into a number of levels or “roles.” A different combination of functions is allowed or not allowed for each role. Your current role does not allow the selected function. See page 418. This device ID already has another part number assigned to it. Please choose from the following options. This message occurs when you have two symbols with different device IDs and different part numbers assigned and then you change one device ID so that the two symbols now have the same ID. You now have two part numbers associated with the same ID. Your choices are: 1. Select the Replace button to replace the part number originally assigned to the device ID with the new one. 2. Select the Append button to append the new part number to the device along with the original part number. 3. Select the Discard button to discard the new part number and keep the original part number. 667

Appendix A - Engineering Design Considerations

This part number specifies a symbol name that does not match the symbol already used in the project. Are you sure you want to append this part number to this device ID. The selected part number is associated in the parts database with a different symbol than the one to which you are currently assigning it. This symbol does not belong to the selected family. Please select from the following choices: You are attempting to assign a symbol to a family when that symbol is not included in the family’s definition. Your choices are: 1. Use the Search button to select a different family that includes the new symbol. 2. Use the Append button to add the new symbol to the family as an auxiliary device. 3. Use the Cancel button to assign the symbol to a different device ID. Unable to update the existing family definition in this project because the new family definition does not contain the currently used symbol. You must change the family or the symbol to correct the problem. This message can occur when you edit a family definition that is currently used in the project and remove a symbol from the family definition that is currently used in the project with that family. Wire number _____ already exists on page _____, line _____. Please select a different wire number. Duplicate wire numbers are not allowed. Enter a different wire number that is not already in use. Wire number _____ already exists on page _____, line _____. The wire number you are pasting will be deleted to resolve the problem. Duplicate wire numbers are not allowed. This wire number will be deleted from the content you are pasting. You can assign a new wire number to the copied wire. You are trying to connect wires that have different wire layers. Please select which wire layer you wish to use for these wires. You are connecting wires that exist on different wire layers. Choose which layer you wish the wires to use.

668

Appendix A - Engineering Design Considerations

You cannot assign a part number that calls out a different family. The part number you are attempting to assign is associated with a different device family than the family to which the selected symbol belongs. You cannot assign a wire number to a wire that is not connected at both ends. One end of the wire is not connected to anything. Connect it to a device or to another wire. You cannot assign a wire number to a wire that is not connected to a device. The selected wire is not connect to any devices. Place devices on the wire first or connect it to existing devices in the drawing. You cannot insert balloon along with a symbol until part number is specified. Select a part number for this symbol before you assign a balloon. You cannot specify part number which calls out family without definition of symbol “_____”. The selected part number is associated with a family. You are attempting to assign it to a symbol that is not included in this family definition. You have changed a part number that was related to one or more symbols that have already been placed in the project. Please indicate whether or not you wish to maintain the link between these symbols for each drawing mode shown below. A symbol in one drawing mode (such as schematic mode) can be related to a symbol in another drawing mode (such as panel layout) because they have the same device ID (i.e., they represent the same device). If you change the part number assigned to the device ID in one drawing mode, the software will prompt you with this dialog to ask if you wish the symbols in the other drawing modes to receive the new part number assignment also. For each drawing mode, select in the Link column whether you wish to Maintain or Unlink the relation between the symbols. Where you select Maintain, that mode will receive the new part assignment. Where you select Unlink, that mode will not receive the new part assignment, in which case a “?” will be appended to the device ID in that mode. You have drawn a wire in a diagonal direction. The software will not break this wire if you place a symbol on this diagonal wire segment and it will not recognize it as a valid connection. In order for a symbol to connect properly to a wire, the wire segment must be horizontal or vertical. 669

Appendix A - Engineering Design Considerations

You have no database connection, please go to the setup dialog and configure the project database connection. Your software does not specify a database type. Use the Configure > Setup function and make settings in the Project Database area.

670

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

B

Wiring Rules XML File This appendix describes the contents of the wiring rules file and how to edit the contents for your own application. The file is used to set rules for panel-to-panel connections when generating the shortest distance routing information. The file is used with the Wiring Rules method for shortest distance, not the Standard method. See page 594 for more information.

Structure of Wiring Rules File The wiring rules file is an XML file that is structured as shown below: Here is a generic outline of the structure: Version Header Line Name of Rule Set1 Rule1 Rule2, etc. Direct wire exceptions Rule1 Rule2, etc. End of direct wire exceptions WireSequencing Enclosure1 Enclosure2 End of WireSequencing Terminal Designations Designation1 Designation2 End of Terminal Designations End of Rule Set1

671

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

Here is a specific example of a wiring rules file, ExampleWiringRules.xml (which you can find in the folder where the Shortest Distance plug-in is installed): - - - - - DOOR LEFTPANEL BACKPANEL RIGHTPANEL -

The rules file can be edited with an XML editor. A number of XML editors are available online including Cooktop and XMLSpy®.

672

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

How to define a new rule set You can create a new wiring rule set for a particular product line by defining a new node in the XML File such as this:

The entry in quotes is the name of the rule set, which will appear in the Use Wiring Rules for dropdown list in the Shortest Distance dialog. Define all your rules below this entry in the XML file. When you have finished entering your rules you will end the rule set by entering this line:

This marks the end of this particular rule set. All your rules for this product line should appear between the two lines.

Defining Panels In order for the wiring rules to work you must define names for your different panels that will be used when creating the wiring rules. The panel names need to be entered on your enclosure layout symbols using the PanelName attribute. You will then refer to those names in the wiring rules file.

673

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

Defining Available Terminals For Wiring If you do not show certain terminals in your schematics that are actually a part of the circuit you must declare those terminals in the wiring rule file and create a rule for them. You must create the terminal layout symbols that include the attribute SDWReservedTerminal with an assigned value of SDW. Only terminals with SDW assigned to this attribute will be assigned automatically by the Shortest Distance program. Then in the wiring rule file you must create a section under your rule set where you declare your terminals. Here is an example: -

You begin the section with the heading and end it with . terminal="Terminal Designation" (This can be any letter designation that you want to use to represent a terminal located in the enclosure) enclosure="Name of the panel that the terminal is located in" (The enclosure value should be the name of the panel where the terminal is located.) Optional commands for plugs: maxConnections=1 (This designates a plug rather than a terminal.) Example:

match = “match_type:group_name=regular_expression” (match_type=”DeviceID”, which means the program should use an expression named “regular_expression” to interpret the device ID.) Example:

(Here “P” is the group name which matches any plug where the device ID begins with the letter P.) One possible use for this would be to ensure that two plugs always connect male to female based on device ID.

674

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

Defining Rules You are now ready to define your wiring rules. You must define a rule for every possible connection that requires the program to wire to a terminal that may not be shown in the schematic. Here is an example rule:

Rule Parameters Here is a definition of each parameter in the above rule: from - The name of the panel that you are wiring from. to - The name of the panel that you are wiring to. location - This parameter takes four possible values: @SameSection@: Enter this if the two panels are located in the same section. @DifferentSection@: Enter this if the two panels are in different sections. @SameCompartment@: Enter this if the two panels are located in the same compartment. @DifferentCompartment@: Enter this if the two panels are located in different compartments. rule - The rule is used to define which terminals the program should wire to. Use the terminal designations defined earlier to create the rule. You can define the rule that you need by using the appropriate syntax. The program recognizes the following operator characters: Operator

Description

, (comma)

Used as a delimiter to separate alternative terminals that can be used if the first terminal designation is not available. Example: T,R

- (dash)

Used to indicate a connection between two different terminal designations on the same side (either the “from” or “to” side). Example: T-R

: (colon)

Used to separate terminal designations on the “from” side of the connection from the terminal designations on the “to” side.

675

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

Example rules: Wire to one terminal on the “from” side designated as T: Rule="T:" Wire to one terminal on the “to” side: Rule=":T" Wire to two different terminals designated as C and T in different sections: Rule="C:T" Wire to two terminals in the “from” side and to two terminals on the “to” side: Rule="C-T:C-T" Note:

You can use combinations of operators to define more complicated rules than the examples above. fromTermSide - In this parameter you specify which sides of the terminal should be wired to (Internal vs. External). Enter an "I" for internal and an "E" for external, which represent the left and right sides of the terminal, respectively. Additional operators can be used to handle cases where you wire to both sides of a terminal and/ or wire between multiple terminals. Here are some examples and their meanings:

Note:

Value

Meaning

I

Single terminal with both connections on the internal side.

E

Single terminal with both connections on the external side.

I-E

The wire coming into the terminal connects to the internal side and the wire going out connects to the external side.

I,E

When you have more than one terminal connected together you can separate them with a comma. In this case it wires into and out of the first terminal on the internal side and into and out of the second terminal on the external side.

You can combine the different examples to handle other situations. toTermSide - This parameter accepts the same syntax as the fromTermSide parameter. You only need to enter a value for this parameter if there is a second terminal in a different section on the destination side that requires a terminal. This is commonly the case when going from one section to another. group - This parameter is used to group connections on a plug. If two rules use the same group name, the software will allow them to wire to the same plug. If no group name parameter is specified, the software will assume all rules to have the same group name.

676

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

Example:

In the following example, group P is defined as a horizontal harness (H_P), and group C as a horizontal harness (H_C). A match is done to find device IDs that start with “P” and these are in group P. Example:

(and under TerminalDesignations)

677

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

Specifying Direct Wire Connections Any connections between panels that do not have a defined rule will automatically be directly routed from the device in the first panel to the device in the second panel. In some cases, however, you might have a rule defined to wire to terminals not shown in the schematic that you may want to override for certain wires. For example, large gauge wires will often need to be wired direct since the terminals may not be able to handle the wires. You may also have certain cables that you want wired direct. You can declare these exceptions in your wiring rule file by creating a new section under your wire rule set:

In the above example you can enter the gauges that should be routed direct (#2) and enter "D" as the rule to force it to direct wire these devices. You can also enter a cable part number (8719) and use the same rule.

Shipping Splits Rules for using Shipping Splits: 1. A rule in the following format must exist. Otherwise the program will not add any shipping split terminals.

2. Attribute "rule" in the above rule specifies the terminals will be used as first choice. If no such terminals are available, the code will look for the attribute “noSSTerminals” of the WiringRule element (the parent node). The “noSSTerminals” attribute can be A. "next" : the code will look at the next section of the same terminal type. B. other terminal type: in this case the format is the same as the rule attribute, which makes the code use a different type(s) of spare terminal. 3. If “noSSTerminals” is empty and both sections have no available spare terminals, then no shipping split will be added. 4. Neither the attribute "rule" nor the attribute “noSSTerminals” adds spare terminals to the connection. The code only inserts an empty panel to the panel list and marks the panel type as "@shippingSplit@". Other rules like from="*" to="@ShippingSplit@" and from="@ShippingSplit@" to = "*" should follow. ("*" can be explicitly specified as a different panel type. And these rules will add spare terminals to the connection according to the "rule" attribute specified. 678

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

Let's look at an example to illustrate how the program handles shipping splits. Suppose we have a connection from panels 1:A to 2:A, and the shipping split should use T terminals. To start with, we have panel 1:A and 2:A sorted in order. If we specifiy

And a spare terminal in T panel is available, now we have 1:A -> 1:@ShippingSplit@ -> 2A. Then the code passes the process for handling generic spare terminals. In this process the program finds that there is a connection from 1:A to 1:@ShippingSplit@. It looks for the rule from="A" to="@ShippingSplit@" location="@SameSection@" and adds a terminal specified by this rule. If this rule is not found, it looks from="*" to="@ShippingSplit" ... If the user’s requirement is that if T terminal is not available in the first stack then use T terminals in the next stack, we need to specify noSSTerminals="next" or noSSTerminals=":T"

Now we have panels as 1:A -> 2:@ShippingSplit@ -> 2:A. Then either From="*" to="@ShippingSplit@" location="@DifferentStack@" rule=":T"

or From="@ShippingSplit@" to="*" location="@SameStack@" rule="T"

will work for this situation. In short, the program adds a new panel type @ShippingSplit@ for handling shipping splits. Rules for how to handle connections to/from panels typed @ShippingSplit@ need to be added.

679

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

Section and Compartment ID Format in EctRway.xml When you create layout diagrams for the wiring rules version of the Shortest Distance Routing function, you use special layout symbols for each panel. These symbols must be given a device ID which is used by the program to identify the section and compartment to which the panel belongs. For example, the installation name of a panel symbol can represent the name of the section (unit, stack). The location name could represent a compartment within a section, if your designs make use of compartments. 1

2

3

Sections (Units, Stacks)

Sections with Compartments

Use IDPattern1 in EctRway.xml

1

2

3

A

A

A

B

B

B

C

C

C

Use IDPattern2 in EctRway.xml

To set how the how the device ID of your panel symbols corresponds to your naming convention for sections and compartments, use the Wiring Rules Configuration dialog (see page 597). The settings made here are stored in EctRway.xml located in the Shortest Distance directory of the current project. In the parameters section of the EctRway.xml file, there re entries using the tag as shown in the following example. ([0-9]*)\+

680

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

The IDPattern tags set a “regular expression” using VBScript and ASP.NET syntax. The regular expression defines an pattern that is then compared to a string, in this case a complete device ID including installation and location, for example =installation1+location2-pb123. Use IDPattern1 to define part of the device ID as the name of the section (unit, stack). In the preceeding example, the pattern looks for any integer in the device ID between the = character and the + character, in other words, the installation part of the complete device ID. Use IDPattern2 if you are using compartments within sections. This tag will define the part of the device ID that will be used for the compartment name. In the preceeding example this tag has been left empty, therefore compartments will not be used. Use IDPattern3 if you wish to specify part of the device ID as a name for the panel symbol. Use of this tag is optional because if you are using the PanelName attribute on the panel symbols the panel name will be provided from there. In the preceeding example this tag has been left empty, therefore the panel name must come from the layout symbol PanelName attribute. Regular Expression Syntax There are several special metacharacters and sequences to allow you to do complex pattern matching, including the following: ^

Stands for the beginning of a string , so "^i" will match "is" but not "mi".

$

Indicates a match at the end of a string, so "$i" will match "mi" but not "is".

*

Matches the preceding character zero or more times, so the regular expression "fo*" matches both "f" and "foo". "+" matches the preceding character one or more times, so "fo+" matches "foo" but not "f". The question mark ("?") matches the preceding character zero or just one time, meaning "a?ve?" matches the "ve" in "never".

.

The period (".") matches any single character except the newline character, so "a.b" matches "aab" and "a3b", but not "ab". The bar "|" is used for alternative matching, as in "a|b", which will match either "a" or "b".

{}

The expression "{n}" matches against the target string exactly n times. For example, "e{2}" will match "feed" but not "fed". The expression "{n,m}" will match against the target string at least n times but not more than m times. "o{1,3}" will match all the o’s in "food" or "sod", but will only match the first three o’s in "soooooie".

[]

Brackets are used to express character and digit sets and ranges. For example, the expression "[abcd]" will match any of the enclosed characters in the target string. The whole lower-case alphabet can be

681

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

expressed using "[a-z]". To include both upper- and lower-case letters in the regular expression, write the expression like this: "[a-zA-Z]". To search for digits in a string, use "[0-9]". Negative character and digit sets and ranges can also be expressed. "[^abc]" will match any characters not enclosed in brackets. You can also write an expression for a negative range, such as "[^m-q]". Note: in this case the “^” character is inside the brackets, so it does not mean “the beginning of a string.”

682

Appendix C - ProjectWise Plug-in

C

ProjectWise Plug-in The promis•e ProjectWise plug-in is a standard module in promis•e that can be used for the document management of promis•e projects. The module allows management of the project as a whole, and “publishes” individual drawing files. The tool depends on the promis•e backup restore function to create a project PRJ file. The PRJ file is a container for all of the individual drawings of a project along with an extract of the entire set of project database entries. This allows an entire project to be restored with all of the content in the state that existed at the time the project was backed up and to use symbols and parts database records that were used in the original project. The document management functionality is provided by ProjectWise software from Bentley Systems, which must be purchased and installed separately. The project operations supported with ProjectWise include:

• • • • •

Check in project Copy in project Check out project Copy out project Undo project checkout

In addition to the project-based function, the ProjectWise plug-in includes an export of all project DGNs or DWGs at the time the project is placed into ProjectWise. These drawings are no longer used by promis•e after entry into ProjectWise but they may be used within ProjectWise for viewing or plotting. The promis•e page descriptions are exported to ProjectWise with the drawings. The promis•e software uses a project backup method because a normal working environment for promis•e has multiple users sharing project data simultaneously. Information is shared in the database and across multiple drawings. Drawing data on one drawing can be edited from another drawing or edited directly in the project database with the Data Editor. Keeping all of the drawings available on the network facilitates this type of setup. promis•e internally keeps track of the entities in all of the drawings and stops users from simultaneously editing the same device or the same drawing.

683

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

Using ProjectWise with promis•e See the Setup section later in this chapter for information on how your ProjectWise software should be configured to operate with promis•e. Once this is done, you use promis•e as follows:

Logging in When promis•e is started, a ProjectWise login dialog will appear that prompts the user for the data source, their user name and password.

Creating new projects After logging in, access to the ProjectWise functionality is through the promis•e Project Manager. The ProjectWise options are selected by right-clicking on the folders and projects in the tree view.

Creating promis•e projects and drawings is currently only done through the promis•e Project Manager. You cannot create projects in ProjectWise. Right-clicking on a folder will allow a new project to be created. The project may be checked into ProjectWise at a later time. 684

Appendix C - ProjectWise Plug-in

Checking in a project To check in a project, right click on the project in the tree view of the Project Manager. Select Check In from the pop-up menu.

The project backup file will be created with all of the project files and project database entries, so that the project can be completely restored at a later date. A dialog will allow the user to select where the backup should be placed. Just select OK to select the default folder.

685

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

The ProjectWise Explorer can be opened to see that the project has been placed in ProjectWise and the promis•e project descriptions have been transferred to ProjectWise.

The individual drawing files are also checked in. These drawing files are for readonly purposes. They drawings with the required database links to be used in a working promis•e project have been compressed into the ".PRJ" file with the project database. If you have chosen to leave a copy of the project on your system you will receive a message that the drawings are now available in a read only mode for viewing or copying from.

686

Appendix C - ProjectWise Plug-in

Checking out a project Checking a project out from ProjectWise can be done from either the ProjectWise Explorer or the promis•e Project Manager. To check out the project from the ProjectWise Explorer, select the project and the promis•e Restore Project dialog will display and allow the user to restore the project. This will place all of the working drawings and the associated database records back on the user’s system. In a multiuser environment it is recommended the project be restored to a shared network location and the project should remain checked out until the revisions have been completed.

Project checkout can also be done directly from the promis•e Project Manager environment, by right-clicking on the read only copy of the project or the main project folder and selecting Check Out from the pop-up menu.

A dialog will allow you to search ProjectWise for the promis•e project.

687

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

Undo Project Check Out If a project is checked out and changes are made but the user does not want to keep the changes, the promis•e Project Manager right-click menu can be used to Undo Check Out. This makes the copy that still exists in ProjectWise the checked-in version and all of the user's changes are not saved.

Copy In The user may want to keep their project checked out for further changes but update the ProjectWise version for viewing or saving their work. The Copy In right-click option saves their work to ProjectWise while leaving the project checked out to them.

Copy Out The user may want to base a new project on an existing one or they may want to update their local read only version. The Copy Out right-click command in the promis•e Project Manager will place a copy of the project in the specified folder but leave the master version of the project checked in to ProjectWise.

Setup The following steps must be followed by the ProjectWise administrator to set up an environment in ProjectWise for promis•e to use. ProjectWise itself should already be set up and working with a datasource. 1. Assign promis•e environment. In the folder [promis-e program folder] >Plugins> DMSManager, there is an xml file named DMSManager.dll.xml. In this xml file there are two init attributes in node “INIT”. The first is "Environment" and the second is "ProjectTypes". The default value for both is "Electrical". This name must match the environment name used in ProjectWise. The following is a copy of the file with the default variable values in bold.

688

Appendix C - ProjectWise Plug-in

2. Modify the promis•e AAM file in the promis•e plug-ins folder. The file [promis-e program folder] >Plugins> DMSManager/promisoe.AAM contains the default page attributes that will be exported from the promis•e page information to ProjectWise. At the end, it has the default environment name of "Electrical". See your ProjectWise documentation for the format of this file if the defaults are not adequate. The document attributes entered in this file are the promis•e Page Descriptions entered in Project Manager: Tools > Options > Default Project Properties > Page Descriptions.

The user can add additional page description in promis•e and add them to the AAM file or directly in the ProjectWise. (This information can also be modified in ProjectWise Administrator after the default file is imported.) Note that all of the document attributes are string types with lengths of 255 characters. Also note that ProjectWise does not support the space character ' ' in the attribute names. Any spaces in your promis•e attribute names will have to be replaced with an underscore '_'.

689

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

3. Import the environment into ProjectWise Open your ProjectWise Administrator Software. Select the datasource, database and right click on "Environments". Select Import and browse to the AAM file in the promis•e Plugins folder.

If required, the attributes can be further modified within ProjectWise by selecting “Environments” and “Attributes”.

690

Appendix C - ProjectWise Plug-in

4. Create Project Type Right click on Project Types and select New > Project Type. Follow the wizard to create the “Electrical” project type.

5. Customize Project Type Right click on the newly created “Electrical” project type and select Add Properties to add the additional project descriptions that should be used in ProjectWise.

This is a default list to add:

Name Description 10 Description 11 Description 12 Description 13 Description 14 Description 15 Description 16 Description 17 Description 18 Description 19 Description 20

Description Description 10 Description 11 Description 12 Description 13 Description 14 Description 15 Description 16 Description 17 Description 18 Description 19 Description 20

Data type String String String String String String String String String String String

Length 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 691

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

Description 4 Description 5 Description 6 Description 7 Description 8 Description 9 Job Number Project Description Revision Number

Description 4 Description 5 Description 6 Description 7 Description 8 Description 9 Job Number Project Description Revision Number

String String String String String String String String String

255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255

6. promis•e workstation setup promis•e should be installed and running on the workstation. The Project Manager will have a menu item for ProjectWise.

Select Options from the ProjectWise menu and fill in a default location for storing the promis•e projects.

There is a toggle for removing the promis•e project files and database records when a project is checked in. One of the benefits of promis•e is its internal project management which allows users to easily copy sections from other projects. To easily copy data from other projects it is best to leave the project on the network and available to other users without having to first restore it from ProjectWise. For long term archiving of projects that are not needed for reference, this option should be turned on.

692

Appendix C - ProjectWise Plug-in

7. Viewing page variables in ProjectWise. In promis•e the user can add many additional page descriptions to the defaults. The new page descriptions are added through the promis•e Project Manager and ProjectWise Administrator as already outlined. To create a custom view for these descriptions, open the ProjectWise Explorer and select View > Manage Views. Create a new view and with the “Electrical” environment. Select the page descriptions to display from the left side and move them to the right side in the order that they should display.

When viewing the drawings within ProjectWise select the new view name under Document Properties to see the selected Page Descriptions exported from promis•e. At this point setup is complete.

693

Appendix B - Wiring Rules XML File

694

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

D

Plant Exchange Plug-in AutoPlant P&ID and other Bentley Plant products store information that is related to the electrical components that will be used in the promis•e project. The Plant Exchange plug-in will read the data for any electrical devices in the Plant database and place these devices in the promis•e BOM Explorer (see page 142). Part numbers can be assigned in Plant or in the BOM Explorer. Once part numbers are assigned, the Insert by Device ID function can be used to place the symbols for the components onto the promis•e drawings.

Plant Software

Plant Database

Tags Attributes Part Numbers

Plant Exchange Plug-in

promis-e Software BOM Explorer

promis-e Parts Database

Drawings

Attribute information can be edited on the drawings, in the promis•e Data Editor, or in the BOM Explorer and be transferred back to the Plant database. The exchange of attribute information with Plant is bi-directional through the Plant Exchange plug-in and you have the ability to specify which data should be the master. The Plant Exchange plug-in is installed with the promis•e software.

695

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

Importing Data from Plant Preliminary setup: In order for the attributes to carry over from the Plant database, you must use the System Options > Symbol Text function in promis•e to select the attributes you plan to use. Select the Shared Value Over SubIDs checkbox for each attribute that you plan to use. You only need to do this once. Select for each attribute you will import

696

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

To use the Plant Exchange plug-in to import data: 1. Open the promis•e project to which you wish to import the data. 2. Select the Manage > Plant Exchange function. The Plant Data Exchange welcome dialog will appear.

Select Next to continue. 3. In the next dialog, your first step is to select a Plant project from which to import data.

Select the Open a Plant project button. 697

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

4. The Open Project dialog will appear, listing any Plant projects that the software has found on your system.

You can filter the listed projects by unit type by making a selection in the Projects of Units Type field. There are also buttons at the top of the dialog for selecting a different project folder and changing the way the projects are displayed. Click on the desired project and select OK to continue.

698

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

5. The previous Plant Data Exchange dialog will reappear, displaying the name of the project you selected.

In the Import Device Types area of this dialog, select checkboxes for the types of component parts data that you wish to import. Select Next to continue.

699

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

6. The device mapping dialog will appear. In this dialog you define how the data fields from the Plant database will correspond to promis•e attributes and also how IDs will be handled.

A. In the Device Type field select the first Plant data type for which you wish to do mapping. B. In the Plant Field column, use the drop-down list to select the name of the first Plant data field that you wish to map.

700

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

C. Then click in the corresponding Promis-e Attributes field and select the name of the desired symbol attribute from the drop-down list.

Note:

You should always map the KEYTAG plant field to the UniqueID promis-e attribute. This value maintains the link between items in the Plant database and items in the promis-e project and allows data to be exported back to the Plant database. D. Continue in this manner until you have mapped all the Plant fields that you wish to import.

Note:

You can also enter text inside quotes in the Plant Field column. This text string will then be mapped to the selected promis-e attribute.

To remove a row from the mapping list, select that row and then select the Delete button. Select the Delete All button to remove all the rows from the mapping list. E. Select the Save Mapping button to save your mapping for future work sessions. F. Select the Use Temporary ID checkbox if you wish the IDs that the items receive in the promis•e BOM Explorer to be considered “temporary IDs.” A temporary ID is an ID that is only used in the BOM Explorer; when you place the item in a drawing, promis•e will assign a new ID based on the project settings. If you do not select this checkbox, the ID that is imported to the BOM Explorer will also be used in the drawing. The Plant tag may be mapped to a promis•e symbol attribute. This will allow symbols and reports to show both the promis•e and Plant tags. 701

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

G. In the Device Tag Format field, define a format for the IDs that will be assigned to the imported items in the BOM Explorer. To do this, select from the Plant field tags that are listed in the PlantTagFields list. When you double-click on one of these tags, it will appear in the Device Tag Format field. You must also select a delimiter character from the Delimiters list to separate selected tags.

Note:

You must make an entry in the Device Tag Format field in order for the software to operate properly. Remember you can use the temporary ID option and change the ID later when the symbol is placed. H. If you are importing more than one type of device, select the next type in the Device Type field and enter the desired mapping. Repeat as necessary. Use the Save Mapping button to save. I. Select the Next button to continue. 7. An import dialog will summarize the data types you have selected and indicate how many records will be imported.

Select the Next button to execute the data exchange. 702

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

8. A dialog will appear indicating that the data exchange has finished.

Select OK to close the Plant Data Exchange dialog.

Using the Imported Data BOM Explorer The imported data can be viewed in the BOM Explorer (see page 142). You will need to assign a part number from the promis•e parts database to each imported item so that the software will know what symbol to use when you place the item in a drawing. If you do not yet know the final part numbers that will be used, you can create generic parts records that consist of a descriptive part number such as “50HP-MOTOR” and information on the correct symbols to use for this part. You can assign the generic part number initially and change it later when the true part number is known. You can also add or change attributes on the imported items in the BOM Explorer (right-click on the ID and select Attribute from the pop-up), or you can do this when you place the symbol.

703

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

Insert Symbol by Device ID To place the imported items in a drawing, use the Design > Insert Symbol > Insert Symbol By Device ID function. A list of unplaced device IDs will appear from which you can select items and place them in a drawing. See page 219. When placing the symbol you can change the prompted device ID and symbol attributes.

Synchronizing Data to Plant If you have changed any of the imported data in promis•e or made changes in Plant you can use the Plant Exchange function to export or synchronize this information with the Plant database. To use the Plant Exchange function to export data: 1. Open the promis•e project to which you wish to synchronize the data. 2. Select the Manage > Plant Exchange function. The Plant Data Exchange welcome dialog will appear. Select Next to continue. 3. In the next dialog, first select a Plant project from which to synchronize data.

Select the Open a Plant project button.

704

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

4. The Open Project dialog will appear, listing any Plant projects that the software has found on your system.

Click on the desired project and select OK to continue. 5. The previous Plant Data Exchange dialog will reappear, displaying the name of the project you selected.

In the Import Device Types area of this dialog, select checkboxes for the types of component parts data that you wish to import back into the Plant database. Select Next to continue.

705

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

6. The device mapping dialog will appear. Your existing mapping should be displayed.

Select the Next button to continue.

706

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

7. The Import dialog will appear. If the software finds imported records where the data does not match the Plant database, it will indicate the number of records that require “manual synchronization.”

Select the Next button to continue.

707

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

8. The Data Synchronize dialog will appear. This dialog will list any data values that differ between promis•e and the Plant database for a single device ID which is displayed at the top of the dialog.

There are three radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog that determine which values will be synchronized: Select the Selected Attributes radio button if you only wish to synchronize the attributes that you manually select (highlight) in the list. You must then highlight the rows for the desired attributes. Select the This Device radio button if you wish to synchronize all attributes for the currently displayed device. Select the All Devices radio button if you wish to synchronize all attributes for all devices that have different values in the Plant database. 9. Select which value you wish to overwrite the other: Select the Use promis-e button if you wish to write the value that is currently in promis-e to the Plant database. Select the Use Plant button if you wish to write the value that is currently in the Plant database to promis•e. 708

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

10. If you did not previously select the All Devices option, you will be prompted for the next device (if any) and you can again select the attributes to synchronize. 11. Select the Next button to complete the synchronization.

709

Appendix D - Plant Exchange Plug-in

710

Index

Index Numerics 3 Phase function 204 3DBox Settings dialog 548 90 Degree Down function 206 90 Degree Up function 206

A Activation 16 Active project 50 Add Catalog Path dialog 411 Add Category dialog 636 Add Page Revision dialog 95 Add Parts Database dialog 414 Add Project Revision dialog 92 Add Record dialog 635 Address File Create and edit 68 Aerial View 177 Align Components 314 Align Wire Numbers 293 Alternate symbols 401 ANSI-IEEE standard 86, 408 API Builder 653 Append Attribute dialog 346 Appending devices to families 86, 231 Array dialog 343 Assign Connection Points dialog Wire Terminations 613 Attribute List dialog 149 Attributes Assign in parts database 633 dialog 633 in BOM Explorer 149 Symbol text 345 Automatic page save 161 Automatic Wire Number dialog 281

Automatically Assign Branch Label dialog 591

B Backup Catalog 326 Project 115 Backup Project dialog 115 Balloon Clear all 69 Create 551 Delete 554 Insert 551 Modify 554 Move 554 Project Settings 69 Base Revision dialog 92 Bill of Materials 465 BOM 465 BOM Attribute dialog 149 BOM Explorer 142, 224 Build dialog 414 Build Expression dialog 346 Button Table Editor dialog 647

C Cable 254 Assign to terminals 525 Assign wires to 254 Cross Reference 103, 260 Labels 503 Manager 261 Cable Combo dialog 539 Cable Manager 261 Cable Text Dialog box 258 711

Index Case sensitive Device ID 75 Catalog 321 Create 412 Migrate from AutoCAD to MicroStation 137 Restore 329 Catalog Manager 321 Catalog Path 321 Catalog Paths 411 Category Inside a Catalog 326 Child Symbol 229 Class Create or Edit 609 Clean Screen 177 Clear Page 174 Clip Jumper 518 Clip Jumper Prefix 102 Command Log 425 Command Protection 418 Commuter License 21 Compare Families 233 Symbols 240 Compile Connection Information 464, 536 Complete Device ID 77 Component list macro 485 Conduit Draw 560 Connection designations 508 Connection List Import Legacy 501 Connection Point 331 Designation 508, 510 Display/Hide 427 Text 332

Connection Points dialog 400 Connection search priorities 276 Continuous Wire 203 Copy Drawing elements 302 Page 166 Project 63 Copy Page dialog 166 Create Field 262 Macro 385 Schematic elements 321 Symbol 333 Create Catalog dialog 412 Create Macro dialog 386 Cross Reference Cable 103 Device 79 Position at parent and child symbols 81 Wire Link 266 Custom AutoFilter dialog 296, 429

D Data Editor dialog 139 Data Manager dialog 139 Database See also Parts Database Date format 90 Decimal places 90 Default Project Properties 71 Default Page Properties 71 Default Project Properties 71 Default Wire Properties dialog 110 Define Target dialog 523 Delete Drawing elements 302 Project 66 712

Index Delete Project Revision dialog 94 Delete Wire Numbers dialog 288 Design Considerations 43 Device BOM Assign dialog 224 Device Cross Reference 79 Device Cross Referencing dialog 80 Device Family dialog 222 Device Family. See also Family Device ID 331 Adjust when moving 75 Assignment 221 Case sensitive 75 Complete 77 Device Tag 77 Duplicate 223, 264 Format 74, 75, 76 Identifier 77 Installation/Location display or hide 77 Nested 75 On Copied Pages 167 On Moved Pages 172 PLC Wired 76, 307 Prompt for 425 Renumber 306 Replace 306 Separators 77 Suppress 223 Symbol 221 Tag 331 Device ID Format dialog 76 Device Labels 503 Device Properties dialog 221 Device Tag 77, 339, 378 Replace 308 Device Tag Format dialog 75 Device Type. See also Family Device Usage Chart dialog 222 DExportToDWG dialog 164

Diagonal wire connector 206 Diagonal Wire Orientation dialog 207 Dialog Language 423 Dialogs Edit text 299 DIN Rail Draw 555 Snap to 558 DIN Rail Properties dialog 557 Direct Wiring 600, 678 Display Formats 74 Display Languages 84 Display Settings 427 Downloading 13 Draw Ladder 207 Wire 3 Phase 204 Continuous 203 Single 201 Wire Number Manual 286 Draw Ladder 207 Draw Panel Layout Accessories dialog 555 Drawing Naming Convention 86 Drawing Configure dialog 453 Drawing Lines 197 Drawing Mode 159, 196 Create 300 Edit 299 Manager 299 Drawing Naming Convention 86 Drawing Set 47 Descriptions 52 Re-assign Page 158 713

Index Duplicate Terminal number 426 Duplicate Device ID 223 DWG Export page to 164 Naming Convention 86

E ECTECAD 408 Edit Components 316 Text 250 Wire 210 Edit Components 316 Edit Page Revisions dialog 97 Edit Part Number Quantity dialog 145 Edit Parts Database dialog 413 Edit Potential Group dialog 402 Edit Prefix/Suffix dialog 283 Edit Project Revisions dialog 93 Edit Role dialog 420 Edit Text Format dialog 187, 190 Edit Text Style dialog 99 Edit Wires 210 Engineering Design Considerations 43, 663 Reports 482 Erase Drawing elements 302 Error check 482 Page 175 Error messages 663 Evaluation period 16 Exchange Family dialog 232 Exit Point 581 Export Catalog 326 promis-e Publisher 437 Export Catalog dialog 327

Export to DWG 164 Expression Builder dialog 101 Extract Page Format dialog 184

F Family 229 Appending devices to 86, 231 Compare 233 Create 234, 396 Exchange 232 in Catalog Manager 321 Modify 404 Over-assignment 231 Update Family 233 Family Description Edit dialog 398 Family on the Fly dialog 235 Family on the Fly dialog 234 Favorites dialog 55 Favorites folder 54 Field Create 262 Mixed device IDs in 264 Field Parameters Dialog Box 263 Filter Parts Database 637 Project parts filter 72 Filtering dialog 72 Find and Replace dialog 290 Force Connection dialog 211 Forced Routing Manager 491 Forcing Connections 499 Foreign Language Text 250 Functionality 26

714

Index

G Gauge Table Editor dialog 576 Generate Report dialog 457 Graph Setting dialog 489 Graphical Parts List 484 Graphical Plan Template assign 533 Template Designer 537 Template path 411 Variables 541 Graphical Plan Template Designer 531 Graphical Terminal Plan 531 Grid Settings 70 Group Settings dialog 548 Grouping wires 601

Insert Symbol By Device ID 219 By Name 215 By Part Number 217 Insert Symbol dialog 215 Insertion Point 331 Display/Hide 427 Installation Definition of 48 Descriptions 52 Device ID display/hide 77 Installation (of software) 13 Installation and Location 48 Installation and Start-up 13 Introduction 25

H

J

Help Screens 41 Hyperlink 243 On Part Number 244 On Symbol 243

Jumper 508 Clip 518 Wire 519

K

I

Komax Wire Cutting Machines 628

I/O Device ID 76, 307 I/O Text Definition dialog 226 Identifiers 77 IEC standard 86, 408 Import Legacy Project 118 Page formats 126 Symbol Catalog 120 Import Catalog dialog 329 Import Legacy Connection List 501 Index Table Editor dialog 649 Insert Device dialog 494 Insert Hyperlink dialog 243 Insert Macro dialog 245 Insert Spares dialog 522

L Label Wire Number 110 Labels 503 Ladder Draw function 207 Language In dialogs 423 Language Text 250 Display on Drawing 84 Edit Database 251 Import legacy 129 Path 410 Layers Wire 108 715

Index License Activation 16 Check out 21 Commuter 21 Line Adjusting Length 202 Line Number Continuous 73 Include page number 73 Number of digits 73 Regions 186 Line Settings dialog 211 Line Style 203, 211 Lines vs. Wires 197 Link Index 269 Location Descriptions 52 Log Commands 425 Logical box See Symbol On the Fly Logical Line 197 Labels 281 See also Wire

M Macro Component list 485 Create 385 Insert 245 Title Block 387 Macro Settings dialog 247 Manage Page Modify 169 Manual 28 Conventions 28 Function 286

Manual (instructions) 41 Markers 503 Menu Edit text 299 Menus 29 MicroStation 115 Migration dialog 118 Migration Wizard 118 Mirroring 228 Mode Create or Rename dialog 300 Mode Manager dialog 299 Modes Drawing 196 Modify Family 404 Function 169 Page 169 Project 65 Symbol 350 Modify Connection Point Text dialog 239 Modify dialog Catalog Manager 324 Modify Page dialog 169 More Properties dialog 284 Move Drawing elements 303 Page 171 Move Page dialog 171 Multi-line Text dialog 249 Multiple Placement Cable Conductors 255 Multiple placement of symbols 227 Multi-polywire 200 MultiWire 199

N Navigation function 178 New 716

Index Page 157 Project 61 New Class dialog 611 New Page dialog 158 New Report Template dialog 467 New/Edit dialog 559 New/Edit DIN Rail dialog 559 New/Modify Family dialog 397 New/Rename Mode dialog 301

O Online Page 160, 169 Open Project dialog Plant Exchange 698, 705 Open Report Template dialog 467 Options 407 Project 67 System 418 User 423 Options dialog 418 Oracle 408 Overview 25

P Page Automatic Save 161 Clear 174 Close 156 Copy 166 Default Properties 71 Export to DWG 164 Filename Format 86 Filenames 154 Format 159, 183 Management 151 Modify 169 Move 171 New 157

Next Page 156 Online 160, 169 Open 155 Previous Page 156 Refresh 175 Rename 170 Save 161 Save As 162 Save Automatic 161 Storage 154 Update 175 Validate 175 Page Format 159 Create 183 Default 73 Designer 183 Import legacy 126 Modify 183 Path 411 Replace 313 Page Format Designer 183 Page Macro Default 71 Page revisions 95 Pan 177 Panduit Auto Size and Space dialog 572 Panduit Auto Size Space 571 Panduit Data Editor 612 Panduit Easy-Mark 506 Panduit Form dialog 643 Panduit Labels dialog 503 Panduit Part Selection 642 Panduit Termination Editor 609 Panduit Wire Containment Tools 560 Panduit Wire dialog 561 Panduit Wire Terminations 608 Panduit Wire Terminations dialog 619 Panel Layout 543 717

Index Create first 544 Create later 545 Design functions 555 Menu 555 Symbol 375 Parent Symbol 229 Part Number 630 Assign 294 At child symbol 84 Default for symbol 345 Display configuration 84 Display/Hide 427 Duplication 265 Position 84 Quantity Delimiter Character 84 Replace 307 Text 332 URL 631 Part Number Assignment dialog (Panduit wire path) 564 Part Number Modification dialog (Panduit) 574 Parts Database 410, 629 Add Category 635 Add record 635 Compare with project 639 Data fields 630 Default for project 72 Editor 630 Field names 640 Filter 637 Import legacy 130 Path 413 Routing/Mounting Accessories 558 Search 637 Show Differences 639 Parts Database Editor dialog 630 Password

Command Protection 418 Paste Options dialog 426 Paths System 410 PDF Configure dialog 453 Percent Spare field 631 Phrase and Language Edit dialog 251 Pin plug connection rule 607 Pin-Plug Plan 507 Plant Data Exchange dialog 697, 704 Plant Exchange Plug-in 695 PLC Address in Device Tag 78 Addressing 89 Addressing, Automatic 89 I/O Text 226 Import File 88 Parent symbol 351 Settings 88 Text 88, 226 PLC Text 226 PLC Wired Device ID 76, 307 PLC Wired Terminal ID 76, 307 Plot Configuration 431 Current Page (AutoCAD) 431 Current Page (MicroStation) 435 Dialog Box 431 Layout Settings 433 Multiple Pages 429 Settings 433 Plot Pages dialog 429 Plotting 429 Plug-in Manager 428 Polywire 199 Potential Group 342, 402 Primary Mode Drawing Mode 718

Index Primary 87 Programmable Logic Controller. See PLC Project Active 50 Backup 115 Copy 63 Data Editor 139 Database 408 Default Folder 411 Default Properties 71 Delete 66 Description 65 Display Formats 74 Favorites folder 54 Find 58 Folder 411 Grid Settings 70 Import Legacy Project 118, 131 Management 45 Manager 49 Migration Wizard 118 Modify 65 New 61 Options 67 Organization 46 Parts filter 72 Profiles 411 Rebuild Database 117 Rename 64 Restore 115 Revision Control 91 Sample projects 43 Save As 60 Search 58 Project API Builder 653 Project Database Path to 408 Project Description dialog 62

Project Manager 49 Project Options Path 411 Project Preferences dialog Panduit Wire Terminaltions 616 Project Profiles Path 411 Project Wise software 424 ProjectWise Plug-in 683 promis-e Publisher 437 Publisher Configuration file 443 Create Package 455 External files 440 File manager 439 Format 443 Printers 452 Starting 438

Q Quantity-Delimiter 84 Quick Select dialog 291

R Raceway Properties Editor dialog 585 Real Time Pan Function 177 Rebuild Project Database 117 Record structure 640 Redraw 176 Refresh Page 175 Regen 176 Region Connection Editor dialog 583 Region Settings 90 Regions 580 Registration 16

719

Index Rename Page 170 Project 64 Terminal 517 Terminals 518 Rename Category dialog 636 Rename Page dialog 170 Rename Project dialog 64 Renumber Device ID 306 Terminals 517 Replace Device ID 306 Device Tag 308 Page Format 313 Part Number 307 Symbol 304 Symbol Attributes 310 Symbol Text 310 Text 308 Replace Device ID dialog 306 Replace Page Format dialog 313 Replace Part Number dialog 307 Replace Symbol Attributes dialog 310 Replace Symbol dialog 304 Replace Text dialog 308 Replace Title Block dialog 311 Report Filters dialog 461 Report Options dialog 462 Report Template dialog 468 Reports 457, 482 Configuration file 463 Custom 466 Engineering Design Considerations 482 Filtering 461 Generate Reports 457 Graphical Parts List 484

Options 462 Output to file 459 Pre-configured 465 Template Designer 466 Template path 411 Text on Drawing 459, 481 Wire Labels 503 Re-sequence Wire Link dialog 274 Restore Catalog 329 Restore Project dialog 116 Revision Control 91 dialog 95 Page revisions 95 Revision List dialog 94 Roles 418 Rotate Symbol 228 Routing/Mounting Accessories dialog 558 Run Graphical Plan dialog 532 Run Project Builder dialog 662

S Sample projects 43 Save Page 161 Save Project As dialog 60 Scale Symbol 228 Schematic Drawing Elements 195 Search Project 58 Search tool 180 Search (project) dialog 58 Search dialog 495 Catalog Manager 324 Search dialog (search tool) 180 See Page Pending Status 59 720

Index Select Classes and Types dialog 614 Select Device ID dialog 234 Select Legacy Data Files dialog 119 Select Page Format dialog 159 Select Pages dialog 289 Select Pages dialog (reports) 463 Select Part Number dialog While drawing 295 Wire Terminations 612 Select Server 16 Select Title Block dialog 312, 313 Select Wire Layer dialog 213 Select Wire Link ID dialog 272 Separators 77 Sequencing terminal connections 601 Settings 407 Setup Configuration 408 Setup dialog 407 Shipping split Wiring rules version 678 Shortest Distance Routing 579 Guidelines and routiing rules 603 Single wire connection 604 Standard Method 580 Terminal stacker feature 605 Wiring Rules 671 Wiring Rules Method 594 Shortest Distance Routing dialog 587, 596 Show Differences dialog 639 Signal Cross Reference. See also Wire Link Single Function 201 Single Point Connection 496 Snap to Endpoint 348 Sort Terminals 516 Sorting (reports) dialog 460 Spare Parts

Database field 631 Tab 53 Spare terminal, shipping split connection rule 603 Speed Sort dialog 617 SQL Server/MSDE 408 Start Number dialog 517 Starting the software 14 Startup Interface 424 Stretch Wire 208 Suppress Device ID 223 Symbol Assign part number 294 Catalog 321 Catalog Manager 321 Catalog Path 321, 411 Create 333 Device ID 221 Elements of 331 in Catalog Manager 321 Insert by Device ID 219 Insert by Name 215 Insert By Part Number 217 Insert in Drawing 214 Library 321 Mirroring 228 Modify Existing Symbol 350 Multiple Placement 227 On the Fly 238 Panel Layout 375 Place as group 548 Replace 304 Rotate 228 Rotation (Automatic) 216 Scale 228 Settings 228 Signal Cross Reference 721

Index JIC 266 Text 332, 422 Update 240 Wizard 333 Symbol Attributes Replace 310 Symbol Catalog Create 412 Path 411 Symbol Libraries 321 Symbol On the Fly 238 Symbol Settings dialog 228 Symbol Text 332, 422 dialog 225 Replace 310 Symbols Alternate 401 System Options 418 Path 411 System Paths 410 System Settings 407

T Tag Mnemonic 77, 339, 378 Template Editor dialog 592 Terminal Assign to cable 525 Connection point designations 508 Delimiter Character 102, 104 Display connection designation 510 Duplicate number prompt 426 Editing Functions 516 Internal vs. External Connection 508 Move 518 On Copied Pages 167 On Moved Pages 172 Rename 517, 518 Renumber 517

Sort 516 Spare 522 Wire number on 283 With Parent 398 Terminal and Pin-Plug Plan 507 Terminal jumper connection rule 607 Terminal Plan 507, 531 Basic Steps 507 Editing Functions 516 Functions 511 Internal vs. External 508 Overview 507 Terminal/Pin-Plug Manager dialog 512 Termination Editor 609 Termination Editor dialog 610 Text Align 340 Attributes 345 Edit 250 Entering 248 Language 250 Multiline 249 Replace 308 Settings 98 Single Line 248 Text Align 340 Text on Drawing (reports) 459, 481 Text Window 40 Three Phase Wire 204 Time Parts Database fields 632 Time format 90 Title Block Create 387 Default 71 Replace 311 Variables 393 722

Index Title Block Wizard 387 Tool Boxes 39 Toolbars 38

U Units of Measure (Default) 86 Update Family dialog 233 Update Page function 175 Update Symbol dialog 240 Update Wiring Diagram dialog 320 URL 631 User Guide 41 User Name 51, 424 User Options 423 Path 411 Using the software 27

V Validate Page 175 Validation Prompts 425 Validation Report dialog 593, 598 Validity Check dialog 586 Variables Graphical Plan 541 Title Block 393 View Redraw 176 View Options 427 Viewing Pages 176 Voltage separated wire routes 605

W Welcome dialog 14, 424 Wire 197 3 Phase 204 90 Degree 206 Attributes 284, 287 Color 211, 284, 287 Connection Points 206

Connector type 106, 206 Containment 560 Continuous 203 Copy 210 Crossing type 105 Default Properties 110 Delete 210 Draw ladder 207 Edit 210 Edit properties 212 Force Connection 211 Gauge 284, 287 ID 106 Jumper dialog 519 Labels 465, 503 Layers 108, 213 Line Style 203, 211 List 465 Move 210 MultiWire 199 Options 105 Polywire 199 Property Display 106 Settings 105 Size 284, 287 Stretch 208 Tag 106 Uses 108 Wire Calculator dialog 570 Wire Fill Calculator 569 Wire Labels 503 Wire Layer Configuration dialog 108 Wire Layers Select 213 Wire Link 266 Changing type 274 Display Configuration 83 Index 269, 274, 275 723

Index Notation Configuration 274 Placing symbol 271 Re-sequence 274 Search and Link 272 Types of 268 Wire Numbering and 281 Wire Link Cross Reference Format dialog 83 Wire Link ID dialog 271 Wire Link Usage dialog 272 Wire List 465 Wire Number 281 Align 293 Automatic 281 Branch label 283 Delete 288 Display/Hide 427 Duplicate 210 Duplicate checking 110 Hide individual wire number 210 Manual 286 Modify 287 On branch 210 On Copied Pages 167 On Moved Pages 172 on Terminal 283 Position 106 Replace 290 Same Potential Over Terminal 107 Tag Format 110 Wire starting point 272 Wire Options 105 Wire Path Assign wires to 569 Wire path 560 Wire Properties Edit 212 Find and Replace 290

Wire Properties Display dialog 106 Wire Routing 543 Wire routing voltage separated 605 Wire Tag Format dialog 112 Wire Terminations 608 Wire/Device connections 276 Wired Device ID 76, 307 Wires Drawing 198 Wireway Draw 560 Wiring Diagrams 317 Charts 104 Create 319 Settings 100 Symbol Create 360 Wiring Rule Configuration dialog 597 Wizard Symbol Creation 333

Z Zone Regions 189 Zoom 176 All 177 Center 177 Dynamic 176 Extents 177 In 177 Navigation function 427 Out 177 Previous 176 Real Time 176 Scale 176 Window 176

724